ConcreteCodeCheck15 EN1992 Enu

Concrete Code Check EN-1992
Design and code-checks of concrete members (SCIA Engineer 15.0 and newer version)
Contacts 16
Abstract 18
Concrete in SCIA Engineer 19
Command properties 23
Command properties 23
Name 24
Selection 25
Type of loads 25
Filter 25
Extreme 25
Values 26
Output 26
Results in sections 26
Drawing setup 26
Run using Model Data files (Debug) 26
Action buttons 26
Concrete member data 27

1D member data 27
Properties of 1D Member data 28
Solver settings 29
Design defaults 36
Beam slab 42
Column 44
Concrete settings (structure) 47

Concrete settings dialogue 47
Find 47
View 48
Filters 50
Default 51
Concrete settings (structure) 51
Solver settings 51
Design Defaults 117
-2-
Beam (Rib) 119
Beam slab 126
Columns 127
Plate, Shell (Plate) 132
Wall, Shell (Wall), Deep beam 139
Output 145
Numerical output 145
Graphical output 151
Design 153
Design of reinforcement 153
Longitudinal reinforcement 153
Shear reinforcement 154
Internal forces - theory 154
Introduction 154
Parameters influencing the calculation 155
Additional tensile forces caused by shear and torsion (shifting of bending moments) 165
Determination whether member is in compression 166
First order bending moments with imperfection 166
Calculation of second order effects 169
Design of reinforcement for rectangular section 172
Design of reinforcement for circular section 172
Design of reinforcement for other cross-sections 173
Checks for all type of cross-sections 174
Ribs 176
Literature 181
Reduction of shear forces and bending moment 182
Assumptions 182
Concrete setup 183
Concrete member data 184
Application to internal forces 187
-3-
Chapter 0
Slenderness 192
Introduction 192
Buckling data 192
Creep coefficient 193
Estimation of ratio of longitudinal reinforcement 194
Calculation of slenderness 194
Calculation of limit slenderness 195
Literature 198
Reinforcement design - theory 198
Introduction 198
Design of longitudinal reinforcement 201
Design of shear reinforcement 209
Torsional longitudinal reinforcement 219
Detailing provisions in Design 220
Minimal area of shear reinforcement from maximum longitudinal spacing 9.2.2(6) 221
Minimal area of shear reinforcement from maximum transverse spacing 9.2.2(8) 221
Minimal area of shear reinforcement from minimal ratio 9.2.2(5) 221
Minimal area of shear reinforcement for torsion 9.2.3(3) 222
Maximal area of shear reinforcement from maximal ratio 6.2.3(3) 222
Minimal area of shear reinforcement from minimal bar diameter 9.5.3(1) 223
Minimal area of shear reinforcement from maximum longitudinal spacing 9.5.3(3) 223
Maximal area of shear reinforcement from maximal ratio 6.2.3(3) 224
Recalculation to edges 225
Minimal area of reinforcement from minimal ratio 9.2.1.1(1) 227
Minimal area of reinforcement from maximum axis distance between bars (Independent) 227
Minimal area of reinforcement for torsion 9.2.3(4) 227
Maximal area of reinforcement from maximal ratio 9.2.1.1(3) 227
Maximal area of reinforcement from minimum clear bar distance between bars 8.2(2) 228
Minimal area of reinforcement from minimal ratio 9.5.2(2) 228
Minimal area of reinforcement from maximum axis distance between bars (Independent) 229
Minimal area of reinforcement from minimal bar diameter 9.5.2(1) 229
Minimal area of reinforcement from minimal number of bars 9.5.2(4) 230
-4-
Minimal area of reinforcement for torsion 9.2.3(4) 230
Maximal area of reinforcement from maximal ratio 9.5.2(3) 231
Minimal area of reinforcement from minimal ratio 9.3.1.1(1) 232
Minimal area of reinforcement from maximum distance between bars 9.3.1.1(3) 232
Maximal area of reinforcement from maximal ratio 9.3.1.1(1) 233
Reinforcement design 1D - graphical output 233
Required 234
Provided 234
Required ∩ Provided 235
Design 2D - Introduction 235

Internal forces 2D - Introduction 235
Theoretical background 236
Additional tensile force caused by shear-shifting 240
Command Internal forces 2D 241
Output 244
Definition of provided reinforcement 253
Design As - Theoretical background 253
Design As - Shear Reinforcement 255
Design As - Check of compressive strut 258
Design As - Detailing provisions 260
Reinforcement diameter for detailing provisions 260
Check minimal clear bar distance 8.2(2) 260
Check minimal ratio of principal reinforcement 9.3.1.1(1) 260
Check maximal ratio of principal reinforcement 9.3.1.1(1) 261
Check minimal transverse ratio of secondary reinforcement 9.3.1.1(2) 261
Check maximal spacing of principal and secondary longitudinal reinforcement 9.3.1.1(3) 261
Check minimal ratio of shear reinforcement 9.3.2(2) 262
Check minimal thickness of member with shear reinforcement 9.3.2(1) 262
Check maximal spacing of shear links 9.3.2(4) 262
Check minimal ratio of vertical reinforcement 9.6.2(1) 263
-5-
Chapter 0
Check maximal ratio of vertical reinforcement 9.6.2(1) 263
Check maximal spacing of vertical reinforcement 9.6.2(3) 263
Check minimal ratio of horizontal reinforcement 9.6.3(1) 263
Check maximal spacing of horizontal reinforcement 9.6.3(2) 264
Check maximal spacing of shear links 9.6.4(1) 264
Check minimal spacing of shear links 9.6.4(2) 264
Check minimal ratio of horizontal reinforcement 9.7(1) 265
Check maximal spacing of reinforcement 9.7(2) 265
Command 265
Design As - Output 267
Punching Design 278
Introduction 278
Features 279
Usage 280
Limitations 281
Punching Design - Procedure & Settings 281
Punching load for columns modelled as support in node 285
Punching load for columns modelled as 1D member 285
Control perimeter near the openings 288
Eccentricity factor β 289
Outer control perimeter 292
Area of shear reinforcement perimeter 293
Number of shear reinforcement perimeters 295
Punching Design - Command 299
Punching Design - Results & Output 303
Punching Design - Errors / Warnings / Notes 305
Basic and additional reinforcement - introduction 308

Introduction 308
Provided library 309
-6-
Provided library settings 312
Definition of main settings 312
Action buttons 313
Drawing 313
Table input 314
Provided library - Member types 315
Rectangle 316
Definition of additional l reinforcement 317
T shape, L shape, I shape and Other 317
Rectangle 320
Circular 320
Oval 321
Other 321
Design Defaults 325
Beam (Rib) 327
Beam slab 334
Columns 335
Plate, Shell (Plate) 340
Wall, Shell (Wall), Deep beam 347
Concrete Member Data 352
Concrete member data 1D 352
Concrete member data 2D 356
Practical reinforcement 359
List of 2D reinforcement mesh 359
Checks 367
Stiffness 367
Introduction 367
Assumptions 370
Theory 371
Setup 374
Errors and warnings 374
Capacity - response (ULS) 375
-7-
Chapter 0
Introduction 375
Assumptions and limitations 375
Calculation xu,lim Dutch NEN NA 378
Effective depth of cross-section 381
Inner lever arm 382
National annexes 384
Capacity - diagram (ULS) 384
Introduction 384
Assumptions and limitations 385
Setup 392
National annexes 395
Shear + torsion (ULS) 395
Introduction 395
Equivalent thin-walled closed cross-section 396
Determination stirrups around section 399
Calculation number of stirrup link (number of cuts) 399
Stirrup for torsion 400
Calculation of average characteristics of shear reinforcement 401
Calculation characteristic of shear reinforcement 401
Calculation procedure 402
Width of cross-section for shear check 405
Effective depth of cross-section for shear check 406
Inner lever arm for shear check 407
Calculation basic characteristics for shear 408
Shear check 408
Calculation of basic characteristics 411
-8-
Torsion check 411
Check of interaction shear and torsion 415
Warnings, errors and notes 416
Stress limitations (SLS) 416
Introduction 416
Assumption and limitations 416
Setup 421
National annexes in stress limitation 423
Errors, Warnings, Notes 423
Crack width (SLS) 424
Introduction 424
Value of strength for calculation of cracking forces 425
Check of normal stresses (occurring of crack width) 425
Type of strength for calculation of cracking forces 425
Use of effective modulus of concrete 426
Type of maximal crack width 427
Type of strength for calculation of cracking forces 427
Calculation of mean strain in the reinforcement and concrete 428
Calculation of maximum crack spacing 431
Calculation of crack width in direction of principal stresses 433
Check of normal stresses (occurring of crack width) 433
Calculation of mean strain in the reinforcement and concrete 434
Calculation of maximum crack spacing 437
Calculation of crack width 439
Warning and errors 439
Abbreviations 440
Warning and errors 440
Abbreviations 441
Literature 442
-9-
Chapter 0
Literature 442
Deflections (SLS) 442
Introduction 442
Assumption 443
Theory 444
Setup 446
Errors, Warnings, Notes 448
Detailing provisions 449
Introduction 449
Assumption and limitations 450
Minimal clear spacing of bars - Code chapter 8.2(2) 450
Maximal percentage of shear reinforcement (6.2.3(3)) 451
Minimal mandrel diameter (8.3(2)) 451
Minimal reinforcement area (9.2.1.1(1)) 452
Maximal area of reinforcement (9.2.1.1(3)) 453
Minimal percentage of shear reinforcement (9.2.2(5)) 454
Maximal longitudinal spacing of stirrups based on shear (9.2.2(6)) 454
Maximal longitudinal spacing of stirrups based on torsion requirements (9.2.3(3)) 455
Maximal centre-to-centre bar distance based on torsion (9.2.3(4)) 456
Maximal clear spacing of bars (Code independent) 456
Unity check calculation 456
Minimal bar diameter of longitudinal reinforcement (9.5.2(1)) 457
Minimal area of longitudinal reinforcement (9.5.2(2)) 457
Maximal area of longitudinal reinforcement (9.5.2(3)) 458
Minimal number of bars in circular column (9.5.2(4)) 458
Minimal bar diameter of transverse reinforcement (9.5.3(1)) 459
Maximal longitudinal spacing of stirrups (9.5.3(3)) 459
Maximal centre-to-centre bar distance (9.3.1.1(3)) 459
Concrete settings 460
Concrete settings for beams 462
Check min. bar distance 462
Minimal bar distance 462
- 10 -
Check max. bar distance 463
Maximal bar distance 463
Check max. bar distance (torsion) 463
Maximal bar distance (torsion) 464
Check min. reinforcement area 464
Check min. reinforcement area for secondary member 464
Check max. reinforcement area 465
Check min. mandrel diameter 465
Check max. longitudinal spacing (shear) 465
Check max. longitudinal spacing (torsion) 465
Check max. transverse spacing (shear) 466
Check min. percentage of stirrups 466
Check max. percentage of stirrups 466
Settings for beam slabs 466
Settings for columns 468
Maximal bar distance 469
Check max. bar distance (torsion) 470
Maximal bar distance (torsion) 470
Check min. bar diameter 471
Check min. number of bars in circular column 472
Min. number of bars in circular column 472
Check min. mandrel diameter 472
- 11 -
Chapter 0
Check max. longitudinal spacing 472
Check min. bar diameter 472
Min bar diameter 473
Min bar diameter 473
Crack check for 2D members - introduction 473
Assumption 474
Internal forces for crack check 479
Reinforcement transformation 481
Recalculation of reinforcement to direction of principal stress 484
Crack appearance 485
Crack width calculation 487
Output 493
Code dependent deflections - introduction 507

Influence of deflection values 508
Effect of load 508
Effect of cracking 508
Effect of creep 508
Procedure for calculation 508
Limitation for version SEN 17.0 509
Setting Project data 509
Global setting 510
511
512
Parameters for calculation of creep coefficient 513
Coefficient for increasing amount of reinforcement 514
Maximal total deflection for 1D member 514
Maximal additional deflection for 1D member 514
Maximal total deflection for 2D member 515
Maximal additional deflection for 2D member 515
Type of variable load coefficient for the automatic generation of a combination 516
Command for Code dependent deflection 516
Group selection 519
- 12 -
Automatic combination 520
Group Result case for deflection 520
Type of reinforcement 521
Group Result case for required reinforcement 521
Group Extreme 1D 522
Group Extreme 2D 522
Direction(local) 522
Values 522
Output 523
Print combination key 524
Print explanation of symbol 525
Group Errors,warnings and notes settings 525
Group Drawing setup 1D 527
Group Drawing setup 2D 528
Combination for CDD 528
Calculation stiffness of 1D element 530
Calculation stiffness of 2D element 532
Calculation of deflection 534
Calculation maximal deflection 535
Steel Fibre concrete 536

Project data 536
Material 537
Material library 537
Stress-strain diagram for Linear analysis and Check verification 542
Stress-strain diagram for Non-linear analysis 543
Materials theoretical background 548
Fibre library 552
Internal forces 555
Internal forces 2D 555
Internal Forces 2D - Theoretical background 555
Internal Forces 2D Shifting 559
- 13 -
Chapter 0
Internal Forces 2D Command 561
Internal Forces 2D Results 564
Dosage design 2D 569
Dosage design Command 569
Dosage design - Theoretical background 571
Capacity check 2D 572
Capacity check command 572
Capacity check Theoretical background 574
Calculation of the design value of compressive concrete strength 576
Calculation of the strains for concrete stress-strain diagram 576
Calculation of the extra rotation point 576
Calculation of the strength reduction factor for strength of concrete and position of concrete compressive
force 577
The design value of tensile concrete strength 580
The balanced depth of compression zone for fibre concrete 580
The tensile strain and stress in fibre concrete 580
The reduction factor for tensile strength of concrete and position of concrete tensile force 581
Capacity check national annexes 585
Shear check 2D 585
Shear check - Command 585
Shear check theoretical background 587
Shear check national annexes 591
Punching - Introduction 591
Introduction 591
Highlights 592
Usage 592
Limitations 593
Punching Command 594
Punching - Theory 598
Punching load from support in node 599
Punching load from columns 600
Punching - Results 609
- 14 -
Punching EWN 612
Crack width 2D 614
Crack width command 614
Crack width theoretical background 617
First direction 621
Second direction 621
Crack width national annexes 622
Stress limitation 2D 623
Stress limitation command 623
Stress limitation theoretical background 625
Stress limitation national annexes 628
Nonlinear calculation of steel fibre reinforced concrete 628
Nonlinear analysis - Introduction 628
Nonlinear analysis 629
09c_Nonlinear_calculation 633
Nonlinear analysis - Results 636
Nonlinear analysis - Benchmark: Double clamped beam 637
- 15 -
Contacts
Belgium Headquarters France
SCIA nv SCIA France sarl
Industrieweg 1007
Centre d'Affaires
B-3540 Herk-de-Stad
16, place du Général de Gaulle
Tel: +32 13 55 17 75
FR-59800 Lille
E-mail: info@scia.net
Tel.: +33 3.28.33.28.67
Support Phone Fax: +33 3.28.33.28.69
CAE (SCIA Engineer) E-mail: france@scia.net
Tel: +32 13 55 09 90
Agence commerciale
CAD (Allplan) 8, Place des vins de france
Tel: +32 13 55 09 80 FR-75012 Paris
Tel.: +33 3.28.33.28.67
Support E-mail:
Fax: +33 3.28.33.28.69
support@scia.net
E-mail: france@scia.net
Brazil Germany
SCIA do Brasil Software Ltda SCIA Software GmbH
Rua Dr. Luiz Migliano, 1986 - sala 702 , CEP Technologie Zentrum Dortmund, Emil-Figge-Strasse 76-80
SP 05711-001 São Paulo D-44227 Dortmund
Tel.: +55 11 4314-5880 Tel.: +49 231/9742586
E-mail: brasil@scia.net Fax: +49 231/9742587
E-mail: info@scia.de
Netherlands Switzerland
SCIA Nederland B.V. SCIA Swiss Office
Wassenaarweg 40 Dürenbergstrasse 24
NL-6843 NW ARNHEM CH-3212 Gurmels
Tel.:+31 26 320 12 30 Tel.: +41 26 341 74 11
Fax.: +31 26 320 12 39 Fax: +41 26 341 74 13
E-mail: info@scia.net E-mail: info@scia.ch
Czech Republic Slovakia

SCIA CZ s.r.o. Praha SCIA SK s.r.o.
Evropská 2591/33d Murgašova 1298/16
160 00 Praha 6 SK-010 01 Žilina
Tel.: +420 226 205 600 Tel.: +421 415 003 070
Fax: +420 226 201 673 Fax: +421 415 003 072
E-mail: info.praha@scia.cz E-mail: info@scia.sk
SCIA CZ s.r.o. Brno

Slavickova 827/1a
638 00 Brno
Tel.: +420 530 501 570
Fax: +420 226 201 673
- 16 -
Contacts
E-mail: info.brno@scia.cz
Austria
SCIA Datenservice Ges.m.b.H.
Dresdnerstrasse 68/2/6/9
A-1200 WIEN
Tel.: +43 1 7433232-11
Fax: +43 1 7433232-20
E-mail: info@scia.at
Support
Tel.: +43 1 7433232-12
E-mail: support@scia.net
All information in this document is subject to modification without prior notice. No part of this manual may be reproduced,
stored in a database or retrieval system or published, in any form or in any way, electronically, mechanically, by print, photo
print, microfilm or any other means without prior written permission from the publisher. SCIAis not responsible for any direct
or indirect damage because of imperfections in the documentation and/or the software.
© Copyright 2018 SCIA nv. All rights reserved.
Document created: 06 / 05 / 2018

SCIA Engineer 18.0
- 17 -
Chapter 1
Abstract
SCIA Engineer 15 brings completely new solution for 1D concrete members. New technologies of the Open design,
powered by our SCIA Design Forms platform, have allowed for a complete revision of the design and checking of reinforced
concrete 1D members. This allows to us the use of all well know features of this platform such as very nice and detailed lay-
outs of calculation, using equations in output etc. Beside this, we offer more - rearrangement of the service tree, new con-
crete setup and member data and couple of new checks. Described solution works for all kind of shapes of non-prestressed
cross-section (e.g. with holes) subjected to all types of loading (e.g. biaxial shear combined with torsion). Generally these
new module provides the following advantages:
l high performance - design and checks run very fast using parallel process providing results in very small calculation
time
l transparency - detailed output enables to verify each intermediate steps of check using formulas with values and proper
units; assisting in dealing with EN 1992-1-1
l dynamic figures - drawing of stress-strain state of cross-section, reinforcement pattern or interaction diagram
l smart settings - new revised global and member settings, including 'quick search' function
l general solution
l supporting interaction of all internal forces (N, My , Mz , Vy , Vz , T);
l supporting arbitrary cross-section shapes including openings & arbitrary reinforcement positions
l revised and updated generic functions for design & checking of reinforced concrete columns & beams
l code compliance - supporting compliance with EN 1992-1-1:2004/AC:2010-11, corrigendum including National
Annexes (currently 18 NA´s).
The revised design and checks functions are developed within the SCIA Design Forms environment. This platform is linked
as post-processor to SCIA Engineer. The new reporting style makes use of its advantages regarding the presentation of res-
ults. Next to text and tabular output, also formulas, code references, dynamic images and diagrams are included to increase
the insight in the calculation!
The Concrete Toolbox is the new 'calculation heart', used by the SCIA Design Forms. It contains a set of code-independent
functions for the design and checking of reinforced concrete members. It makes use of advanced generic algorithms, how-
ever in full compliance with e.g. the Eurocode assumptions. This means they are valid for arbitrary cross-section shapes and
reinforcement positions. They also support the interaction of any mixture of internal forces (N, My , Mz , Vy , Vz , T).
There are also some limitations. New concrete checks do not support the following items:
l numerical cross-section
l cross-section with more components
l phased cross-section
l member or cross-section with different material than concrete material – composite cross-section
l different reinforcement materials in one section
- 18 -
Concrete in SCIA Engineer

New version of Concrete module is placed in completely different part of the main program tree. This module is situated in
Concrete new command in the tree.
Nevertheless, existing old solution for concrete design and check is still available. The functionality of existing concrete
checks is activated in Project data - Functionality - Old concrete checks (see the following figure). Command in the tree is
renamed to Concrete Advanced.
Both items in the tree are visible in this case.
- 19 -
Chapter 2
When we go into Concrete tree we can also see completely different arrangement of the tree. The Concrete tree is split into
five parts:
l Settings - global and local settings

l Concrete settings (structure) - see chapter "Concrete settings (structure)" on page 47
l Reinforcement drawing settings
l Settings per member
l 1D member data (see Concrete_member_data.htm)
l 1D buckling data
l 2D member data
l Results tools 2D
l Section on 2D member
l Averaging strip
l Reinforcement design
l Design defaults
l 1D members
l Internal forces
l Slenderness
l Reinforcement design - design of longitudinal and shear reinforcement
l 2D members
l Internal forces
l Reinforcement design (ULS)
l Input of real reinforcement
l Reinforcement checks (ULS+SLS)
l 1D members
l Internal forces
l Slenderness
- 20 -
l Stiffnesses
l Capacity - response (ULS)
l Capacity - diagram (ULS)
l Shear + Torsion (ULS)
l Stress limitation (SLS)
l Crack width (SLS)
l Deflection (SLS)
l Detailing provisions
l 2D members - Crack width (SLS)
l Section Check - results
- 21 -
Chapter 2
- 22 -
Command properties
Command properties
Command properties
Concrete checks run from the new commands mentioned in chapter "Concrete in SCIA Engineer" on page 19. The com-
mand for these checks includes standard items where it is possible to select member, type of load, filter, extreme and others.
The description of all values is the following.
- 23 -
Chapter 3
Name
User is allowed to name the Check. It might be very useful for better specification and orientation, especially in engineering
report. Default name is always name of the command in the tree.
- 24 -
Command properties
Selection
This attribute influences the total amount of members, which will be taken into the concrete checks. There are four pos-
sibilities to be chosen from:
l All – all active 1D members will be checked

l Current – only selected 1D members will be checked
l Advanced – user may define the selection more specifically with relation to previous selection
l Named selection – only 1D members from certain named selection, will be checked. new attribute “Named selection” will
appear in the properties
l Design groups - groups of members with same length, type, cross-section or additional rules, see "Design groups"
Type of loads
By this attribute user defines the type of the load for checks. There are three possibilities to choose from:
l Combinations – user may choose from all combinations

l Load cases – user may choose from all load cases
l Class – user may choose from all result classes
In dependence on selected type of the load, new attribute Combination or Load cases or Class will appear right under this
attribute. User may select desired Combination, Load case or Class from filtered list here.
Filter
It is possible to define filter for adjusting already selected type of selection. This will affect the number of 1D member taken
into the check. User may select one from the following possibilities:
l No – no filter will be applied

l Wildcard – user may define the attributes for selection by himself
l Material – user may select specific material
l Cross-section – user may select specific cross-section
l Layer – user may select desired layer
l Type of beam
Again, after selection one possibility a new appropriate attribute will be displayed right under, for further selection.
Extreme
This attribute defines which results should be shown in Preview window or document. User may choose from five pos-
sibilities:
l Section - Results will be presented in all sections on all member - WARNING: displaying standard or detailed results with
these extreme selected can take a lot of time
l Cross-section - Extremes on all types of sections will be displayed
l Design group - Extremes on design groups will be displayed
l Member - Extremes per members will be displayed
l Global - Only global extremes will be displayed
- 25 -
Chapter 3
Values
Each design or check includes its own values. Usually Unity check is the first typical value for all checks. There is also pos-
sibility to see More component.
Output
This attribute defines type of numerical output. There are available three levels of numerical outputs:
l Brief – one table for all checks with the unity checks, default Engineering Report table.
l Standard – more detailed output coming from SCIA Design Forms
l Detailed – very deep output coming from SCIA Design Forms
Results in sections
This setting specify on which sections will be calculation performed and extremes will be found
l All - All sections are evaluated

l Selected - Only selected sections are evaluated. Sections are defined in service Structure
Drawing setup
By selecting edit button for this parameter, a 1D results display dialogue will be open. Here user may specify the rep-
resentation of check results on 1D member. This dialogue is a standard dialogue for graphical presentation of results on 1D
member. The most important settings are the following:
l Limits – maximal and minimal values which should be drawn

l Description – which information is required to be printed (values, section, load case or combination and units)
l Angle of text – angle of text related to centreline of the member
l Setup for more components
l same scale or height
l spaces between diagrams and shifting of the first diagram
Run using Model Data files (Debug)

This check box allows to save all model data including detailed trace of all calculation steps into files in SCIA Engineer TEMP
folder.
Action buttons
There are two buttons in the lower part of the Properties dialogue.
l Refresh – this button starts the process of check itself and it is needed to press this button to refresh previous checked res-
ults and to get new results, based on chosen attributes)
l Preview – this button opens Preview window with tables containing results of finished check
Note: Content of command properties can be slightly different in future versions
- 26 -
Concrete member data
1D member data
These settings overwrite the global settings for a specific member. Member data can easily be copy-pasted to similar mem-
bers. There is differentiation based on type of member (beam, column, beam slab, rib). As in the case of setup, Member
data has been also restyled. Local settings contains a contain about the same input parameters and calculation settings as
the global settings in setup. Moreover, user can set his/her own value of limit deflection and limit width of crack, define more
environmental classes than just one as in previous version.
Concrete Advanced member data
- 27 -
Chapter 4
Properties of 1D Member data

1D Member data are arranged similarly as Concrete settings (structure). Generally, there are the following items.
l Name – name of the member data

l Member – name of the associated member
l Member type – generally member data can be set for Beam, Columns, Beam Slab and Rib differently.
l Advanced mode – some items are visible only in advanced mode
l Solver settings
l Design defaults
- 28 -
Solver settings
General
Creep
Type input of creep coefficient
Type of calculation creep coefficient:
Description - user value - creep coefficient inputted directly by the user
- auto - creep coefficient is calculated automatically by the program
Default Combo box ; Typeϕ = Auto / User input; default = Auto
Code Annex B.1
Level Standard
Member 1D member (Beam / Column / Beam Slab / Rib)
Relative humidity
Description Relative humidity of ambient environment
Default Edit box; RH = 50 %
Code Annex B.1
Level Advanced
Figure 1D member (Beam / Column / Beam Slab / Rib)
Age of concrete at loading

Description Age of concrete at loading of the member
Default Edit box; t0 = 28 days
Code Annex B.1
Level Advanced
Age of concrete at the moment considered

Age of concrete at the moment considered. It means, time, which creep
Description
coefficient is calculated for.
Default Edit box; t = 1825 days
Code Annex B.1
Level Advanced
- 29 -
Chapter 4
SLS
Use effective modulus of concrete
Possibility to use effective E modulus of concrete. It means the long-
Description term behaviour of concrete is covered in the analysis of the crack width,
stress limitations and stiffness calculation.
Default Check box, default NO
Code 7.1(2)
Level Advanced
Internal forces
Isolated member
The geometric imperfection is calculated as for isolated member, if this
Description
parameter is ON
Default Check box; default True
Code 5.8.8.2
Level Advanced
Member Column
Determination of unfavourable direction

Determination of the direction for calculation of second order effect and
geometrical imperfection effect and geometrical imperfection according
to conditions 5.38a a 5.38b
- Auto: automatic calculation of direction for taking into account second
order effect and geometrical imperfection according to conditions 5.38a
Description a 5.38b
- Uniaxial: second order effect and geometrical imperfection is taken
into account only in one (more unfavourable direction)
- Biaxial: second order effect and geometrical imperfection is taken into
always in both directions
Default Combo box Auto / uniaxial / biaxial; default Auto
Code 5.8.9
Level Advanced
Member Column
Internal forces ULS

Use minimum value of eccentricity
The minimum value of eccentricity is taken into account for calculation
Description
first order eccentricity, if this parameter is ON.
- 30 -
Default Check box default True

Code 6.1.4
Level Advanced
Member Column
Use geometric imperfection

The geometric imperfection is taken into account for calculation first
Description
order eccentricity, if this parameter is ON.
Default Check box, default True
Code 5.2.5
Level Standard
Member Column
Use second order effect

The second order effect is taken into account, if slenderness is greater
Description
than limit slenderness and this parameter is ON.
Default Check box, default True
Code 5.8.8
Level Standard
Member Column
Estimation ratio of longitudinal reinforcement for recalculation

Estimation ratio of longitudinal reinforcement for calculation mechanical
reinforcement ratio in design of reinforcement. Mechanical ratio is cal-
Description
culated for calculation limit slenderness (chapter 5.8.3.1(1) and second
order effect - method based on nominal curvature (formula 5.36)
Default Edit box; default μs = 1 %
Code 6.2.3
Level Advanced
Member Column
Take into account additional tensile force caused by shear force

If the check box is ON , the additional tensile force caused by shear force
Description
is taken into account by using shift rules
Default Check box default True
Code 9.2.1.3(2)
Level Standard
Member Beam / Beam Slab / Rib
- 31 -
Chapter 4
Design As
Design method (beams)
Method for design of longitudinal reinforcement for beams and beams
Description
slab
Combo box; Auto / Uniaxial around y / Uniaxial around z / Biaxial;
Default
Default Auto
Code -
Level Advanced
Design method (columns)

Description Method for design of longitudinal reinforcement for columns
Combo box; Auto / Uniaxial around y / Uniaxial around z / Biaxial;
Default
Default Auto
Code -
Level Advanced
Member Column
Interaction diagram
Interaction diagram method
Possibility to set method for evaluation of results using interaction dia-
gram:
- NRd - assuming MEd is constant
Description - MRd - assuming NEd is constant
- NRdMrd - - assuming eccentricity is constant

- Mrdy - assuming MEdz is constant
- Mrdz - - assuming MEdy is constant

Default Combo box NRd / MRd / NRdMrd / Mrdy / Mrdz, default NRdMRd
Code 6.1
Level Standard
Shear
Type calculation / input of angle of compression strut
Type calculation of angle of between of compression strut and member
Description axis for shear check
- Auto: automatic calculation of minimum angle based on condition
- 32 -
VEd≤ VRd.max
- User(angle) : the value is inputted by the user as angle

- User(cotangent) : the value is inputted by the user as cotangent of the
value
Combo box, Auto / User (angle) / User (cotangent); default User
Default
(angle)
Code 6.2.3
Level Standard
Shear between web and flange

Input type for angle between compression strut and member axis for lon-
gitudinal shear check
Description - User(angle): the value is inputted by the user as angle
- User(cotangent): the value is inputted by the user as cotangent of the
value
Default Combo box, User (angle) / User (cotangent); default User (angle)
Code 6.2.4(4)
Level Advanced
Member Beam / Beam Slab
Angle of compression strut

Angle between compression strut and member axis for longitudinal
Description shear check; editable only if type of calculation of compression strut
angle is User (angle)
Default Edit box, ϕf = 40 °
Code 6.2.4(4)
Level Advanced
Cotangent angel of compression strut

Cotangent of the angle between compression strut and member axis
Description for longitudinal shear check; editable only if type of calculation of com-
pression strut angle is User (cotangent)
Default Edit box, cot ϕf =1,2
Code 6.2.4(4)
Level Advanced
- 33 -
Chapter 4
Torsion
Equivalent thin walled cross-section
Type of equivalent thin- walled cross- section used for calculation of
Description
cross-section capacity in torsion
Combo box; Automatic / From stirrups from torsion / From effective
Default CSS / From effective rectangular CSS; / User input of thin-walled closed
cross-section; default Automatic
Code 6.3.1(3)
Level Advanced
Area of thin walled closed cross-section

An area of thin walled closed cross-section enclosed by the centre-lines
of the connecting walls, including inner hollow areas; visible only if Equi-
Description
valent thin walled cross-section is set to User input of thin-walled closed
cross-section
Default Edit box; default 0 mm2
Code 6.3.1(3)
Level Advanced
Outer circumference of the cross-section

Outer circumference of the cross-section; visible only if Equivalent thin
Description walled cross-section is set to User input of thin-walled closed cross-sec-
tion
Code 6.3.1(3)
Level Advanced
Effective wall thickness

Thickness of equivalent thin-walled cross-section. It may be taken as
A/u, but should not be taken as less than twice the distance between
Description edge and centre of the longitudinal reinforcement; visible only if Equi-
valent thin walled cross-section is set to User input of thin-walled closed
cross-section
Code 6.3.1(3)
Level Advanced
Member 1D member (Beam / Column / Beam Slab)
- 34 -
Cracking forces
Type of strength for calculation of cracking forces
Type of tensile strength of concrete used for calculation of cracking
Description forces in SLS checks (stresses and deflections). It is possible to select
between fctm (Table 3.1) and fctm,fl (Clause 3.1.8).
Default Combo box fctm / fctm,fl (default fctm )
Code 7.1(2)
Level Advanced
Value of strength for calculation of cracking forces

Value of strength of concrete used for calculation of cracking forces in
SLS checks (stresses and deflections). It is possible to select between
a) 0 MPa - first crack appears when tensile stress is reached in concrete
Description
cross-section
b) fcteff - first crack is appears when effective tensile strength is reached
in cross-section
Default Combo box 0 MPa/ fctm,eff (default fct,eff )
Code 7.1(2)
Level Advanced
Crack width
Type of maximal crack width
Possibility to automatically determined crack width according to expos-
Description ure class, combination and type of structure or to set user defined value
of crack width
Default Combo box; Auto / User; default Auto
Code 7.3.1(5)
Level Standard
User defined value of crack width

Description User defined crack width
Default Edit box; winp = 0,3 mm
Code 7.3.1(5)
Level Standard
- 35 -
Chapter 4
Deflections
Maximal total displacement L/x; x =
Maximal total (nonlinear+creep) displacement allowed for 1D member
Description
expressed as span / depth ratio
Default Edit box; xtot = 250
Code 7.4.1(4)
Level Standard
Maximal additional displacement L/x; x =

Maximal additional (total - immediate) displacement allowed for 1D
Description
member expressed as span / depth ratio
Default Edit box; xadd = 500
Code 7.4.1(5)
Level Standard
Design defaults
Minimal concrete cover

Different surfaces
If YES, then the minimal concrete cover is calculated independently per
Description
surface and all items for concrete cover are split into lower and upper
Default Edit box , default = 50 years
Code -
Level Standard
Figure -
Design working life

Design working life is information used for determination of minimal con-
Description
crete cover
Code 4.4.1.2(5), table 4.3N
Level Standard
Figure -
- 36 -
Risk of corrosion attack

Corrosion induced by carbonation
Exposure class caused by carbonation is used for determination of min-
Description
imal concrete cover in Table 4.4N
Default Combo box; None / X0 /XC1 / XC2 / XC3 / XC4; default =XC3
Code 4.4.1.2(5), table 4.3N
Level Standard
Figure -
Corrosion induced by chlorides

Exposure class caused by chlorides is used for determination of minimal
Description
concrete cover in Table 4.4N
Default Combo box; None / XD1 / XD2 / XD3; default =None
Code 4.4.1.2(5), table 4.3N
Level Standard
Figure -
Corrosion induced by chlorides from sea water

Exposure class caused by chlorides from sea water is used for determ-
Description
ination of minimal concrete cover in Table 4.4N
Default Combo box; None / XS1 / XS2 / XS3; default =None
Code 4.4.1.2(5), table 4.3N
Level Standard
Figure -
Free / thaw attack

Description Additional Exposure class caused by freezing or thawing
Default Combo box; None / XF1 / XF2 / XF3; default = None
Code 4.4.1.2(12)
Level Standard
Figure -
- 37 -
Chapter 4
Chemical attack
Description Additional Exposure class caused by chemical attack
Default Combo box; None / XA1 / XA2 / XA3; default = None
Code 4.4.1.2(12)
Level Standard
Figure -
Risk of abrasion attack

Description Additional Exposure class caused by abrasion attack
Default Combo box; None / XM1 / XM2 / XM3; default = None
Code 4.4.1.2(13)
Level Advanced
Figure -
Possibility of special control

Special geometric control
To take into account additional deviation to nominal concrete cover
Description
caused by special geometric control
Default Check box; default = True
Code 4.4.1.3(3)
Level Advanced
Figure -
Special quality control

Description
caused by special concrete quality control
Code 4.4.1.2(5)
Level Advanced
Figure -
Risk of casting on atypical surface

Description To take into account additional deviation to nominal concrete cover
- 38 -
caused by casting on atypical surface

Combo box; Standard / Against prepared ground / Again soil / Uneven
Default
surface default = Standard
Code 4.4.1.3(4)
Level Advanced
Figure -
Concrete characteristic
Type of concrete
Description
caused by production type
Default Combo box; In-situ / Prefabricated ; default = In-situ
Code 4.4.1.3(1P, 3)
Level Advanced
Figure -
Beam
Longitudinal
Material
Description Information about material of longitudinal reinforcement
Default Link to library; default taken from setting in Project data
Code -
Level Standard
Figure -
Member Beam / Rib
Upper
Diameter of upper reinforcement
Description Information about diameter of upper of reinforcement
Default Edit box; default ds,u = 16 mm
Code -
Level Standard
Figure -
Member Beam / Rib
- 39 -
Chapter 4
Type of cover of upper reinforcement

Description Information about type of cover of upper reinforcement
Default Combo box; Auto / User; default = Auto
Code 4.4.1
Level Standard
Figure -
Member Beam / Rib
User defined concrete cover of upper reinforcement

Possibility to define concrete cover of upper reinforcement; this
Description
item is visible only if the item above is set to User
Default Edit box; cu = 30 mm
Code 4.4.1
Level Standard
Figure -
Member Beam / Rib
Lower
Diameter of lower reinforcement
Description Information about diameter of lower of reinforcement
Default Edit box; default ds,l = 16 mm
Code -
Level Standard
Figure -
Member Beam / Rib
Type of cover of lower reinforcement

Description Information about type of cover of lower reinforcement
Code 4.4.1
Level Standard
Figure -
Member Beam / Rib
User defined concrete cover of lower reinforcement

Possibility to define concrete cover of lower reinforcement; this item is
Description
visible only if the item above is set to User
- 40 -
Default Edit box; cl = 30 mm

Code 4.4.1
Level Standard
Figure -
Member Beam / Rib
Side
Type of cover of side reinforcement
Description Information about type of cover of side reinforcement
Code 4.4.1
Level Standard
Figure -
Member Beam / Rib
User defined concrete cover of side reinforcement

Possibility to define concrete cover of side reinforcement; this item is vis-
Description
ible only if the item above is set to User
Default Edit box; cs = 30 mm
Code 4.4.1
Level Standard
Figure -
Member Beam / Rib
Stirrups
Material
Description Information about material of stirrups reinforcement
Code -
Level Standard
Figure -
Member Beam / Rib
Diameter of stirrups
Description Information about diameter of stirrups
Default Edit box; dss = 8 mm
- 41 -
Chapter 4
Code -
Level Standard
Figure -
Member Beam / Rib
Number of cuts
Description Information about number of cuts for shear reinforcement
Default Edit box; ns = 2
Code -
Level Standard
Figure -
Member Beam / Rib
Angle
Angle between shear reinforcement and the beam axis perpendicular
Description
to the shear force
Default Edit box; α = 90 °
Code -
Level Standard
Figure -
Member Beam / Rib
Beam slab
Longitudinal
Material
Description Information about material of longitudinal reinforcement
Code -
Level Standard
Figure -
Member Beam slab
Upper
Description Information about diameter of upper of reinforcement
Default Edit box; default ds,u = 16 mm
- 42 -
Code -
Level Standard
Figure -
Member Beam slab

Description Information about type of cover of upper reinforcement
Code 4.4.1
Level Standard
Figure -
Member Beam slab
User defined concrete cover of upper reinforcement

Possibility to define concrete cover of upper reinforcement; this item is
Description
Default Edit box; cu = 30 mm
Code 4.4.1
Level Standard
Figure -
Member Beam slab
Lower
Description Information about diameter of lower of reinforcement
Default Edit box; default ds,l = 16 mm
Code -
Level Standard
Figure -
Member Beam slab

Description Information about type of cover of lower reinforcement
Code 4.4.1
Level Standard
Figure -
Member Beam slab
- 43 -
Chapter 4
User defined concrete cover of lower reinforcement

Possibility to define concrete cover of lower reinforcement; this item is
Description
Default Edit box; cl = 30 mm
Code 4.4.1
Level Standard
Figure -
Member Beam slab
Column
Longitudinal
Material
Description Information about material of main reinforcement
Code -
Level Standard
Figure -
Member Column
Main
Diameter of main reinforcement
Description Information about diameter of main of reinforcement
Default Edit box; default ds,m = 16 mm
Code -
Level Standard
Figure
Member Column
Type of cover of main reinforcement

Description Information about type of cover of main reinforcement
Code 4.4.1
Level Standard
Figure -
Member Column
- 44 -
User defined concrete cover of main reinforcement

Possibility to define concrete cover of main reinforcement; this item is vis-
Description
ible only if the item above is set to User
Default Edit box; cm = 30 mm
Code 4.4.1
Level Standard
Figure -
Member Column
Stirrups
Material
Description Information about material of stirrups reinforcement
Code -
Level Standard
Figure -
Member Beam / Column
Description Information about diameter of stirrups
Code -
Level Standard
Figure -
Member Beam / Column
Number of cuts
Description Information about number of cuts for shear reinforcement
Code -
Level Standard
Figure -
Member Beam / Column / Rib
Angle
Description
to the shear force
- 45 -
Chapter 4

Code -
Level Standard
Figure -
Basic (user defined) stirrup

This group of items is related to user defined shear reinforcement which is considered as real inputted reinforcement on
member. This replaces user defined shear reinforcement which is not taken into account for design. Check shear and tor-
sion is not influenced by this settings.
Material
Description Information about material of inputted stirrups reinforcement
Code -
Level Advanced
Figure -
Angle
Description
to the shear force
Code -
Level Advanced
Figure -
Area of shear reinforcement per meter

Information about defined shear reinforcement taken into account as
Description
real reinforcement for shear design
Default 0 mm2
Code -
Level Advanced
Figure -
- 46 -
Concrete settings (structure)

There is brand new Concrete settings (structure) setup for concrete members which contains all needed settings coming
from code or calculation routines. The global settings located in Concrete settings (structure) are by default valid for all mem-
bers in the project, unless they are overwritten by Settings per member - 1D member data. A lot of input parameters and cal-
culation settings are collected here, reflecting the complexity of the Eurocode.
Concrete settings dialogue

This dialogue is split into two main parts. The left part contains the values themselves and right side includes explanatory fig-
ure with description of the value. Additionally there are several buttons for search, filtering, mode selection and default set-
tings.
Concrete settings dialogue is presented as a kind of table with 9 columns (description, symbol, value, default, unit, chapter,
code, structure and check type). Each column has enabled possibility for search. User can easily start typing at the first row
of column and see intermediate output of the search.
To find all items related to any chapter (like Cover, ULS ...) use search in column Check
type
Find
There's also a 'Find' function, where the user can insert a search term. It brings some kind of filtering of items in the setup.
This function enables searching the defined value anywhere in the Concrete setting dialogue
- 47 -
Chapter 5
View
Furthermore, very useful new thing is possibility of switch type of view of items of setup - concrete commands view, code
chapter view or list view. The first view is according to commands (Concrete commands view) used for design and check.
View possibilities and Concrete commands view

Another view is based on numbering from design code as mentioned on the following figure.
Code chapters view

The last predefined view is the List view where all items are listed and could be alphabetically sorted.
- 48 -
List view
Additionally, the User has also possibility to create his own view based on filtered items and use them for quick changes later
on. User defined view can be crated using Save actual view and definition of the name.
Afterwards, this view is possible to select in User item. This user view is possible to save or import from the file using Save
views into file, and Import views from file.
- 49 -
Chapter 5
User defined view

Finally, there is possibility to see only changed items using option Show only changed items.
Filters
The user can choose between a Standard or Advanced level, which filters the amount of data. The example is visible on
group Solver settings - General.
Standard view
- 50 -
Advanced view
Default
Finally, when the user wants go back to predefined values it is possible to easily press button default and all settings are
restored.

Solver settings
General
Limit value of unity check
Description Limit value of unity check when the check is still OK
Default Edit box , default = 1,0
Code -
Level Standard
Figure
Member All
- 51 -
Chapter 5
Limit value of unity check cannot be changed from 1,0
Value of unity check for not calculated unity checks

Value of unity check which is presented when the unity check is not pos-
Description
sible to calculated due to some errors during calculation
Default Edit box; default = 3,0
Code -
Level Advanced
Figure
Member All
The coefficient for calculation effective depth of cross-section

The coefficient for calculation effective depth of cross- section from
depth of cross-section, if effective depth of cross-section is not possible
Description
to calculate from plane of equilibrium (tensile reinforcement or com-
pressive concrete fibre was not found)
Default Edit box; default Coeffd = 0,9
Code -
Level Advanced
Figure
Member All
The coefficient for calculation of inner lever arm

The coefficient for calculation inner lever arm from effective depth of
cross-section, if effective inner lever arm is not possible to calculate from
Description
plane of equilibrium (tensile reinforcement or compressive concrete
fibre was not found)
- 52 -
Default Edit box Coeffz = 0,9

Code -
Level Advanced
Figure
Member All
The coefficient for calculation force, where member as under compression

The coefficient for calculation force, where member is considered as
Description
under compression. If NEd ≤ Ncom → member under compression
Default Edit box Coeffcom = 0,1
Code -
Level Advanced
Figure
Member All
Creep
Type input of creep coefficient
Type of calculation creep coefficient:
Description - Auto - creep coefficient is calculated automatically by the program
- User value - creep coefficient inputted directly by the user
Default Combo box; Type φ = Auto
Code Annex B.1
- 53 -
Chapter 5
Level Standard
Figure -
Member All
Relative humidity
Description Relative humidity of ambient environment
Default Edit box; RH = 50 %
Code Annex B.1
Level Advanced
Figure -
Member All
Age of concrete at loading

Description Age of concrete at loading of the member
Default Edit box; t0 = 28 days
Code Annex B.1
Level Advanced
Figure -
Member All
Age of concrete at the moment considered

Age of concrete at the moment considered. It means, time, which creep
Description
coefficient is calculated for.
Default Edit box; t = 1825 days
Code Annex B.1
Level Advanced
Figure -
Member All
User value
Description User defined value of creep coefficient
Default Edit box; φ = 2,5
Code Annex B.1
Level Standard
Figure -
Member All
- 54 -
SLS
Use effective modulus of concrete
Possibility to use effective E modulus of concrete. It means the long-
Description term behaviour of concrete is covered in the analysis of the crack width,
stress limitations and stiffness calculation.
Default Check box, default False
Code 7.1(2)
Level Advanced
Figure
Member All
Default sway type

Sway around y axis
Yes indicates, that the members are prone to sway (unbraced) around
y axis of LCS of the member. This setting is used in calculation of slen-
Description
derness and internal forces 1D, if in Buckling data or Buckling data lib-
rary if possibility “Setting” is selected.
Default Check box ; Default True
Code -
Level Standard
- 55 -
Chapter 5
Figure
Member All
Sway around z axis

Yes indicates, that the members are prone to sway (unbraced) around
z axis of LCS of the member. This setting is used in calculation of slen-
Description
derness and internal forces 1D, if in Buckling data or Buckling data lib-
rary if possibility “Setting” is selected.
Default Check box ; Default True
Code -
Level Standard
Figure
Member All
Minimal concrete cover

Design working life
Design working life is information used for determination of minimal con-
Description
crete cover
Code 4.4.1.2(5), table 4.3N
Level Standard
- 56 -
Figure -
Member All
Risk of corrosion attack

Corrosion induced by carbonation
Exposure class caused by carbonation is used for determination of min-
imal concrete cover in Table 4.4N
None - No corrosion induced by carbonation
Description XC1 - Dry or permanently wet

XC2 - Wet, rarely dry
XC3 - Moderate humidity
XC4 - Cyclic wet and dry
Default Combo box; default = XC3
Code 4.4.1.2(5), table 4.3N
Level Standard
Figure -
Member All
Corrosion induced by chlorides

Exposure class caused by chlorides is used for determination of minimal
concrete cover in Table 4.4N
None - No corrosion induced by chlorides
Description
XD1 - Moderate humidity
XD2 - Wet, rarely dry
XD3 - Cyclic wet and dry
Default Combo box; default = None
Code 4.4.1.2(5), table 4.3N
Level Standard
Figure -
Member All
Corrosion induced by chlorides from sea water

Exposure class caused by chlorides from sea water is used for determ-
ination of minimal concrete cover in Table 4.4N
Description None - No corrosion induced by chlorides from sea water

XS1 - Exposed to airborne salt but not in direct contact with sea water
XS2 - Permanently submerged
- 57 -
Chapter 5
XS3 - Tidal, splash and spray zones

Code 4.4.1.2(5), table 4.3N
Level Standard
Figure -
Member All
Free / thaw attack

Additional Exposure class caused by freezing or thawing
None - No Freeze/Thaw Attack
XF1 - Moderate water saturation, without de-icing agent
Description
XF2 - Moderate water saturation, with de-icing agent
XF3 - High water saturation, without de-icing agents
XF4 - High water saturation with de-icing agents or sea water
Code 4.4.1.2(12)
Level Standard
Figure -
Member All
Chemical attack
Additional Exposure class caused by chemical attack
None - No chemical attack
XA1 - Slightly aggressive chemical environment according to EN 206-1,
Table 2
Description
XA2 - Moderately aggressive chemical environment according to EN
206-1, Table 2
XA3 - Highly aggressive chemical environment according to EN 206-1,
Table 2
Code 4.4.1.2(12)
Level Standard
Figure -
Member All
Risk of abrasion attack

Description Additional Exposure class caused by abrasion attack
- 58 -
None - No abrasion
XM1 - Moderate abrasion
XM2 - Heavy abrasion
XM3 - Extreme abrasion
Code 4.4.1.2(13)
Level Advanced
Figure -
Member All
Possibility of special control

Special geometric control
Description
caused by special geometric control
Default Check box; default = False
Code 4.4.1.3(3)
Level Advanced
Figure -
Member All
Special concrete quality control

Description
caused by special concrete quality control
Code 4.4.1.2(5)
Level Advanced
Figure -
Member All
Risk of casting on atypical surface

caused by casting on atypical surface
Standard - No additional deviation to nominal concrete cover
Description
Against prepared ground - Concrete cast against prepared ground
Against soil - Concrete cast directly against soil
Uneven surface - Increasing due uneven surface
- 59 -
Chapter 5
Default Combo box; default = Standard

Code 4.4.1.3(4)
Level Advanced
Figure -
Member All
Concrete characteristic
Type of concrete
caused by production type
Description
In-situ - Concrete is cast directly on the construction site
Prefabricated - Elements are precasted in factory
Default Combo box; default = In-situ
Code 4.4.1.3(1P, 3)
Level Standard
Figure -
Member All
Internal forces
Absolute limit ratio for modification of internal forces
Internal forces will be set to zero if the modification of internal forces
Description using the absolute limit ratio is taken into account and the internal forces
are smaller than the input value.
Default Edit box; Ratioint,abs = 5,0 kN
Code -
Level Standard
Figure
Member 1D (Beam, Beam slab, Column, Rib)
- 60 -
Relative limit ratio for modification of internal forces

Internal forces will be set to zero if the modification of internal forces
using the relative limit ratio is taken into account and the ratio of internal
Description
forces and resultant of bending moments (for N, My , Mz , T) or resultant
of shear forces (for Vy , Vz ) is smaller than the input value.
Default Edit box; Ratioint,rel = 0,1
Code -
Level Standard
Figure
Modification of internal forces

Internal forces used in concrete calculation are modified.
No - internal forces are without modification
Absolute ratio - internal forces will be set to zero if internal forces are
Description smaller than the absolute limit ratio.
Relative ratio - internal forces will be set to zero, if ratio of internal forces
and resultant of bending moments (for N, M y , M z , T) or resultant of
shear forces (for Vy , Vz ) is smaller than the relative limit ratio.
Default Combo box; default = No
Code -
Level Standard
- 61 -
Chapter 5
Figure
Use equivalent first order value

The first order moment is taken into account as equivalent first order
Description
moment, if this parameter is ON.
Code 5.8.8.2(2)
Level Advanced
Figure
Member Column

Determination of the direction for calculation of second order effect and
geometrical imperfection effect and geometrical imperfection according
to conditions 5.38a a 5.38b.
Auto - automatic calculation of direction for taking into account second
order effect and geometrical imperfection according to conditions 5.38a
Description a 5.38b.
Uniaxial - second order effect and geometrical imperfection is taken into
account only in one (more unfavourable direction).
Biaxial - second order effect and geometrical imperfection is taken into
always in both directions.
Default Combo box; default = Auto
Code 5.8.9
Level Advanced
- 62 -
Figure
Member Column
Internal forces ULS

Take into account additional tensile force caused by shear (shift rule)
If the check box is ON, the additional tensile force caused by the shear
Description
force is taken into account using the shift rule.
Code 9.2.1.3(2)
Level Standard
Figure
Member Beam, Rib, Plate, Shell(Plate)
Use minimum value of eccentricity

The minimum value of eccentricity is taken into account for calculation
Description
first order eccentricity, if this parameter is ON.
Code 6.1.4
- 63 -
Chapter 5
Level Advanced
Figure
Member Column

Description
Code 5.2(5)
Level Standard
Figure
Member Column

The second order effect is taken into account, if slenderness is greater
Description
than limit slenderness and this parameter is ON.
Code 5.8.8
Level Standard
- 64 -
Figure
Member Column
Estimation of longitudinal reinforcement for recalculation internal forces

Estimation ratio of longitudinal reinforcement for calculation mechanical
reinforcement ratio in design of reinforcement. Mechanical ratio is cal-
Description
culated for calculation limit slenderness (chapter 5.8.3.1(1) and second
order effect - method based on nominal curvature (formula 5.36).
Default Edit box; default μs = 2 %
Code 6.2.3
Level Advanced
Figure
Member Column
Shear force reduction above supports

Description Shear force above support is reduced if this item is ON.
Default Check box; default False
Code 6.2.1(8)
- 65 -
Chapter 5
Level Advanced
Figure
Member Beam, Beam slab, Rib
Moment reduction above supports

Bending moment above support is reduced if this item is set ON:
- for standard support, formula 5.9 is used
Description
- for column support the reduced moment is the same as on the face of
the column
Code 5.3.2.2(4)
Level Advanced
Figure
Internal forces SLS
Description
Code 5.2(5)
Level Standard
- 66 -
Figure
Member Column
Design As
Coefficient for reduction of strength of the concrete in compressive concrete
Coefficient for reduction of strength of the concrete in compressive con-
Description crete which is used for calculation design value of resistance of concrete
compressive strut nRd = Acc · Redfcd · fcd
Default Edit box; default Redfcd = 0,85
Code -
Level Standard
Figure -
Member All
Beam, Column, Rib, Beam Slab

Limit ratio of bending moment for uni axial method
Limit ratio of bending moments for using uniaxial design method. If ratio
of bending moments is lesser than limit ratio, uniaxial design method is
Description
used and smaller value of bending moment and shear force is neg-
lected.
Default Edit box; ρM,lim = 0,1
Code -
Level Advanced
Figure
- 67 -
Chapter 5
Design method (beams)

Method for design of longitudinal reinforcement for beams.
Auto - Automatic determination of design method according to bending
moments ratio ρM .
Uniaxial around z - Design for uniaxial bending moment M z only.
Description Moment My will not be taken into account (My = 0 kNm).
Uniaxial around y - Design for uniaxial bending moment M y only.
Moment Mz will not be taken into account (Mz = 0 kNm).
Biaxial - Design for biaxial bending for both bending moments M y and
Mz .
Code -
Level Advanced
Figure
Design method (columns)

Method for design of longitudinal reinforcement for columns.
Auto - Automatic determination of design method according to bending
moments ratio ρM .
Uniaxial around z - Design for uniaxial bending moment M z only.
Description Moment My will not be taken into account (My = 0 kNm).
Uniaxial around y - Design for uniaxial bending moment M y only.
Moment Mz will not be taken into account (Mz = 0 kNm).
Biaxial - Design for biaxial bending for both bending moments M y and
Mz .
- 68 -
Code -
Level Advanced
Figure
Member Column
Coefficient increasing statically required reinforcement in beam for upper surface

Increasing statically required reinforcement at upper surfaces for beam,
Description
beam slab and rib.
Default Edit box; Coeffstat.up = 0,0
Code -
Level Advanced
Figure
Coefficient increasing statically required reinforcement in beam for lower surface

Increasing statically required reinforcement at lower surfaces for beam,
Description
beam slab and rib.
Default Edit box; Coeffstat.lo = 0,0
Code -
Level Advanced
- 69 -
Chapter 5
Figure
Coefficient increasing statically required reinforcement in column

Description Increasing statically required reinforcement for column.
Default Edit box; Coeffstat = 0,0
Code -
Level Advanced
Figure
Member Column
Design longitudinal and shear reinforcement due to torsion

Longitudinal and shear reinforcement due to torsion is not designed if
Description
the check box is set False
Code -
Level Advanced
Figure
Member 1D (Beam,Beam slab,Column,Rib)
- 70 -
Plate, Wall, Shell(Plate), Shell(Wall), Deep Beam

Coefficient for increasing the statically required area of reinforcement for the upper surface of
Plate, Shell(Plate)
Increasing statically required reinforcement for upper surface of Plate,
Description
Shell(Plate). As,stat = (1 + Coeffstat.up.2D ) ∙ As,stat
Default Edit box; Coeffstat.up.2D = 0,0
Code -
Level Advanced
Figure -
Member Plate, Shell(Plate)
Coefficient for increasing the statically required area of reinforcement for the lower surface of
Plate, Shell(Plate)
Increasing statically required reinforcement for lower surface of Plate,
Description
Shell(Plate). As,stat = (1 + Coeffstat.lo.2D ) ∙ As,stat
Default Edit box; Coeffstat.lo.2D = 0,0
Code -
Level Advanced
Figure -
Coefficient for increasing the statically required area of reinforcement for both layers in Wall, Shell
(Wall) and Deep Beam
Increasing the statically required reinforcement for both surfaces of Wall
Description
and Shell(Wall). As,stat = (1 + Coeffstat.both.2D ) ∙ As,stat
Default Edit box; Coeffstat.both.2D = 0,0
Code -
Level Advanced
Figure -
Member Wall, Shell(Wall), Deep beam
Interaction diagram
Interaction diagram method
Possibility to set method for evaluation of results using interaction dia-
gram:
Description - NRd - assuming MEd is constant
- MRd - assuming NEd is constant
- NRdMrd - assuming eccentricity is constant
- 71 -
Chapter 5
- Mrdy - assuming MEdz is constant
- Mrdz - - assuming MEdy is constant

Default Combo box; default = NRdMRd
Code 6.1
Level Standard
Figure
Member All
Division of strain
Calculation precision for one of the diagram “branches” during gen-
eration of interaction diagram. The value means how many times the
Description
strain plane is readjusted from the position of section under full com-
pression to the position of section under full tension.
Default Edit box; default = 250
Code -
Level Advanced
Figure
- 72 -
Number of points in vertical cut

Number of directions in which the interaction diagram is calculated (num-
Description
ber of “branches”) during generation of interaction diagram.
Default Edit box; default = 36
Code -
Level Advanced
Figure
Shear
Type calculation of angle of between of compression strut and member
axis for shear check.
- Auto - automatic calculation of minimum angle based on condition
Description VEd ≤ VRd.max
- User(angle) - the value is inputted by the user as angle

- User(cotangent) - the value is inputted by the user as cotangent of the
value
Default Combo box; default = User(angle)
Code 6.2.3
Level Standard
- 73 -
Chapter 5
Figure
Member All

Angle between of compression strut and member axis for shear check;
Description editable only if type of calculation of compression strut angle is User
(angle)
Default Edit box; θ = 40 °
Code 6.2.3
Level Standard
Figure
Member All

Cotangent angle between of compression strut and member axis for
angle is User (cotangent)
Default Edit box; cot(θ) =1,2
Code 6.2.3
Level Standard
- 74 -
Figure
Member All
Shear between web and flange

Input type for angle between compression strut and member axis for lon-
gitudinal shear check.
Description - User(angle) - the value is inputted by the user as angle
- User(cotangent) - the value is inputted by the user as cotangent of the
value
Default Combo box, User (angle) / User (cotangent); default User (angle)
Code 6.2.4(4)
Level Advanced
Figure

Angle between compression strut and member axis for longitudinal
angle is User (angle)
Default Edit box, θf = 40 °
Code 6.2.4(4)
- 75 -
Chapter 5
Level Advanced
Figure

Cotangent of the angle between compression strut and member axis
Description for longitudinal shear check; editable only if type of calculation of com-
pression strut angle is User (cotangent)
Default Edit box, cot(θf ) = 1,2
Code 6.2.4(4)
Level Advanced
Figure
Torsion
Equivalent thin walled cross-section
Type of equivalent thin- walled cross- section used for calculation of
cross-section capacity in torsion.
Description Automatic - The program tries to create equivalent thin-walled cross-
section from stirrup for torsion at first, and if this method is not suc-
cessful, program uses method based on shape of cross-section.
- 76 -
From stirrups from torsion - The program tries to create equivalent thin-
walled cross-section around stirrup.
From effective CSS - The program tries to create equivalent thin-walled
cross-section from current cross-section by offsetting the value tef .
From effective rectangular CSS - The program tries to create an equi-
valent rectangular concrete thin-walled cross-section the perimeter and
area of which are the same as the perimeter and area of the original
cross-section.
For more details see "Stirrups for torsion"
Default Combo box; default = Automatic
Code 6.3.1(3)
Level Advanced
Figure
Punching
Type of Beta factor
Type of beta factor used in punching calculation
Approximate - Values of beta factors are taken from figure 6.21N from
Description EN 1992-1-1
Formula (DIN EN) - Values of beta factors are calculated according for-
mula from DIN EN
Default Combo box; Type β = Approximate
Code 6.4.3(3-6)
Level Standard
- 77 -
Chapter 5
Figure
Member Plate
Control perimeter
Distance of control perimeter for ceiling plate
The coefficient for determination of the distance of control perimeter of
Description a ceiling plate from the column face (or from the previous perimeter if
already exists).
Default Edit box; coeff ku1,cel = 2,0
Code 6.4.2(1)
Level Advanced
Figure
Member Plate
Distance of control perimeter for foundation plate

The coefficient for determination of the distance of control perimeter of
Description a foundation plate from the column face (or from the previous perimeter
if already exists).
Default Edit box; coeff ku1,found = 2,0
- 78 -
Code 6.4.2(1)
Level Advanced
Figure
Member Plate
Distances for control perimeter are not editable in SCIA Engineer 17.0.
Stress limitation
Indirect load
When the stress in reinforcement is caused by the indirect load
Description (imposed deformation) then the stress should not exceed different max-
imal value
Default Check box, default NO
Code 7.2(5)
Level Advanced
Figure
Member All
- 79 -
Chapter 5
Cracking forces
Type of tensile strength of concrete used for calculation of cracking
Description forces in SLS checks (stresses and deflections). It is possible to select
between fctm (from Table 3.1) and fctm,fl (according Clause 3.1.8).
Default Combo box; fct,eff = fctm
Code 7.1(2)
Level Advanced
Figure
Member All

Value of strength of concrete used for calculation of cracking forces in
SLS checks (stresses and deflections). It is possible to select between
0 MPa - first crack appears when tensile stress is reached in concrete
Description
cross-section
fct,eff - first crack is appears when effective tensile strength is reached in
cross-section
Default Combo box; default = fct,eff
Code 7.1(2)
Level Advanced
Figure -
Member All
Deflection
Coefficient for increasing the amount of reinforcement
Description Coefficient for increasing the amount of reinforcement for calculation of
- 80 -
deflection (reduced stiffnesses).

Code -
Level Advanced
Figure
Member All
Maximal total displacement L/x; x =

Descrip- Maximal total (nonlinear + creep) displacement allowed for 1D member
tion expressed as span / depth ratio.
Default Edit box; xtot = 250
Code 7.4.1(4)
Level Standard
Figure
- 81 -
Chapter 5
Maximal additional displacement L/x; x =

Descrip- Maximal additional (total - immediate) displacement allowed for 1D mem-
tion ber expressed as span / depth ratio.
Default Edit box; xadd = 500
Code 7.4.1(5)
Level Standard
Figure
Maximal total deflection

Descrip- Maximal total (short-term + creep) deflection allowed for a 2D member
tion input as an absolute value.
Default Edit box; δlim,tot = 25 mm
Code 7.4.1(4)
Level Standard
Figure
Member 2D (Plate, Wall, Shell(Plate), Shell(Wall), Deep beam)
Maximal additional deflection

Descrip- Maximal additional (total - immediate) deflection allowed for a 2D member
tion input as an absolute value.
Default Edit box; δlim,add = 15 mm
- 82 -
Code 7.4.1(5)
Level Standard
Figure
Member 2D (Plate, Wall, Shell(Plate), Shell(Wall), Deep beam)
Type of variable load coefficient for the automatic generation of a combination for calculation of
creep deflection
Type of a variable load coefficient for the automatic generation of a com-
bination for calculation of deflection due to creep. There are two options
:
Description - Use Psi2 factor – the variable load used in the combination is multiplied
by Psi2 factor according to the load type.
- User input - the variable load used in the combination is multiplied by a
user-defined value.
Default Combo box; default = Use Psi2 factor
Code -
Level Advanced
Figure -
Member All
User-defined value of the variable load coefficient for the automatic generation of a combination for
calculation of creep deflection
User-defined value of the variable load coefficient for the automatic gen-
eration of a combination for calculation of creep deflection. The variable
Description
load used in the combination is multiplied by a user-defined value. This
value is visible only if User input is selected in previous combo box.
Code -
Level Advanced
Figure -
Member All
- 83 -
Chapter 5
Detailing provisions
Beam (Rib)
Longitudinal
Check min. bar distance
Setting if minimal clear bar distance of longitudinal reinforcement for
Description
beam is checked or not.
Code 8.2(2)
Level Standard
Figure
Member Beam, Rib
Minimal bar distance

Additional limit for minimal clear bar distance of longitudinal rein-
Description
forcement for beam.
Edit box; slb,min = 20 mm; this item is visible only if check box above is set
Default
True
Code 8.2(2)
Level Standard
Figure
Member Beam, Rib
- 84 -
Check max. bar distance

Setting if maximal clear bar distance of longitudinal reinforcement for
Description
Code -
Level Standard
Figure
Member Beam, Rib
Maximal bar distance

Additional limit for maximal clear bar distance of longitudinal rein-
Description
forcement for beam.
Edit box; slb,max = 350 mm; this item is visible only if check box above is
Default
set True
Code -
Level Standard
Figure
Member Beam, Rib
Check max. bar distance (torsion)

Setting if maximal centre- to- centre bar distance of longitudinal rein-
Description forcement for beam based on torsion requirement is checked or not.
This value is checked if torsional moment exists in cross-section only.
- 85 -
Chapter 5
Code 9.2.3(4)
Level Standard
Figure
Member Beam, Rib
Maximal bar distance (torsion)

Maximal centre-to-centre bar distance of longitudinal reinforcement for
Description beam based on torsion requirement. This value is checked if torsional
moment exists in cross-section only.
Edit box; slbt,max = 350 mm; this item is visible only if check box above is
Default
set True
Code 9.2.3(4)
Level Standard
Figure
Member Beam, Rib
Check min. reinforcement area

Setting if minimal reinforcement area of longitudinal reinforcement for
Description
Code 9.2.1.1(1)
Level Standard
- 86 -
Figure
Member Beam, Rib
Check min. reinforcement area for secondary member

Description
secondary beam is checked or not.
Code 9.2.1.1(1)
Level Standard
Figure
Member Beam, Rib
Check max. reinforcement area

Setting if maximal reinforcement area of longitudinal reinforcement for
Description
Code 9.2.1.1(3)
Level Standard
- 87 -
Chapter 5
Figure
Member Beam, Rib
Stirrups
Check min. mandrel diameter
Setting if minimal mandrel diameter of stirrups for beam is checked or
Description
not.
Code 8.3(2)
Level Standard
Figure
Member Beam, Rib
Check max. longitudinal spacing (shear)

Setting if maximal longitudinal spacing of stirrups based on shear
Description
requirements is checked or not.
Code 9.2.2(6)
Level Standard
- 88 -
Figure
Member Beam, Rib
Check max. longitudinal spacing (torsion)

Setting if maximal longitudinal spacing of stirrups based on torsion
Description
requirements is checked or not.
Code 9.2.3(3)
Level Standard
Figure
Member Beam, Rib
Check min. percentage of stirrups

Description Setting if minimal percentage of stirrups for beam is checked or not.
Code 9.2.2(5)
Level Standard
- 89 -
Chapter 5
Figure
Member Beam, Rib
Check max. percentage of stirrups

Description Setting if maximal percentage of stirrups for beam is checked or not.
Code 6.2.3(3)
Level Standard
Figure
Member Beam, Rib
Beam Slab
Longitudinal
Description
beam slab is checked or not.
Code 8.2(2)
- 90 -
Level Standard
Figure
Member Beam slab

Description
forcement for beam slab
Edit box; slbs,min = 20 mm; this item is visible only if check box above is
Default
set True
Code 8.2(2)
Level Standard
Figure
Member Beam slab

Setting if maximal bar distance of longitudinal reinforcement for beam
Description
slab is checked or not.
Code 9.3.1.1(3)
Level Standard
- 91 -
Chapter 5
Figure
Member Beam slab

Description
Code 9.3.1.1(1)
Level Standard
Figure
Member Beam slab

Description
Code 9.3.1.1(1)
Level Standard
- 92 -
Figure
Member Beam slab
Column
Longitudinal
Description
column is checked or not.
Code 8.2(2)
Level Standard
Figure
Member Column

Description
forcement for column.
Edit box; slc,min = 20 mm; this item is visible only if check box above is set
Default
True
- 93 -
Chapter 5
Code 8.2(2)
Level Standard
Figure
Member Column

Setting if maximal clear bar distance of longitudinal reinforcement for
Description
Code -
Level Standard
Figure
Member Column

Additional limit for maximal clear bar distance of longitudinal rein-
Description
forcement for column
Edit box slc,max = 350 mm; this item is visible only if check box above is
Default
set True
Code -
Level Standard
- 94 -
Figure
Member Column

Setting if maximal centre- to- centre bar distance of longitudinal rein-
Description forcement for column based on torsion requirement is checked or not.
This value is checked if torsional moment exists in cross-section only.
Code 9.2.3(4)
Level Standard
Figure
Member Column

Maximal centre-to-centre bar distance of longitudinal reinforcement for
Description column based on torsion requirement. This value is checked if torsional
Edit box; slct,max = 350 mm; this item is visible only if check box above is
Default
set True
Code 9.2.3(4)
Level Standard
- 95 -
Chapter 5
Figure
Member Column

Description
Code 9.5.2(2)
Level Standard
Figure
Member Column

Description
Code 9.5.2(3)
Level Standard
- 96 -
Figure
Member Column
Check min. bar diameter

Setting if minimal bar diameter of longitudinal reinforcement for column
Description
is checked or not.
Code 9.5.2(1)
Level Standard
Figure
Member Column
Check min. number of bars

Setting if minimal number of bars in columns is checked or not.
Description Option whether the program check: (i) minimal number of bars in cir-
cular columns and (ii) presence of at least one bar at each edge of a poly-
gonal-shaped cross-section.
Code 9.5.2(4)
Level Standard
- 97 -
Chapter 5
Figure
Member Column
Min. number of bars in circular column

Description Minimal number of bars in circular column.
Edit box; nlc,min = 4 bars; this item is visible only if check box above is set
Default
True
Code 9.5.2(4)
Level Standard
Figure
Member Column
Transverse
Code 6.2.3(3)
Level Standard
- 98 -
Figure
Member Column

Setting if minimal mandrel diameter of stirrups for column is checked or
Description
not
Code 8.3(2)
Level Standard
Figure
Member Column
Check max. longitudinal spacing

Description Setting if maximal longitudinal spacing of stirrups is checked or not.
Code 9.5.3(3)
Level Standard
- 99 -
Chapter 5
Figure
Member Column

Setting if minimal diameter of longitudinal bar in column is checked or
Description
not.
Code 9.5.3(1)
Level Standard
Figure
Member Column
Min bar diameter

Description User defined minimal diameter of longitudinal bar in column.
Edit box; dsc,min = 6 mm; this item is visible only if check box above is set
Default
True
Code 9.5.3(1)
Level Standard
- 100 -
Figure
Member Column
Min bar diameter

User defined minimal diameter of longitudinal bar in column as mul-
Description
tiplication factor of maximal diameter of longitudinal reinforcement.
Edit box; xdsc = 25 %; this item is visible only if check box above is set
Default
True
Code 9.5.3(1)
Level Standard
Figure
Member Column
Plates, Shell (plate)
Longitudinal
Check min. ratio of principal reinforcement
Descrip- Setting if minimal ratio of principal longitudinal reinforcement for plate
tion and shell(plate) is checked or not.
Code 9.3.1.1(1)
- 101 -
Chapter 5
Level Standard
Figure
Type of the minimum tension principal reinforcement for the upper surface
Selection of the type of minimum tension reinforcement for each rein-
forcement layer at the upper surface of the plate.
Auto - A) Automatic calculation of minimum tension reinforcement: The
Description
minimum reinforcement is evaluated with equation 9.1N.
User value - B) Minimum tension reinforcement: The minimum tension
reinforcement is calculated as a percentage of the area of concrete.
Combo box; default = Auto; this item is visible only if check box above is
Default
set True
Code -
Level Standard
Figure
Minimum tension principal reinforcement for the upper surface [%]

The minimum tension reinforcement of plate is calculated as a per-
Description
centage of the area of concrete.
Edit box; default = 0,2 %; this item is visible only if check box above is set
Default
True and combo box above is set User value
Code -
Level Standard
- 102 -
Figure
Type of the minimum tension principal reinforcement for the lower surface
Selection of the type of minimum tension reinforcement for each rein-
forcement layer at the lower surface of the plate.
Auto - A) Automatic calculation of minimum tension reinforcement: The
Description
minimum reinforcement is evaluated with equation 9.1N.
User value - B) Minimum tension reinforcement: The minimum tension
reinforcement is calculated as a percentage of the area of concrete.
Combo box; default = Auto; this item is visible only if check box above is
Default
set True
Code -
Level Standard
Figure
The minimum tension principal reinforcement for the lower surface [%]
The minimum tension reinforcement of plate is calculated as a per-
Description
centage of the area of concrete.
Edit box; default = 0,2 %; this item is visible only if check box above is set
Default
True and combo box above is set User value
Code -
Level Standard
Figure
Check max. ratio of principal reinforcement

Descrip- Setting if maximal ratio of principal longitudinal reinforcement for plate
tion and shell(plate) is checked or not.
Code 9.3.1.1(1)
- 103 -
Chapter 5
Level Standard
Figure
Check min. transverse ratio of secondary reinforcement

Setting if minimal transverse ratio of secondary longitudinal rein-
Description
forcement for plate and shell(plate) is checked or not.
Code 9.3.1.1(2)
Level Standard
Figure -
Min. transverse ratio of secondary reinforcement

Minimal value of transverse ratio of secondary longitudinal rein-
Description
forcement for plate and shell(plate).
Edit box; ρl,min,sec = 20 %; this item is visible only if check box above is
Default
set True
Code 9.3.1.1(2)
Level Standard
Figure -

Setting if minimal bar distance of longitudinal reinforcement for plate
Description
and shell(plate) is checked or not.
Code 8.2(2)
Level Standard
Figure -
- 104 -

Additional limit for minimal bar distance of longitudinal reinforcement for
Description
plate and shell(plate).
Edit box; slp,min = 20 mm; this item is visible only if check box above is set
Default
True
Code 8.2(2)
Level Standard
Figure -
Check max. spacing of principal longitudinal reinforcement

Setting if maximal spacing of principal longitudinal reinforcement for
Description
plate and shell(plate) is checked or not.
Code 9.3.1.1(3)
Level Standard
Figure
Check max. spacing of secondary longitudinal reinforcement

Setting if maximal spacing of secondary longitudinal reinforcement for
Description
plate and shell(plate) is checked or not.
Code 9.3.1.1(3)
Level Standard
- 105 -
Chapter 5
Figure
Shear
Check min. ratio of shear reinforcement
Setting, if minimal ratio of shear reinforcement for plate and shell(plate)
Description is checked or not. The minimal ratio of shear reinforcement is editable in
Manager for national annexes.
Code 9.3.2(2)
Level Standard
Figure -
Check min. thickness of member with shear reinforcement

Setting, if minimal thickness of member with shear reinforcement for
plate and shell(plate) is checked or not. If this check is ON, then for thick-
Description
ness of slab lesser than minimal design of shear reinforcement finished
with some warning.
Code 9.3.2(1)
Level Standard
Figure -
Min. thickness of member with shear reinforcement

Minimal thickness of member with shear reinforcement for plate and
Description
shell(plate).
Edit box; hmin = 200 mm; this item is visible only if check box above is set
Default
True
Code 9.3.2(1)
Level Standard
Figure -
- 106 -
Check max. spacing of shear links

Setting, if maximal spacing of shear link for plate and shell(plate) is
Description
checked or not.
Code 9.3.2(4)
Level Standard
Figure -
Max. spacing of shear links

Coefficient for maximal spacing of shear links for plate and shell(plate).
Description
smax,p,s = Coeffsmax.p.s ∙ d ∙ (1 + cotg(α))
Edit box; Coeffsmax.p.s = 0,8; this item is visible only if check box above is
Default
set True
Code 9.3.2(4)
Level Standard
Figure -
Wall, Shell(wall)
Longitudinal
Check min. ratio of vertical reinforcement
Setting if minimal ratio of vertical longitudinal reinforcement for wall and
Description
shell(wall) is checked or not.
Code 9.6.2(1)
Level Standard
Figure -
Member Wall, Shell(Wall)
Check max. ratio of vertical reinforcement

Setting if maximal ratio of vertical longitudinal reinforcement for wall and
Description
Code 9.6.2(1)
Level Standard
Figure -
- 107 -
Chapter 5
Check maximal spacing of vertical reinforcement

Setting if maximal spacing of vertical longitudinal reinforcement for wall
Description
and shell(wall) is checked or not.
Code 9.6.2(3)
Level Standard
Figure -
Max. spacing of vertical reinforcement

Maximal spacing of vertical longitudinal reinforcement for wall and shell
Description
(wall) as multiplicand of wall thickness.
Edit box; coef smax,v = 3; this item is visible only if check box above is set
Default
True
Code 9.6.2(3)
Level Standard
Figure -
Max. spacing of vertical reinforcement

Maximal spacing of vertical longitudinal reinforcement for wall and shell
Description
(wall).
Edit box; smax,v = 400 mm; this item is visible only if check box above is
Default
set True
Code 9.6.2(3)
Level Standard
Figure -
Check min. ratio of horizontal reinforcement

Setting if minimal ratio of horizontal longitudinal reinforcement for wall
Description
and shell(wall) is checked or not.
Code 9.6.3(1)
Level Standard
Figure -
- 108 -
Check max. spacing of horizontal reinforcement

Setting if maximal spacing of horizontal longitudinal reinforcement for
Description
wall and shell(wall) is checked or not.
Code 9.6.3(2)
Level Standard
Figure -
Max. spacing of horizontal reinforcement

Maximal spacing of horizontal longitudinal reinforcement for wall and
Description
shell(wall).
Edit box; smax,h = 400 mm; this item is visible only if check box above is
Default
set True
Code 9.6.3(2)
Level Standard
Figure -

Setting if minimal bar distance of longitudinal reinforcement for wall and
Description
Code 8.2(2)
Level Standard
Figure -

Description
wall and shell(wall).
Edit box; slw,min = 20 mm; this item is visible only if check box above is set
Default
True
Code 8.2(2)
Level Standard
Figure -
- 109 -
Chapter 5
Transverse
Check max. spacing of shear links
Setting, if maximal spacing of shear link for wall and shell(wall) is
Description checked or not. The maximal spacing of shear links is editable in Man-
ager for national annexes.
Code 9.6.4(1)
Level Standard
Figure -
Check min. number of shear links

Setting, if minimal number of shear link for wall and shell(wall) is
Description
checked or not.
Code 9.6.4(2)
Level Standard
Figure -
Min. number of shear links

Description Minimal number of shear links per square meter for wall and shell(wall).
Edit box; nlinks.w = 4; this item is visible only if check box above is set
Default
True
Code 9.6.4(2)
Level Standard
Figure -
Deep beam
Longitudinal
Check min. ratio of reinforcement
Setting if minimal ratio of longitudinal reinforcement for deep beam is
Description
checked or not.
Code 9.7(1)
Level Standard
- 110 -
Figure -
Member Deep beam
Check max. spacing of reinforcement

Setting if maximal spacing of longitudinal reinforcement for deep beam
Description
is checked or not.
Code 9.7(2)
Level Standard
Figure -
Member Deep beam
Max. spacing of reinforcement

The maximal spacing of vertical longitudinal reinforcement for a deep
Description
beam as multiplication of deep beam thickness
Edit box; coef smax,db = 2; this item is visible only if check box above is set
Default
True
Code 9.7(2)
Level Standard
Figure -
Member Deep beam
Max. spacing of reinforcement

The maximal spacing of vertical longitudinal reinforcement for a deep
Description
beam.
Edit box; smax,v = 300 mm; this item is visible only if check box above is
Default
set True
Code 9.7(2)
Level Standard
Figure -
Member Deep beam

Setting if minimal bar distance of longitudinal reinforcement for deep
Description
Code 8.2(2)
Level Standard
- 111 -
Chapter 5
Figure -
Member Deep beam

Description
wall and shell(wall).
Edit box; sldb,min = 20 mm; this item is visible only if check box above is
Default
set True
Code 8.2(2)
Level Standard
Figure -
Member Deep beam
Punching
Particular detailing checks for punching cannot be disabled in SCIA Engineer 17.
Check min. shear reinforcement

Setting if the minimum reinforcement area of a shear link is checked or
Description
not.
Code 9.4.3(2)
Level Standard
Figure -
Member Plate
Check distance of the first perimeter of shear links

Setting if the distance between the face of a column and the nearest
Description
shear reinforcement is checked or not.
Code 9.4.3(1,4)
Level Standard
- 112 -
Figure
Member Plate
Min. distance from column face

The coefficient for determination of the minimum allowed distance of the
Description
first perimeter of shear links from a column face.
Edit box; coeff s0,min = 0,3; this item is visible only if check box above is
Default
set True
Code 9.4.3(1)
Level Standard
Figure
Member Plate
Max. distance from column face

The coefficient for determination of the maximum allowed distance of
Description
the first perimeter of shear links from a column face.
Edit box; coeff s0,max = 0,5; this item is visible only if check box above is
Default
set True
Code 9.4.3(4)
Level Standard
- 113 -
Chapter 5
Figure
Member Plate
Check max. radial spacing of shear links

Setting if the radial spacing between perimeters of shear links around a
Description
Code 9.4.3(1)
Level Standard
Figure
Member Plate
Max. spacing of shear links

The coefficient for determination of the maximum allowed radial spacing
Description
between shear links around a column.
Edit box; coeff sr,max = 0,75; this item is visible only if check box above is
Default
set True
Code 9.4.3(1)
Level Standard
- 114 -
Figure
Member Plate
Check max. tangential spacing of shear links

Setting if the tangential spacing between perimeters of shear links
Description around a column (within or outside basic control perimeter) is checked
or not.
Code 9.4.3(1)
Level Standard
Figure
Member Plate
Max. tangential spacing within the first control perimeter

The coefficient for determination of the maximum allowed tangential
Description spacing between shear links around a column within the basic control
perimeter.
Edit box; coeff st,max,u1 = 1,5; this item is visible only if check box above
Default
is set True
Code 9.4.3(1)
Level Standard
- 115 -
Chapter 5
Figure
Member Plate
Max. tangential spacing outside the first control perimeter

The coefficient for determination of the maximum allowed tangential
Description spacing between shear links around a column outside the basic control
perimeter.
Edit box; coeff st,max,out = 2,0; this item is visible only if check box above
Default
is set True
Code 9.4.3(1)
Level Standard
Figure
Member Plate
Check minimum number of perimeters of shear links

Setting if the minimum number of perimeters of shear links around a
Description
Code 9.4.3(1)
Level Standard
- 116 -
Figure
Member Plate
Min. number of perimeters of shear links

The value of minimum number of perimeters of shear links around a
Description
column.
Edit box; nper,min = 2; this item is visible only if check box above is set
Default
True
Code 9.4.3(1)
Level Standard
Figure
Member Plate
Design Defaults
New setting Design defaults is created in menu Concrete > Reinforcement design, where user can define defaults
parameters for design of reinforcement including provided reinforcement. This functionality allows to define basic setting
and library of provided reinforcement depending on type of member and cross-section for whole structure. Main goal is to
define basic and additional reinforcement for design for whole structure in project according to the type of member and
cross-section.
- 117 -
Chapter 5
The group Reinforcement design and dialog Design defaults will be visible, even the calculation is not done. The setting in
dialog Design defaults will be similar as Concrete setting.
When you open design defaults dialogue you can see there defaults based on the member type.
- 118 -
Beam (Rib)
The possibilities in Design defaults dialogue are dependent on the usage or not of provided library for longitudinal rein-
forcement.
Longitudinal reinforcement
Displaying of items in Design defaults for Beams is dependent on setting Use a template of provided reinforcement
Use a template of provided reinforcement
When this check box is switch True the default diameters for design of
Description reinforcement are taken into account from selected item in library of
provided reinforcement for Rectangular, T, L, I and general sections
Code -
Level Standard
Figure -
Member Beam, Rib
Use a template of provided reinforcement - True

When the provided reinforcement library is used then diameters for design are defined in provided reinforcement library dir-
ectly.
There are items from library of provided reinforcement dependent on type of cross-section and items from the library are
filtered according to type of member
l Rectangular section
l T section
- 119 -
Chapter 5
l L section
l I section
l Other and general
Description Link to provided library based on cross-section type

Default Link to library; default is the first value from the library
Code -
Level Standard
Figure -
Member Beam, Rib
Values of cover are the same as in case of Use a provided reinforcement library is False.
Use a template of provided reinforcement - False
When the provided reinforcement library is not used then diameters for design are defined in design defaults directly.
Then there is division to surfaces - Upper / Lower / Side.
Upper
Description Selection of type of cover for upper surface - Auto / User
Code 4.4.1
Level Standard
- 120 -
Figure
Member Beam, Rib
User defined cover for upper reinforcement

Description User defined value of cover for upper reinforcement.
Edit box; cu = 30 mm; this item is visible only in case of Type of cover of
Default
upper reinforcement is User.
Code 4.4.1
Level Standard
Figure
Member Beam, Rib

Defined diameter of reinforcement for upper surface used during
Description
design procedure
- 121 -
Chapter 5
Edit box; ds,u = 16 mm; this item is visible only if check box Use a tem-
Default
plate of provided reinforcement is set False.
Code -
Level Standard
Figure
Member Beam, Rib
Lower
Description Selection of type of cover for lower surface - Auto / User
Code 4.4.1
Level Standard
Figure
Member Beam, Rib
- 122 -
User defined cover for lower reinforcement

Description User defined value of cover for lower reinforcement.
Edit box; cl = 30 mm; this item is visible only in case of Type of cover of
Default
lower reinforcement is User.
Code 4.4.1
Level Standard
Figure
Member Beam, Rib

Defined diameter of reinforcement for lower surface used during design
Description
procedure
Edit box; ds,l = 16 mm; this item is visible only if check box Use a template
Default
of provided reinforcement is set False.
Code -
Level Standard
- 123 -
Chapter 5
Figure
Member Beam, Rib
Side
Description Selection of type of cover for side surface - Upper / Lower / User
Default Combo box; default = Upper
Code 4.4.1
Level Standard
Figure
Member Beam, Rib
User defined cover for side reinforcement

Description User defined value of cover for side reinforcement.
Default Edit box; cs = 30 mm; this item is visible only in case of Type of cover of
- 124 -
side reinforcement is User.

Code 4.4.1
Level Standard
Figure
Member Beam, Rib
Stirrups
Description Definition of diameter of stirrup used in design of shear reinforcement
Code -
Level Standard
Figure -
Member Beam, Rib
Number of cuts
Definition of diameter of number of cuts used in design of shear rein-
Description
forcement
Default Edit box; ns = 8 mm
Code -
Level Standard
- 125 -
Chapter 5
Figure
Member Beam, Rib
Angle
Definition of angle of stirrups used in design of shear reinforcement per-
Description
pendicular to beam axis
Default Edit box; α s = 90°
Code -
Level Standard
Figure -
Member Beam, Rib
Beam slab
The settings for Beam slab is very similar to beam with the following limitations:
l Only upper and lower surface cover is defined (No side cover)
l Only link provided reinforcement library for Rectangular cross-section
l Without definition of stirrups
ectly.
- 126 -
Columns
Displaying of items in Design defaults for Beams is again dependent on setting Use a template of provided rein-
forcement see above.
- 127 -
Chapter 5

When the provided reinforcement library is used then diameter for design are defined in provided reinforcement library dir-
ectly.
l Circular
l Oval
l Other and general

Code -
Level Standard
Figure -
Member Column
When the provided reinforcement library is not used then diameter for design are defined in design defaults directly.
- 128 -
Then there is definition of one Main cover only.
Main
Type of cover of Main reinforcement
Description Selection of type of cover for main surface - Auto / User
Code 4.4.1
Level Standard
Figure
Member Column
- 129 -
Chapter 5
User defined cover for main reinforcement

Description User defined value of cover for main reinforcement.
Edit box; c = 30 mm; this item is visible only in case of Type of cover of
Default
main reinforcement is User.
Code 4.4.1
Level Standard
Figure
Member Column

Defined diameter of reinforcement for main surface used during design
Description
procedure.
Edit box; ds,m = 16 mm; this item is visible only if check box Use a tem-
Default
Code -
Level Standard
- 130 -
Figure
Member Column
Stirrups
Code -
Level Standard
Figure -
Member Column
Number of cuts
Description
forcement
Code -
Level Standard
- 131 -
Chapter 5
Figure
Member Column
Plate, Shell (Plate)

The concrete settings for 2D members is different than 1D member, but the idea of usage of provided reinforcement library
for design defaults is the same.
Longitudinal
Displaying of items in Design defaults for Plate and Shell (Plate) is dependent on setting Use a template of provided rein-
forcement, see above.
When the provided reinforcement library is used then diameters for design are defined in design defaults directly.
- 132 -
Values of cover and angles are the same as in case of Use a provided reinforcement library is False. Diameter are linked via
Provided reinforcement library
Description Link to provided library based for Plate

Code -
Level Standard
Figure -

Then there is definition of items based on surfaces - Upper (z+) / Lower (z-).
Upper (z+)
Type of cover of first layer of upper reinforcement
Selection of type of cover for first layer of upper reinforcement - Auto /
Description
User
Default Combo box; Typec1,u = Auto
Code 4.4.1
Level Standard
Figure -
- 133 -
Chapter 5

Description User defined value of cover for first layer of upper reinforcement.
Edit box; cuser1,u = 30 mm; this item is visible only in case of Type of
Default
cover of upper reinforcement is User.
Code 4.4.1
Level Standard
Figure -
Diameter of first upper reinforcement layer

Defined diameter of first upper reinforcement layer used during design
Description
procedure
Edit box; ds1.u = 10 mm; this item is visible only if check box Use a tem-
Default
Code -
Level Standard
Figure
Angle of first upper reinforcement layer

Defined angle of first upper reinforcement layer used during design pro-
Description
cedure from x axis of LCS 2D mesh element
Default Edit box; α 1.u = 0°
Code -
Level Standard
- 134 -
Figure
Diameter of second upper reinforcement layer

Defined diameter of second upper reinforcement layer used during
Description
design procedure
Default
Code -
Level Standard
Figure
Angle of first second reinforcement layer

Defined angle of first second reinforcement layer used during design
Description
procedure from x axis of LCS 2D mesh element
- 135 -
Chapter 5
Code -
Level Standard
Figure
Lower (z-)
Type of cover of first layer of lower reinforcement
Selection of type of cover for first lower of lower reinforcement - Auto /
Description
User
Default Combo box; Typec1,l = Auto
Code 4.4.1
Level Standard
Figure -

Description User defined value of cover for first layer of lower reinforcement.
Edit box; cuser1,l = 30 mm; this item is visible only in case of Type of cover
Default
of lower reinforcement is User.
Code 4.4.1
Level Standard
Figure -
Diameter of first lower reinforcement layer

Description Defined diameter of first lower reinforcement layer used during design
- 136 -
procedure
Edit box; ds1.l = 10 mm; this item is visible only if check box Use a tem-
Default
Code -
Level Standard
Figure
Angle of first lower reinforcement layer

Defined angle of first lower reinforcement layer used during design pro-
Description
Default Edit box; α 1.l = 0°
Code -
Level Standard
Figure
Diameter of second lower reinforcement layer

Defined diameter of second lower reinforcement layer used during
Description
design procedure
- 137 -
Chapter 5
Default
Code -
Level Standard
Figure

Defined angle of second lower reinforcement layer used during design
Description
Code -
Level Standard
Figure
Shear
Diameter of shear reinforcement
Definition of diameter of shear reinforcement (links) used in design of
Description
shear reinforcement
- 138 -
Default Edit box; default = 8 mm

Code -
Level Standard
Figure -
Arrange perimeters of shear links by limits from detailing

Setting if perimeters of shear links are calculated by limits from detailing
Description
or if they are defined by user
Code 9.4.3
Level Standard
Figure -
The distance of the first perimeter from the column face

Description The distance of the first perimeter from the column face
Edit box; s0 = 100 mm; this item is visible only if check box above is set
Default
False
Code 9.4.3(4)
Level Standard
Figure -
Radial spacing of perimeters

Description Radial spacing of perimeters
Edit box; sr = 150 mm; this item is visible only if check box above is set
Default
False
Code 9.4.3(1)
Level Standard
Figure -
Wall, Shell (Wall), Deep beam
Longitudinal
Displaying of items in Design defaults for Wall, Shell (Wall) and Deep beam is dependent on setting Use a template of
provided reinforcement, see above.
- 139 -
Chapter 5

Values of cover and angles are the same as in case of Use a provided reinforcement library is False. Diameters are linked
via Provided reinforcement library. There are two links in fact for Wall and Deep beam.
Template of provided reinforcement (Wall)
Description Link to provided library based for Wall
Code -
Level Standard
Figure -
Template of provided reinforcement (Deep beam)

Description Link to provided library based for Deep beam
Code -
Level Standard
Figure -
Member Deep beam

- 140 -
Then there is definition of items based for Both surface in one step. It means the same reinforcement is placed in each sur-
face.
Both
Type of cover of both surfaces
Selection of type of cover for first layer of reinforcement for both sur-
Description
faces - Auto / User
Default Combo box; Typec1 = Auto
Code 4.4.1
Level Standard
Figure -
User cover of reinforcement layer

User defined value of cover for first layer of reinforcement for both sur-
Description
faces.
Edit box; cuser1 = 30 mm; this item is visible only in case of Type of cover
Default
of both surfaces is User.
Code 4.4.1
Level Standard
Figure -
- 141 -
Chapter 5
Diameter of reinforcement of first layer

Description Defined diameter of first reinforcement layer for both surfaces.
Edit box; ds1 = 10 mm; this item is visible only if check box Use a template
Default
Code -
Level Standard
Figure
Angle of reinforcement of first layer

Description Defined angle of first reinforcement layer for both surfaces
Default Edit box; α 1 = 0°
Code -
Level Standard
Figure
- 142 -
Diameter of reinforcement of second layer

Description Defined diameter of second reinforcement layer for both surfaces
Default
Code -
Level Standard
Figure
Angle of reinforcement of second layer

Description Defined angle of second reinforcement layer for both surfaces
Code -
Level Standard
Figure
- 143 -
Chapter 5
Shear
Description
shear reinforcement in wall
Code -
Level Standard
Figure -
- 144 -
Output
Output
Numerical output
Numerical output
Results are displayed in a numerical as well as a graphical way, including dynamic images of interaction diagrams and stress
/ strain distributions.
Level of output detail
The level of output detail can be chosen in the Properties menu (Output). Generally, there are three levels of output
l Brief output - lists the unity check values of the selected members, or the required area of reinforcement. It is a simple
table for all checks with the unity checks, default Engineering Report table.
l Standard - more detailed output coming from SCIA Design Forms
l Detailed - first gives an overview of the input data, then followed by a detailed calculation - very detailed output coming
from SCIA Design Forms. It also includes dynamic images displaying:
l Drawing of cross-section including reinforcement layout
l Stress and strain distributions in different limit states
l 2D prints of 3D interaction diagrams
Example of Brief output
- 145 -
Chapter 6
Example of Standard output
- 146 -
Output
Example of Detailed output
- 147 -
Chapter 6
- 148 -
Output
- 149 -
Chapter 6
- 150 -
Output
Graphical output
Graphical output
Graphical output depends on amount of selected component. When only on value is chosen then only one value is drawn
without any additional text or information. When more values are chosen then all selected values are drawn parallel to
centreline of the beam with some predefined space between diagrams (for general drawing settings refer to "Displaying the
internal forces"). Additionally, each diagram is described by the explanatory text. Hereafter, you can find the graphical out-
put for Check response Unity_check; (εcc ) or (σcc ) .
- 151 -
Chapter 6
Drawing Unity check - check response
Drawing More component- check response

Generally, the colours of graphical drawing also depend on selection type and range of value (min, max) which is set in
Drawing setup.
l When the values without unity checks are chosen, then colours are the following
lValue below min – red colour
l Value in range – grey colour
l Value above max – blue colour
l When the values with unity checks are chosen, then colours are the following
lValue below min – grey colour
l Value in range – green colour
l Value above max – red colour
- 152 -
Design
Design
Design of reinforcement
First you get an overview of the input data for the design:
l Internal forces, displaying the characteristic and design values.

For member type 'column', the design values of the bending moments include the 2nd order bending moments (if
required) and the moments due to geometric imperfections.
For member type 'beam', the design values of the bending moments include the shifting of the moment line - to take the
additional tensile force due to shear into account.
l Slenderness calculation (for member type 'column'), determining if 2nd order effects need be taken into account.
The design of longitudinal reinforcement to resist N, My and Mz is done according to the Ultimate Limit State requirements.
Design method is selected based on type of member (beam x column) and according to the acting load. There is not any
limit for type of cross-section (formerly for columns rectangle and circle) nor for load type (formerly for beams - My or Mz ).
In case the required area of reinforcement exceeds the available space on one layer, more layers (with adapted lever arm)
are automatically generated. Designed reinforcement is automatically recalculated to real bars afterwards.
- 153 -
Chapter 7
Shear reinforcement
The design of shear reinforcement to resist Vy and Vz is done according to the ULS requirements. Formerly, there was pos-
sibility to design shear reinforcement just for Vy or Vz .
Internal forces - theory

Introduction
The internal forces, which are used for design and checks of concrete members can be different as internal forces cal-
culated from FEM analysis. The differences may be caused by:
l for compression member (column)

l taken into account eccentricities caused by imperfections
l taken into account second order eccentricity
- 154 -
Design
l for beams and beams as slab

l taken into account additional tensile forces caused by shear and torsion (shifting of bending moments)
. The following preconditions are used for calculation :
l The shifting of bending moments is taken into account only for beams and beams as slab and in both directions
l The second order effect and geometrical imperfection are calculated only for column in compression
l Cross-section with one polygon and one material is taken into account for calculation second order effect and imper-
fection in version SCIA Engineer 15
l The material of all reinforcement bars have to be same in SCIA Engineer 15
Parameters influencing the calculation
Coefficient for calculation of effective depth of cross-section

Coefficient for calculation effective depth of cross-section can be set and loaded from concrete setting (Advanced level).
Default value is 0.9. This coefficient is used for calculation of the effective depth of cross-section - it is used if the effective
depth cannot be calculated from the plane of deformation or if it is calculated using the simplified formula
d = Coeffd ∙ h
where
is height of cross- section in direction, which effective

h
depth of cross-section is calculated in
coefficient for calculation effective depth of cross-sec-
Coeffd
tion
Coefficient for calculation of lever arm

Coefficient for calculation inner lever arm can be set and loaded from concrete setting (Advanced level). Default value is 0.9.
This coefficient is used for calculation of the inner lever arm of cross-section - it is used if the lever arm cannot be calculated
form the plane of deformation or if it is calculated using the simplified formula
- 155 -
Chapter 7
z = Coeffz ∙ d
where
is effective depth of cross-section calculated in direction, which inner lever arm

d
of cross-section is calculated in
Coeff
coefficient for calculation inner level arm
z
Angle between concrete compression strut and beam axis
Angle between concrete compression strut and beam axis perpendicular to the shear force can be calculated automatically
or input by user in SEN depending on parameter Type calculation/input angle of compression strut. This parameter
can be changed in Concrete setting (if 1D concrete member data is not defined) or in 1D concrete member data. There are
the following options:
l Auto - angle of compression strut is calculated automatically as minimal value between θmin and θmax to condition accord-
ing to equation 6.29 in EN 1992-1-1
where
TEd the design torsional moment

T
the design torsional resistance moment
Rd,max
VEd the design resultant of shear forces
V design value of the maximum shear force which can be sustained by the mem-
Rd,max ber, limited by crushing of the compression struts
- 156 -
Design
l User(angle) - angle of compression strut be input directly by the user as an angle. If the inputted value is outside of the
interval θmin and θmax , the minimal or maximum value is taken into account for calculation
l User(cotangent) - angle of compression strut be input directly by the user as cotangent of the angle. If the inputted value
is outside of the interval θmin and θmax , the minimal or maximum value is taken into account for calculation.
Minimal and maximal angle of compression strut is parameter of national annex and can be
edit in Manager of national annex
Angle of shear reinforcement

There are differences in using of angle of shear reinforcement in calculation between design of reinforcement and check.
l Design - angle of shear force for member = Beam, can be set directly in Concrete setting (if 1D concrete member data is
not defined) or in 1D concrete member data , see pictures below. For member = Column, the angle most shear rein-
forcement is always 90 ° and can not be changed.
- 157 -
Chapter 7
Concrete setting 1D concrete member data
l Check - angle of stirrups is loaded from inputted shear reinforcement. There is possible to input shear reinforcement only
with angle 90 ° in SCIA Engineer
Type of member can be defined in properties of member via parameter Type or directly in
1D concrete member data
Use equivalent first order value

This setting allows to user set, if equivalent bending moment according to 5.8.8.2(2) in EN 1992-1-1 will be taken into
account for calculation first order eccentricity. This setting can be done in Concrete setting for Advanced mode. The code
EN 1992-1-1 recommend use equivalent first order moments, therefore this value is set to Yes by default.
- 158 -
Design
Coefficient for calculation of force at which member is in compression

Coefficient for calculation forces, when member is in compression can be set and loaded from concrete setting (Advanced
level). Default value is 0.1. This coefficient is used for determination, if member is in compression, which is necessary for cal-
culation second order effect, imperfection and minimal eccentricity. Member is in compression, if condition below is satisfy
NEd > -Coeffcom ∙fcd ∙ Ac
where
NEd design axial lod

fcd design value of concrete compressive strength
Ac is cross-sectional are of concrete cross-section
Isolated member
Check box for determination, if the member is isolated member or not. Default setting is determined automatically by pro-
gram and the member is isolated, if to this member are not linked the others members. This setting can be changed in 1D
concrete member data for Member type = Column(Advanced mode). This setting is used for calculation length of the
member for calculation geometrical imperfection, clause 5.2(6) in EN 1992-1-1.
- 159 -
Chapter 7
Buckling data
The detailed description of inputting buckling data and way of calculation buckling data are described in "System lengths and
buckling settings" [3]. There is described general functionality, but for concrete member there are additional parameters for
definition of buckling data.
- 160 -
Design
These additional data are important for calculation eccentricities caused by imperfection (see clause 5.2(5) in EN 1992-1-1)
and they can be defined in tab-sheet Buckling data in dialogue Buckling and relative lengths (member properties >
parameter Buckling and relative length > button Edit ).
There are following additional data:
l Combo box Tot. height – this combo allows to set type of calculation of total height of building or length of the isolated
columns. There are two items in combo box:
o Calculate – the tot height. will be calculated automatically as sum of lengths of the all members in buckling system
o User – the value can be input directly by the user. The input value will be taken into account if Calculate = User
l edit box Tot. height – this edit box allows to input total height of building or length of the isolated columns directly by the
user. The input value will be taken into account if item User is set in combo box Tot. Height.
l edit box my - is the number of vertical members contributing to the total effect of the imperfection perpendicular to y axis
of LCS. It means, that value is used for recalculation of bending moment around y axis. Only one value can be set for all
columns in buckling system
l edit box mz - is the number of vertical members contributing to the total effect of the imperfection perpendicular to z axis
of LCS. It means, that value is used for recalculation of bending moment around z axis. Only one value can be set for all
columns in buckling system
The important parameter for calculation of buckling data is type of structure (braced or
- 161 -
Chapter 7
Sway around y axis =NO (it means the structure is not prone to sway perpendicular to y
axis)

This setting allows user to set, if geometrical imperfection will be taken into account for ULS or SLS. This setting can be done
in Concrete setting (if 1D concrete member data is not defined) or directly in 1D concrete member data for Member type =
Column
The imperfection shall be taken into account in ultimate limit states and need not be considered for serviceability limit states,
see clause 5.2(2P) and 5.2(3) in EN 1992-1-1, therefore default setting in SCIA Engineer is:
l ULS - use geometric imperfection = Yes, it means geometric imperfection will be taken into account
l SLS - use geometric imperfection = No, it means geometric imperfection will not be taken into account
Use minimum eccentricity

User can set whether the minimum first order eccentricity calculated according to clause 6.1(4) in EN 1992-1-1 will be taken
into account in the calculation of the first order eccentricity with geometrical imperfection for ULS. This setting can be done in
Concrete setting (if 1D concrete member data is not defined) or directly in 1D concrete member data for Member type =
Column by using Advanced mode/level
- 162 -
Design

This setting allows user to set if second order effect will be taken into account. This setting can be done in Concrete setting (if
1D concrete member data is not defined) or directly in 1D concrete member data for Member type = Column
If check box Use second order effect = Yes, then the second order effect will be taken into account, if conditions below
are satisfied:
l the combination for ULS is used

l Member type = Column and only in case that column is in compression see,"Determination whether member is in com-
pression" on page 166
l calculated slenderness is greater than limit slenderness, see "Introduction" on page 192
Design defaults
Design defaults is a special group of properties where user can define the basic parameters (diameter of longitudinal and
shear reinforcement, type of value of concrete cover...) for design of longitudinal and shear reinforcement. This setting can
be done in Concrete setting (if 1D concrete member data is not defined) or directly in 1D concrete member data.
- 163 -
Chapter 7
Concrete setting 1D concrete data
Four type of 1D members with different design defaults parameter are supported in SCIA Engineer:
l Beam / Rib - member predominantly loaded by bending moments, for which longitudinal and shear reinforcement can be
designed. There are the following parameters:
l Longitudinal reinforcement
l Provided (basic and additional) reinforcement library
l type of cover of upper and lower reinforcement (auto or user defined value)
l type of cover of side reinforcement (upper, lower or user define value)
l material of longitudinal reinforcement (only in 1D concrete data)
l Stirrups
l diameter of stirrups
l number of cuts (number of shear links)
l angle of shear reinforcement
l material of shear reinforcement (only in 1D concrete data)
l basic (user defined stirrup) - where user can defined user value of area of shear reinforcement per meter with some
angle and material of this reinforcement.
l Beam slab - member predominantly loaded by bending moments for which shear reinforcement is not designed (for
example cut of 2D member).There are the following parameters:
l Column - member predominantly in compression for which longitudinal and shear reinforcement can be designed. There
are the following parameters:
l type of cover of reinforcement (auto or user defined value)
l Stirrups
- 164 -
Design

Design defaults in concrete setting:

l There is possibility to define design defaults for all types of 1D member (beam, rib, column, beam slab)
l the material of longitudinal and shear reinforcement is not possible to input/edit in this setting, but material is loaded from
project data and it is same for all type of members
Design defaults in 1D concrete member data

l only design defaults of selected type of member can be edited in this setting
l material of shear and longitudinal reinforcement can be edited directly in concrete member data

This setting allows user to set in which direction second order moment and geometrical imperfection will be taken into
account. This setting can be done in Concrete setting (if 1D concrete member data is not defined) or directly in 1D concrete
member data for Member type = Column in case of Advanced mode/level
Additional tensile forces caused by shear and torsion (shifting of bending

moments)
Additional tensile forces caused by shear and torsion is taken into account in Concretein SCIA Engineer by using simplified
calculation based on shifting of bending moments according to clause 9.2.1.3(2). Shifting of bending moment is calculated
only for beams and beams as slab.
Distance for shifting is calculated for both axes and depends on the type of member
l for beams
a = z ∙ (cot(θ) - cot(α)) / 2
l for beams as slab
a=d
where
z is inner lever arm of cross-section z = Coeffz · Coeffd · h(b)
- 165 -
Chapter 7
d is effective depth of cross-section d = Coeffd · h(b)

Coeff coefficient for calculation effective depth of cross-section "Coefficient for cal-
d culation of effective depth of cross-section" on page 155
Coeff
coefficient for calculation inner lever arm of cross-section
z
dimension of cross-section in centre of gravity of cross-section in z(y) direction
h (b)
in LCS of cross-section
angle between the concrete compression strut and the beam axis per-
θ pendicular to the shear force "Angle between concrete compression strut and
beam axis" on page 156
angle between shear reinforcement and the beam axis perpendicular to the
α
shear force
Automatic calculation of angle between the concrete compression strut and beam axis is
calculated by simplified method for shifting with the following simplifications:
l shear of member for calculation value VRd.max is calculated as minimum width of cross-section at whole cross-section
perpendicular to direction of shear forces
l value Ak and uk for calculation of TRd.max is calculated for effective rectangular cross-section, which has the same cross-
sectional area and same perimeter as inputted cross-section
Determination whether member is in compression

The second order effect, minimal eccentricity and geometrical imperfection are taken into account only for member =
Column, which is in compression. Column is in compression if conditions below is satisfied
NEd > -Coeffcom ∙ fcd ∙ Ac
where
NEd design axial load

coefficient for calculation force for determination, of member is in compression
Coeff
or not, see "Coefficient for calculation of force at which member is in com-
com pression" on page 159
Ac cross-sectional area of concrete cross-section
First order bending moments with imperfection

The calculation of first order moment is calculated only for Member type = Column and it in case, that columnis in com-
pression see,"Determination whether member is in compression" above and it runs according to the following procedure:
l first order eccentricity without effect of imperfection is calculated,

l eccentricity caused by imperfection is calculated ,
l first order eccentricity including effect of imperfection is calculated.
- 166 -
Design
Calculation of first order eccentricity without effect of imperfection

There are two options for calculation first order moments and eccentricity in SCIA Engineer depending on check box Use
equivalent first order value,see "Use equivalent first order value" on page 158
l the equivalent first order bending moments are taken into account. It means, that bending moments will be same at whole
length of the member. This option is used if check box Use equivalent first order value = Yes in Concrete setting (if
1D concrete member data is not defined) or in 1D concrete member data
e0y = M0ez / NEd, e0z = M0ey / NEd
l the first order eccentricity is calculated from bending moments in current section. It follows, that bending moments in each
section can be different. This option is used if check box Use equivalent first order value = No in Concrete setting (if
1D concrete member data is not defined) or in 1D concrete member data
e0y = Mz / NEd, e0z = My / NEd
where
e0,y(z) the 1st order eccentricity in direction of y (z) axis of LCS

My(z) the 1st order moment around of y (z) axis of LCS
NEd the design axial force in calculated section of the column (in SCIA Engineer value N)
e0e,y(z) the 1st order equivalent eccentricity in direction of y (z) axis of LCS
M0e,y(z) the 1st order equivalent moment around of y (z) axis of LCS
The 1st order equivalent moment is calculated according to clause 5.8.8.2 (2) in EN 1992-1-1
M0,ey = max (0,6 ∙ M02,y +0,4 ∙ M01,y ; 0,4 ∙ M02,y )
M0,ez = max (0,6 ∙ M02,z +0,4 ∙ M01,z ; 0,4 ∙ M02,z )
where
M
the first end bending moments around y(z) axis of LCS with lesser absolute value as second end bending moment.
01y |M01y(z)| < |M02y(z)| The same values are used for calculation limit slenderness
(z)
M
the second end bending moments around y(z) axis of LCS with greater absolute value as first end bending
02y moment. |M02y(z)| ≥ |M01y(z)| The same values are used for calculation limit slenderness
(z)
The user (real) reinforcement defined via REDES and free bars are not taken into account
for calculation effective depth of cross-section for design reinforcement to column (Type
of check = Design ULS in service Internal forces)
Calculation of eccentricity due to imperfection

The imperfection in SEN is represented by an inclination according to clause 5.2(5) in EN 1992-1-1. The imperfection shall
be taken into account in ultimate limit states and need not be considered for serviceability limit states, see clause 5.2(2P) and
5.2(3) in EN 1992-1-1. User can set independently if the imperfection will be taken into account for ULS or SLS.
The inclination is calculated around both axes (axis y and z) of LCS according to formula:
θi,y(z) = θ0 ∙ α h ∙ α m,y(z)
where
- 167 -
Chapter 7
the basic value of inclination. The value is National parameter, it means that value can be different for each country.
θ0
The value can be set in Manager for national annex > EN 1992-1-1 > General > ULS > General > Theta_0 )
the reduction factor for length of column or height of structure. The value is calculated according to formula
α h = 2 / √l, ⅔ ≤ α h ≤ 1
l is length of column or height of structure depending on, if the member is isolated or not, see "Isolated member" on
αh page 159
l isolated member l = L, where L is length of the member

l not isolated member l = H, where H is total height of building (buckling system). This height can be defined in
Buckling data, see "Buckling data" on page 160
the reduction factor for numbers of members calculated according to formula
α α m,y(z) = √(0,5 ∙ (1 + 1 / my(z)))
m,y
my (mz ) is the number of vertical members contributing to the total effect of the imperfection perpendicular to y(z)
(z)
of LCS. It means, that value is used for recalculation of bending moment around y(z) axis of LCS. These value can
be defined in Buckling data, see "Buckling data" on page 160
The effect of imperfection for isolated column and for structure is taken into account always as an eccentricity according to
clause 5.2(7a) in EN 1992-1-1.
ei,y = θi,z ∙ l0,z / 2, ei,z = θi,y ∙ l0,y / 2
where
θ
i,y the inclination around y(z) axis of LCS (perpendicular to y (z) axis of LCS)
(z)
l0,y the effective length of the member (column) around y(z) axis of LCS (perpendicular to y (z) axis of LCS), which can
(z) be defined in Buckling data, see "Buckling data" on page 160
The direction (sign) of value of eccentricity caused by imperfection has to be same as dir-
ection (sign) of first order eccentricity.
Minimum first order eccentricity

The minimum first order eccentricity is calculated according to clause 6.1(4) in EN 1992-1-1.
e0,min,y = max(b / 30, 20 mm), e0,min,z = max(h / 30, 20 mm)
where
e0,min,y(z) is minimum first order eccentricity in direction of y (z) axis of LCS

b dimension of cross-section in centre of gravity in direction of y axis of LCS
h dimension of cross-section in centre of gravity in direction of z axis of LCS
The minimum eccentricity is taken into account,if check box Use minimum value of eccentricity = Yes
- 168 -
Design
The direction (sign) of minimum first order eccentricity has to be same as direction (sign) of
first order eccentricity
Calculation of first order eccentricity including effect of imperfection

First order eccentricity including effect of imperfection is calculated according to formula below
eoEd,y(z) = e0,y(z) + ei,y(z) > e0,min,y(z)
where
is the 1st order eccentricity in direction of y (z) axis of LCS ,see "Calculation of
e0,y(z)
first order eccentricity without effect of imperfection" on page 167
is eccentricity caused by imperfection in direction of y (z) axis of LCS, see "Cal-
ei,y(z)
culation of eccentricity due to imperfection" on page 167
e
is minimum first order eccentricity in direction of y (z) axis of LCS, see "Min-
0,min,y imum first order eccentricity" on the previous page
(z)
After calculation of first order eccentricity including effect of imperfection, the 1st order moment, including the effect of imper-
fections around y (z) axis of LCS is calculated:
M0Ed,y(z) = NEd ∙ eoEd,z(y)
Calculation of second order effects

The EN 1992-1-1 defines several methods for analysis of second order effects with axial load (general method, simplified
method based on nominal stiffness, simplified method based on nominal curvature...). The SEN allows making analysis of
second order effect by using the following methods:
l General method - equilibrium and resistance is verified in the deformed state, deformations are calculated taking into
account the relevant effects of cracking, non-linear material properties and creep, see clause 5.8.2(2) in EN 1992-1-1,
l Simplified method based on nominal curvature according to EN 1992-1-1, clause 5.8.8
The second order effect by simplified method is taken into account:
l for ultimate limit state

l only for Member type = Column and it in case, that column is in compression see,"Determination whether member is in
compression" on page 166
l check box Use second order effect in switched ON, see
l calculated slenderness is greater than limit slenderness, see"Introduction" on page 192
Calculation of second order moment

Nominal second order moment is calculated according to clause 5.8.8.2(3) in EN 1992-1-1
M2,y(z) = NEd ∙ e2,z(y)
where
is the design axial force in calculated section of the column (in SCIA Engineer
NEd
value N)
e2,z
is the second order eccentricity in direction of z (y) axis of LCS
(y)
- 169 -
Chapter 7
The second order eccentricity are calculated according to formulas below
λz(y) > λz(y),lim Use second order effect Second order eccentricity
YES YES e2y(z) = (1/r)z(y) ∙ l0z(y)2 / cz(y)
YES NO
NO YES e2y(z) = 0
NO NO
where
(1/r)y
the curvature around y(z) axis of LCS (perpendicular to y (z) axis of LCS)
(z)
is the effective length of the member (column) around y(z) axis of LCS (per-
l0,y(z)
pendicular to y (z) axis of LCS), see "Buckling data" on page 160
is a factor depending on the curvature distribution around y(z) axis of LCS
according to clause 5.8.8.2(4) in EN 1992-1-1.
cy(z) l for constant first order bending moment (non zero) at whole length of the
column and in case that equivalent bending moment is taken into account
(see"Use equivalent first order value" on page 158 ) , value 8 is used
l otherwise value 10 is used
slenderness ratio around y(z) axis of LCS, see "Calculation of slenderness" on
λy(z)
page 194
λy limit slenderness ratio around y(z) axis of LCS, see "Calculation of limit slen-
(z),lim derness" on page 195
The direction (sign) of final value of second order eccentricity has to be same as direction
(sign) of first order eccentricity
Calculation of curvature
The curvature for calculation of second order eccentricity is calculated according to clause 5.8.8.3 in EN 1992-1-1.
(1/r)y(z) = Kr ∙ Kφ,y(z) ∙ (1/r0)y(z)
where
is a correction factor depending on axial load, see clause 5.8.8.3 (3) in EN 1992-1-1. This factor depends on rel-
ative normal force (n), see "Relative normal force" and mechanical ratio of reinforcement (ω), see "Mechanical
ratio of reinforcement - check" or "Mechanical ratio of reinforcement - design". The formula below can be used for
Kr symmetrical cross-section and symmetrical reinforcement. For unsymmetrical cross-section and reinforcement
the simplification according to [4] is used value Kr = 1
Kr = (1 + ω - n) / (1 + ω - 0,4)
is factor for taking into account of creep around y(z) axis of LCS , see clause 5.8.8.3 (4) in EN 1992-1-1. This factor
K depends on effective creep ratio (φef ), see "Effective creep ratio" and factor (βy(z)), see "Coefficient beta" depend-
φ,y ing on slenderness
(z)
Kφ,y(z) = 1 + βy(z) ∙ φef ≥ 1
- 170 -
Design
(1/r
0) y is the basic value of curvature around y(z) axis of LCS, see "Basic value of curvature"
(z)
Coefficient Beta
Slenderness of the column for calculation of factor Kφ,y(z) is taken into account by parameter (βy(z)), which is calculated
according to formula:
βy(z) = 0,35 + fck / 200 - λy(z) / 150
where
fck is characteristic value of concrete compressive strength in [MPa]

λy is slenderness ratio around y(z) axis of LCS, see "Calculation of slenderness" on
(z) page 194
Effective depth of cross-section

Effective depth of cross-section is used for calculation of basic value of curvature and it is calculated according to clause
5.8.8.3(2) in EN 1992-1-1. The EN 1992-1-1 does not give rules when the reinforcement is not symmetrical but according
to [4] the following rules are used for calculation effective depth:
l for symmetrical reinforcement and in case if all reinforcement is not concentrated on opposite sides, but part of it is dis-
tributed parallel
dy = 0,5 ∙ b + isy , dz = 0,5 ∙ h + isz
l for other cases (deign of reinforcement)
dy = b - asy , dz = h - asz
l for other cases (check) - the effective depth is calculated from plane of equilibrium or by simplified calculation, if this value
cannot be calculated from this plane, see "Coefficient for calculation of effective depth of cross-section" on page 155
where
the radius of gyration of the total reinforcement area in direction of y(z) axis of
isy(z)
LCS
b dimension of cross-section in centre of gravity in direction of y axis of LCS
h dimension of cross-section in centre of gravity in direction of z axis of LCS
asy
distance of centre of tensile reinforcement from tensile edge of css
(z)
Calculation the radius of gyration of the total reinforcement and distance of centre of tensile reinforcement from tensile edge
depends on shape of cross-section and if the internal forces are calculated for design of reinforcement or for checks. It
means, this value can be different for design of reinforcement and for checks.
The user (real) reinforcement defined via REDES and free bars are not taken into account
for calculation effective depth of cross-section for design reinforcement to column
- 171 -
Chapter 7
Design of reinforcement for rectangular section

Total area of reinforcement
As = μs ∙ Ac
Calculation of ratio of reinforcement in y and z direction

ratioy = σy / (σy + σz ), ratioz = σz / (σy + σz )
if σy = 0 MPa and σz = 0, then ratioy = ratioz = 0.5
Calculation area of reinforcement in direction of y(z) axis of LCS

As,y(z) = ratioy(z) ∙ As
Distance of centre of tensile reinforcement from tensile edge of cross-section

as = cnom + dss + 0,5 ∙dsm
Position of reinforcement from centroid of concrete cross-section in direction of y(z)

zs,y = 0,5 ∙ b - as , zs,z = 0,5 ∙ h - as
Second moment of reinforcement area

Is,y = As,y ∙ (zs,z )2 + 1 / 3 ∙ As,z ∙ (zs,z )2
Is,z = As,z ∙ (zs,y )2 + 1 / 3 ∙ As,y ∙ (zs,y )2
Radius of gyration of the total reinforcement area

is,y(z) = √(Is,z(y) / As )
where
estimation ratio of longitudinal reinforcement from recalculation internal forces for design, see "Estimation of ratio
μs
of longitudinal reinforcement" on page 194
Ac cross sectional area of concrete
the bending stress in concrete calculated for uncracked concrete cross-section according to formulas:
σy(z)
σy(z) = M0Ed,y(z) / Wc,y(z)
My 1st order moment around of y(z) axis of LCS (in SCIA Engineer value My(z)) without imperfection and minimum
(z) value of eccentricity
section modulus of concrete cross-section around y(z) axis of LCS
Wc,y
(z) Wc,y = 1 / 6 ∙ b ∙ h2, Wc,z = 1 / 6 ∙ b2 ∙ h
b width of rectangular cross-section

h height of the rectangular cross-section
c
nominal concrete cover, see "Design Defaults" on page 325
nom
dsm diameter of longitudinal main reinforcement of the column, see "Design Defaults" on page 325
dss diameter of transverse reinforcement (stirrup) of the column, see "Design Defaults" on page 325
Design of reinforcement for circular section

- 172 -
Design
As = μs ∙ Ac

as = cnom + dss + 0,5 ∙ dsm

zs = 0,5 ∙ D - as

Is,y = Is,z = As / 2 ∙ ((As / (4 ∙ π ∙ zs ))2 + zs 2)

is,y(z) = √(Is,z(y) / As )
where
μs
D diameter of circular cross-section
c
nom
dsm diameter of longitudinal main reinforcement of the column, see "Design Defaults" on page 325
Design of reinforcement for other cross-sections

As = μs ∙ Ac
Area of reinforcement in each edge

As,i = As /nedge

as = cnom + dss + 0,5 ∙ dsm

zs,y(z)i = disty(z)i - as

Is,y(z) = ∑(As,i ∙ zs,z(y)i2)

is,y(z) = √(Is,z(y) / As )
where
μs
- 173 -
Chapter 7

n
number of edge of cross-section
edge
dist
distance from the middle of the i-th edge to centre of gravity of cross-section in direction of y(z) axis of LCS
y(z)
c
nom
dsm diameter of longitudinal main reinforcement of the column,see "Design Defaults" on page 325
Checks for all type of cross-sections

As = ∑Ai,s

Is,y(z) = ∑(As,i ∙ zs,z(y)i2)

is,y(z) = √(Is,z(y) / As )
where
Ai,s the cross-sectional area of i-th bar of reinforcement

zs,y(z)i the position of i-th bar of reinforcement from centre of gravity of cross-section in direction of y(z) axis of LCS
Basic value of curvature

There is rule for calculation basic curvature only for symmetrical cross-section with symmetrical reinforcement. In EN 1992-
1-1, where the formula below should be used
(1 / r0)y(z) = εyd / (0,45 ∙ dz(y))
For unsymmetrical cross-section with unsymmetrical reinforcement according to recommendation of [4] the following for-
mula should be used
(1 / r0)y(z) = (εyd + εcu) / dz(y)
where
strain in reinforcement at reaching design

yield strength of reinforcement
l for design of reinforcement strain in rein-

forcement at reaching design yield
εyd strength of reinforcement is calculated
from default material properties defined in
dialogue Project data according to for-
mula:
εyd = fyd / Es
- 174 -
Design
l for checks strain in reinforcement at reach-

ing design yield strength of reinforcement
is calculated from material properties of
inputted reinforcement via REDES or
Free bars according to formula:
εyd = max(fyd,i / Es,i)

effective depth of cross-section in direction of
y(z) axis of LCS, see "Design of rein-
dy(z)
forcement for rectangular section" on
page 172
εcu ultimate compressive strain in the concrete
design yield strength of reinforcement. The
quality of reinforcement can be input in Pro-
fyd ject data or in 1D concrete member data
(see "Concrete member data" on page 27),
if concrete member data is inputted
design value of modulus of elasticity of rein-
forcement. The quality of reinforcement can
be input in Project data or in 1D concrete
Es
member data (see "Concrete member data"
on page 27 ), if concrete member data is
inputted
design yield strength of i-th reinforcement in
fyd,i the cross- section inputted via REDES or
Free bars
design value of modulus of elasticity of i-th
Es,i reinforcement in the cross-section inputted
via REDES or Free bars
Calculation of unfavourable direction

The minimum eccentricity, geometrical imperfection and first order moments including imperfection are calculated in both
directions. The second order effect depending on comparison of slenderness and limit slenderness can be calculated too in
both directions. The column will deflect under the action of the first-order moments and accidental moment. It proposed that
the second order moments will occur in whichever direction the deflection due to first-order moment as a proportion of the
effective length of the column is the greatest. It is assumed, though this is not stated in the code, that the accidental moment
and second-order moments will only occur in one direction and not in both direction at once. Therefore it is possible in SCIA
Engineer, to define unfavourable direction, it means direction in which direction second order moment and geometrical
imperfection will be taken into account, see
There are 3 possibilities:
l Auto - the direction for calculation second order effect and geometrical imperfection is determined automatically accord-
ing to conditions 5.38a and 5.38b in EN 1992-1-1
The uniaxial calculation for automatic determination is taken into account, if conditions below are satisfied, otherwise
biaxial calculation will be used
l λy / λz ≤ 2
l λz / λy ≤ 2
l ((e0Edz + e2z ) / heq) / ((e0Edy + e2y ) / beq) ≤ 2
l ((e0Edy + e2y ) / beq) / ((e0Edz + e2z ) / heq) ≤ 2
- 175 -
Chapter 7
l Uniaxial - second order effect and geometrical imperfection is taken into account only in one direction (more unfavourable
direction). In case, that more unfavourable direction can not be assigned (accidental bending moments, effective length
and cross-section properties are the same in both directions), the second order effect and geometrical imperfection will
be taken into account in both directions.
l Biaxial - second order effect and geometrical imperfection is always taken into account in both directions
There are no rules for determination of unfavourable direction in EN 1992-1-1, therefore in SCIA Engineer is used pro-
cedure described in [5], where unfavourable direction is determined according to equation below
ηy = |NEd ∙ e0Edz ∙ λy | / heq
ηz = |NEd ∙ e0Edy ∙ λz | / beq
ηy > ηz - unfavourable direction is around y axis
ηy < ηz - unfavourable direction is around z axis
ηy = ηz - both direction are taken into account
where
NEd design axial load

first order eccentricity including effect of imperfection in dir-
e0Edy(z) ection of y (z) axis of LCS, see "Calculation of first order
eccentricity including effect of imperfection" on page 169
the second order eccentricity in direction of z(y) axis of
e2y(z) LCS, see "Calculation of second order moment" on
page 169
λy(z) is slenderness around y (z) axis of LCS
width of equivalent rectangular section, see clause 5.8.9
beq (3) in EN 1992-1-1
beq = icy ∙ √12
height of equivalent rectangular section, see clause 5.8.9
heq (3) in EN 1992-1-1
heq = icz ∙ √12
radius of gyration of concrete cross-section in direction of y
icy(z) (z) axis of LCS, see "Calculation of slenderness" on
page 194
Ribs
The ribs have not been supported until SCIA Engineer version 15.3 in Concrete checks. From this version it is possible to
use concrete rib in design and check. There are the following improvements:
l settings for ribs were defined in concrete settings (structure) and concrete member data similarly as for beams
- 176 -
Design
- 177 -
Chapter 7
l it is not necessary to switch check box rib in property dialogue of the design or check
l rib can be any shape of cross-section, general cross-section is also supported
l the final shape of cross-section is a composition of rib cross-section and part of the slab. Finally one polygon is exported to
EMD data
l reinforcement of the rotated L or T cross-section is done automatically. The reinforcement template is considered as ori-
ginal T or L section but reinforcement is correctly inputted as rotated
l new reinforcement template for X section have been prepared
- 178 -
Design
l ribs are supported for design and check
- 179 -
Chapter 7
l design based on My + Mz is supported typically for L rib
- 180 -
Design
l design and check for rib with different material than is in the slab is not supported
Literature
1. EN 1992-1-1: 2004 Eurocode 2 : Design of concrete structures – Part 1-1: General rules and rules
for building
2. ENV 1992-1-1: 1991 Eurocode 2 : Design of concrete structures – Part 1: General rules and rules for
building
3. R. MATELA: Input of buckling lenghts, tutorial, downloadable at http://www.cads.co.uk/hres/

[Eng]%20Input%20of%20Buckling%20Lengths.pdf
4. C. R. HENDY and D. A. SMITH: Designers' Guide to EN 1992-2 Eurocode 2: Design of concrete

structures: Part 2: Concrete bridges, Thomas Telford, 2007, 378 p.
5. A. W. BEEBY and R. S. NARAYANAN: Designers' Guide to Eurocode 2: Design of Concrete Struc-

tures: Designers' Guide to EN 1992-1-1 and EN 1992-1-2 Eurocode 2: Design of Concrete
- 181 -
Chapter 7
Structures Design of Concrete Structures General Rules and Rules for Buildings and Structural Fire
Design, Thomas Telford, 2005, 232 p.
Reduction of shear forces and bending moment

Assumptions
Reduction of shear forces and bending moment is additional functionality which is available from version SCIA Engineer
16.0. This enables to users taken into account of reduction of internal forces. Generally we can perform reduction for:
l shear forces (based on 6.1.2(8) from EN 1992-1-1)

l bending moments (based on 5.3.2.2(3) and 5.3.2.2(4))
There are the following preconditions for forces reductions:
l shear forces and bending moments in both directions are reduced. It means Vy and Vz and My and Mz .
l reduction is done for beams only
l both reductions (shear and moments) will be done per request in concrete setup or in concrete member data
l when concrete member data are not defined then defaults of support widths are taken into account and generated.
l different procedure for support type (support or column ) for bending moment reactions
Shear forces reduction

Reduction of shear forces is possible to perform in two places. There is possible to reduce shear forces:
l in the edge of the column

l in the edge of the column + effective depth of the cross-section (based on 6.1.2(8) from EN 1992-1-1))
in the edge of the column in the edge of the column + effective depth of the cross-section
Value "d" is taken into account from the point where the support or column is placed
There is a selection in concrete settings in concrete member data for type of shear reduc-
tion
Bending moment reduction

Reduction of bending moment is also possible to perform in two ways. There is possible to reduce bending moments:
l in the edge of the column (5.3.2.2(3))

l using formula 5.9 from 5.3.2.2(4)
- 182 -
Design
in the edge of the column using formula 5.9
where FEd,sup is reaction in support and t is support width
The way of moment reduction is based on type of support.if standard support is defined
then reduction using formula is used. If column is defined then reduction in the edge of the
columns is used.
When support type Support on beam is used then the reduction is not performed. The
workaround is to input node into the section and define Support in node.
Support type Line support on beam is not considered fro reduction at all
Concrete setup
Global settings valid for whole structure can be defined as a special new items in Concrete settings
l Shear force reduction above support (default NO)

l Moment reduction above support (default NO)
IF the shear force is set YES then Reduce shear force combobox is active. As described previously there are two options:
l in the face (support / column)

l in the face (support / column) + effective depth of cross-section
- 183 -
Chapter 7
This options are available only for of structure is (Beam, Beam Slab, Rib)
Default for Reduction is OFF, these items are dependent on advanced mode

Besides Global settings for reduction defined in previous chapter it is possible to change settings individually per member.
The same items as in concrete settings are available in Concrete member data
These items are dependent on Advanced mode only
- 184 -
Design
These items are visible only for member type different than Column (Beam, Beams slab,
Rib)
In the bottom of concrete member data there is a special action button for Update of support width. This action button col-
lects all linked members or supports to investigated member and read theirs support widths. Update support width dialogue
is action button in concrete member data
Correct support widths are taken into account also for rotated or inclined columns
When you click on this button there is the following dialogue, where the user has the possibility to set on or off particular set-
tings. related to:
l support width
l shear reduction
l moment reduction
There is also possibility to export information from CMD to ER. there are prepared two new TLX files:
- 185 -
Chapter 7
l ForcesReduction
l Support widths
- 186 -
Design
The settings in CMD is the main decision if the reduction is performed or not in general.
Additionally update support width is used in case when the reduction is not required for par-
ticular support. But it doesn’t work in opposite way. If the main decision in CMD is set OFF
then Support width reduction settings in Support width dialogue has no influence on reduc-
tion in general.
Application to internal forces

When the settings from previous chapters are selected for reduction then there is possibility to obtain reduces internal
forces. These forces are presented as design values with appendix Ed (VEd , MEd ). Then these reduced forces are taken
into account for design or checks.
Original Vz
Reduced Vz
Original My - nodal support
- 187 -
Chapter 7
Reduced My - nodal support
Original My - column support
Reduced My - column support
- 188 -
Design
Additionally there is possibility to draw original an recalculated internal forces together.

Original and reduced My together
Original and reduced Vz together
- 189 -
Chapter 7
When shifting and reduction of bending moments are both selected then at first shifting is
done and afterwards the reduction is applied.
Detailed output then looks as follows

Shear force reduction
Bending moment reduction - support
Bending moment reduction - column
- 190 -
Design
Additional generated sections

New sections are generated in places where the reduction is applied (column or support edge) . Then all results of design
and checks are also calculate din these sections.
- 191 -
Chapter 7
Slenderness
Introduction
Slenderness and limit slenderness of the column should be checked before design or check of the members. Using of
second order effect in calculation depends on the check of slenderness, because if the check is slenderness is greater than
limit slenderness), the second order effect has to be taken into account for column calculation.
Conditions Calculation of second order effect

λy > λlim,y or λz > λlim,z YES
λy ≤ λlim,y or λz ≤ λlim,z NO
The slenderness and limit slenderness is calculated according to clause 5.8.3.1 and 5.8.3.2 in EN 1992-1-1. The following
preconditions are used for calculation :
l The slenderness is calculated for beams and columns and for general load (N + My + Mz )
l The limit slenderness is calculated only in case that axial forces is smaller than zero (N < 0 kN)
l Cross-section with one polygon and one material is taken into account in version SCIA Engineer
l The material of all reinforcement bars have to be same in SCIA Engineer
Buckling data
The detailed description of inputting buckling data and way of calculation buckling data are described in [3]. There is
described general functionality, but for calculation of slenderness and limit slenderness are important the following prop-
erties
l properties for calculation effective length of the member around y and z axis
l if the member is braced (Sway = NO) or unbraced (Sway = YES) around a and z axis
- 192 -
Design
The important parameter for calculation of buckling data is type of structure (braced or
unbraced). The global type of structure can be set in Concrete Setting (Design defaults
> Default sway type). For example , the structures is braced perpendicular to y axis of
GCS, if parameter Sway around y axis = NO (it means the structure is not prone to
sway perpendicular to y axis)
Creep coefficient
This value can be set in Concrete setting, see "Concrete settings" by using Advanced level or in 1D member data
(advanced mode is ON), if is defined. Creep coefficient can be calculated automatically by using input ages of concrete and
- 193 -
Chapter 7
relative humidity (see annex B.1 in EN 1992-1-1), if the Type input of creep coefficient = Auto. If Type input of
creep coefficient = User value., then creep coefficient can be input directly by the user.
Estimation of ratio of longitudinal reinforcement

There are some values in design of reinforcement, which are dependent on area of reinforcement, for example:
l mechanical reinforcement ratio (μ) in calculation limit slenderness (clause 5.8.3.1(1) in EN 1992-1-1)
l mechanical reinforcement ratio (μ) in calculation second order eccentricity (clause 5.8.8.3(3) in EN 1992-1-1)
l radius of gyration of the total reinforcement area (is ) in calculation second order eccentricity (clause 5.8.8.3(2) in EN
1992-1-1)
l calculation of exponent of interaction formula x in biaxial bending calculation (clause 5.8.9.(4) in EN 1992-1-1)
These values should be calculated before design of reinforcement, but before design we do not know area of rein-
forcement. It follows that for calculation of this value
l area of reinforcement will be neglected,

l iterative calculation will be used or,
l area of reinforcement will be estimated.
The third solution is implemented in SCIA Engineer via parameter Estimation ratio of longitudinal reinforcement for recal-
culation internal forces, where user can set ratio of reinforcement, which will be used for calculation of the values above.This
value can be set in Concrete settings, see "Concrete settings" by using Advanced level or in 1D member data
(advanced mode is ON), if is defined. Total area of reinforcement is calculated according to formula:
As = μs ∙ Ac
where
A
cross-sectional area of concrete cross-section
c
μ estimation ratio of longitudinal reinforcement loaded from Concrete setting (if concrete member data is not defined )
s or concrete member data
Calculation of slenderness
The slenderness (slenderness ratio) is calculated according to clause 5.8.3.2(1) in EN 1992-1-1.
λy(z) = l0,y(z) / ic,y(z)
where
l
is the effective length of the member (column) around y(z) axis of LCS (perpendicular to y (z) axis of LCS), which
0,y can be defined via Buckling data, see "Calculation of slenderness" above
(z)
i
c,y is the radius of gyration of the uncracked concrete section in direction of y (z) axis of LCS
(z)
The simplified values and formulas for calculation of effective length for isolated columns,
braced and unbraced frames are described in clauses 5.8.3.2(2-4) in EN 1992-1-1
- 194 -
Design
The slenderness is calculated in each section, it follows that for arbitrary member and mem-
ber with haunch, the slenderness can be different along length of the member
Calculation of limit slenderness
The limit slenderness is calculated according to clause 5.8.3.1(1) in EN 1992-1-1. The limit slenderness and the slen-
derness are always checked separately for each direction according to 5.8.3.1(2) in EN 1992-1-1. The formula for cal-
culation of limit slenderness in EN 1992-1-1 is national parameter, it means, that different formula, method or value can be
used in some countries, see concrete setup (Manager for national annex > EN 1992-1-1 > General > ULS > General
> lambda_lim )
There are changes in calculation of limit slenderness for some national annex see the table below
National annex Calculation of limit slenderness

Standard EN 1992-1-1 λlim = (20 ∙ A ∙ B ∙ C) / √n
λlim = 25 ... for |n| ≥ 0,41
DIN EN 1992-1-1 NA
λlim = 16 / √n ... for |n| < 0,41
ČSN EN 1992-1-1 NA
λlim = (20 ∙ A ∙ B ∙ C) / √n ≤ 75
STN EN 1992-1-1 NA
- 195 -
Chapter 7
For more details about National annexes see "Theoretical background for National annexes".
where
A
the coefficient based on effective creep ratio φeff , see "Effective creep ratio"
the coefficient based on mechanical reinforcement ratio ω, see "Mechanical rein-

B
forcement ratio - check" or "Mechanical reinforcement ratio - design"
the coefficient based on shape (ratio) of bending moment rm , see "Shape of bend-
C
ing moment"
n the relative normal force n, see "Relative normal force"
The limit slenderness is not checked if normal force (relative normal force) is tensile.
The limit slenderness is calculated in each section, it follows that for arbitrary member,
member with a haunch, member with non-uniform normal force along the length of the
member or member in which the reinforcement is not constant over the length of the mem-
ber, the limit slenderness can vary along the length of the member.
Effective creep ratio

In SCIA Engineer, for calculation of limit slenderness it is used creep ratio loaded from concrete setting (if member data is
not defined ) or concrete member data, see "Concrete settings (structure)" on page 51 . It means that if user wants to take
into account effective creep ratio according to clause 5.8.4 in EN 1992-1-1, the value of this creep ratio has to be directly
input to concrete setting or to concrete member data as "User value of creep coefficient". Otherwise, the final creep ratio will
be taken into account.
The coefficient A is than calculated according to formula :
A = 1 / (1 + 0,2 ∙ φ)
where
φ is creep ratio loaded from concrete setting (if concrete member data is not defined
on column) or concrete member data
Mechanical reinforcement ratio - check

Mechanical reinforcement ratio depends on total area of longitudinal reinforcement. For checks total area of reinforcement
is calculated from inputted reinforcement via REDES or Free bars. The mechanical reinforcement ratio is calculated
according to formula below. The mechanical reinforcement can be different along whole length of the column and in each
section of the member and it is calculated according to formula below
ω = ∑(As,i ∙ fyd,i) / (Ac ∙ fcd)
where
cross-sectional area of i-th reinforcement in the cross-section of cur-

As,i
rent section inputted via REDES or Free bars
design yield strength of i-th reinforcement in the cross-section inputted
fyd,i
via REDES or Free bars inputted via REDES or Free bars
- 196 -
Design

The coefficient B is than calculated according to formula:
B = √(1 + 2 ∙ ω)
Mechanical reinforcement ratio - design
Mechanical reinforcement ratio depends on total area of longitudinal reinforcement. For design of reinforcement, total area
of reinforcement is calculated from estimation ratio loaded from Concrete setting (if concrete member data is not defined )
or concrete member data, see "Concrete settings (structure)" on page 51. The mechanical reinforcement ratio is the same
at whole length of the column and it is calculated according to formula
ω = μs ∙ fyd / fcd
where
estimation ratio of longitudinal reinforcement loaded from Concrete

μs setting (if concrete member data is not defined) or concrete member
data
design yield strength of reinforcement. The quality of reinforcement
fyd can be input in Project data (if concrete member data is not defined) or
in concrete member data
The coefficient B is than calculated according to formula

B = √(1 + 2 ∙ ω)
Shape of bending moment
Shape of bending moment is expressed by ratio of first order end section bending moments without influence of imper-
fection in direction of the selected local axis. The ratio of these moments (value r m ) depends on type of member and on
shape of shear force.
l if type of member is unbraced around local axis (sway= YES), then rm = 1,0
l if type of member is braced around local axis (sway= NO) and first order moments arise only from or predominantly due
to imperfections or transverse loading (maximum bending moment along the member is not at the beginning or at the
end of the member ), then rm = 1,0
l otherwise, value rm is calculated according to formula rmy(z) = M01y(z) / M02y(z) and |M02y(z)| ≥ |M01y(z)|
where
M01y the first end bending moments around y(z) axis of LCS with lesser
(z) absolute value as second end bending moment
M02y the second end bending moments around y(z) axis of LCS with
(z) greater absolute value as first end bending moment.
the ratio of bending moment around y(z) axis of LCS which is used for
rmy(z)
calculation limit slenderness around y(z) axis of LCS
- 197 -
Chapter 7
The coefficient C is than calculated according to formula

Cy(z) = 1,7 - rmy(z)
Relative normal force

Relative normal force is calculated according to formula
n = NEd / Ac ∙ fcd
where
NEd the design value of the applied axial force in compression

Ac the cross-sectional area of concrete
fcd the design value of concrete compressive strength
If normal force is not uniform along the length of column or the part of the column (for arbit-
rary member and member with haunch), the maximum value of normal force at length of
column or the part of the column will be taken into account.
Literature
1. EN 1992-1-1: 2004 Eurocode 2 : design of concrete structures – Part 1-1: General rules and rules for
building
2. ENV 1992-1-1: 1991 Eurocode 2 : design of concrete structures – Part 1: General rules and rules for
building
3. R. MATELA: Input of buckling lenghts, tutorial, downloadable at http://www.cads.co.uk/hres/

[Eng]%20Input%20of%20Buckling%20Lengths.pdf
Reinforcement design - theory

Introduction
SCIA Engineer allows to design reinforcement to general cross-section which is loaded by general internal forces (N, My ,
Mz , Vy , Vz , Mx ) . There is a possibility to design:
l statically required longitudinal reinforcement, see "Design of longitudinal reinforcement" on page 201

l longitudinal reinforcement including detailing provisions
l statically required shear reinforcement, see "Design of shear reinforcement" on page 209
l shear reinforcement including detailing provisions
l torsional longitudinal reinforcement, see "Torsional longitudinal reinforcement" on page 219
The following preconditions are used for calculation :
l additional tensile forces caused by shear is taken into account by shifting of bending moments, see clause 9.2.1.3(2) in
EN 1992-1-1,
- 198 -
Design
l cross-section with one polygon and one material is taken into account,
l practical (user defined) reinforcement is not taken into account.
Design defaults
Design defaults is a special group of properties for, where user can define the basic parameters (diameter of longitudinal
and shear reinforcement, type of value of concrete cover...) for design of longitudinal and shear reinforcement.This setting
can be done in Design defaults (if 1D concrete member data is not defined) or directly in 1D concrete member data.
Concrete setting 1D concrete data
Four type of 1D members with different design defaults parameter are supported in SCIA Engineer:
l Beam / Rib - member predominantly loaded by bending moments, for which longitudinal and shear reinforcement can be
designed. There are the following parameters:
l type of cover of side reinforcement (upper, lower or user define value)
l Stirrups
l angle of shear reinforcement
l basic (user defined stirrup) - where user can defined user value of area of shear reinforcement per meter with some
angle and material of this reinforcement.
l Beam slab - member predominantly loaded by bending moments for which shear reinforcement is not designed (for
example cut of 2D member).There are the following parameters:
- 199 -
Chapter 7
l Column - member predominantly in compression for which longitudinal and shear reinforcement can be designed. There
are the following parameters:
l type of cover of reinforcement (auto or user defined value)
l Stirrups
Design defaults in concrete setting:
l There is possibility for define design defaults for all type of 1D member (beam, column, beam slab)
l the material of longitudinal and shear reinforcement is not possible to input/edit in this setting, but material is loaded from
project data and it is same for all type of members
Design defaults in 1D concrete member data
l only design defaults of selected type of member can be edited in this setting
l material of shear and longitudinal reinforcement can be edited directly in concrete member data
For more details about each item see "Design defaults".
Design method
User can set type of method for design reinforcement for columns and beams This setting can be done in Concrete setting
(if 1D concrete member data is not defined) or directly in 1D concrete member data for Member type = Column or beams by
using Advanced mode/level
Concrete setting 1D concrete member data for beam 1D concrete member data for column
Four type of methods for design statically required reinforcement are supported for beams and columns:
l auto
l uniaxial around y
l uniaxial around z
l biaxial
Uniaxial method around y axis is always used for type of member = beam as slab.
Biaxial method independently on selected method is always used for circular and oval
columns
- 200 -
Design
Limit ratio of bending moments for uniaxial method
The automatic method for design of reinforcement is based on ratio of bending moments around y and z axis and on value
of limit ratio of bending moments for using uniaxial method. This limit value can be set and loaded from concrete setting
(Advanced level). Default value for Ratiolim is 0.1. It follows, if ratio of maximal bending moments around y and z axis for all
combinations in current section is lesser than limit ratio of bending moments, uniaxial method is used for design, otherwise
biaxial method is used.
Design of longitudinal reinforcement

The design of statically required reinforcement is based on the calculation of equilibrium. This method uses an iteration
routine to calculate equilibrium based on internal forces, the cross- section, material properties and position of rein-
forcement. Generally, this iterative method works for the interaction of the normal force (N) with uni-axial or bi-axial bending
moments (My + Mz ).
There are the following assumptions:
l Plane sections remain plane.

l Strain in bonded reinforcement, whether in tension or compression, is the same as the strain in the concrete at the same
level
l Tensile strength of the concrete is ignored.
l The stresses in the concrete in compression are given by the design stress–strain relationships ( bilinear or parabola-rect-
angular stress-strain diagram)
- 201 -
Chapter 7
l The stresses in the reinforcing steel are given by the design stress–strain relationships (bilinear with or without inclined
horizontal branch stress-strain diagram)
Four methods are supported in SCIA Engineer for design of reinforcement for beams and columns, see "Design method"
on page 200
l uni-axial around y axis, see "Uniaxial method for design" on the facing page
l uni-axial around z axis, see "Uniaxial method for design" on the facing page
l biaxial, see "Biaxial method for design" on page 206
l auto, see "Automatic method for design" on page 208
Uniaxial method around y axis is always used for type of member = beam as slab.
Biaxial method independently on selected method is always used for circular and oval
columns
Designed required area is for better overview and graphical presentation recalculated to directions of cross-section (mem-
ber) LCS axes, see "Recalculation reinforcement to directions" on page 205
Except of statically required longitudinal reinforcement (As.stat ), the program calculates required longitudinal reinforcement
(As.req ). It is statically required longitudinal reinforcement with the influence of detailing provision. The program than cal-
culates also provided longitudinal reinforcement (As.prov ). It is required longitudinal reinforcement area recalculated to real
bars , where:
l diameter of longitudinal reinforcement is taken into account (cross-sectional area of bars with input diameter)
l minimal number of bars per edge is 2
l number of bars is rounded to integer
l corner bars are taken into account for all edges (half of bar is taken into account for one edge, and half of bar for second
edge)
- 202 -
Design
Uniaxial method for design

This method allows to design reinforcement only for normal force (N Ed ) and one bending moment (M Ed ). In case, that
cross-section is loaded by bending moments around both axis’s, one bending moment is ignored:
l for method uniaxial around y, the bending moment MEdz is ignored, it follows that reinforcement is designed only for
normal forces NEd and bending moment MEdy
l for method uniaxial around z, the bending moment MEdy is ignored, it follows that reinforcement is designed only for
normal forces NEd and bending moment MEdz
- 203 -
Chapter 7
The results of uniaxal method depend on type of member:
l for beams and beam as slab

l reinforcement is designed only at one or two edges (if compressive reinforcement is required or cross-section is
loaded only by normal force)
l the reinforcement can be unsymmetrical
l for columns
l reinforcement is designed always at two edges and the reinforcement is symmetrical
l reinforcement is designed always at one layer
The position of reinforcement is calculated from parameters defined in Design defaults,

see "Calculation position of reinforcement" below
Calculation position of reinforcement

The position of reinforcement is calculated from parameters which are defined in Reinforcement design > Design defaults,
see "Design Defaults" on page 325 . The position of reinforcement is always in the middle of the edge, which is created by off-
set of current cross-section in distance as . This distance and diameter of reinforcement can be different for each edges and
it is calculated in dependence on type of member according to formulas:
l beam
as,lj = cnom,l + dss + 0,5 ∙ ds,l + (smin + ds,l) ∙ (j - 1)
as,uj = cnom,u + dss + 0,5 ∙ ds,u + (smin + ds,u) ∙ (j - 1)
as,sj = cnom,s + dss + 0,5 ∙ ds,s + (smin + ds,s ) ∙ (j - 1)
l beam as slab
as,lj = cnom,l + 0,5 ∙ ds,l + (smin + ds,l) ∙ (j - 1)
as,uj = cnom,u + 0,5 ∙ ds,u + (smin + ds,u) ∙ (j - 1)
l column
as = cnom + dss + 0,5 ∙ ds
- 204 -
Design
where
cnom,l is concrete cover at lower surface for beam or beam as slab

cnom,u is concrete cover at upper surface for beam or beam as slab
is concrete cover for side reinforcement for beams(for edge which are not at
cnom,s lower or upper surface). This value depends on parameter Type of cover
of side reinforcement, see "Design Defaults" on page 325
cnom is concrete cover for columns, the value is same for all edges
dss is diameter of stirrups for beam or column
is diameter of longitudinal reinforcement at lower surface for beam or beam
ds,l
as slab
is diameter of longitudinal reinforcement at upper surface for beam or beam
ds,u
as slab
is diameter of longitudinal reinforcement for side reinforcement for beams.
ds,s
his value is same as diameter of longitudinal reinforcement at lower surface
is diameter of longitudinal reinforcement for columns, the value is same for
ds
all edges
j layer of reinforcement
smin is minimal surface-to-surface distance of reinforcement between two layers
The edge, for which parameter of upper reinforcement is used, is the edge above axis
which is crossed by line in direction of bending moment resultant for dangerous com-
bination, which causes the biggest linear stress in the cross-section
The edge, for which parameter of lower reinforcement is used, is the edge under axis
which is crossed by line in direction of bending moment resultant for dangerous com-
bination, which causes the biggest linear stress in the cross-section
Recalculation reinforcement to directions

Longitudinal reinforcement can be designed to more edges of cross- section and for general cross- section. Designed
required area is for better overview and graphical presentation recalculated to directions of axis’s of LCS of the cross-
- 205 -
Chapter 7
section (member). The recalculation area of reinforcement depends on angle of edge from y-axis and angle of bending
moment resultant from y-axis, see pictures below. It follows, that 4 areas of reinforcement can be presented in graphical
and numerical output:
required area of reinforcement (mostly designed for bending moment My ) placed on edges above axis y with
A
angle of edges lesser than 45 ° from y-axis. The edges with angle 45 ° and above axis y are assigned to this dir-
sz.req+ ection if direction of bending moment resultant (α M ) is lesser or equal than 45 °.
required area of reinforcement (mostly designed for bending moment My ) placed on edges under axis y with
A
angle of edges lesser than 45 ° from y-axis. The edges with angle 45 ° and under axis y are assigned to this dir-
sz.req- ection if direction of bending moment resultant (α M ) is lesser or equal than 45 °.
required area of reinforcement (mostly designed for bending moment Mz ) placed on edges above axis z with
A
angle of edges greater than 45 ° from y-axis. The edges with angle 45 ° and above axis z are assigned to this
sy.req+ direction if direction of bending moment resultant (α M ) is greater than 45 °.
required area of reinforcement (mostly designed for bending moment Mz ) placed on edges under axis z with
A
angle of edges greater than 45 ° from y-axis. The edges with angle 45 ° and under axis z are assigned to this
sy.req- direction if direction of bending moment resultant (α M ) is greater than 45 °.
Note: Same procedure is used also for recalculation of provided (As,prov ) reinforcement to
directions.
Biaxial method for design
This method allows to design reinforcement for normal force (NEd) and biaxial bending moments. This method is based on
interaction formula, equation 5.39 in EN 1992-1-1.
(MEdy / MRdy )2 + (MEdz / MRdz )2 ≤ 1
where
M
is design moment around y axis
Edy
M is design moment around z axis
- 206 -
Design
Edz
M is the design moment resistance around y-axis, it means intersection of interaction diagram and line parallel with
Rdy My axis across the point with coordinates [NEd, MEdy , 0], see "Theoretical background" on page 385
M is the design moment resistance around y-axis, it means intersection of interaction diagram and line parallel with
Rdy Mz axis across the point with coordinates [NEd, 0, MEdz ], see "Theoretical background" on page 385
is exponent of interaction formula
l for column with circular cross-section a = 2

l for column with rectangular cross-section , the value is calculated from the table below by interpolation
a NEd / NRd 0,1 0,7 1,0
a= 1,0 1,5 2,0
l for other cases a = 1

N
is design axial force
Ed
N is design axial resistance

Rd NRd = Ac ∙ (fcd + μs ∙ fyd)
estimation ratio of longitudinal reinforcement loaded from Concrete setting (if concrete member data is not
μs
defined ) or concrete member data, see "Estimation of ratio of longitudinal reinforcement" on page 194
design yield strength of reinforcement. The quality of reinforcement can be input in Project data(if concrete mem-
fyd
ber data is not defined ) or in concrete member data
Procedure of calculation:
l program designs initial area of reinforcement according to linear stress on the edges of the cross-section
l program increases area of reinforcement, generates interaction diagram around y and z axes and checks interaction for-
mula in iterative calculation, till interaction formula is not satisfied
l if interaction formula is fulfilled, then program checks plane of deformation and increase area of reinforcement, if the
plane of deformation is not found
- 207 -
Chapter 7
The results of biaxial method depends on type of member:
l for beam and beam as slab

l the reinforcement can be unsymmetrical
l exponent of interaction formula is 1
l for column
l reinforcement is symmetrical, if the cross-section is symmetrical
l exponent of interaction formula depends on shape of cross-section, see table above
l reinforcement is designed always at one layer
Automatic method for design
There is possibility to used automatic method for design. The program automatically select uniaxial or biaxial method accord-
ing to values of bending moments around y and z axis. It follows:
l uniaxial method (see"Uniaxial method for design" on page 203 ) is used if
ρM = min(|MEdy,max |, |MEdz,max |) / max(|MEdy,max |, |MEdz,max |) ≤ ρM,lim
l biaxial method (see"Biaxial method for design" on page 206 ) is used in other cases
where
M
is maximal design moment around y axis from all combinations in current section
Edy.max
M
is maximal design moment around z axis from all combinations in current section
Edz.max
Ratio is limit ratio of bending moments for uniaxial method loaded from Concrete setting , see "Limit ratio of bending
lim moments for uniaxial method" on page 201
- 208 -
Design
Different method for design of reinforcement can be used in each section along the mem-
ber in dependence on values of bending moments around y and z axis from all com-
binations
Design of shear reinforcement
Design of shear reinforcement includes:
l design for biaxial shear force,see "Design of shear reinforcement for shear forces" on the next page
l design for torsion , see "Design shear reinforcement for torsion" on page 214
l design for interaction shear force and torsion, see "Design of shear reinforcement for interaction shear and torsion" on
page 216
Design is provided according to clause 6.1 - 6.3 in EN 1992-1-1. Design reinforcement for shear and torsion is commonly
based on the theory of the concrete truss-model too. In this theory a virtual truss-model is imagined in a concrete beam. This
truss-model has a set of vertical (or slightly diagonal), horizontal and diagonal members. The vertical bars are considered to
be the stirrups; the horizontal bars are the main reinforcement and the diagonal bars are the concrete struts.
l The shear forces in both direction are taken into account and design of shear reinforcement is done for resultant of shear
forces
- 209 -
Chapter 7
l The parameters of plane of equilibrium (value, d, z and h) are recalculated to direction of shear force resultant
l The design shear resistance of the member without shear reinforcement (VRd,c ) is calculated according to clause 6.2.2
(1) in EN 1992-1-1, if section is cracked in flexure, otherwise clause 12.6.3 in EN 1992-1-1 is used
l Design value of maximum shear force will be calculated according to clause 6.2.2(6) (VEd,max ) and 6.2.3 (3,4) (VRd,max )
in EN 1992-1-1
l Design value of shear resistance is calculated according to 6.2.3 (3,4) (VRd,s ) in EN 1992-1-1
l The number of shear link is loaded directly from Design defaults from concrete setting or concrete member data, see
"Design Defaults" on page 325
l The angle of compression strut can be calculated automatically or defined by user, see "Angle between concrete com-
pression strut and beam axis" on page 156
l The torsional cracking moment (TRd,c ) is calculated according to clause 6.3.2(5) in EN 1992-1-1
l Design value of maximum of torsional resistance moment (TRd,max ) is calculated according to clause 6.3.2(4) in EN
1992-1-1
l The angle of stirrups for design shear reinforcement for torsion has to be perpendicular
l There are 5 possibilities for calculation thin-walled closed section, see "Equivalent thin-walled closed cross-section" on
page 396
With the following limitations
l Cross-section with one polygon and one material is taken into account in version SCIA Engineer 15 and later.
l The user(practical) reinforcement is not taken into account.
l Design should be done only in case that the angle between gradient of the strain plane and the resultant of shear forces is
not greater than 15 °.
l Inclined compression chord or inclined tensile chord are not taken into account.
l The widths of cross-section for shear checks (value bw and bw1) are calculated automatically. There is no possibility for
definition of user value in SCIA Engineer 15 and later.
Except of statically required shear reinforcement per meter including detailing provision
(Aswm.req ), the program calculates provided shear reinforcement (Aswm.prov ). It is stat-
ically required shear reinforcement, where the spacing of the stirrups in longitudinal dir-
ection is rounded to 25 mm
Design of shear reinforcement for shear forces
As was mentioned above, there exists general concept of “strut-and-tie” model for the prediction of shear effects in con-
crete. In this model, the top compression and bottom tensile members represent the compressive concrete and tensile rein-
forcement, respectively. The procedure for design can be represented by diagram below:
- 210 -
Design
The formulas which are used for the calculation of each component of this model are the following.
Generally, there are two possibilities for calculation of shear capacity of concrete dependently on existence of cracks in bend-
ing:
Shear concrete capacity in region cracked in bending – formula 6.2.a,b in EN 1992-1-1
VRd,c = [CRd,c ∙ k ∙ (100 ∙ ρl ∙ fck )1/3 + k1 ∙ σcp] ∙ bw ∙ d
VRd,c,min = (νmin + k1 ∙ σcp) ∙ bw ∙ d
Shear concrete capacity in region uncracked in bending – clause 12.6.3(3) in EN 1992-1-1

VRd,c = fcvd ∙ Acc / k12.6.3
Additionally, there is calculated maximal shear force (VEd,max ) without reduction by β for member where load is applied in
the upper side of the member (see formula 6.5 in EN 1992-1-1).
VEd,max = 0,5 ∙ bw1 ∙ d ∙ ν ∙ fcd
- 211 -
Chapter 7
Maximal capacity of concrete compressive strut (VRd,max ) is determined according to formula 6.9 in EN 1992-1-1, because
as has been mentioned before, the angle of stirrups θ is always perpendicular to member axis.
VRd,max = (α cw ∙ bw1 ∙ z ∙ ν1 ∙fcd) / (cot θ + tan θ)
Statically required cross- sectional area of the shear reinforcement per meter is calculated from the formula 6.13 in
EN 1992-1-1
Aswm,req = Asw,req / sl,req = VEd / (z ∙ fywd ∙ (cot θ + cot α) ∙ sin α)
Design value of shear force sustained by shear reinforcement (VRd,s ) is calculated according to formula 6.13 in EN 1992-1-
1
VRd,s = Asw / s ∙ z ∙ fywd ∙ (cot θ + cot α) ∙ sin α
Final design value of shear force (VRd) carried by member is calculated based on the following formulas depending on type
of member and area of shear reinforcement.
l for beam as slab and for other member with only detailing stirrups (Aswm.req = 0)
VRd = VRd,c ≤ min(VRd,max , VEd,max ) + Vtd + Vccd
l for other cases
VRd = VRd,s + Vtd + Vccd ≤ min(VRd,max , VEd,max ) + Vtd + Vccd
where
resultant of shear force

VEd
VEd = √(VEd,y 2 + VEd,z 2)
VEd,y(z) shear force in direction of y(z) axis of LCS

VRd,c the design shear resistance of the member without shear reinforcement
σct,max maximal tensile strength in uncracked cross-section
V
the minimal value of design shear resistance of the member without shear reinforcement
Rd,c,min
CRd,c coefficient for calculation VRd,c loaded from Manager for National annexes
coefficient of effective height of cross-section
k
k = 1 + √(200 / d) ≤ 2
ratio of tensile reinforcement
ρl
ρl = Asl / (bw ∙d) ≤ 0,02
fck characteristic compressive cylinder strength of concrete
k1 coefficient for calculation VRd,c loaded from Manager for National annexes
stress caused by axial force (NEd > 0 for compression)
σcp
σcp = NEd / Ac ≤ 0,2 ∙ fcd
the smallest width of the cross-section in tensile area of cross-section perpendicular to direction of resultant
bw
shear force, see "Width of cross-section for shear check" on page 405
effective depth of cross-section recalculated to direction of shear forces resultant, see "Effective depth of
d
cross-section for shear check" on page 406
Asl statically required tensile area of reinforcement, see "Design of longitudinal reinforcement" on page 201
- 212 -
Design
NEd the axial force in the cross-section due to loading or prestressing.

Ac the area of concrete cross section
Coefficient of minimum value of shear resistance of the member without shear reinforcement loaded from
νmin
Manager for National annexes,see equation 6.3N in EN 1992-1-1
the concrete design strength in shear and compression, see equations 12.5 and 12.6 in EN 1992-1-1
fcvd if σccp ≤ σc,lim : fcvd = √(fctd2 + σccp ∙ fctd)
if σccp > σc,lim : fcvd = √(fctd2 + σccp ∙ fctd - ((σccp - σc,lim ) / 2)2)
fctd design axial tensile strength of concrete

normal (axial) stress of uncracked cross-section
σccp
σccp = NEd / Acc
limit value of stress caused by axial force, see equations 12.7 in EN 1992-1-1
σc,lim
σc,lim = fcd - 2 ∙ √(fctd ∙ (fctd + fcd))
Acc compressed concrete area for uncracked cross-section
maximum value of shear force resultant calculated without reduction by coefficient β, see clause 6.2.2(6) in
VEd,max
EN 1992-1-1
minimum width of cross-section between tension and compression chord perpendicular to direction of shear
bw1
force, see "Width of cross-section for shear check" on page 405
strength reduction factor for concrete cracked in shear loaded from Manager for National annexes, see equa-
ν
tion 6.6N in EN 1992-1-1
the design value of the maximum shear force which can be sustained by the member, limited by crushing of
VRd,max
the compression struts
coefficient taking into account state of the stress in the compression chord, see note 3 in clause 6.2.3(3) in EN
αcw
1992-1-1. The value 1 is always taken into account for non -prestressed structures
inner lever arm of cross-section recalculated to direction of shear forces resultant, see "Inner lever arm for
z
shear check" on page 407
strength reduction factor for concrete cracked in shear loaded from Manager for National annexes, see note
1 and 2 in clause 6.2.3(3) in EN 1992-1-1
ν1 if σswd > 0,8 ∙ fywk : ν1 = ν
if σswd ≤ 0,8 ∙ fywk and fck ≤ 60 MPa: ν1 = 0,6
if σswd ≤ 0,8 ∙ fywk and fck > 60 MPa: ν1 = 0,9 - fck / 200 > 0,5
Angle between concrete compression strut and beam axis perpendicular to the shear force, see "Angle
θ
between concrete compression strut and beam axis" on page 156
VRd,s design value of the shear force which can be sustained by the yielding shear reinforcement
A
Statically required cross-sectional area of the shear reinforcement per meter
swm.req
the cross-sectional area of the shear reinforcement calculated from inputted parameters in design default,
Asw see "Design Defaults" on page 325
Asw = ns ∙ 0,25 ∙ π ∙ dss 2
- 213 -
Chapter 7
dss diameter of stirrups loaded from Concrete setting or Concrete data, see "Design Defaults" on page 325
number of cuts (shear links) loaded from Concrete setting or Concrete data, see "Design Defaults" on
ns
page 325
the spacing of the stirrups in longitudinal direction
sl.req
sl,req = Asw / Aswm,req
fywd the design yield strength of the shear reinforcement
angle of shear reinforcement loaded from Concrete setting or Concrete data, see "Design Defaults" on
α
page 325. This angle for column is 90 °
fywk characteristic yield strength of the shear reinforcement
the design value of the shear component of the force in the tensile reinforcement, in the case of an inclined
Vtd
tensile chord
the design value of the shear component of the force in the compression area, in the case of an inclined com-
Vccd
pression chord
For member with inclined chords the additional forces haves to be taken into account for
shear check according to clause 6.2.1 (1). The calculation is prepared for taking into
account also inclined chords. Nevertheless the calculation itself is not implemented yet. The
partial components are explained in the following figure.
Design shear reinforcement for torsion
As was mentioned above, there exists general concept of “strut-and-tie” model for the prediction of torsion effects in con-
crete. In this model, the top compression and bottom tensile members represent the compressive concrete and tensile rein-
forcement, respectively. The procedure for design can be represented by diagram below:
- 214 -
Design
Torsional cracking moment is calculated according to equation 6.26 in EN 1992-1-1, provided that the stress caused by tor-
sional moment is equal to design axial tensile strength of concrete (value fctd). It follows
TRdc = 2 ∙ fctd ∙ tef ∙ Ak
Maximum of torsional resistance moment (TRd,max ) is determined according to formula 6.30 in EN 1992-1-1.
TRd,max = 2 ∙ ν ∙ α cw ∙ fcd ∙ Ak ∙tef ∙cos θ ∙ sin θ
Statically required cross-sectional area of the shear reinforcement per meter is calculated according to formula below
Aswm,req = Aswt,req / sl,req = |TEd| / (2 ∙ Ak ∙ fywd ∙ cot θ)
Design torsional resistance moment of torsional reinforcement (TRd,st ) is calculated according to formula below
TRdst = 2 ∙ Ak ∙ (Aswt / st ) ∙fywd ∙ cot θ
Final design value of torsional moment (TRd) carried by member is calculated based on the following formulas
l for member without or with only detailing stirrups for torsion (Aswm,req = 0)
TRd = TRd,c ≤ TRd,max
l for other cases
TRd = TRd,s ≤ TRd,max
- 215 -
Chapter 7
where
TEd torsional moment

TRd,c the design value of torsional cracking moment
tef effective wall thickness, see "Calculation of basic characteristics" on page 411
the area enclosed by the centre-lines of the thin-walled closed cross-section, including inner
Ak
hollow areas, see "Calculation of basic characteristics" on page 411
T
Maximum of torsional resistance moment
Rd,max
αcw
1992-1-1. The value 1 is always taken into account for non-prestressed structures
ν
tion 6.6N in EN 1992-1-1
θ
TRd,st design torsional resistance moment of torsional reinforcement
A
swm.req
see "Design Defaults" on page 325
Aswt
Asw = 0,25 ∙ π ∙ dss 2
sl.req
sl,req = Aswt / Aswm,req
fywd the design yield strength of the shear reinforcement.
Design of shear reinforcement for interaction shear and torsion

As was mentioned above, there exists general concept of “strut-and-tie” model for the prediction of shear and torsional
effects in concrete. The procedure for design shear reinforcement for interaction shear and torsion can be represented by
diagram below:
- 216 -
Design
Only minimum reinforcement is required (see provided that the following condition (equation 6.31 in EN 1992-1-1) is sat-
isfied
TEd / TRd,c + VEd / VRd,c ≤ 1
The maximum resistance of a member subjected to torsion and shear is limited by the capacity of the concrete struts. In
order not to exceed this resistance the following condition (equation 6.29 in EN 1992-1-1) should be satisfied
TEd / TRd,max + VEd / VRd,max ≤ 1
Statically required cross-sectional area of the shear reinforcement per meter is calculated according to formulas
Aswm1,req = Asw,req / sl,req = VEd / (z ∙ fywd ∙(cot θ + cot α) ∙ sin α)
Aswm2,req = Aswt,req / sl,req = [|TEd| / (2 ∙ Ak ) + VEd / (ns ∙ z)] / (fywd ∙ cot θ)
Aswm,req = max(Aswm1,req, Aswm2,req)
The force in shear reinforcement caused by shear and torsion effect can be calculated according to formula
Fswd = [|TEd| / (2 ∙ Ak ) + VEd / (ns ∙ z)] ∙ (st / cot θ)
The maximum force which, can be carried by shear reinforcement is give by formula
Fswd,max = Aswt / fywd
where
- 217 -
Chapter 7

the design value of torsional cracking moment, see
TRd,c
"Design shear reinforcement for torsion" on page 214
VEd

the design shear resistance of the member without
VRd,c shear reinforcement, see "Design of shear rein-
forcement for shear forces" on page 210
Maximum of torsional resistance moment, see "Design
TRd,max
shear reinforcement for torsion" on page 214
the design value of the maximum shear force which
can be sustained by the member, limited by crushing of
VRd,max
the compression struts, see "Design of shear rein-
forcement for shear forces" on page 210
the area enclosed by the centre-lines of the thin-walled
Ak closed cross-section, including inner hollow areas, see
"Calculation of basic characteristics" on page 411
inner lever arm of cross-section recalculated to dir-
z ection of shear forces resultant, see "Inner lever arm
for shear check" on page 407
Angle between concrete compression strut and beam
axis perpendicular to the shear force, see "Angle
θ
between concrete compression strut and beam axis"
on page 156
Statically required cross-sectional area of the shear
Aswm.req
reinforcement per meter
the cross-sectional area of the shear reinforcement cal-
culated from inputted parameters in design default,
Asw = ns ∙0,25 ∙ π ∙ dss 2
the cross-sectional area of the shear reinforcement cal-

culated from inputted parameters in design default,
Aswt see "Design Defaults" on page 325
Asw = 0,25 ∙ π ∙ dss 2
diameter of stirrups loaded from Concrete setting or

dss
Concrete data, see "Design defaults" on page 163
number of cuts (shear links) loaded from Concrete set-
ns ting or Concrete data, see "Design defaults" on
page 163
the spacing of the stirrups in longitudinal direction,
sl.req
if Aswm2,req > Aswm1,req: sl,req = Aswt / Aswm,req
- 218 -
Design
otherwise: sl,req = Asw / Aswm,req

Torsional longitudinal reinforcement
Additional tensile forces caused by torsion are calculated from the equation 6.28 in EN 1992-1-1
Fsdt = |TEd| / (2 ∙ Ak ) ∙ uk ∙ cot θ
where
T
torsional moment
Ed
A the area enclosed by the centre-lines of the thin-walled closed cross-section, including inner
k hollow areas, see "Calculation of basic characteristics" on page 411
circumference of the area enclosed by the centre-lines of the thin-walled closed cross-section, see "Calculation
uk
basic characteristics for shear" on page 408
Angle between concrete compression strut and beam axis perpendicular to the shear force, see "Angle between
θ
concrete compression strut and beam axis" on page 156
The required cross-sectional area of the longitudinal reinforcement for torsion is calculated in case, that sum of design axial
forces (NEd) and Additional tensile forces caused by torsion (F sdt ) is tensile (bigger than 0). This area is calculated by using
biaxial method for design, see "Biaxial method for design" on page 206 with following preconditions:
l reinforcement is designed only for pure tension

l longitudinal reinforcement is equally distributed on each edge of cross-section
In a simplified way said, the longitudinal reinforcement for torsion is designed according to formula below,
ΔAs = Ftsd / σsd
where
Fsdt additional tensile force caused by torsion

σsd design value of stress in longitudinal reinforcement
Additional tensile forces caused by shear forces is taken into account in design of statically
required reinforcement by shifting of bending moments, see "Additional tensile forces
caused by shear and torsion (shifting of bending moments)" on page 165
- 219 -
Chapter 7
Detailing provisions in Design
Introduction to reinforcement design on detailing provisions
The Reinforcement design in Concrete in SCIA Engineer allows to design reinforcement not only on acting forces, but also
according detailing provision requirements from EN 1992-1-1 including national annexes specifications. For details about
supported national annexes see "National annexes theoretical background".
Detailing provisions used in design of reinforcement can be activated or deactivated in "Concrete settings (structure)".
Parameters for detailing are on two places according if they are or they are not national annex dependable.
l in Concrete settings (structure) - general parameters

l in National annex editor - national dependent parameters
Detailing provisions for shear reinforcement are independent on detailing provisions for longitudinal reinforcement
The difference between Check for detailing provisions and Design for detailing provisions is in recalculation. In check are dir-
ectly compared spacings, amounts, ratios with values from real reinforcement. In design are these spacing, amounts, ratios
converted to the area of reinforcement in mm2 (longitudinal) or mm2/m (shear).
Shear reinforcement design on detailing provisions

Statically required shear reinforcement is compared with shear reinforcement calculated with detailing provisions. Final
shear reinforcement is calculated by formula
Aswsm,req = max(Aswsm,stat ; Aswm,min)
where
Aswsm,stat statically required shear reinforcement, for details about calculation see "Shear reinforcement design"
Aswm,min shear reinforcement according to detailing provisions
Maximal area of shear reinforcement according to detailing provision is calculated too. When Aswsm,req < Aswm,max , error
message is displayed.
Error: Provided shear reinforcement Aswsm,req exceeded maximal value Aswm,max .
Shear reinforcement design on detailing provisions for beam
Minimal shear reinforcement according to detailing provisions for beam is calculated according to formula
Aswm,min = max(Asw,long,min; Asw,trans,min; Asw,ρ,min; Asw,tor,min)
where
Asw,long,min minimal area of shear reinforcement from maximum longitudinal spacing 9.2.2(6)
Asw,trans,min minimal area of shear reinforcement from maximum transverse spacing 9.2.2(8)
Asw,ρ,min minimal area of shear reinforcement from minimal ratio 9.2.2(5)
Asw,tor,min ) minimal area of shear reinforcement for torsion 9.2.3(3)
- 220 -
Design
Minimal area of shear reinforcement from maximum

longitudinal spacing 9.2.2(6)
Based on maximum longitudinal spacing of shear links which is defined in clause 9.2.2(6).
Asw,long,min = 1 / sl,max ∙ π ∙ ϕ2 / 4 ∙ ns
where
sl,max Maximum longitudinal spacing of shear links according to clause 9.2.2(6)

ϕ Diameter of shear reinforcement
ns Number of cuts in one shear link

transverse spacing 9.2.2(8)
Based on formula 9.8N from EN 1992-1-1
sst,max,lim = min(Coeffst,max,A ∙ d; Coeffst,max,B)
Where
Coeff First coefficient for maximal allowed transverse spacing, can be changed in National annex setting.
st,max,A Default value 0,75
Coeff Second coefficient for maximal allowed transverse spacing, can be changed in National annex setting.
st,max,B Default value 0,6 m
d Effective height of cross-section recalculated to the shear forces resultant
Final minimal area is calculated by

Asw,trans,min = 1 / sst,max,lim ∙ π ∙ ϕ2 / 4 ∙ ns
where

Minimal area of shear reinforcement from minimal ratio

9.2.2(5)
Based on formula 9.5N from EN 1992-1-1
ρw,min = Coeffρw,min ∙ √fck / fywk
where
Coeffρw,min Coefficient for minimal ratio, can be changed in National annex setting. Default value 0,08
fck Characteristic cylinder concrete strength in [MPa]
fywk Characteristic yield strength of shear reinforcement in [MPa]
- 221 -
Chapter 7

Asw,ρ,min = ρw,min ∙ bw ∙ sin α
where
ρw,min Minimal shear reinforcement ratio according to clause 9.2.2(5)

bw Minimum width of cross-section in tensile area
α Angle of stirrup links - 90 ° for vertical stirrups
Minimal area of shear reinforcement for torsion 9.2.3(3)

Based on statement from clause 9.2.3(3) from EN 1992-1-1. It can be transformed to formula
ssl,tor,max = min(u / 8; sl,max ; bmin)
where
u Outer perimeter of equivalent thin-walled cross-section

bmin Lesser dimension of the beam cross-section

Asw,tor,min = 1 / ssl,tor,max ∙ π ∙ ϕ2 / 4 ∙ ns,tor
where
ssl,tor,max Maximum longitudinal spacing of shear links for torsion according to clause 9.2.3(3)
ns,tor Number of cuts effective on torsion (for normal stirrups (type of stirrup = Single) ns,tor = 1)
Minimal area of shear reinforcement for torsion is calculated only when torsion force is
presented in the section.
Maximal area of shear reinforcement from maximal

ratio 6.2.3(3)
Maximal area of shear reinforcement is calculated from maximal ratio by modification of equation 6.12 from clause 6.2.3(3),
where s = 1 m.
Asw,ρ,max = 1 / 2 ∙ α cw ∙ ν1 ∙ bw ∙ fcd / fywd
where
αcw Coefficient taking account of the state of the stress in the compression chord
ν1 Strength reduction factor for concrete cracked in shear
bw Minimum width of cross-section in the tensile area
fcd Design concrete strength
fywd Design yield strength of the shear reinforcement
- 222 -
Design
When Aswsm,req < Aswm,max , error message is displayed.
The values of coefficients or calculation procedures used in all detailing provisions can be
modified by National annexes, for details see "National annexes theoretical background".
Shear reinforcement design on detailing provisions for column
Minimal shear reinforcement according to detailing provisions for beam is calculated according to formula
Aswm,min = max(Aswc,ϕ,min; Aswc,long,min)
where
Aswc,ϕ,min minimal area of shear reinforcement from minimal bar diameter 9.5.3(1)
Aswc,long,min minimal area of shear reinforcement from maximum longitudinal spacing 9.5.3(3)
Minimal area of shear reinforcement from minimal bar

diameter 9.5.3(1)
Based on minimal bar diameter requirement which is defined in clause 9.5.3(1). It can be transformed to formula
ϕt,min,col = max(dsc,min; xdsc ∙ ϕl)
where
dsc,min Minimal diameter of transverse reinforcement according to clause 9.5.3(1)

xdsc Multiplication of the maximum diameter of the longitudinal bars
ϕl Maximal diameter of the longitudinal bars

Aswc,ϕ,min = π ∙ ϕt,min,col2 / 4 ∙ ns
where
ϕt,min,col Minimal diameter of transverse reinforcement according to clause 9.5.3(1)


longitudinal spacing 9.5.3(3)
Based on minimal allowed longitudinal spacing of transversal reinforcement which is defined in clause 9.5.3(3). It can be
transformed to formula
scl,tmax = min(Coeffcl,max,A ∙ ϕl; bmin; Coeffcl,max,B)
where
- 223 -
Chapter 7
Coeff First coefficient for maximum allowed longitudinal spacing, can be changed in National annex setting.
cl,max,A Default value 20
Coeff Second coefficient for maximum allowed longitudinal spacing, can be changed in National annex setting.
cl,max,B Default value 0,4 m
bmin Lesser dimension of the column cross-section
ϕl Maximal diameter of the longitudinal bars

Aswc,long,min = 1 / sscl,tmax ∙ π ∙ ϕ2 / 4 ∙ ns
where
sscl,tmax Maximum longitudinal spacing of transversal reinforcement according to clause 9.5.3(3)

Maximal area of shear reinforcement from maximal

ratio 6.2.3(3)
Maximal area of shear reinforcement is calculated from maximal ratio by modification of equation 6.12 from clause 6.2.3(3),
where s = 1 m.
Asw,ρ,max = 1 / 2 ∙ α cw ∙ ν1 ∙ bw ∙ fcd / fywd
where
αcw Coefficient taking account of the state of the stress in the compression chord
ν1 Strength reduction factor for concrete cracked in shear
bw Minimum width of cross-section in the tensile area
fcd Design concrete strength
fywd Design yield strength of the shear reinforcement
When Aswsm,req < Aswm,max , error message is displayed.
Longitudinal reinforcement design on detailing provisions

All detailing provisions, which are selected in Concrete settings, see "Concrete settings (structure)" are calculated and dis-
played in detailing output, therefore three types of minimal and maximal areas are prepared to distinguish (by type of rein-
forcement statical x structural x torsion) if calculated detailing area will be taken to account.
l Statically based minimal and maximal areas - As,min, As,max

l Structural based minimal and maximal areas - As1,min, A1s,max
- 224 -
Design
l Minimal area from torsion - As,tor,min
Calculated areas are compared with statically required longitudinal reinforcement and additional longitudinal reinforcement
for torsion according the table below.
As,stat > 0
YES NO
As,det,min = max(As,min; As1,min; As,tor,min) As,det,min = max(As1,min; As,tor,min)
YES
As,det,max = min(As,max ; As1,max ) As,det,max = As1,max
As,tor > 0
As,det,min = max(As,min; As1,min) As,det,min = As1,min
NO
As,det,max = min(As,max ; As1,max ) As,det,max = As1,max
Recalculation to each edge, based on theirs effective length (centre-to-centre distance of the corner bars) is done before
comparison, so for each edge is compared its own minimal and maximal area of reinforcement.
Recalculation to edges
For each edge is calculated its effective length
uedge,i = bi - bl,i - br,i
bl(r),i = ci - ϕs - ϕl / 2
where
bi Length of i-th edge

bl,i Edge length curtailment from the left
br,i Edge length curtailment from the right
ci Concrete cover to the edge before and after evaluated edge, because it can be different from left and right
ϕs Diameter of stirrup
ϕl Diameter of longitudinal bar on evaluated edge
- 225 -
Chapter 7
Effective perimeter is calculated as sum of effective lengths for each edge.

ucirc = ∑uedge,i
Area of reinforcement for edge is than calculated by general formula as

As,min,i = uedge,i / ucirc ∙ As,min
This area for edge is than compared with statically required and torsional reinforcement.
For detailing provisions based on statical reinforcement are to the calculation of ucirc taken
only edges which contains some statically required reinforcement.
For detailing provisions based on structural reinforcement are to the calculation of u circ
taken all edges.
Longitudinal reinforcement design on detailing provisions for beam and rib
played in detailing output.
- 226 -
Design
Minimal area of reinforcement from minimal ratio

9.2.1.1(1)
According the equation 9.1N from EN 1992-1-1
As,min = max(CoeffAsmin,2 ∙ fctm ∙ bt ∙ d / fyk ; CoeffAsmin,1 ∙ bt ∙ d
where
Coeff Second coefficient for minimal ratio of reinforcement, can be changed in National annex setting. Default
Asmin,2 value 0,26
Coeff First coefficient for minimal ratio of reinforcement, can be changed in National annex setting. Default
Asmin,1 value 0,0013
fctm Mean tensile strength of concrete
bt Average value of cross-section width in tensile area
d Effective depth of cross-section
fyk Characteristic yield strength of the reinforcement
This detailing provision is applicative only on statically required reinforcement.
Minimal area of reinforcement from maximum axis dis-

tance between bars (Independent)
Asc,min = ucirc / slb,max ∙ π ∙ ϕ2 / 4
where
ucirc Effective perimeter of cross-section, for details see "Recalculation to edges"

slb,max Maximal axis distance between bars
ϕ Diameter of longitudinal reinforcement
This detailing provision is applicative always, regardless on statically required reinforcement or torsional reinforcement.
As,min1 = Asc,min
Minimal area of reinforcement for torsion 9.2.3(4)

As,tor,min = n ∙ π ∙ ϕ2 / 4
where
n Minimal amount of bars for torsion, default value 6

Maximal area of reinforcement from maximal ratio

9.2.1.1(3)
As,max = CoeffAsmax ∙ Ac
- 227 -
Chapter 7
where
Coeff Coefficient for maximal ratio of reinforcement, can be changed in National annex setting. Default value
Asmax 0,04
Ac Area of cross-section
Maximal area of reinforcement from minimum clear bar

distance between bars 8.2(2)
Based on minimal clear bar distance between bars which is defined in clause 8.2(2).
ss-s,min,lim = max(k1 ∙ ϕ; dg + k2; slb,min)
where
k1 Factor for multiplication the diameter of reinforcement , default value 1

dg Stone diameter of concrete
k2 Coefficient to be added to stone diameter, default value 5 mm
slb,min Minimal bar distance, default value 20 mm
Maximal area of reinforcement is than recalculated directly to the edges by formula

As1,max,edge,i = [uedge,i / (ss-s,min,lim + ϕ) + 1] ∙ π ∙ ϕ2 / 4
where
uedge,i Effective length of edge

ss-s,min,lim Minimal clear bar distance according to 8.2(2)
Longitudinal reinforcement design on detailing provisions for column
Minimal area of reinforcement from minimal ratio 9.5.2

(2)
According the equation 9.12N from EN 1992-1-1
- 228 -
Design
As,min = max(CoeffAsmin,2 ∙ NEd / fyd; CoeffAsmin,1 ∙ Ac
where
Asmin,2 value 0,2 %
Asmin,1 value 0,1
NEd Design axial compression force
fyd Design yield strength of the reinforcement
This detailing provision is applicative only on edges where is designed statically required reinforcement. The reinforcement
is distributed to the edges according next formula.
As,min,i = As,min ∙ As,stat,i / As,stat
where
As,min,i Area of reinforcement from minimal ratio recalculated to the i-th edge of the cross-section
As,min Total area of reinforcement from minimal ratio
As,stat,i Statically required area of reinforcement on the i-th edge of the cross-section
As,stat Total area of statically required reinforcement
Minimal area of reinforcement from maximum axis dis-

tance between bars (Independent)
Asc,min = ucirc / slb,max ∙ π ∙ ϕ2 / 4
where
ucirc Effective perimeter of cross-section, for details see "Recalculation to edges"

slb,max Maximal axis distance between bars
As,min1 = Asc,min
The recalculation to edges is done according the ratio of effective length of edge and effective perimeter, for details see
"Recalculation to edges"
Minimal area of reinforcement from minimal bar dia-

meter 9.5.2(1)
Asϕt,min = nlc,min ∙ π ∙ ϕmin,col2 / 4
where
- 229 -
Chapter 7
nlc,min Minimal number of bars in column

ϕmin,col Minimal bar diameter, 8 mm by default. Can be changed by national annex
In this calculation is incorrectly displayed multiplication by nlc,min. There have to be minimal

number of bars (number of edges) as in detailing provision 9.5.2(4)
This detailing provision is applicative always, but recalculation to the edges is done according the existence of statically
required reinforcement on the evaluated edge and the existence of statically required reinforcement on neighbouring
edges. The value of Asϕt,min,i is multiplication by coefficient of neighbouring edges.
Asϕt,min,i multiplicand
As,stat,i > 0 As,stat,i = 0
No As,stat on neighbouring edges 2 1
As,stat on the left or right neighbouring edge 1,5 0,5
As,stat on both neighbouring edges 1 0
Minimal area of reinforcement from minimal number of

bars 9.5.2(4)
Asnc,min = nmin ∙ π ∙ ϕ2 / 4
where
Minimal number of bars in column =

nmin
number of edges of cross-section
ϕ Bar diameter
This detailing provision is applicable always, but recalculation to the edges is done in same way as for detailing 9.5.2(1) by
using multiplicand based on neighbouring edges.
Minimal area of reinforcement for torsion 9.2.3(4)

This detailing is calculated only when torsion load is exist.
As,tor,min = n ∙ π ∙ ϕ2 / 4
where
Minimal number of bars for torsion. Number is calculated from the effective lengths of edges, with spacing between
n bars not greater than 350 mm by default. The minimal number of bars is defined as number of edges of cross-sec-
tion.
ϕ Bar diameter
The recalculation to edges is done according the ratio of effective length of edge and effective perimeter, for details see
"Recalculation to edges"
- 230 -
Design
Maximal area of reinforcement from maximal ratio 9.5.2

(3)
As,max,col = CoeffAs,max,col ∙ Ac
where
Coeff Coefficient for maximal ratio of reinforcement, can be changed in National annex setting. Default
As,max,col value 0,04

where


where

Longitudinal reinforcement design on detailing provisions for BeamSlab
- 231 -
Chapter 7
Minimal area of reinforcement from minimal ratio

9.3.1.1(1)
This clause is implemented as "Use clause 9.2.1.1(1)". According the equation 9.1N from EN 1992-1-1
As,min = max(CoeffAsmin,2 ∙ fctm ∙ bt ∙ d / fyk ; CoeffAsmin,1 ∙ bt ∙ d
where
Asmin,2 value 0,26
Asmin,1 value 0,0013
fctm Mean tensile strength of concrete
bt Average value of cross-section width in tensile area
d Effective depth of cross-section
fyk Characteristic yield strength of the reinforcement
Minimal area of reinforcement from maximum distance

between bars 9.3.1.1(3)
smax,slab = min(Coeffsmax,slab,A ∙ h; Coeffsmax,slab,B)
where
Coeff First coefficient for maximum allowed axis bar distance, can be changed in National annex setting.
smax,slab,A Default value 3,0
Coeff Second coefficient for maximum allowed axis bar distance, can be changed in National annex setting.
smax,slab,B Default value 400 mm
h Height of the slab
Calculated smax,slab is than used for calculation minimal area of reinforcement.
Asc,min = ucirc / smax,slab ∙ π ∙ ϕ2 / 4
where
Effective perimeter of cross-section, where only top and bottom surface are taken to calculation, for details
ucirc
see "Recalculation to edges"
s
Maximal axis distance between bars
max,slab
- 232 -
Design
Maximal area of reinforcement from maximal ratio

9.3.1.1(1)
This clause is implemented as "Use clause 9.2.1.1(3)".
As,max = CoeffAsmax ∙ Ac
where
Coeff Coefficient for maximal ratio of reinforcement, can be changed in National annex setting. Default value
Asmax 0,04

where


where

Reinforcement design 1D - graphical output
- 233 -
Chapter 7
Graphical output
When user presses button refresh then calculation is done and the results are displayed in 3D window as graph of values
over length of selected members.Below is description of possible output values (see following figures).
Required
Type of values Required contain results related to the required reinforcement
As,req - The area of required longitudinal reinforcement including detailing provisions
Aswm,req - The area of required shear reinforcement including detailing provisions
UC (As,max) - The ratio between area of required longitudinal reinforcement and area of maximal allowed area from detail-
ing provisions, UC (As,max) = As,req / As,max
UC (Aswm,max) - The ratio between area of required shear reinforcement and area of maximal allowed area from detail-
ing provisions, UC (Aswm,max) = Aswm,req / Aswm,max
As,req (ϕ) - The area of required longitudinal reinforcement displayed as: "number of bars ϕ diameter of bars"; when * - min-
imal amount of reinforcement from detailing provision is used, when n/a - UC( As,max) > 1, reinforcement exceed maximal
allowed area from detailing provisions and cannot be transformed to number of bars
Aswm,req (ϕ/m) - The area of required shear reinforcement displayed as: "ϕ diameter of stirrup / longitudinal spacing of stir-
rups, (number of stirrup cuts)"
Provided
Type of values Provided contain results related to the provided reinforcement
As,add,req - The area of additional required longitudinal reinforcement. It is needed to add to provided reinforcement if it is
insufficient. As,add,req = As,req - As,prov. Displayed only if As,req > As,prov. The design goal is to have zero in this value. In
that case will be all required reinforcement covered by provided reinforcement.
As,prov - The area of provided longitudinal reinforcement. Sum of the basic and additional reinforcement
UC (As,req) - The ratio between area of required longitudinal reinforcement and area of provided longitudinal rein-
forcement, UC (As,req) = As,req / As,prov
- 234 -
Design 2D - Introduction
UC (As,max) - The ratio between area of provided longitudinal reinforcement and area of maximal allowed area from detail-
ing provisions, UC (As,max) = As,prov / As,max
As,prov (ϕ) - The area of provided longitudinal reinforcement displayed as: "number of basic bars ϕ diameter of basic bars +
number of additional bars ϕ diameter of additional bars"
As,add,req (ϕ) - The area of additional required longitudinal reinforcement displayed as: "number of bars ϕ diameter of
bars"
Required ∩ Provided
The results for required and provided reinforcement together
As,req - The area of required longitudinal reinforcement including detailing provisions - same graph as in Required type of
values
As,req ∩ As,prov - The areas of required and provided longitudinal reinforcement together
As,prov - The area of provided longitudinal reinforcement. Sum of basic and additional reinforcement - same graph as in
Provided type of values
SCIA Engineer allows to design reinforcement to 2D members which are loaded by general internal forces (n, my , mz , vy ,
vz , mx ) . There is a possibility to design:
l statically required longitudinal reinforcement, see "Design of longitudinal reinforcement" on page 201

l longitudinal reinforcement including detailing provisions "Design As - Detailing provisions" on page 260
l statically required shear reinforcement, see "Design of shear reinforcement" on page 209
l shear reinforcement including detailing provisions Detailing provisions
and similarly as for 1D is possible to use the concept of Provided reinforcement
Internal forces 2D - Introduction
- 235 -
Chapter 7
As the first step for design and check procedure of 2D concrete is necessary to prepare dimensional 2D forces for concrete
structures. These dimensional forces will be calculated by Baumann transformation formula. These forces will be related to
LCS of 2D mesh element it means to direction XY of LCS. The main reason why to recalculate forces coming from FEM ana-
lysis is take into account also effect of torsional moment to calculation.
The following precondition will be used for calculation of 2D dimensional forces in one node of 2D member:
l the dimensional internal forces will be calculated only in direction of reinforcement. The different directions for lower and
upper surface can be used
l Calculation in two directions + direction of concrete strut
l The directions of calculation will be defined in Design default in Concrete setting or concrete member data
l Baumann’s transformation formulas will be used in calculation
l the angle of concrete strut will be optimized to force in this direction will be the smallest.
l the dimensional forces with influence of additional tensile force caused by shear will be calculated - effect of moment shift-
ing
Theoretical background
The following procedure will be used for calculation of dimensional forces 2D:
l Definition of input value for calculation

l Calculation of inner lever arm
l Calculation of normal forces at both surfaces of 2D element
l Calculation of principal forces at both surfaces of 2D element
l Recalculation of principal forces at both surfaces to inputted direction (Baumann’s transformation formula)
l Optimization of angle of concrete strut
l Calculation of virtual forces at lower(upper) surface for inputted direction and direction of concrete strut for upper(lower
surface)
l Recalculation of forces at surfaces to centre of gravity of cross-section of 2D member
Definition of input value for calculation

The following value are defined as basic forces in centres:
l nx(y) - normal force in node of 2D member in x(y) direction

l mx(y) - bending moment in node of 2D member in x(y) direction
l nxy - membrane shear force in node of 2D member
l mxy - twisting moment in node of 2D member
l h - thickness of 2D element
l α x - angle of x axis of LCS of FEM element. The angle of x axis will be depends on selected LCS system to which forces
will be calculated (LCS of FEM element, LCS of 2D element, UCS…)
l α inp,1(2)+ - the first (second) inputted direction of calculation at upper surface defined from x axis of LCS of FEM element
l α inp,1(2)- - the first (second) inputted direction of calculation at lower surface defined from x axis of LCS of FEM element
l θα Minimal angle between angle of inputted direction and angle of concrete strut, default value will be 15 °
- 236 -
l as+(-) Distance of the centroid of the upper(lower) defined longitudinal reinforcement from upper (lower) edge of 2D ele-
ment. For surface with two layer of reinforcement
as+(-) = cover+(-) + ds1+(-)
l d1(2)+(-) Diameter of longitudinal reinforcement in first(second) direction at upper(lower) surface

l cover+(-) Cover of longitudinal reinforcement at upper(lower) surface calculated to surface of the closer bar to the surface
l z - Inner lever arm for upper (lower) surface.
l z+(-) - The position for recalculation forces at surfaces to centre of gravity of cross-section of 2D member.
Calculation lever arm for 2D element

The lever arm is necessary to know for calculation surface forces. The a special cross-section set has to be created for cal-
culation of lever arm (value z). Value z will be calculated in direction of angle of first principal moment (the forces will be recal-
culated to this direction and cross- section set will be created in this direction).The reinforcement will be designed for
recalculated forces and from designed reinforcement inner lever arm will be calculated
If value z is not calculated (forces are zero or equilibrium is not found) the value z will be calculated according to formula
z = 0,9 ∙ d
where
effective height , which is calculated according to formula

d
IF mα ≥ 0 then d = dlo else d = dup
the effective height for lower surface is distance of centroid of inputted element at
d lower surface for whole element from upper edge of the element
lo
dlo = h - as-
the effective height for upper surface is distance of centroid of inputted element at
d upper surface for whole element from lower edge of the element
up
dup = h - as+
The distance of centre of compressive concrete and centre of tensile reinforcement to centre of cross-section has to be cal-
culated too
z = z+ + z-
where
the part of lever arm for upper surface (above centre of cross-section)
IF mα ≥ 0 then z+ is distance of centre of compressive concrete to centre of CSS
z
IF mα < 0 then z+ is distance of centre of tensile reinforcement to centre of CSS
+
IF value z is not calculated (forces are zero or equilibrium is not found) then z = 0,45
∙d
the part of lever arm for lower surface (under centre of cross-section)
IF mα ≥ 0 then z- is distance of centre of tensile reinforcement to centre of CSS
z- IF mα < 0 then z- is distance of centre of compressive concrete to centre of CSS
∙d
- 237 -
Chapter 7
The forces for calculation of z will be will be calculated according to formulas below
mα = mx ∙ cos2(α) + my ∙ sin2(α) + mxy ∙ sin(2 ∙ α)
nα = nx ∙ cos2(α) + ny ∙ sin2(α) + nxy ∙ sin(2 ∙ α)
Calculation of normal forces at both surfaces of 2D element

The inputted internal forces will be recalculated to both surfaces according the following formulas
nx-(+) = nx / 2 +(-) mx / z
ny-(+) = ny / 2 +(-) my / z
nxy-(+) = nxy / 2 +(-) mxy / z
Calculation of principal forces at both surfaces of 2D element

The principal forces at both surfaces will be calculated according to the following formulas
nI∓ = (nx∓ + ny∓ ) / 2 + 1/2 ∙ √((nx∓ + ny∓ ) 2 + 4 ∙ nxy,∓ )
nII∓ = (nx∓ + ny∓ ) / 2 - 1/2 ∙ √((nx∓ + ny∓ ) 2 + 4 ∙ nxy,∓ )
and direction of first principal force will be calculated according to formula

α I∓ = 0,5 ∙ tan-1((2 ∙ nxy∓ ) / (nx∓ - ny∓ ))
Recalculation of principal forces at both surfaces to inputted (Baumann’s transformation

formula)
The recalculation the principal forces to inputted direction will be done separately for both surfaces with using Baumann’s
transformation formula
nEds,i∓ = (nI∓ ∙ sin(α j∓ ) ∙ sin(α k∓ ) + nII∓ ∙ cos(α j∓ ) ∙ cos(α k∓ )) / (sin(α j∓ - α i∓ ) ∙ sin(α k∓ - α i∓ ))
where
index of direction (direction for recalculation of forces) i, j, k, i = 1,2,3,1. For

example for lower surface and for calculation of forces in second direction α 2- (i
i, j, = 2, j = 3, k = 1) the formula will be following
k, i
nEds,2- = (nI- ∙ sin(α 3-) ∙ sin(α 1-) + nII- ∙ cos(α 3-) ∙ cos(α 1-)) / (sin(α 3- - α 2-) ∙ sin
(α 1- - α 2-))
angle between inputted direction or direction of concrete strut and direction of
first principal forces at lower or upper surface
α l The first inputted direction: α 1∓ = α inp,1∓ - α I∓
i,j,k±
l The second inputted direction: α 2∓ = α inp,2∓ - α I∓
l Direction of concrete strut: α 3∓ = α con∓ - α I∓
the direction of concrete strut at lower (upper) surface. This value can be cal-
culated for all states of stresses excepted of hyperbolic state of stress (n1∓ > 0
α and n2∓ < 0) according to formula: α con∓ = 0,5 ∙ (α inp,1∓ + α inp,2∓ ). For hyper-
con∓ bolic state of stress (n1∓ > 0 and n2∓ < 0) the angle of concrete strut should be
find by optimization method , see next chapter. For the angle of concrete strut,
the following conditions have to be fulfilled:
- 238 -
l (α inp,1∓ + n ∙ 180°) - Δα ≥ α con∓ ≥ (α inp,1∓ + n ∙ 180°) + Δα; n = 0,1,2

Optimization of angle of concrete strut

For hyperbolic state of stress (n1∓ > 0 and n2∓ < 0) the angle of concrete strut α con∓ should be find by optimization methods.
The two methods for optimization of angle of concrete strut will be available:
The force in concrete strut will be compressive and the smallest (nEds,3∓ < 0 and nEds,3∓ = minimum). The solution can be
based on derivation of the following equation.
nEds,3∓ = (nI∓ ∙ sin(α 1∓ ) ∙ sin(α 2∓ ) + nII∓ ∙ cos(α 1∓ ) ∙ cos(α 2∓ )) / (sin(α 1∓ - x) ∙ sin(α 2∓ - x))
d/dx nEds,3∓ (x) = {cos(α 1∓ - x) ∙ [nII∓ ∙ cos (α 1∓ ) ∙ cos (α 2∓ ) + nI∓ ∙ sin (α 1∓ ) ∙ sin (α 2∓ )]} / [sin (α 1∓ - x)2 ∙ sin(α 2∓ - x)2] + {cos
(α 2∓ - x) ∙ [nII∓ ∙ cos (α 1∓ ) ∙ cos (α 2∓ ) + nI∓ ∙ sin (α 1∓ ) ∙ sin (α 2∓ )]} / [sin (α 1∓ - x)2 ∙ sin(α 2∓ - x)2] = 0
The force in concrete strut will be compressive and the sum of all compressive forces in all direction at one surface will be the
smallest (nEds,3∓ < 0 and ∑nEds,i∓ = minimum (for nEds,i∓ ≤ 0)). The optimization method for finding this angle of concrete
strut is not developed.
For the angle of concrete strut, the following conditions have to be fulfilled:

Calculation of virtual forces at lower(upper) surface for inputted direction and direction of
concrete strut for upper (lower surface)
The virtual forces will be calculated according to Baumann’s transformation formula, where instead of angle of concrete
strut angle of direction for upper or lower surface will be added
l nEds,virt,1-
IF α inp,1- = α inp,1+
THEN nEds,virt,1- = nEds,1-
ELSE nEds,virt,1- = (nI- ∙ sin(α 2-) ∙ sin(α 1+) + nII- ∙ cos(α 2-) ∙ cos(α 1+)) / (sin(α 2- - α 1-) ∙ sin(α 1+ - α 1-))
(Baumann’s transformation formula where α 3- = α 1+)
nEds,virt,2-
ELSE nEds,virt,2- = (nI- ∙ sin(α 2+) ∙ sin(α 1-) + nII- ∙ cos(α 2+) ∙ cos(α 1-)) / (sin(α 2+ - α 2-) ∙ sin(α 1- - α 2-))
l nEds,virt,3-
ELSE nEds,virt,3- = (nI- ∙ sin(α 2+) ∙ sin(α 1-) + nII- ∙ cos(α 2-) ∙ cos(α 1-)) / (sin(α 2- - α 3+) ∙ sin(α 1- - α 3+))
l nEds,virt,1+
- 239 -
Chapter 7
IF α inp,1+ = α inp,1-
THEN nEds,virt,1+ = nEds,1+
ELSE nEds,virt,1+ = (nI+ ∙ sin(α 2-) ∙ sin(α 1+) + nII+ ∙ cos(α 2-) ∙ cos(α 1+)) / (sin(α 2+ - α 1+) ∙ sin(α 1- - α 1+))
(Baumann’s transformation formula where α 3+ = α 1-)
l nEds,virt,2+
THEN nEds,virt,2-= nEds,2-
nEds,virt,3+
THEN nEds,virt,3+ = nsurface,3+
ELSE nEds,virt,3+ = (nI+ ∙ sin(α 2+) ∙ sin(α 1+) + nII+ ∙ cos(α 2+) ∙ cos(α 1+)) / (sin(α 2+ - α 3-) ∙ sin(α 1+ - α 3-))
Recalculation of forces at surfaces to centre of gravity of cross-section of 2D member

The forces will be recalculated to centre of gravity of cross-section of 2D member.
l Forces at centroid for direction inputted for upper surface
mEd,i = nEds,i- ∙ z- + nEds,virt,i+ ∙ z+
nEd,i = nEds,i- + nEds,virt,i+
l Forces at centroid for direction inputted for lower surface
mEd,i = nEds,virt,i- ∙ z- + nEds,i+ ∙ z+
nEd,i = nEds,virt,i- + nEds,,i+
Additional tensile force caused by shear-shifting

The additional tensile force caused by shear should be taken into account for design of reinforcement. The method based
on shifting of bending moments will be used. There is necessary to shift bending moment from basic forces in distance a = d
=Coeff d ∙ h (see clause 9.2.1.3(2) in EN 1992-1-1,). It follows that square subregion with dimension 2 ∙ a will be created
around selected point of mesh element and maximum bending moments inside of this square will be taken into account for
this point of mesh element.
- 240 -
Shifting is dependent on settings in Concrete setting > Solver settings > Internal forces > Internal forces ULS.
Command Internal forces 2D

The previous chapter says about the procedure of calculation internal forces for 2D members. Here the presentation pos-
sibilities are described. There is completely new item in the tree Concrete > Reinforcement design > 2D members > Internal
forces.
- 241 -
Chapter 7
There is also standard command for 2D with the following items.
- 242 -
Except typical general setting for command there are the following typical for 2D members
l Averaging of peak - check box YES/ NO

l Location - In centres / In nodes avg. / In nodes no avg. / In nodes avg. on macro
l System
l LCS mesh element - usually used and recommended
l Global - can be used in case of hyperbolic / parabolic shells and such atypical structures
l Type of values - there are five types of values for particular selection and its values
- 243 -
Chapter 7
l The explanation of type of values is the following:

l Design (centroid) - forces which are used for design of reinforcement calculated to centre of gravity of cross-section
and related to direction (1,2) and surface(+-); these forces are comparable with 1D solution in fact. The forces for
upper and lower surface are the same in case of directions(1,2) of designed reinforcement are the same. These
forces are calculated based on design (surface) forces and virtual forces
l Basic (centroid) - forces related to centre of gravity calculated purely on FEM (the same forces as are presented in
Results >2D members > 2D internal forces
l Basic (surface) - basic forces from FEM analysis recalculated to surface
l Principal (surface) - basic forces from surface recalculated to Principal forces in surfaces
l Design (surface) - recalculation of principal forces(surface) to inputted directions separately for both surfaces with
using Baumann’s transformation formula
l Standard results - check box set as default ON, drawing of iso-plots

l Results on sections - in case the sections are defined the results of internal forces can be evaluated on these items
l Result on edges - results of internal forces can be evaluated on all edges of the 2D members
Output
Graphical output
When user presses button refresh then calculation is done and the results are displayed in 3D window (See the following fig-
ure).
Graphical drawing in 3D window - mEd1+
- 244 -
Numerical output
As the check is based on Scia Design Form technology, three different outputs are available.
l Brief
l Standard
l Detailed
The selection of them is done via combo box Output in the property window of this check.
- 245 -
Chapter 7
Brief
Brief output is typical output of Program name where the values are printed into table based on selection from Type of val-
ues.
- 246 -
- 247 -
Chapter 7
Standard
Standard output is coming from Scia design Forms and includes the basic settings and major steps of calculation of design
forces.
Detailed
Detailed output is again coming from Scia design Forms and includes the basic settings and all detailed steps of calculation
of crack width.
- 248 -
- 249 -
Chapter 7
- 250 -
- 251 -
Chapter 7
- 252 -
Definition of provided reinforcement
It is feasible for user to start Design procedure by the definition of a provided reinforcement amount specifically per whole
structure of particular slab independently. Definition of the provided reinforcement is described in "Provided library" on
page 309
From the moment practical reinforcement has been added to a member, the total amount
of practical reinforcement is not accounted in Design (ULS) as the user reinforcement. This
means that the practical reinforcement (defined via 2D Meshes) doesn’t overwrite the
provide reinforcement and oppositely.’ As conclusion the practical reinforcement on 2D
member is not taken into account during Design As at all.
Design As - Theoretical background
There are the following basic precondition during design of longitudinal reinforcement for 2D members based on ULS:
l the longitudinal area of reinforcement will be designed only in two inputted direction.The different directions for lower and
upper surface can be used
l the first layer is always layer closest to surface and the second layer lies directly on the first layer
l the same layers are defined for both surfaces for walls
- 253 -
Chapter 7
l there is used basic principle of upper and lower face fro plates and walls. These notions had possessed their exact math-
ematical meaning, which had made them acceptable for Shells, too: the lower face had been the structural plane edge in
direction of the negative planar (local) axis (z-), the upper face having been opposite to it.
l there is a possibility to define principal and secondary layer reinforcement by setting in CMD
l the longitudinal reinforcement will be designed without influence of shear effect. Just the additional tensile forces caused
by shear is taken into account by shifting of bending moments, see clause 9.2.1.3(2) in EN 1992-1-1,
l the practical (user) reinforcement will not taken into account in the first step
l rectangular cross-section with one polygon and one material is taken into account,
l two surfaces reinforcement design of rectangular cross-section based on formulas loaded by nEd; mEd and vEd is con-
sidered
l in fact it is uni-axial method based on formulas only
l the angle of concrete strut will be optimized to force in this direction will be the smallest. In second step there will be more
method for optimization
Except of statically required longitudinal reinforcement (As.req), the program calculates provided longitudinal reinforcement
(As.req,bar). It is statically required longitudinal reinforcement area recalculated to real bar distances, where:
l diameter of longitudinal reinforcement is taken into account (cross-sectional area of bars with input diameter)
l number of bars is rounded to integer
Basic work-flow of calculation based on formulas is the following:
l determination of "as "; where cnom is nominal concrete cover for surface and ds is diameter of designed reinforcement for
surface.
as = c nom + 0,5 ∙ ds
l determination of "d"; where h is 2D member thickness
d = h - as
- 254 -
l calculation of compression zone xc
xc = (-nEd + As- ∙ σs- + As+ ∙ σs+) / (λ ∙ b ∙ η ∙ fcd)
l calculation of forces in components
Fc = λ ∙ b ∙ η ∙ σcc
Fs- = As- ∙ σs-
Fs+ = As+ ∙ σs+
l calculation of lever arm of forces in components
zc = 0,5 ∙ h - β ∙ xc
zs+ = 0,5 ∙ h - as+
zs- = -0,5 ∙ h + as-
l calculation of resistances and verification
nRd = Fc + Fs- + Fs+ ≥ nEd
mRd = -Fc ∙ zc + Fs- ∙ zs- + Fs+ ∙ zs+ ≥ mEd
So the main idea is to find such reinforcement areas to fulfil the last two formulas.
The same assumption are used as in the solution based on finding of equilibrium of plane by iterative process :
l Plane sections remain plane.

l Strain in bonded reinforcement, whether in tension or compression, is the same as the strain in the concrete at the same
level
l Tensile strength of the concrete is ignored.
l The stresses in the concrete in compression are given by the design stress–strain relationships ( bilinear or parabola-rect-
angular stress-strain diagram)
l The stresses in the reinforcing steel are given by the design stress–strain relationships (bilinear with or without inclined
horizontal branch stress-strain diagram)
Design As - Shear Reinforcement
The shear resistance of the member without shear reinforcement have to be designed and in case, that shear force cannot
be carried by the concrete, shear reinforcement has to be designed. The following preconditions will be used for design stat-
ically required shear reinforcement
l The statically required shear reinforcement will be design only for ULS
l The shear reinforcement will be designed only in direction of shear resultant, it means the bending moments and mem-
brane forces has to be recalculated to this direction
l The practical (user) shear reinforcement will not taken into account.
l The designed longitudinal reinforcement (including additional tensile force and detailing provisions) will be recalculated to
direction of shear resultant
l The inner lever arm and effective depth of cross-section will be calculated from plane of equilibrium in direction of shear
resultant
- 255 -
Chapter 7
There is general concept of “strut-and-tie” model for the prediction of shear effects in concrete. In this model, the top com-
pression and bottom tensile members represent the compressive concrete and tensile reinforcement, respectively. The pro-
cedure for design can be represented by diagram below:
The formulas which are used for the calculation of each component of this model are the following. Shear concrete capacity
in region cracked in bending – formula 6.2.a,b in EN 1992-1-1
vRd,c = [CRd,c ∙ k ∙ (100 ∙ ρl ∙ fck )1/3 + k1 ∙ σcp] ∙ b ∙ d
vRd,c,min = (νmin + k1 ∙ σcp) ∙ bw ∙ d
Maximal capacity of concrete compressive strut (vRd,max ) is determined according to formula 6.9 in EN 1992-1-1, because
as has been mentioned before, the angle of stirrups (θ) is always perpendicular to member axis.
vRd,max = (α cw ∙ b ∙ z ∙ ν1 ∙fcd) / (cot θ + tan θ)
Width of cross-section is set 1 m for 2D shear reinforcement design
Statically required shear reinforcement is not required when

vEd ≤ vRd,max and vEd ≤ vRd,c
Otherwise required cross- sectional area of the shear reinforcement per meter is calculated from the formula 6.8 in
EN 1992-1-1
Aswm,req = Asw,req / sl,req = vEd / (z ∙ fywd ∙ cot θ)
Angle of shear reinforcement α = 90 ° is used for 2D reinforcement design (reinforcement

can not be inclined).
Design value of shear force sustained by shear reinforcement (vRd,s ) is calculated according to formula 6.8 in EN 1992-1-1
vRd,s = Asw / s ∙ z ∙ fywd ∙ cot θ

vEd
vEd = √(vEd,x 2 + vEdy 2)
vEd,y(z) shear force in direction of y(z)-axis of LCS

vRd,c the design shear resistance of the member without shear reinforcement
v
Rd,c,min
k
k = 1 + √(200 / d) ≤ 2
ratio of tensile reinforcement calculated for both directions
ρx = Asl,x / (b ∙ d)
ρl
ρy = Asl,y / (b ∙ d)
ρl = (ρx ∙ ρy )1/2
- 256 -

σcp,1 = min(-nEd,x / Ac ; 0,2 ∙ fcd)

σcp
σcp,2 = min(-nEd,y / Ac ; 0,2 ∙ fcd)
σcp= (σcp,1 + σcp,2) / 2

b width of cross-section is set 1 m for 2D shear reinforcement design
d
Asl statically required tensile area of reinforcement, see "Design of longitudinal reinforcement" on page 201
νmin
ν
tion 6.6N in EN 1992-1-1
vRd,max
αcw
z
1 and 2 in clause 6.2.3(3) in EN 1992-1-1.
θ
vRd,s design value of the shear force which can be sustained by the yielding shear reinforcement.
A
swm.req
Asw = ns ∙0,25 ∙ π ∙ dss 2
number of cuts (shear links) loaded from Concrete setting or Concrete data, see "Design Defaults" on
ns
page 325
- 257 -
Chapter 7

sl.req
sl,req = Asw / Aswm,req
α angle of shear reinforcement is 90 ° in 2D reinforcement design
Design As - Check of compressive strut
Th third direction of reinforcement is not included in this calculation. Nevertheless there is verification of so called check of
compression strut. The internal forces which are calculated in direction of concrete strut have to be also checked and these
have to be carried by the concrete. The of depth of the compression zone will be calculated for each surface as average val-
ues from depth of compression zone for statically required reinforcement from both directions
xc,avg +(-) = 0,5 ∙ (xc1+(-) + xc,2+(-))
where
xc1+ depth of the compression zone calculated from statically required reinforcement
(-) in the first direction
xc2+ depth of the compression zone calculated from statically required reinforcement
(-) in the second direction
- 258 -
Design value of resistance of concrete compressive strut is calculated according to formula

nRd,sc+(-) = -Acc+(-) ∙ Redfcd . fcd
where
Acc+
the compression area at upper (lower surface)
(-)
Red the coefficient for reduction strength of the concrete in compressive concrete
fcd strut from concrete setup
fcd the design compressive strength of concrete
Check compression strut is fulfilled, if the conditions below is fulfilled

nEd,sc+(-) ≤ nRd,sc+(-)
with Unity check

UC = nEd,sc+(-) / nRd,sc+(-)
The check of compression strut is done only when:
l statically required reinforcement is designed in both directions (Asreq, 1(2)+(-) > 0

l the depth of compression zone is non-zero (xc,avg± > 0)
The output of Unity check from check of compression strut is mentioned only in Detailed output, see below.
- 259 -
Chapter 7
Design As - Detailing provisions

As was mentioned in the previous chapters there is also possibility to including detailing provisions during design routine. All
settings related to detailing provisions are available in Concrete settings (structure) and in Manager of national annexes. Cal-
culation of detailing provisions is dependent on member type. There are the following groups.
l Plate, Shell (Plate)

l Wall, Shell (Wall)
l Deep beam
All explanation of setting for detailing provisions for 2D members and activation of particular detailing provisions can be done
in chapter "Concrete settings (structure)" on page 51
Reinforcement diameter for detailing provisions

Three different approaches of using reinforcement diameters in case of existence provided reinforcement or not are imple-
mented
l Provided reinforcement is not used - diameters for detailing is used the same as for required reinforcement
l Provided reinforcement is used (but only basic)
l diameters for required reinforcement is used from additional,
l diameters for detailing reinforcement is used from basic reinforcement
l Provided reinforcement is used (both basic and additional)
l diameters comes from basic or additional, depends on if As,stat ≥ As,basic or not
As,req is calculated as max(As,stat ; As,det,min), where As,det,min is affected by As,prov ,
All 2D members
Longitudinal
Check minimal clear bar distance 8.2(2)

Calculation of maximum allowed area of reinforcement from minimum clear spacing of reinforcement bars

Longitudinal
Check minimal ratio of principal reinforcement 9.3.1.1(1)

Calculation itself is based on formulas from 9.2.1.1(1)
- 260 -
Check maximal ratio of principal reinforcement 9.3.1.1(1)

Calculation itself is based on formulas from 9.2.1.1(1)
Check minimal transverse ratio of secondary reinforcement 9.3.1.1(2)

Determination of principal or secondary reinforcement layer is defined via concrete member data
Check maximal spacing of principal and secondary longitudinal rein-

forcement 9.3.1.1(3)
There are different requirements for principal and secondary reinforcement
- 261 -
Chapter 7
Shear
Check minimal ratio of shear reinforcement 9.3.2(2)
Check minimal thickness of member with shear reinforcement 9.3.2(1)

There is only message that there is small depth and should be increased to design also shear reinforcement
Check maximal spacing of shear links 9.3.2(4)
- 262 -
Wall, Shell (Wall)

Longitudinal
Check minimal ratio of vertical reinforcement 9.6.2(1)
Check maximal ratio of vertical reinforcement 9.6.2(1)
Check maximal spacing of vertical reinforcement 9.6.2(3)
Check minimal ratio of horizontal reinforcement 9.6.3(1)
- 263 -
Chapter 7
Check maximal spacing of horizontal reinforcement 9.6.3(2)
Transverse
Check maximal spacing of shear links 9.6.4(1)
Check minimal spacing of shear links 9.6.4(2)
- 264 -
Deep beam
Longitudinal
Check minimal ratio of horizontal reinforcement 9.7(1)
Check maximal spacing of reinforcement 9.7(2)
National annexes are supported in detailing provisions. For more details about national
depended values, see pdf document "National annex for EN 1992"
Command
The previous chapter says about the procedure of calculation Design As for 2D members. Here the presentation pos-
sibilities are described. There is completely new item in the tree Concrete > Reinforcement design > 2D members > Rein-
forcement design (ULS).
Generally, there is a possibility to present four types of reinforcement. Nevertheless shear reinforcement is available only for
"Required" and "Required (statically)" , because shear reinforcement is not supported for basic and additional rein-
forcement.
- 265 -
Chapter 7
l Required - statically required reinforcement including detailing provisions

l Required (statically) - purely statically required reinforcement
l Required (additional) - additional required reinforcement which is needed besides provided (basic + additional rein-
forcement)
l Provided - basic + additional reinforcement
There is also standard command for 2D with the following items.

l System
- 266 -
Required Required (statically) Required (additional) Provided

It is recommended to calculate provided reinforcement in Location - In centres because res-

ults are presented on centres of mesh elements as string (diameter / spacing in mm). This
string results cannot be drawn when location in nodes or any averaging is used.
Design As - Output
Graphical output
ures).Typical cases can be the following for first direction and upper surface.
l Statically required reinforcement
l Required reinforcement including detailing provisions
- 267 -
Chapter 7
l Additional required reinforcement
l Provided reinforcement
- 268 -
Numerical output
As the check is based on Scia Design Form technology, three different outputs are available
l Brief
l Standard
l Detailed
- 269 -
Chapter 7
Brief
Brief output is typical output of Program name where the values are printed into table based on selection from Type of val-
ues
l Required and Required (statically)
- 270 -
The values in table means the following:
Value Explanation
Required reinforcement area recalculated into real spacing rounded to 10 mm expressed as
ReinfReq,1(2)+(-)
diameter / spacing for particular direction (1,2) and surface (+,-)
Required reinforcement area including detailing provisions for particular direction (1,2) and sur-
As,req1(2)+(-)
face (+,-)
As,stat1(2)+(-) Statically required reinforcement for particular direction (1,2) and surface (+,-)
Required reinforcement recalculated into real spacing rounded to 10 mm for particular dir-
As,req,bar,1(2)+(-)
ection (1,2) and surface (+,-)
ratio of required reinforcement area to area of rectangular concrete section for particular dir-
ρreq,1(2)+(-)
vEd design value of resultant shear force
vRd,c shear capacity of concrete
vRd,max maximal shear resistance of concrete strut
ReinfAsw required shear reinforcement expressed in number of bas and diameter
Asw,stat required shear reinforcement area
l Required (additional) and Provided
- 271 -
Chapter 7
The values in table means the following:
Value Explanation
Provided reinforcement area as it is defined in the library of provided reinforcement expressed
ReinfProv,1(2)+(-)
as diameter / spacing for particular direction (1,2) and surface (+,-)
Provided reinforcement area as it is defined in the library of provided reinforcement for par-
As,prov,1(2)+(-) ticular direction (1,2) and surface (+,-). Summation of basic and additional reinforcement if it is
needed
Additional required reinforcement area for particular direction (1,2) and surface (+,-). This rein-
forcement is designed in case of
As,add,req,1(2)+(-) As,req,1(2)+(-) ≥ As,prov,1(2)+(-)
and it is
As,add,req,1(2)+(-) = As,req,1(2)+(-) - As,prov,1(2)+(-)
ratio of provided reinforcement area to area of rectangular concrete section for particular dir-
ρprov,1(2)+(-)
Standard
Standard output is coming from Scia design Forms and includes the basic settings and major steps of calculation of required
areas. Typically it is prepared for one A4 page.
- 272 -
Detailed
Detailed output is again coming from Scia design Forms and includes the basic settings and all detailed steps of required
areas calculation.
- 273 -
Chapter 7
- 274 -
- 275 -
Chapter 7
- 276 -
- 277 -
Chapter 7
Punching Design
Introduction
The Punching Design command - available since the release of SCIA Engineer 17 - allows quick verification of punching
shear as one of the critical failure modes for ceiling/foundation plates. The phenomenon of punching arises when a con-
centrated load is applied to a small area of a plate inducing its perforation. Two basic cases of punching shear design can be
performed by the program. First one is given by reactions of columns against the ceiling plate and second one is caused by
the reaction of a foundation plate against loaded columns.
The used principles of punching design are given by clauses 6.4 and 9.4.3 in EN 1992-1-1: 2004 / AC:2014 + applicable
National Annexes. The calculation reveals either that the load-bearing capacity of the reinforced concrete plate in shear is
sufficiently high to resist the punching shear or that additional amount of punching shear reinforcement is required. If any
verification limit given by the code is exceeded, the verification result is marked as not permissible. In such case, the user
must change the model parameters or select a suitable design alternative.
- 278 -
Features
n Automatic or manual selection of structural nodes where a column support of plate is located
n Automatic preparation of all required input data including longitudinal reinforcement directly from the model
n Automatic recognition of a column position based on the shape of the basic control perimeter created around that column
n Determination of the load increment factor β by general formula or using a simplified approach
n Check of shear resistance of the plate without punching reinforcement and, if necessary, design some quantitative
amount of shear links
n Presentation of inputs and results via both graphical and numerical output, both integrated to the Engineering Report
n Design of shear reinforcement using further control perimeters than the basic one [NEW 17.1]
n Take into account all modelled openings to properly reduce the length of control perimeters [NEW 17.1]
- 279 -
Chapter 7
Usage
1. Open Concrete service using tree menu
2. Select the item Punching Design located at Reinforcement design > 2D members
3. Adjust properties of the Punching Design command:
a. Define automatic or manual selection of nodes (All / Current / ...)
b. Select specific result case from the list of defined load-cases, combinations or result classes
c. Define what type of longitudinal reinforcement should be considered (Required / Provided)
d. Select type of extreme to be displayed (Nodes / Global)
e. Select type of result value to be displayed (VEd, UCvRd,c , UCvRd,max ,...)
- 280 -
4. Run the Punching Design procedure by click on the [Refresh] action button
5. See and verify Punching Design results via graphical and numerical output
6. If necessary, change Punching Design settings to modify assumptions for the design
7. Refresh the results with new settings and sent them into the Engineering Report
Limitations
Not all modelled column point-type supports of plates can be successfully designed for the punching shear. When some lim-
itation is reached, it's handled by the Error/Warning/Note system through which user is able to get information about an
occurred issue in both graphical and numerical output (depends on E/W/N settings in the command). For full list of lim-
itations see Punching Design E/W/N.
Punching Design - Procedure & Settings
Basis of calculation
The used principles of punching shear design are given by clauses 6.4 and 9.4.3 in EN 1992-1-1: 2004 / AC:2014 in com-
pliance with a select National Annex. The settings of annex parameters can be checked (or modified) via Manager of
National annexes. Moreover, the Punching design procedure can be also influenced by changes of relevant items in Con-
crete settings (procedure rules) or Design defaults (assumptions for design of both longitudinal and shear reinforcement).
- 281 -
Chapter 7
- 282 -
Modelling
Two basic cases of punching shear phenomenon can be recognized within the model. First one is given by reactions of
columns against the ceiling plate and second one is caused by reaction from the foundation plate against columns. The
columns can be modelled as 1D members or supports, each connected perpendicularly to the concrete plate via a common
structural (punching) node. Only concrete columns with rectangle or circle cross-section can be handled. The selection of
nodes, where the punching design is calculated, is prepared neither automatically or manually by user (for more see Punch-
ing design command). Both options respect the current activity set up in the model.
Following rules must be fulfilled for each node in the selection:
n node has the reference on a plate (=2D member) from concrete material
n node has a reference either on a column (=1D member) or support in node
n node does not contain any further reference on neighbouring beams or other columns which are not perpendicular to the
plate
Note: To ensure the selection contains only valid nodes for the punching design, the fil-
tering of nodes is integrated to the punching design procedure and run automatically
before the design procedure to remove unsupported nodes from the selection. In such
case user gets info about such action it in the graphical and preview window.
Input data
Once the selection of punching nodes is ready, input data required by the punching design procedure are automatically pre-
pared for each node directly from the model. User is able to check them after the calculation as part of the standard output in
the preview window. It's important to mentioned, that input data cannot be modified by user directly, since any additional
data applicable on punching nodes does not yet exist for the Punching Design command (the old one from Concrete
Advance menu is not compatible!). However, most of inputs can be changed by updating the relevant parameters (like geo-
metry) in the model.
Warning: As a part of the preparation of input data, there is also a check, whether a selec-
ted punching node can be successfully calculated for punching design or some known lim-
itation is reached (for complete list see Punching E/W/N ). When the node cannot be
successfully calculated, the semi-results are set to not available values (N/A) and final unity
check is set to the error value (as default UC = 3.0) together with status Not OK.
- 283 -
Chapter 7
Punching load and area

The punching load and loaded area are evaluated for each linear combination separately to properly consider which sur-
face (side) of the plate is actually loaded. Key step is to determine a punching shear force, VEd, and based on its sign (i.e. dir-
ection) is decided about a governing column, which is punched through the plate. The loaded surface of the plate than lies
on opposite side than the governing column. In addition to that, corresponding unbalanced bending moments, MEd,y and
MEd,z , are registered as required input for calculation of the eccentricity factor β using an advanced method. The evaluation
of the punching load varies with selected approach for modelling columns at the calculated node. Selected approach also
determines what coordination system is taken as a referenced for the loaded area (assumed as cross-section shape of the
column) to be further used for the rest of punching design procedure. Two categories of point-type support of plates may be
recognized in the model.
- 284 -
Punching load for columns modelled as support in node

First option is modelling plate with supports in nodes, where the loaded area of each node is derived according to a type of
using support:
n Standard support - the square cross-section is assumed for the column with an inputted size
n Column support - the assigned cross-section is assumed for the column with inputted dimensions
For both types, the coordination system of the loaded area is determined from the coordination system of the node itself with
just substitution of axes (x=y and y=z). When the support is rotated around its z-axis, this rotation is taken into account and
the loaded area is rotated as well. The punching shear force VEd is taken as component R z of the reaction in the support
including its sign (which is positive when the direction of R z is same as the direction of z-axis of GCS). The unbalanced
moments are derived from moment reactions Mx and My , which are again just transformed to the coordination system of
the loaded area (and presented in absolute values).
Punching load for columns modelled as 1D member

Second possibility of point-type support of plate is direct modelling of columns above and below the plate as 1D members.
The loaded area is taken as column cross-section from the member identified as the governing column (the one punched
through the plate), where the coordination system of the member is adopted as the referenced one. The shear force, VEd,
is calculated as a resultant of normal (axial) forces from columns acting perpendicularly on the plate. For calculation of the
resultant is used the following convention of direction of a normal force based on its sign:
n Column in compression (-N) - the force is in direction from the column into the plate (punching)
n Column in tension (+N) - the force is in direction from the plate into the column (pulling)
In case of a single column connected to the plate, the shear force is directly the normal force from the end section of the
column on side relating to the node. If two columns below and above the plate are modelled, the punching shear force VEd is
as follows: if both forces are in compression (or in general they have same sign), just differential force is considered, else
sum of forces is taken. The sign of punching shear force indicates its direction in relation to GCS (where the positive sign
means same direction as z-axis of GCS). As was mentioned, the loaded surface is then always on the opposite side of the
plate than the acting punching shear force.
- 285 -
Chapter 7
- 286 -
In similar manner, the unbalanced moments are derived as a resultants from bending moments in both directions (y and z
axis). For each direction, the resultant is calculated based on sign of bending moments from section above and below the
plate as follows: if both moments have different sign, sum of moments in absolute values is taken, else only differential
moment is considered.
Note: For determination of punching load from columns modelled as 1D members are
used original internal forces from FEM analysis (not the recalculated design forces avail-
able in concrete menu).
Reinforced concrete plate

Each calculated node for punching design has to have a reference on a 2D member (a referenced plate), from where the
properties about the plate are obtained. But in many case, the region around the node includes also other 2D members with
possibly different properties than the referenced plate. To overcome the issue of properties discrepancy, a homogenization
of properties from all relevant plates is done to prepare required input data for punching design. Two following steps are per-
formed as part of data homogenization:
Firstly, to get unified outer boundary of plates per a floor, all the connected plates lying in the common plane (same as the
referenced plate has) are virtually merged together. From the merging procedure are automatically excluded plates with an
unsupported material or member type (like shell, orthotropy etc.).
Secondly, within the unified boundary is created around each calculated node a certain region in default distance 3 href from
the column face (where href is thickness of the referenced plate at the location of punching node). The size of the region can
be changed from the default value using Concrete settings.
From this region, the required input data about plate are homogenized from mesh nodes / elements within this region as fol-
lows:
n Thickness [h] - taken as minimum value recognized from all mesh nodes / elements in the region
n Material [Class] - taken as minimum value recognized from all mesh nodes / elements in the region
n Type [Ceiling / Foundation] - taken as foundation if plate is supported by surface support so that contact stresses are
present on all mesh nodes / elements in the region, else ceiling plate is assigned
- 287 -
Chapter 7
Note: If the properties of a plate around the node are not consistent (the homogenization is
required), user is informed about that via notes of Punching E/W/N system.
The same region like for the homogenization of concrete plate properties is assumed for determining the amount of lon-
gitudinal reinforcement considering in the calculation. Only reinforcement from the loaded surface of the plate (opposite to
acting punching shear force) is take into account.
As a source of longitudinal reinforcement, user can choose between required or provided type of reinforcement (see Punch-
ing Design command), both coming as a results from the design of longitudinal reinforcement. If such kind of result is missing
on relevant plates for a selected result case, the design is automatically run on background before the punching design ana-
lysis.
After data of longitudinal reinforcement are available, characteristics of longitudinal reinforcement are calculated at first for
each (i-th) mesh node from that region separately and are further homogenized as follows:
n Effective depth [deff ] - taken as minimum value from calculated effective depths deff,i
deff,i = (dy,i + dz,i) / 2
n Reinforcement ratio [ρl] - taken as mean value from calculated reinforcement ratios ρl,i
ρl,i = √(ρy,i . ρz,i)
where
ρy,i = Asy,i / (b . dy,i) and ρz,i = Asz,i / (b . dz,i) with assumption b = 1.0 m
In case, the longitudinal reinforcement is not designed as orthogonal, a transformation procedure is involved to recalculate
reinforcement area to orthogonal directions.
Note: The amount of required or provided longitudinal reinforcement can be influenced

using the Design defaults.
Punching design procedure

Control perimeters
The methodology for verification of the punching shear resistance of a concrete plate is based on examining a couple of con-
trol perimeters around the column, each located at fixed distance from the column face. The first of these perimeters is the
column perimeter, u0, which is located at the column face itself. The second perimeter of critical importance is basic control
perimeter, u1. This is defined as the perimeter located as default at the distance 2deff from column face and is constructed to
minimise it's length with respect to the plate boundary.
Warning: The distance of basic control perimeter (u1 ) can be found in Concrete settings,
but cannot be modified by the user from the prescribed default value. For foundation plate,
the EC2 code recommends to find the distance of basic control perimeter iteratively within
the 2d eff from column periphery, see clause 6.4.4(2) . This condition is not applied in the
punching design procedure, because the reduction of shear force ΔVEd by soil pressure is
not considered.
Control perimeter near the openings

All openings from the model are automatically considered in the punching design. Openings in distance up to 6 deff away
from the column are take into account as they influence the length of the control perimeter and hence the area over which
- 288 -
the shear force is dissipated. More specifically, the part of control perimeter contained between two tangents drawn to the
outline of the opening from the centre of the loaded area is considered to be ineffective.
Punching shear stress

At each individual perimeter, design shear stresses due to the punching are calculated in same manner by the formula
according to clause 6.4.3(1) as follows:
vEd,ui = β ∙ |VEd| / (ui ∙ deff )
where
β = factor dealing with eccentricity
VEd = applied shear force
ui = length of control perimeter to be checked
deff = mean effective depth
Eccentricity factor β
In general, all columns experience unbalanced moments from uneven loading on either side resulting in uneven shear dis-
tribution around column. To take this effect into account, the increasing factor β is introduced. For most structures, where
the lateral stability does not depend on frame action between the slabs and the columns, and where the adjacent spans do
not differ in length by more than 25%, approximate values for factor β can be used (the code recommends specific values
for internal, edge and corner column type). For cases, where uneven loading is significant, more precise method of cal-
culation β is prescribed as function of the geometry of the basic control perimeter and the transferred moments:
β = 1 + √ {(ky ∙ MEd,y /VEd ∙ u1/W1,y )2 + (kz ∙ MEd,z /VEd ∙ u1/W1,z )2}
where
VEd the applied shear force
MEd,i the unbalanced moments between plate and column around specific axis
the modulus of basic perimeter curve in direction of specific axis (recalculated to the centre of grav-
W1,i
ity of the loaded area)
correction factor to adjust factor β for the aspect ratio of the loaded area in specific axis (derived as
ki
interpolation of values given by the Table 6.1 in EN 1992-1-1)
Warning: It' up to the user to decide what method is should be user for evaluation of factor β
(via Concrete settings), because the program cannot check the preconditions for using
- 289 -
Chapter 7
approximate values of β described above. As default method is assumed method of approx-

imate values, which might be incorrect in case of significant uneven loading!
Punching resistance without shear reinforcement

In general, there are two possible modes of punching shear failure for ceiling and foundation plates. The first one is concrete
shear-tension failure in area surrounded by the assumed basic control perimeter u 1 around the column. There, the res-
istance of the plate is firstly calculated without shear reinforcement according to clause 6.4.4(1)
vRd,c = CRd,c ∙ k ∙ (100 ∙ ρl∙ fck )1/3 ≥ vmin
where
CRd,c = 0.18 / γc
k = 1 + √(200 / deff ) ≤ 2.0 where deff in [mm]
ρl the average reinforcement ratio in specific distance around column
fck the characteristic concrete compressive strength in [MPa]
vmin = 0.035 ∙ k3/2 ∙ fck 1/2
Warning: In the calculation procedure of the punching shear resistance, vRd,c , the influ-
ence of normal concrete stresses σcp is neglected. In addition, specifically for foundation
plate is not applied the reduction of punching shear force due to soil pressure according to
clause 6.4.4(2), so that the punching shear resistance is calculated in same way like for ceil-
ing plate (because the ratio 2d / a = 1).
To determine, whether punching shear reinforcement is required, the following unity check value UCvRd,c is introduced:
UCvRd,c = vEd,u1 / vRd,c
Note: If UCvRd,c >1.0, the design of shear reinforcement proceeds to quantify a necessary
amount of shear reinforcement which should be applied around the column. In such case,
the warning W6/102 occurs together with the status of design OK, but.
The second punching failure mode is strut diagonal failure caused by crushing of concrete. Crushing of a strut at column peri-
meter u0 is checked by maximum punching resistance taken from National Annex. The recommended value is given by the
clause 6.4.5(3) as
vRd,max = 0.4∙ v ∙fcd
To check the maximum punching shear stress is not exceeded, another unity check value UCvRd,max is presented
UCvRd,max = vEd,u0 / vRd,max
Warning: If UC vRd,max >1.0, the warning W6/101 occurs and design procedure ends with
status Not OK. In such case, the concrete plate in current arrangement is not designable
for punching shear and user has to increase column size or change plate properties (like
using higher grade of concrete material or increased its thickness).
- 290 -

If punching reinforcement is required (based on condition UCvRd,c > 1.0), the necessary amount of shear reinforcement is
determined quantitatively as series of shear reinforcement perimeters placed around a column with constant number of ver-
tical shear links per the perimeter. The distribution of the shear links is assumed as radial with the equidistant spacing from
column face. The values of the radial spacing, sr , as well as the distance of first shear reinforcement perimeter from the
column face, s0, are defined as default automatically (based on detailing provision rules) but they can be also specified manu-
ally by the user via Design defaults or Concrete Member Data.
- 291 -
Chapter 7
Note: The usage of automate method for determination of sr and s0 should always lead to
optimal design of shear links around a column to get minimum amount of required shear
reinforcement which automatically fulfils also the detailing rules.
Outer control perimeter

Design of shear reinforcement starts with calculation of the length of outer control perimeter uout , beyond which the shear
reinforcement is no longer needed to apply, according to clause 6.4.5(4)
uout = β ∙ |VEd| / (vRd,c ∙ deff )
The real geometry and position of outer control perimeter - visualized in the graphical window by gray color - is than
searched iteratively to find a distance, aout , for which the outer control perimeter has the required length and preferably also
same type of shape like the basic control perimeter. When any opening has to be considered to reduce the length of control
- 292 -
perimeters, it also effects seeking of outer control perimeter. The ineffective part due to opening is not take into account so
the distance of aout from column face has to increase.
Warning: In exceptional cases, the geometry of the outer control perimeter with required
length uout cannot be iteratively found so that the design procedure is terminated with error
E6/106 and status Not OK. To overcome such issue, it's mostly necessary to find suitable
design alternative (by changing the plate-column geometry).
Area of shear reinforcement perimeter

Having found that the shear reinforcement is required in the basic control perimeter, the statically required area of single
perimeter of shear reinforcement around the column can be calculated by the adjusted expression according to clause 6.4.5
(1) as
Asw,req =[(vEd,u1 - 0.75 ∙ vRd,c ) ∙ u1 ∙ sr] / (1.5 ∙ fywd,ef )
where
vEd,u1 the maximum applied shear stress along the basic control perimeter
u1 the length of the basic control perimeter
sr the radial spacing of perimeters of shear reinforcement
the effective design strength of the punching shear reinforcement

fywd,ef
fywd,ef = 200 + 0.25 ∙ deff ≤ fywd
The corresponding number of shear links n s per the perimeter is determined including detailing rules about maximum
allowed tangential spacing of shear links in perimeters within and outside the basic control perimeter according to clause
9.4.3(1)
ns = max { 4 ∙ Asw,req/ (π ∙ ds 2); u1,last / st,max,u1; us,last / st,max,out }
where
- 293 -
Chapter 7
ds the assumed diameter of a shear link
u1,last the length of the last perimeter of shear reinforcement within u1
st,max,u1 the maximum allowed tangential spacing of links within u1
us,last the length of the outermost perimeter of shear reinforcement outside u1
st,max,out the maximum allowed tangential spacing of links outside u1
The coefficients for maximum allowed tangential spacing of shear links within and outside the basic control perimeter can be
modified via Concrete settings - as default are used recommended values mentioned in 9.4.3(1). The diameter of shear link
can be modified via Design defaults (or Concrete member data).
- 294 -
Another prescribed detailing rule introduce also a minimum reinforcement area of a single shear link according to clause
9.4.3(2)
Asw1,min = 0.08 ∙ √ ( fck / fywk ) ∙ sr ∙ st / 1.5
where
sr the spacing of shear links in radial direction
st the spacing of shear links of the outermost perimeter in tangential direction
fck the characteristic concrete compression strength
fywk the tensile strength of shear reinforcement
From previous, the final area of each shear reinforcement perimeter around the column is as follows
Asw = ns ∙ π ∙ ds 2 / 4 ≥ ns ∙ Asw1,min
If the condition about minimum reinforcement area of a shear link is not satisfied, the number of shear links ns is increased
followed by recalculation of the minimum area with updated value of tangential spacing until the condition is fulfilled.
Number of shear reinforcement perimeters

Hence the shear reinforcement perimeter is designed with constant number of shear links, it's necessary to distribute those
perimeters in radial distance sr from column face. The number of the perimeters nper is derived from the clause 6.4.5(4),
which specifies that the outermost perimeter of shear reinforcement should be placed at a distance not greater than kout ∙
deff within outer control perimeter uout . The following formula for nper is introduced taking into account also demand of a min-
imum number of perimeters of shear links around the column according to clause 9.4.3(1)
nper = [(aout - s0 - kout ∙ deff ) / sr] + 1 ≥ nper,min
where
- 295 -
Chapter 7
aout the distance of the outer control perimeter uout from column face
the coefficient to determine the maximum allowed distance of the outermost perimeter of shear
kout
links from uout
nper,min the minimum number of perimeters of shear links around the column
- 296 -
Finally, the total amount of shear reinforcement Asw,tot around the column is than simply calculated as
Asw,tot = nper ∙ Asw
Punching resistance with shear reinforcement

Part of the punching design procedure is also check the punching resistance with the designed shear reinforcement. Veri-
fication is done in a required number of control perimeters given by formula
ncon = [s0 + (nper - 1) ∙ sr] / au
where
au = 2 ∙ deff as equidistant spacing between control perimeters u1, u2, ..., un placed radially from column face
The same shape pattern like for the basic control perimeter u1 is primarily used for generating further required control peri-
meters. The punching resistance with shear reinforcement is calculated for i-th control perimeter using expression in clause
6.4.5(1)
vRd,cs,i = 0.75 ∙ vRd,c + 1.5 ∙ (deff / sr) ∙ Asw ∙ fywd,ef / (ui ∙ deff ) ≤ kmax ∙ vRd,c
where
Asw is the designed area of one perimeter of shear reinforcement around the column
sr is the radial spacing of perimeters of shear reinforcement
the effective design strength of the punching shear reinforcement

fywd,ef
ui is the lenght of i-th control perimeter with the distance from column face au,i = i ∙ au
is the factor, limiting the maximum capacity that can be achieved by application of shear rein-
kmax
forcement
- 297 -
Chapter 7
The utilization i-th control perimeter (at distance au,i from column face) is calculated as vEd,i / vRd,cs,i where vEd,i is eval-
uated by already given formula using the proper length ui.
The final unity check of the punching resistance with shear reinforcement across the control perimeters is than formulated
as
UCvRd,cs = max {vEd,ui / vRd,cs,i; vEd,ui / (kmax ∙ vRd,c )} ≤ 1.0
- 298 -
Warning: It's obvious, that due to the limitation of the capacity by the value kmax ∙ vRd,c , the
design can not be always successfully finished in terms of UCvRd,cs > 1.0. In such case the
warning W6/117 occurs and status of the design is Not OK. To overcome the limitation, it's
recommended to increase the thickness of the plate.
Punching Design - Command

The Punching Design command can be selected in the tree menu of service Concrete > Reinforcement design > 2D mem-
bers. The command is available, when EC - EN national code is selected in Project data and the linear or non-linear static
analysis is done for the model containing 2D members from concrete material. Once the command is selected, appropriate
parameters are listed and can be adjusted in property window with following options:
- 299 -
Chapter 7
- 300 -
Selection
Places, where the punching design is calculated and results are available, can be defined automatically or manually.
However, the final selection always contains just structural nodes, which fulfil the following criteria:
l node has the reference on a plate (=2D member) from concrete material
l node has a reference on a columns below and /or above the plate (=1D member) or support in node
l node does not contain any reference on beams
To define the selection of the nodes, several options are available:

Prepares automatically the selection of all structural nodes in model, which fulfil above mentioned
All
criteria
Uses user selection of part of the model, where structural nodes are filtered to keep in selection
Current
just the proper nodes
Same approach as Current, just additional options are available for user to enhance the
Advanced
actual selection by the previous one.
Same approach as Current, just an already saved selection of part of the model - made and
Named Selection
named by user - is used.
Note: If manually defined selection contains structural nodes not applicable for punching,
user is informed about that fact in the graphical window and preview. Also keep on mind,
that the filtering of nodes also respects current Activity applied in model.
Result case
To define load, for which results are calculated and displayed, the following parameters can be used:
Specifies what type of load is considered (if some option is marked with an asterisk, the
Type of load
FEM results for that option are not yet calculated).
Load case / Combination /
Result Class / Nonlinear Offers list of all available result cases for the selected type of load.
Com.
Reinforcement
To define longitudinal reinforcement, which is taken into account during the punching calculation, these parameters can be
used:
Specifies what type of reinforcement is considered in the punching design calculation from
Type of reinforcement following options: Requiredor Provided (both represent results from the calculation of Rein-
forcement design - Command for 2D concrete members).
Averaging of peak Controls whether the averaging of peak is applied or not during the Reinforcement design
Provides information about the location of the Reinforcement design results (used In nodes
Location
avg.)
Provides information about the coordination system of Reinforcement design results (used
System
LCS mesh element)
- 301 -
Chapter 7
Note: If results of the Reinforcement design are not available for the selected Result case,
Location and System, than the program automatically runs the procedure to make those
results available for the Punching design calculation.
Note: The 'User' type of reinforcement applied on 2D members as Reinforcement 2D is not

take into account for Punching Design calculation.
Extreme
To control display of results, the following parameters can be used:
Specifies for what nodes results are displayed: Nodes - results are displayed for every cal-
Extreme culated node regardless of position of extreme, Global - just the node with the extreme of a
selected result value is displayed
Values Specifies what result value is presented from the available list of Punching design - Results
Output settings
In addition to previous settings related to the result values and extremes, it's possible to control specifically a numerical out-
put as follows:
Specifies what type of numerical output is displayed from following options: Brief (just
Output summary info) and Standard (summary info supplemented by more detailed inform-
ation)
Print explanation of symbols Controls whether an explanation of symbols used in numerical output is present or not
Controls whether an combination key is presented or not (this option is available just
Print combination key
when type of load is not a load-case and output is selected as Brief)
Errors, warnings and notes settings

System of errors, warnings and notes is fully supported for the Punching Design calculation to provide various type of inform-
ation (for a complete list see Punching design - Errors / Warnings / Notes). The E/W/N messages are displayed using both
numerical and graphical output. The showing is controlled by following options:
Show information in Result Controls whether summary info about errors and warning is visible as a part of the Result
header header.
Specifies what errors are presented in graphical and numerical output: All (all detected
Show errors
errors) and None (no errors)
Specifies what warnings are presented in graphical and numerical output: All (all detec-
Show warnings ted warnings), In extremes only (just warnings detected on nodes with extreme) and None
(no warnings)
Specifies what notes are presented in graphical and numerical output: All (all detected
Show notes
notes), In extremes only (just notes detected on nodes with extreme) and None (no notes)
Controls whether an explanation of detected errors, warnings and notes is presented in
Show table with explanation
the numerical output
- 302 -
Punching Design - Results & Output
Results presentation
For the evaluation of results from the punching design calculation, both graphical and numerical output can be used in stand-
ard way like for other commands. By settings of relevant items in the property window of the Punching Design command is
possible to adjust what result is displayed and in which form.
Graphical output
The list of quantities available to be displayed in the graphic window as a result from the punching design calculation is fol-
lowing:
UC Summary unity check of the punching design
UCvRd,c Unity check of the punching shear resistance of plate without shear reinforcement
UCvRd,max Unity check of the maximum punching shear resistance

UCvRd,cs Unity check of the punching shear resistance of plate with designed shear reinforcement
UCAsw,det Unity check of the detailing rules of the designed punching shear reinforcement
A sw,tot The total amount of designed shear reinforcement placed around a column
V Ed The punching shear force
The visualization of any selected result from the above mentioned list consists of a numerical value completed with geometry
of control perimeters considered during the calculation. Colouring of both components is taken differently. A numerical value
is coloured in standard way like for other results within the program. It means, if the result is a type of unity check value (like
UC), colour may be green / red for sufficient / insufficient utilization given by the comparison with the limit value from Con-
crete settings. For the rest results representing some physical quantity (like VEd) is reserved the colour of blue.
- 303 -
Chapter 7
In contrary, the colouring of control perimeters is done independently on the selected result with aim to graphically dis-
tinguish between the following punching design situation which may occur:
Red (A) The maximum shear capacity is exceeded (UCvRd,max > 1.0)
Green (B) The shear capacity without shear reinforcement is sufficient (UCvRd,c ≤ 1.0)
The shear capacity with required shear reinforcement is sufficient (UCvRd,cs ≤ 1.0) including detailing rules (UCAsw,-
Blue (C/E)
det ≤ 1.0)
The plate is not designable for the punching shear (UCvRd,cs > 1.0) due to limitation of the maximum capacity
Red (D) achieved by application of shear reinforcement or some detailing rule is not succeeded (UCAsw,det > 1.0) in case of
using user defined arrangement of shear links.
Numerical output
Beside the graphical output, it's also possible to see the results as part of numerical output through the Preview window or
using the Table results. For the punching design calculation, there is available two types of numerical output:
n Brief - contains just a summary table with the basic overview of punching design
n Standard - contains the summary table complemented by detailed tables with inputs and intermediate results of the unity
checks
- 304 -
The numerical output can be also enhanced by explanation of symbols or explanation of

E/W/N issues. The visibility of both can be activated via dedicated controls in the property
window of the command.
Punching Design - Errors / Warnings / Notes
List of E/W/N
Part of graphical and numerical output can be information about errors, warnings and notes. List of all possible E/W/N mes-
sages is following:
Errors
Index Type Description Solution
Unhandled problem occurred during the preparation of geo- If possible, change the model parameters or select a
E6/101 Error
metry of column shape. suitable design alternative, else punching node can-
- 305 -
Chapter 7
Unhandled problem occurred in calculation of basic control

E6/102 Error
perimeter.
Unhandled problem occurred in calculation of concrete shear
E6/103 Error
capacity.
not be calculated.
Unhandled problem occurred in calculation of design shear
E6/104 Error
reinforcement.
Unhandled problem occurred in calculation of reduction of
E6/105 Error
column periphery.
Punching design failed. A control perimeter cannot be correctly
If possible, try to extend boundary of the plate or
E6/106 Error generated because the entire boundary of the plate is very
change the dimensions of the involved members.
close to the column periphery.
Warnings
Punching shear resistance at the column perimeter (vRd,max ) Use higher grade of material or increase thickness of
W6/101 Warning
is not sufficient acc. to §6.4.3(2). the plate.
Punching shear resistance at the basic control perimeter To avoid design of shear reinforcement try to increase
W6/102 Warning (vRd,c ) is not sufficient acc. to §6.4.3(2). Punching shear rein- amount of longitudinal reinforcement (by using Design
forcement is required. defaults).
Area of a single link of shear reinforcement is less than min-
W6/110 Warning
imum value acc. to §9.4.3(2).
Tangential spacing of shear links (st,u1) of the outermost peri-
W6/111 Warning meter of shear reinforcement inside the basic control peri-
meter (u1) exceeds maximum value acc. to §9.4.3(1).
Tangential spacing of shear links (st,out) of the outermost peri-
W6/112 Warning meter of shear reinforcement outside the basic control peri-
Last perimeter of shear reinforcement is placed at a distance
W6/113 Warning greater than (kd) from the outer control perimeter uout, see
§6.4.5(4).
Number of perimeters of shear reinforcement is less than the
W6/114 Warning
minimum value acc. to §9.4.3(1).
Radial spacing sr of shear reinforcement perimeters around
W6/115 Warning
the column exceeds the maximum value acc. to §9.4.3(1). Change assumptions for design of shear rein-
Distance s0of first perimeter of shear reinforcement from the forcement (by using Design defaults).
W6/116 Warning
column face is not within the interval acc. to §9.4.3(1) and (4).
Punching resistance of plate with designed shear rein- Use higher grade of material or increase thickness of
W6/117 Warning
forcement vRd,cs is not sufficient acc. to §6.4.5(1). the plate.
A control perimeter ui outside the basic control area is not gen-
W6/118 Warning erated with same shape as the basic control perimeter u1, see
§6.4.2(7).
Node cannot be calculated for punching. The basic control
W6/119 Warning perimeter is detected as type of straight line between opposite
edges of the plate so different failure mode is assumed.
Design of punching shear reinforcement cannot be done. The
W6/120 Warning
outer control perimeter uout is not found correctly.
W6/121 Warning Node cannot be calculated for punching. A point force is Remove the point force and apply the load through a
- 306 -
applied on the node. column (1D member).

Node cannot be calculated for punching. Connected plate is
W6/122 Warning
not horizontal.
Node cannot be calculated for punching. Connected column is
W6/123 Warning
not perpendicular to the plate.
Node cannot be calculated for punching. Connected column Split the column in the node to get separate column
W6/124 Warning
goes through the plate. above and below the plate.
Node cannot be calculated for punching. Connected column is Instead of using alpha angle, rotate the column
W6/127 Warning
rotated by alpha angle. through a rotation of its LCS.
Node cannot be calculated for punching. Connected column is Make the column as prismatic by removing all
W6/128 Warning
not prismatic. hunches.
Node cannot be calculated for punching. Connected columns Unify LCS of connected columns above and below the
W6/129 Warning
above and below the plate have different orientation of LCS. plate to have same orientation of axes.
Node cannot be calculated for punching. The nodal support is Rotate the nodal support in way, the z-axis is per-
W6/130 Warning
not perpendicular to plate by its z-axis. pendicular to the plate.
Node cannot be calculated for punching. Connected column Change cross-section of the column to supported
W6/131 Warning
has not supported type of cross-section. shape (rectangle or circle).
Node cannot be calculated for punching. Connected plate is Apply surface support on all plates around the column
W6/132 Warning identified as foundation but this is not valid everywhere around to make available result of contact stress on FEM ele-
the node. ments around the node.
Node cannot be calculated for punching. Combination of Replace column modelled as the nodal support by the
W6/133 Warning
nodal support and linked 1D member is not allowed. 1D member.
Node cannot be calculated for punching. Subregion near the Change the material of the problematic subregion to
W6/134 Warning
node is not from the concrete material. concrete.
Node cannot be calculated for punching. An opening with Simplify shape of the opening to be rectangle or circle
W6/136 Warning
unsupported shape is detected around the node. (if possible)
Reduced length of the basic control perimeter due to openings
Change the method for determination of the Beta
W6/137 Warning is significant. The simplified method for the Beta factor is not
factor in the Concrete settings.
recommended to use.
Notes
N6/101 Note Length of column periphery u0 is reduced acc. to §6.4.5(3).
Normal concrete stress σcp is neglected in the formula for cal-
N6/102 Note
culation punching shear resistance vRd,c .
The ratio of longitudinal reinforcement ρl around the node is
N6/103 Note
taken as the maximum limit (0.04).
The longitudinal reinforcement ρl around the node is not fully
N6/104 Note
anchorage (for some mesh nodes ρl =0).
The thickness of the plate around the node is not the same. The
N6/105 Note
minimum value of thickness is taken.
Concrete material around the node is not the same. The min-
N6/106 Note
imum value of characteristic strength fck is taken.
Reduction of punching shear force for foundation plate is neg-
N6/107 Note
lected.
The length of control perimeters is reduced by ineffective part
N6/108 Note
caused by presence of openings acc. to §6.4.2(3).
- 307 -
Chapter 7
Capacity of designed shear reinforcement vRd,cs is limited by

N6/111 Note
value of kmax ∙ vRd,c acc. to §6.4.5(1).
Basic and additional reinforcement - introduction
The SCIA Engineer program from version 16.1 allows users to define some basic and additional provided reinforcement (in
concrete setting or concrete member data), which can be taken into account for design longitudinal reinforcement for 1D
members in service Concrete.
Terminology:
Statically required reinforcement As,stat – it is reinforcement designed by the program (reinforcement for N+My+Mz, lon-
gitudinal reinforcement designed for tensile force caused by shear and torsion)
Required reinforcement As,req – it is sum of statically required reinforcement and reinforcement designed according detail-
ing provisions
Basic provided reinforcement As,bas,prov – it is predefined reinforcement by the user in Concrete setting or concrete mem-
ber data. This reinforcement is constant at whole length of the member.
Additional provided reinforcement As,add,prov – it is predefined additional reinforcement by the user in Concrete setting or
concrete member data and these reinforcement will be used only on parts of the member where basic reinforcement is not
sufficient.
Additional required reinforcement A s,add,req – it is reinforcement designed by the program, calculated as difference
between required reinforcement and provided reinforcement
As,add,req = As,req - As,prov = As,req - As,bas,prov - As,add,prov
Provided reinforcement A s,prov – it is reinforcement calculated as sum of basic provided and additional provided rein-
forcement As,prov = As,bas,prov + As,add,prov
Introduction
The SCIA Engineer program from version 16.1 allows users to define some basic and additional provided reinforcement (in
concrete setting or concrete member data), which can be taken into account for design longitudinal reinforcement for 1D
members in service Concrete and from version R 17.0 also for 2D members.
- 308 -
Terminology:
Statically required reinforcement As,stat – it is reinforcement designed by the program (reinforcement for N+My+Mz, lon-
gitudinal reinforcement designed for tensile force caused by shear and torsion)
Required reinforcement As,req – it is sum of statically required reinforcement and reinforcement designed according detail-
ing provisions
Basic provided reinforcement As,bas,prov – it is predefined reinforcement by the user in Concrete setting or concrete mem-
ber data. This reinforcement is constant at whole length of the member.
Additional provided reinforcement As,add,prov – it is predefined additional reinforcement by the user in Concrete setting or
concrete member data and these reinforcement will be used only on parts of the member where basic reinforcement is not
sufficient.
Additional required reinforcement A s,add,req – it is reinforcement designed by the program, calculated as difference
between required reinforcement and provided reinforcement
As,add,req = As,req - As,prov = As,req - As,bas,prov - As,add,prov
Provided reinforcement A s,prov – it is reinforcement calculated as sum of basic provided and additional provided rein-
forcement As,prov = As,bas,prov + As,add,prov
Provided library
New library Provided reinforcement (design) is introduced where Basic and Additional provided reinforcement of lon-
gitudinal and shear (not part of R17.0) reinforcement is defined for taking into account in design of reinforcement. The lib-
rary is placed in Libraries > Concrete.
- 309 -
Chapter 7
It is a standard library of SCIA Engineer for managing layouts of basic and additional reinforcement for design.The library
contains templates for definition of basic and additional reinforcement, which are used in design depending on type of struc-
ture (1D/2D); member type (beam / column / beam slab / plate / wall / deep beam) and cross-section (rectangular / circle /
oval / I-section / T-section and Other). In fact it is standard SCIA Engineer library with the following properties:
l Name – name of layout, which can be edit by the user

l Description – brief description of the layout. The default is without description, but description can be create or edit by the
user
l Member type– member type for which basic and additional provided reinforcement is created (beam(rib), column, beam
slab, plate, wall, deep beam). This property is not editable and it is created automatically according selected member type
in dialogue for editing of the layout
l Cross-section – type of cross-section according to member type for which basic and additional provided reinforcement is
created (rectangular, T section, circular...). This property is not editable and it is created automatically according selected
cross-section in dialogue for editing of the layout
l Mode – standard or advanced mode for definition basic and additional provided reinforcement.
l
Only standard mode is supported in version 17.0, it follows that basic and additional rein-
forcement can be defined only for selected
There are supported standard operations in the library:
- 310 -
Create new layout - button New or icon . New layout of basic reinforcement is created and dialogue for definition
layout is opened, see "Layout definition". The new layout will add to end of the list of the layout
Insert layout - button Insert or icon . New layout of basic reinforcement is created and dialogue for definition layout
is opened, see"Layout definition" . The new layout will add above selected layout from the list
Edit layout - button Edit or icon . Dialogue for definition layout is opened.
Copy layout - icon . New layout is created by copying selected existed layout.
Delete layout - button Delete or icon . Selected layout is deleted.There is possible to delete only layout which is not
assigned to some type of member and cross-section in Design defaults or in 1D member data
Undo/Redo - icons .
Read from system database - icon . The user can loaded layout of basic and additional provided reinforcement
from system database (EP_BasicReinf.db4 file which is stored in folder DB defined in Options > Directories > Database
files)
Read from file - icon . The user can loaded layout of basic and additional provided reinforcement from some db4
file (default path is set to User directory)
Save to file - icon . The user can save selected layouts to db4 file(default path is set to User directory).
List of layouts basic and additional reinforcement can be filtered and there are three possibilities:
l All defined layouts of basic and provided reinforcement are visible

l Used - only layouts which is assigned to some type of member and cross-section in Design defaults or in 1D member data
l Wildcard name - user can define strings for setting visibility of the layouts
There is possible to create own layouts of basic and additional provided reinforcement and
then to use these layouts in other project by using Save to file and Read from file
- 311 -
Chapter 7
The system database of layouts basic and additional provided reinforcement is used by
default
Provided library settings
When you create new or edit existing template then the following dialogue appears.
The dialogue can be divide into 4 parts
Definition of main settings

l Member type - selection of beam / column / beam slab / plate / wall / deep beam
l Cross-section type
l beam - rectangle, T shape, L shape, I shape, other
l column - rectangle, circular, oval, other
l beam slab - rectangle
This item is not editable in case of selection of 2D member type
l Mode - fixed standard mode

l Type of reinforcement - dialogue with selection of position of main reinforcement
l beam - main reinforcement in Y direction / main reinforcement in Z direction
l column - edge Y in corner / Edge z in corner
This item is not editable for other cases
- 312 -
Action buttons
There are two action buttons
l basic count to zero - when you press this button all basic reinforcement count is set to zero
l additional count to zero - when you press this button all additional reinforcement count is set to zero
Drawing
The representative drawing is place on the left side of dialogue. There are the following rules:
l green dot - basic reinforcement bar

l blue dot - additional reinforcement bar
- 313 -
Chapter 7
l orange dot - currently selected bar or layer

l dashed line - selection of List type of additional reinforcement
Typical drawing for 1D member can bee seen as follows
Typical drawing for 2D member can bee seen as follows
Table input
The last and the most important part is table input itself. Here the particular values of the number of bars, diameters and dis-
tances are defined per basic and additional reinforcement. It will be explained in the following chapter in details.
- 314 -
Provided library - Member types
Generally there are different settings and possibilities dependently on member type (1D/2D).
- 315 -
Chapter 7
Provided library for 1D members

Beam
Basically, there are supported several cross-section types for beams.
Rectangle
The format of definition of provided reinforcement for rectangular beam is defined by Upper / Lower / Side surface rein-
forcement. The basic reinforcement is defined via Diameter and Number of bars per specific surface. The area of bars is cal-
culated automatically and it is not editable.
Additionally there is one option which determines predominant direction of reinforcement. This possibility is in selection of
main direction of reinforcement Main reinf in Y dir / Main reinf in Z dir
M-
ain
rei-
nf
in
Y
dir-
r
- 316 -
M-
ain
rei-
nf
in
Z
dir
Definition of additional l reinforcement

Definition of additional reinforcement is done via diameter and two options of bars input. The first is Fix value of number of
bars used in rules for additional bars and the second one is the List of possible bars which can be used during design pro-
cedure.
l Fix – fixed number of bars of additional provided reinforcement will be defined.

l List - list of number of bars of additional provided reinforcement will be taken into account.
T shape, L shape, I shape and Other

The format of T / L /I shape of cross-section is very similar to rectangular beam
- 317 -
Chapter 7
- 318 -
Column
There is used the same functionality for columns as for beams. Additionally there is one option which determines pre-
dominant direction of reinforcement. Thsi possibility is selection of Edge Y/Z direction in corner.
l column - edge Y in corner / edge Z in corner
Ed-
ge
Y in
cor-
ner
- 319 -
Chapter 7
Ed-
ge z
in
cor-
ner
Rectangle
Rectangular cross-section is typical case of column with the following possible provided reinforcement template. Of course
there is possible to set the option above to use predominant direction of reinforcement.
Circular
There is only one layer for definition of provided reinforcement for circular column.
- 320 -
Oval
Definition of provided reinforcement for Oval cross-section is completely the same as for rectangular cross-section
Other
Definition of provided reinforcement for Other cross-section is completely the same as for rectangular cross-section
- 321 -
Chapter 7
Beam slab
The same behaviour as for rectangle beam is used for beam slab. In this case only rectangular cross-section is supported
and side reinforcement is not allowed.
Rules for input basic and additional reinforcement:

There are two following rules used in the library:
l The bars are uniformly distributed along the whole length of edge, if on neighbouring edges are not defined bars or only
one bar is inputted on these edges
l The bars are not uniformly distributed along the whole length of edge, it follows that bar is not inputted to corner, where
on neighbouring bar is inputted two or more bars
l The same rules as for basic reinforcement are used, if on selected edge basic reinforcement is not defined
l The bars of additional provided reinforcement have to be placed between bars of basic reinforcement, it follows if number
of bars are even, the number of additional provided bars have to be odd and vice versa
- 322 -
Provided library for 2D members

There is different settling for Plate and Wall / Deep beam.
Plate
The dialogue for plate looks as follows. There is possibility to define basic reinforcement by diameter and distances directly
or to use link to 2D mesh library by teh setting Definition of basic reinforcement: By 2D mesh or / by Diameter.
Generally there are four rows based on two surfaces (upper and lower) and two directions (1 and 2).
Basic reinforcement
Definition of basic reinforcement is dependent on settings definition of basic reinforcement. In case of By Diameter Basic
reinforcement is defined by Diameter and Spacing. The final value of reinforcement are is then calculated automatically. In
addition it is possible to manually edit reinforcement area. Then the spacing is recalculated based on new defined area.
In the case of By 2D mesh there is directly link to Mesh 2D library and diameter, spacing and area are not editable. The link
of 2D mesh library is common for one surface.
- 323 -
Chapter 7
Additional reinforcement
There are three possibilities how to define rules for additional reinforcement. Type: Fix / List by diameter / List by spa-
cing.
l Fix – fixed number of bars of additional provided reinforcement will be defined.

l List of diameters – list of diameter of additional provided reinforcement will be taken into account. It means that dia-
meter of bars from the list with greater area than is additional area will be taken into account. This possibility substitutes
functionality User scale isolines from Concrete Advanced.
l List of distances – list of bars number of additional provided reinforcement will be taken into account. It means that
number of bars from the list with greater area than is additional area will be taken into account. This possibility substitutes
functionality User scale isolines in old concrete. This option is available only for 2D concrete.
Fix
List
by dia-
meter
- 324 -
List
by
spa-
cing
Wall / Deep beam

The possibilities for definition of basic and additional reinforcement for wall / deep beam is the same as for plate. Never-
theless there is defined one layer only which is used for both surfaces (see below).
Design Defaults
New setting Design defaults is created in menu Concrete > Reinforcement design, where user can define defaults
parameters for design of reinforcement including provided reinforcement. This functionality allows to define basic setting
and library of provided reinforcement depending on type of member and cross-section for whole structure. Main goal is to
- 325 -
Chapter 7
define basic and additional reinforcement for design for whole structure in project according to the type of member and
cross-section.
The group Reinforcement design and dialog Design defaults will be visible, even the calculation is not done. The setting in
dialog Design defaults will be similar as Concrete setting.
When you open design defaults dialogue you can see there defaults based on the member type.
- 326 -
Beam (Rib)
The possibilities in Design defaults dialogue are dependent on the usage or not of provided library for longitudinal rein-
forcement.
Displaying of items in Design defaults for Beams is dependent on setting Use a template of provided reinforcement
Use a template of provided reinforcement
When this check box is switch True the default diameters for design of
Description reinforcement are taken into account from selected item in library of
provided reinforcement for Rectangular, T, L, I and general sections
Code -
Level Standard
Figure -
Member Beam, Rib

ectly.
l T section
- 327 -
Chapter 7
l L section
l I section
l Other and general

Code -
Level Standard
Figure -
Member Beam, Rib
Then there is division to surfaces - Upper / Lower / Side.
Upper
Description Selection of type of cover for upper surface - Auto / User
Code 4.4.1
Level Standard
- 328 -
Figure
Member Beam, Rib

Description User defined value of cover for upper reinforcement.
Edit box; cu = 30 mm; this item is visible only in case of Type of cover of
Default
upper reinforcement is User.
Code 4.4.1
Level Standard
Figure
Member Beam, Rib

Defined diameter of reinforcement for upper surface used during
Description
design procedure
- 329 -
Chapter 7
Edit box; ds,u = 16 mm; this item is visible only if check box Use a tem-
Default
Code -
Level Standard
Figure
Member Beam, Rib
Lower
Description Selection of type of cover for lower surface - Auto / User
Code 4.4.1
Level Standard
Figure
Member Beam, Rib
- 330 -

Description User defined value of cover for lower reinforcement.
Edit box; cl = 30 mm; this item is visible only in case of Type of cover of
Default
lower reinforcement is User.
Code 4.4.1
Level Standard
Figure
Member Beam, Rib

Defined diameter of reinforcement for lower surface used during design
Description
procedure
Edit box; ds,l = 16 mm; this item is visible only if check box Use a template
Default
Code -
Level Standard
- 331 -
Chapter 7
Figure
Member Beam, Rib
Side
Description Selection of type of cover for side surface - Upper / Lower / User
Default Combo box; default = Upper
Code 4.4.1
Level Standard
Figure
Member Beam, Rib
User defined cover for side reinforcement

Description User defined value of cover for side reinforcement.
Default Edit box; cs = 30 mm; this item is visible only in case of Type of cover of
- 332 -
side reinforcement is User.

Code 4.4.1
Level Standard
Figure
Member Beam, Rib
Stirrups
Code -
Level Standard
Figure -
Member Beam, Rib
Number of cuts
Description
forcement
Default Edit box; ns = 8 mm
Code -
Level Standard
- 333 -
Chapter 7
Figure
Member Beam, Rib
Angle
Definition of angle of stirrups used in design of shear reinforcement per-
Description
pendicular to beam axis
Default Edit box; α s = 90°
Code -
Level Standard
Figure -
Member Beam, Rib
Beam slab
The settings for Beam slab is very similar to beam with the following limitations:
l Only upper and lower surface cover is defined (No side cover)
l Only link provided reinforcement library for Rectangular cross-section
l Without definition of stirrups
ectly.
- 334 -
Columns
Displaying of items in Design defaults for Beams is again dependent on setting Use a template of provided rein-
forcement see above.
- 335 -
Chapter 7

When the provided reinforcement library is used then diameter for design are defined in provided reinforcement library dir-
ectly.
l Circular
l Oval
l Other and general

Code -
Level Standard
Figure -
Member Column
When the provided reinforcement library is not used then diameter for design are defined in design defaults directly.
- 336 -
Then there is definition of one Main cover only.
Main
Type of cover of Main reinforcement
Description Selection of type of cover for main surface - Auto / User
Code 4.4.1
Level Standard
Figure
Member Column
- 337 -
Chapter 7
User defined cover for main reinforcement

Description User defined value of cover for main reinforcement.
Edit box; c = 30 mm; this item is visible only in case of Type of cover of
Default
main reinforcement is User.
Code 4.4.1
Level Standard
Figure
Member Column

Defined diameter of reinforcement for main surface used during design
Description
procedure.
Edit box; ds,m = 16 mm; this item is visible only if check box Use a tem-
Default
Code -
Level Standard
- 338 -
Figure
Member Column
Stirrups
Code -
Level Standard
Figure -
Member Column
Number of cuts
Description
forcement
Code -
Level Standard
- 339 -
Chapter 7
Figure
Member Column

The concrete settings for 2D members is different than 1D member, but the idea of usage of provided reinforcement library
for design defaults is the same.
Longitudinal
Displaying of items in Design defaults for Plate and Shell (Plate) is dependent on setting Use a template of provided rein-
forcement, see above.
- 340 -
Values of cover and angles are the same as in case of Use a provided reinforcement library is False. Diameter are linked via
Provided reinforcement library
Description Link to provided library based for Plate

Code -
Level Standard
Figure -

Then there is definition of items based on surfaces - Upper (z+) / Lower (z-).
Upper (z+)
Type of cover of first layer of upper reinforcement
Selection of type of cover for first layer of upper reinforcement - Auto /
Description
User
Default Combo box; Typec1,u = Auto
Code 4.4.1
Level Standard
Figure -
- 341 -
Chapter 7

Description User defined value of cover for first layer of upper reinforcement.
Edit box; cuser1,u = 30 mm; this item is visible only in case of Type of
Default
cover of upper reinforcement is User.
Code 4.4.1
Level Standard
Figure -
Diameter of first upper reinforcement layer

Defined diameter of first upper reinforcement layer used during design
Description
procedure
Default
Code -
Level Standard
Figure
Angle of first upper reinforcement layer

Defined angle of first upper reinforcement layer used during design pro-
Description
Code -
Level Standard
- 342 -
Figure
Diameter of second upper reinforcement layer

Defined diameter of second upper reinforcement layer used during
Description
design procedure
Default
Code -
Level Standard
Figure

Defined angle of first second reinforcement layer used during design
Description
- 343 -
Chapter 7
Code -
Level Standard
Figure
Lower (z-)
Type of cover of first layer of lower reinforcement
Selection of type of cover for first lower of lower reinforcement - Auto /
Description
User
Default Combo box; Typec1,l = Auto
Code 4.4.1
Level Standard
Figure -

Description User defined value of cover for first layer of lower reinforcement.
Edit box; cuser1,l = 30 mm; this item is visible only in case of Type of cover
Default
of lower reinforcement is User.
Code 4.4.1
Level Standard
Figure -
Diameter of first lower reinforcement layer

Description Defined diameter of first lower reinforcement layer used during design
- 344 -
procedure
Default
Code -
Level Standard
Figure
Angle of first lower reinforcement layer

Defined angle of first lower reinforcement layer used during design pro-
Description
Code -
Level Standard
Figure
Diameter of second lower reinforcement layer

Defined diameter of second lower reinforcement layer used during
Description
design procedure
- 345 -
Chapter 7
Default
Code -
Level Standard
Figure

Defined angle of second lower reinforcement layer used during design
Description
Code -
Level Standard
Figure
Shear
Description
shear reinforcement
- 346 -

Code -
Level Standard
Figure -
Arrange perimeters of shear links by limits from detailing

Setting if perimeters of shear links are calculated by limits from detailing
Description
or if they are defined by user
Code 9.4.3
Level Standard
Figure -
The distance of the first perimeter from the column face

Description The distance of the first perimeter from the column face
Edit box; s0 = 100 mm; this item is visible only if check box above is set
Default
False
Code 9.4.3(4)
Level Standard
Figure -
Radial spacing of perimeters

Description Radial spacing of perimeters
Edit box; sr = 150 mm; this item is visible only if check box above is set
Default
False
Code 9.4.3(1)
Level Standard
Figure -
Wall, Shell (Wall), Deep beam
Longitudinal
Displaying of items in Design defaults for Wall, Shell (Wall) and Deep beam is dependent on setting Use a template of
provided reinforcement, see above.
- 347 -
Chapter 7

Values of cover and angles are the same as in case of Use a provided reinforcement library is False. Diameters are linked
via Provided reinforcement library. There are two links in fact for Wall and Deep beam.
Template of provided reinforcement (Wall)
Description Link to provided library based for Wall
Code -
Level Standard
Figure -
Template of provided reinforcement (Deep beam)

Description Link to provided library based for Deep beam
Code -
Level Standard
Figure -
Member Deep beam

- 348 -
Then there is definition of items based for Both surface in one step. It means the same reinforcement is placed in each sur-
face.
Both
Type of cover of both surfaces
Selection of type of cover for first layer of reinforcement for both sur-
Description
faces - Auto / User
Default Combo box; Typec1 = Auto
Code 4.4.1
Level Standard
Figure -
User cover of reinforcement layer

User defined value of cover for first layer of reinforcement for both sur-
Description
faces.
Edit box; cuser1 = 30 mm; this item is visible only in case of Type of cover
Default
of both surfaces is User.
Code 4.4.1
Level Standard
Figure -
- 349 -
Chapter 7
Diameter of reinforcement of first layer

Description Defined diameter of first reinforcement layer for both surfaces.
Default
Code -
Level Standard
Figure
Angle of reinforcement of first layer

Description Defined angle of first reinforcement layer for both surfaces
Code -
Level Standard
Figure
- 350 -
Diameter of reinforcement of second layer

Description Defined diameter of second reinforcement layer for both surfaces
Default
Code -
Level Standard
Figure
Angle of reinforcement of second layer

Description Defined angle of second reinforcement layer for both surfaces
Code -
Level Standard
Figure
- 351 -
Chapter 7
Shear
Description
shear reinforcement in wall
Code -
Level Standard
Figure -
Concrete Member Data
The same setting as was described in "Design Defaults" on page 325 as a Global setting for whole structure can be defined
per particular member only via Concrete member data. This local setting overwrites global settings. Generally the items are
the same. There is again difference between structure type 1D/2D and particular member types Beam / Beam slab /
Column and Plate / Shell(Plate) / Wall, Shell (Wall) / Deep beam.
Concrete member data 1D

There is in addition one item related to material of longitudinal and shear reinforcement in concrete member data only.
Beam
The following dialogue appears in case Use a template of provided reinforcement is set ON and OFF respectively.
- 352 -
- 353 -
Chapter 7
Beam slab
- 354 -
Column
- 355 -
Chapter 7
Concrete member data 2D

There is in addition items related to material of longitudinal and shear reinforcement in concrete member data only. Besides
material for longitudinal reinforcement there is also additional type of reinforcement layer Principal / Secondary for Plate
and Horizontal / Vertical for Wall and Deep beam.
Plate, Shell(Plate)
- 356 -
Wall, Shell (Wall)

- 357 -
Chapter 7
Deep beam
- 358 -
Practical reinforcement
As in the past, practical reinforcement layout can be defined for each 1D concrete member. Longitudinal bars, stirrups and
free-form bars are available for manual input by the user. Additionally, also anchorage types may be chosen and their prop-
erties manipulated by the user. See "REDES - input of practical reinforcement"
This practical reinforcement layout forms the basis for several ULS and SLS checks of reinforced concrete members.
List of 2D reinforcement mesh
In 2D reinforcement mesh library are available next meshes. These meshes can be used as basic reinforcement in the
provided library, definition by 2D meshes.
Name Description Producer Direction 1 (lon- Direction 2 (trans- Note

gitudinal) verse)
Diameter Bar dis- Diameter Bar dis-
tance tance
P-84 P-net van de Riet 4 150 4 150
P-524 P-net van de Riet 10 150 10 150
P-262VZ P-net van de Riet 5 75 5 75
verzinkt
verzinkt
verzinkt
- 359 -
Chapter 8

verzinkt
verzinkt
verzinkt
verzinkt
B-189 B-net van de Riet 6 150 6 150
B-524 B-net van de Riet 10 150 10 150
B-634 B-net van de Riet 11 150 11 150
B-734 B-net van de Riet 12 150 12 150
B-785 B-net van de Riet 10 100 10 100
K-189 K-net van de Riet 6 150 5 250
K-295 K-net van de Riet 7,5 150 5 250
K-424 K-net van de Riet 9 150 5,5 250
K-524 K-net van de Riet 10 150 6 250
K-634 K-net van de Riet 11 150 6,5 250
K-754 K-net van de Riet 12 150 7 250
L-189 L-net van de Riet 6 150 5 250
L-295 L-net van de Riet 7,5 150 5 250
L-378 L-net van de Riet 8,5 150 5 250
L-524 L-net van de Riet 10 150 5 250
L-754 L-net van de Riet 12 150 7 250
Z-257 Z-net van de Riet 7 150 5 250
Z-335 Z-net van de Riet 8 150 5 250
Z-424 Z-net van de Riet 9 150 5,5 250
G-295 G-net van de Riet 7,5 150 5 250
G-335 G-net van de Riet 8 150 5 250
G-424 G-net van de Riet 9 150 5,5 250
G-524 G-net van de Riet 10 150 6 250
G-754 G-net van de Riet 12 150 7 250
E-131 E-net van de Riet 5 250 5 150
S-284 S-net van de Riet 5 250 8,5 200
- 360 -
S-354 S-net van de Riet 5,5 250 9,5 200
S-434 S-net van de Riet 5,5 250 10,5 200
S-566 S-net van de Riet 7 250 12 200
U-10 U-net van de Riet 10 200 6 250
U-12 U-net van de Riet 12 200 6 250
W-193 W-net van de Riet 7 200 5 250
W-285 W-net van de Riet 8,5 200 5 250
W-393 W-net van de Riet 10 200 6 250
W-567 W-net van de Riet 12 200 7 250
V-50 V-net van de Riet 5 225 5 250
S-081 Steknet van de Riet 5 450 8 150
Q84 4 150 4 150
Q131 5 150 5 150
Q188 8 150 8 150
Q221 6,5 100 8,5 150
Q267 7 150 7 150
Q296 7,5 150 7,5 150
Q377 8,5 150 8,5 150
Q378 8,5 150 8,5 160
Q513 7 150 8 100
R188 8 150 5 260
R221 8,5 150 5 250
R378 8,5 150 8 250
R296 7,5 150 5 250
KY80 8 150 8 150
KY81 8 100 8 100
KY85 8 100 8 100
AQ42 4,2 100 4,2 100
AQ60 6 100 6 100
AQ80 8 100 8 100
AQ70 6 100 8 100
KA16 4 150 4 100
KA17 4 160 4 160
- 361 -
Chapter 8
KA18 4 200 4 200

KD35 5 100 5 100
KD36 5 200 5 200
KD37 5 150 6 150
KH20 8 150 8 150
KH30 6 100 6 100
KY49 8 100 8 100
KY50 8 150 8 150
KY51 8 200 8 200
KY86 8 150 8 150
PAF R Adets 4,5 200 4,5 300 1)
PAF C Adets 4,5 200 4,5 200 1)
PAF V Adets 4,5 200 4,5 160 1)
PAF 10 Adets 5,5 200 5,5 200 1)
ST 15 C Adets 6 200 6 200 1)
ST 20 Adets 6 150 7 300 1)
ST 25 Adets 7 150 7 300 1)
ST 25 C Adets 7 150 7 150 1)
ST 25 CS Adets 7 150 7 150 1)
ST 35 Adets 7 100 7 300 1)
ST 40 C Adets 7 100 7 100 1)
ST 50 Adets 8 100 8 300 1)
ST 50 C Adets 8 100 8 100 1)
ST 60 Adets 9 100 9 250 1)
ST 65 C Adets 9 100 9 100 1)
P-130-A P-Mesh Van Merksteijn 5 150 5 150 2)
International B.V.
International B.V.
International B.V.
International B.V.
PS-196-A PS-Mesh Van Merksteijn 5 100 5 100 2)
International B.V.
International B.V.
International B.V.
International B.V.
BEC-188-A BEC-Mesh Van Merksteijn 6 150 6 150 2)
International B.V.
- 362 -
International B.V.
International B.V.
International B.V.
International B.V.
International B.V.
International B.V.
S-474 S-Mesh Van Merksteijn 7 250 11 200 2)
International B.V.
W-524 W-Mesh Van Merksteijn 10 150 10 150 2)
International B.V.
B-188-A B-Mesh Van Merksteijn 6 150 6 150 2)
International B.V.
International B.V.
International B.V.
International B.V.
International B.V.
International B.V.
International B.V.
Q-131-A Q-Mesh Van Merksteijn 5 150 5 150 2)
International B.V.
International B.V.
International B.V.
International B.V.
R-188-A R-Mesh Van Merksteijn 6 150 6 250 2)
International B.V.
R-257-A R-Mesh Van Merksteijn 7 150 6 250 2)
International B.V.
R-335-A Q-Mesh Van Merksteijn 8 150 6 250 2)
International B.V.
CAF-P CAF Van Merksteijn 4,5 200 4,5 200 2)
International B.V.
RAF-P CAF Van Merksteijn 4,5 200 4,5 300 2)
International B.V.
- 363 -
Chapter 8
VAF-P CAF Van Merksteijn 4,5 200 4,5 160 2)

International B.V.
FAP-10 CAF Van Merksteijn 5,5 200 5,5 200 2)
International B.V.
A-142 A-mesh Van Merksteijn 6 200 6 200 2)
International B.V.
International B.V.
International B.V.
International B.V.
A-142-M AM-mesh Van Merksteijn 6 200 6 200 2)
International B.V.
International B.V.
International B.V.
International B.V.
A-142-FE AFE-mesh Van Merksteijn 6 200 6 200 2)
International B.V.
International B.V.
International B.V.
International B.V.
A-142-EC AEC-mesh Van Merksteijn 6 200 6 200 2)
International B.V.
International B.V.
International B.V.
International B.V.
B-283 B-mesh Van Merksteijn 6 100 7 200 2)
International B.V.
International B.V.
B-503-B B-mesh Van Merksteijn 8 100 8 200 2)
International B.V.
B-785-B B-mesh Van Merksteijn 10 100 8 200 2)
International B.V.
International B.V.
K-131 K-mesh Van Merksteijn 5 150 5 150 2)
- 364 -
International B.V.
K-131-S K-mesh Van Merksteijn 5 150 5 150 2)
International B.V.
K-189-A K-mesh Van Merksteijn 6 150 6 150 2)
International B.V.
International B.V.
International B.V.
International B.V.
International B.V.
SE-5100-F SE-mesh Van Merksteijn 5 100 5 100 2)
International B.V.
SE-5150-5 SE-mesh Van Merksteijn 5 150 5 150 2)
International B.V.
SE-5200-4.85 SE-mesh Van Merksteijn 5 200 5 200 2)
International B.V.
International B.V.
International B.V.
International B.V.
International B.V.
International B.V.
International B.V.
International B.V.
International B.V.
International B.V.
International B.V.
International B.V.
International B.V.
International B.V.
International B.V.
- 365 -
Chapter 8

International B.V.
International B.V.
International B.V.
International B.V.
International B.V.
NSDK-6100 DK-mesh Van Merksteijn 6 100 6 100 2)
International B.V.
International B.V.
International B.V.
DK-8100 DK-mesh Van Merksteijn 8 100 8 100 2)
International B.V.
International B.V.
International B.V.
International B.V.
International B.V.
International B.V.
International B.V.
International B.V.
International B.V.
Note: 1) Reinforcement according https://www.adets.fr/la- gamme- adets/gamme-

actuelle/
Note: 2) Reinforcement according http://www.van-merksteijn.com/en/categorie/welded-

fabric/
- 366 -
Checks
Checks
First you get an overview of the input data for the checks:
l Internal forces, displaying the characteristic and design values.

For member type 'column', the design values of the bending moments include the 2nd order bending moments (if
required) and the moments due to geometric imperfections.
For member type 'beam', the design values of the bending moments include the shifting of the moment line - to take the
additional tensile force due to shear into account.
l Slenderness calculation (for member type 'column'), determining if 2nd order effects need to be taken into account.
l Stiffnesses, displaying the values EA, EIy and EIz .
Available checks at the Ultimate Limit State:
l Capacity check for N-My -Mz interaction - based on resistance calculated from interaction diagram
l Response check - based on check of ultimate stresses and strains for N-My -Mz interaction
l Check of shear and torsion
l Check of interaction of shear, torsion, bending and normal force
l Check of detailing provisions
Available checks at the Serviceability Limit State:
l Stress limitation (for concrete as well as reinforcing steel)

l Crack width limitation
l Simple check for deflection - based on calculation of stiffness ratio, without necessity to calculate Code dependent deflec-
tions (CDD)
Stiffness
Introduction
The behaviour of reinforced concrete is not linear-elastic, even with loads within working stress limits, and it is therefore
necessary to adjust either E or I depending on the magnitude of the applied load. In addition concrete is subjected to sig-
nificant long term strains due to creep and shrinkage, which will affect the curvature and stiffness of a reinforced concrete
structures.This chapter describes how the curvature and stiffness of a reinforced concrete section is calculated.
Stiffness presentation command is used for presentation of calculated stiffness. The procedure for calculation of stiffness is
based on the requirements mentioned in chapter 7.4.3 from EN 1992-1-1. Generally, two states of cross-section are con-
sidered:
l I) uncracked cross-section - which is loaded below the level when tensile strength of concrete is reached, here the
cross-section with tensile strength is used
l II) fully cracked cross-section - which is loaded above the level when tensile strength of concrete is reached, here the
cross-section without tensile strength is used
The stiffness is decreased when the load achieve cracking moment (M y,cr ). The dependency of stiffness on cracking
moment is visible from the following figure. The curve is not linear due to tensile stiffening which partly higher then cross-sec-
tion completely without tensile strength
- 367 -
Chapter 9
The behaviour of the reinforced cross-section can be also expressed in term of moment and strain (deformation) diagram.
The final value of stiffness is calculated using interpolation formula between state (I) deformation for uncracked concrete
section (ξ = 0) and state (II) deformation for fully cracked concrete section (no tension carries) (ξ = 1) dependently on the
ratio of stress in reinforcement from cracking load and acting load.The dependency of cracking moment on strain in con-
crete is visible from the following figure.
- 368 -
Checks
The distribution of the reinforcement stress in crack and between cracks can be graphically expressed on the following fig-
ure. Reinforcement stress is higher in crack and concrete stress is zero in crack. The final values of stiffness is dependent on
the tension stiffening of concrete in cracks based on distribution coefficient.
- 369 -
Chapter 9
The plane of the equilibrium is calculated for particular state of cross-section using method described in chapter "Theoretical
background" on page 375 . There are used different stress-strain diagram towards the Capacity-response (ULS). Stress-
strain diagram based on the serviceability limit state are used for the finding of the plain of the equilibrium. Generally, this
command uses the iterative method for the interaction of the normal force (N) with uni-axial or bi-axial bending moments
(My + Mz ). Additionally, there is possibility to calculate short-term or long-term stiffness which is applied via modified stress-
strain diagram.
Assumptions
The same preconditions are used for calculation as mentioned in chapter "Assumption and limitations" on page 416
SCIA Engineer is able to calculate short-term or long-term stiffness. This type depends on setting in Global settings - Solver
settings - General - SLS - Use effective modulus of elasticity.
- 370 -
Checks
Theory
The calculation procedure can be described in the following steps:
1) Calculation of uncracked cross-section
The cross-section characteristics for uncracked cross-section (using the linear stress-strain diagram with a tensile branch
for concrete and reinforcement) are calculated. This state is signed with bottom index I
.
The values in table are the following:

t y - distance from centre of gravity of particular cross-section type to centre of gravity of concrete cross-section in (y) dir-
ection
t z - distance from centre of gravity of particular cross-section type to centre of gravity of concrete cross-section in (z) dir-
ection
A - area of particular cross-section type
Iy - moment of inertia for particular cross-section type around (y) direction
Iz - moment of inertia for particular cross-section type around (z) direction
x - depth of compressive zone for particular cross-section type

Ast - area of tensile reinforcement for particular cross-section type
Asc - area of compressive reinforcement for particular cross-section type
- 371 -
Chapter 9
A - area of total reinforcement for particular cross-section type

2) Calculation of tensile concrete strength used for crack appearance
Stiffness and deflections are dependent significantly on the effective concrete strength which governs the cracking moment.
Value of strength for determination if crack appears or not, see chapter "Value of strength for calculation of cracking forces"
on page 425The resultant value is effective tensile concrete strength σcr which can be fctm or fctm,fl. Additionally, there is
possibility to set tensile strength or 0 MPa.
3) Verification of crack appearance
At first crack appearance is verified for characteristic load combination in accordance to chapter 7.1(2) - maximal tensile
stress in concrete fibre is compared with effective concrete tensile strength fct,eff . The calculation of maximal tensile stress in
concrete fibre is performed on cross-section with SLS linear diagram of concrete with tensile branch and the reinforcement
is taken into account with linear diagram. As a conclusion, two cases can appear:
1) σct ≤ σcr - no crack appears; the cross-section is considered as uncracked and SLS linear diagram with ten-
sion is used for another steps of the calculation.
2) σct > σcr - crack appears; the cross-section is considered as cracked; the cross-section is recalculated using
SLS linear diagram without tension.
where
σ normal concrete stress on un-cracked section at the most tensioned fiber of con-
ct crete cross-section
σ is value of strength for determination if crack width will be calculated or not, see
cr chapter "Value of strength for calculation of cracking forces" on page 425
When the cracks appear then the following steps are done
4) Calculation of cracking internal forces
The cracking internal forces are calculated based on the uncracked CSS characteristics and tensile concrete strength. After-
wards, these cracking forces are used for calculation of stress in reinforcement (σsr).
5) Calculation of distribution coefficient
Beforehand the distribution coefficient, calculated from the reinforcement stress for acting load (σs ) and for cracking load
(σsr), has to be known. There is coefficient β which is determined according to duration of the load:
β = 1,0 - for short-term load
β = 0,5 - for long-term load (based on using Use effective modulus of concrete = true)
- 372 -
Checks
The distribution coefficient (in fact coefficient of tension stiffening) is calculated based on the type of load (β) and also on the
ratio of reinforcement stress for cracking and acting load
ξ = 1 - β ∙ (σsr / σs )2
6) Calculation of fully cracked cross-section

The cross-section characteristic for full cracked cross-section (using linear stress-strain diagram without tensile branch for
concrete and reinforcement) are calculated. This state is signed with bottom index II.
Explanation is mentioned above.

7) calculation of resultant values of stiffnesses and curvatures
When the steps above are calculated then resultant values of stiffnesses can be calculated using interpolation formula
respecting uncracked state (I) and fully cracked state (II).
Calculation of the resultant bending stiffness,
EIy = 1 / [ξ / EIy,II + (1 - ξ) / EIy,I ]
axial stiffness,
EA = 1 / [ξ / EAII + (1 - ξ) / EAI ]
and curvatures.
1 / ry = ξ ∙ 1 / ry,II + (1 - ξ) ∙ 1 / ry,I
- 373 -
Chapter 9
Output values
There are presented the following output values:
l EA - axial stiffness of the cross-section

l EIy - bending stiffness around (y) axis of the cross-section
l EIz - bending stiffness around (z) axis of the cross-section
Setup
The same values which are used for stress limitations are used for Stiffness calculation (see chapter Stress limitation -
"Setup" on page 421 These values are:
l Value of strength for calculation of cracking forces

l Type of strength for calculation of cracking forces
l Use of effective modulus of concrete
Errors and warnings

The following errors, warnings and notes may be occurred during the stiffness calculation.
List of Errors
Number Type Description Description/Solution
Plane of equilibrium was To increase amount of reinforcement or to increase dimensions of cross-section or to increase
E0/1 Error
not found. quality of the used materials
List of Warnings
The selected combination is not serviceability - char- Please change type of combination to serviceability - char-
W5/3 Warning
acteristic acteristic
The selected combination is not serviceability - quasi- Please change type of combination to serviceability - quasi-
W5/4 Warning
permanent permanent
List of Notes
The calculation was not done (because numerical cross-section, phased
N0/1 Note cross-section, member or cross-section with different material as concrete
material is used)
N0/2 Note The prestressed reinforcement is not taken into account
N0/3 Note The "Free bars " reinforcement is not taken into account
There is some detailing longitudinal reinforcement, which is not taken into
N0/4 Note
account for the ULS and SLS check
N2/1 Note The normal forces and bending moments are zero (N = 0, My = 0, Mz = 0)
The maximal effective concrete strength is exceeded; cracks appear under the Change (a) the dimensions of the cross-sec-
N8/1 Note " & State & "-term characteristic load combination. Furthermore, the concrete tion, (b) the amount of reinforcement or (c)
stress-strain diagram without tensile branch is used. the quality of the used materials.
- 374 -
Checks
" & State & " in note N8/1 is replaced by "short" or "long" according used combination
Capacity - response (ULS)

Introduction
The Capacity - response is based on the calculation of strain and stress in particular component (concrete fibre, rein-
forcement bar) and comparison with limited values with respect of EN 1992-1-1 requirements. Based on the internal forces,
concrete cross-section and defined reinforcement by the user, SCIA Engineer is able to calculate the response of a member
or a single cross-section. This method uses an iteration routine to calculate equilibrium based on the internal forces, the
cross-section, material properties and reinforcement layout. However, this method does not calculate extremes (capacities
of cross-section) like the interaction diagram, but calculates the state of equilibrium for that section (response). The cal-
culation also includes depth of compression zones (d), curvatures in each axis (εx , εy and εz ), stresses, strains and forces in
particular components. Generally, this iterative method works for the interaction of the normal force (N) with uni-axial or bi-
axial bending moments (My + Mz ).
Assumptions and limitations

l Strain and stress of diagram defined in properties of material will be used
l Concrete – bilinear or parabola-rectangular stress-strain diagram

l Reinforcement – bilinear with or without inclined horizontal branch stress-strain diagram
l Tensile stress in concrete is not considered

l Standard REDES reinforcement is considered
l The area of longitudinal reinforcement is not subtracted from concrete area in the first step
Calculation procedure
Imagine a diagram representing the strain in a reinforced concrete cross-section. Generally, the cross-section can be non-
symmetric to y or z axis and loaded with a combination of N, My and Mz . Then the vector of strain consists of three non-zero
values ε = {εx ; εy , εz }. This vector determines so called plane of deformation (see following figure). More information can be
found in VONDRÁČEK, R.: Numerical Methods in Nonlinear Concrete Design, Diploma thesis, 2000.
- 375 -
Chapter 9
Corresponding plane of strain for plane of equilibrium in one plane bending only (My ) is shown in following figure. Never-
theless, the distribution of the stress in compression part depends on type of stress-strain diagram of concrete. When bilin-
ear diagram is used then distribution is constant or linear constant. In case of parabola-rectangular diagram the stress
distribution is constant or linear-parabola.
The previous figure shows a non specific case, but let us imagine an ultimate state. Under the ultimate state, we understand
a case, where either concrete or steel is strained to limit value. We can draw some cases in a similar diagram. The basic
assumptions of this limit strain method show the following figure. Generally, four limit strain states can occur. The numbering
(1-4) in the following figure represents particular state types of the cross-section. The state (1) corresponds to the optimal
failure when ultimate compressive strain in concrete (ε cu) and ultimate tensile strain in reinforcement (ε ud) are reached. In
case of state (2), the ultimate limit strain in concrete is assumed within considering the strain in prestressing at the beginning
of plastic branch (ε s ). The state (3) expresses the starting of the concrete crushing. Finally, the state (4) represents the
reaching of ultimate compressive strain for axially loaded member decreased due to brittle failure effect.
The following checks are performed
l Check of compressive concrete
verification of strains: εcc / εcc,lim
verification of stresses: σcc / σcc,lim
l Check of compressive reinforcement
verification of strains: εsc / εsc,lim
verification of stresses: σsc / σsc,lim
- 376 -
Checks
l Check of tensile reinforcement
verification of strains: εst / εst,lim
verification of stresses: σst / σst,lim
Unity check is maximum from all partial unity checks. It means

UC = max(εcc / εcc,lim ; σcc / σcc,lim ; εsc / εsc,lim ; σsc / σsc,lim ; εst / εst,lim ; σst / σst,lim )
where
εcc the most compressive strain in concrete

εcc,lim the limit of compressive strain in concrete
σcc the most compressive stress in concrete
σsc,lim the limit of compressive stress in concrete
εsc the most compressive strain in reinforcement
εsc,lim the limit of compressive strain in reinforcement
σsc the most compressive stress in reinforcement
σsc,lim the limit of compressive stress in reinforcement
εst the most tensile strain in reinforcement
εst,lim the limit of tensile strain in reinforcement
σst the most tensile stress in reinforcement
σst,lim the limit of tensile stress in reinforcement
- 377 -
Chapter 9
Output values
l UC - unity check of check response (see above)

l εcc - maximal value of compressive strain of concrete
l εsc - maximal value of compressive strain of reinforcement
l εst - maximal value of tensile strain of reinforcement
l σcc - maximal value of compressive stress of concrete
l σsc - maximal value of compressive stress of reinforcement
l σst - maximal value of tensile stress of reinforcement
l x - depth of neutral axis in the direction perpendicular to neutral axis
l d - effective depth of cross-section in the direction perpendicular to neutral axis
l z - inner lever arm in the direction perpendicular to neutral axis
Calculation xu,lim Dutch NEN NA
- 378 -
Checks
There is special requirement in Dutch NEN NA (6.1(9)) for calculation of limited value of xu,lim . In sections of beams sub-
jected to bending without normal force - other than by pre-tensioning the height of the concrete compression zone xu must
be limited. This limitation also applies if the relevant section is loaded by a normal force - other than by pre-tensioning - less
than 0.1 ∙ fcd ∙ Ac .
Must be fulfilled the condition based on fck :
l xu ≤ xu,lim
where fck ≤ 50 MPa
l xulim = 500 ∙ d / (500 + f)
otherwise
l xulim = εcu2(3) ∙ d / (εcu2(3) + 7 ∙ f)
where
d effective depth of cross-section

ε
the limit value of concrete strain in compression based on used material diagram
cu2 (bilinear or parabola-rectangular)
(3)
the height of the concrete compression zone at that portion of the reinforcement
xu
which is necessary for the taking the prescribed loading
the average strength of reinforcement calculated as follows
f
f = fyd ∙ As / As
As area of reinforcement
fyd design yield strength of reinforcement
This calculation is done as part of the following commands
l Design of As
l Check capacity - response
l Check capacity - diagram
Design As
Limit value of xu is set as limit for design of reinforcement.
- 379 -
Chapter 9
Check capacity - response

Limit value of xu is taken into account in calculation of check response, see Detailed output
Check capacity - diagram

Limit value of xu is taken into account in calculation of interaction diagram, see Detailed output
- 380 -
Checks
Effective depth of cross-section

The effective depth of cross-section is usually defined as distance of the most compressive fibre of concrete to centre of grav-
ity of tensile reinforcement. In SCIA Engineer, the effective depth of cross-section is defined as distance of the most com-
pressive fibre of concrete to position resultant of forces in tensile reinforcement. In relation of bending loading in SCIA
Engineer is calculated the perpendicular projection this distance to straight line perpendicular to neutral axis (slope line
plane of equilibrium), called d.
There are some exceptional cases, when effective depth is not calculated from plane of equilibrium:
l The most compressive fibre can not be determined (the whole cross-section is in tension)
l Resultant of forces in tensile reinforcement can not be determined (whole section is in compression)
l Equilibrium is not found
l Distance of the most compressive fibre and Resultant of forces in tensile reinforcement is lesser than 0,5⋅h
In this cases, the effective depth is calculated according to formula

d = Coeffd⋅hl
where
- 381 -
Chapter 9
Coeff the coefficient for calculation effective depth of cross-section loaded form Concrete settings, if effective depth of
d cross-section is not possible to calculate from plane of equilibrium). Default value is 0,9.
hl the height of cross-section perpendicular to neutral axis.
If there are the most compressive concrete fibres with the same value of compressive
stress, the fibre which is the nearest to straight line in direction resultant of bending moment
and crossing the centre of gravity of cross- section, is taken into account for calculation
effective depth.
Inner lever arm

Inner lever arm in EN 1992-1-1, clause 6.2.3 (3) is defined as a distance of forces in tensile and compression chord, it fol-
lows that is it the distance of position resultant of tensile force (tensile reinforcement) and position of resultant of com-
pressive force (compressive reinforcement and compressive concrete). For better overview, there is calculated the
perpendicular projection inner lever arm to straight line perpendicular to neutral axis (slope line plane of equilibrium), called
zrec .
Except of value inner lever arm, there is calculated part of inner lever arm only:
l part of inner lever arm (distance from centre of tensile force to centre of gravity of cross-section) – value z+ or projection
this value to straight line perpendicular to neutral axis – value zrec+
l is part of inner lever arm (distance from centre of compressive force to to centre of gravity of cross-section) – value z- or
projection this value to straight line perpendicular to neutral axis – value zrec-
There are some exceptional cases, when inner lever arm is not calculated from plane of equilibrium:
l The most compressive fibre can not be determined (the whole cross-section is in tension)
l Resultant of forces in tensile reinforcement can not be determined (whole section is in compression)
l equilibrium is not found
In this cases, the inner lever arm and parts of inner lever arm is calculated according to formula
z = zrec = Coeffz ∙ d
z+ = zrec+ = z- = zrec- = 0.5 ∙ z
where
Coeff the coefficient for calculation inner lever arm of cross-section loaded form Concrete setup, if inner lever arm of
z cross-section is not possible to calculate from plane of equilibrium). Default value is 0,9.
d the effective depth of cross-section
- 382 -
Checks
Errors and warnings

The following errors, warnings and notes may be occurred during the check capacity -response
List of Errors
To increase amount of reinforcement or to increase dimensions of
E0/1 Error Plane of equilibrium was not found.
cross-section or to increase quality of the used materials
The maximum value of the characteristic concrete cyl- To decrease value of the characteristic concrete cylinder strength
E0/2 Error
inder strength was exceeded of used material or change of limit in concrete setup
The minimum value of the characteristic concrete cyl- To increase value of the characteristic concrete cylinder strength
E0/3 Error
inder strength was exceeded of used material or change of limit in concrete setup
The maximum value of the characteristic yield strength To decrease value of the characteristic yield strength of non-
E0/4 Error
of non-prestressed reinforcement was exceeded prestressed reinforcement or change of limit in concrete setup
To increase amount of reinforcement or to increase dimensions of
E0/5 Error Limit strain of concrete was exceeded
cross-section or to increase quality of the used materials
List of Notes
The calculation was not done (because numerical cross-section, phased cross-section, member or
N0/1 Note
cross-section with different material as concrete material is used)
There is some detailing longitudinal reinforcement, which is not taken into account for the ULS and
N0/4 Note
SLS check
N0/5 Note There is some detailing stirrups, which is not taken into account for the check shear and torsion
N2/2 Note The effective depth of cross-section was calculated from user input value d = Coeffd ∙ h, because
- 383 -
Chapter 9

effective depth of cross-section is not possible to calculate from plane of equilibrium (tensile rein-
forcement , compressive concrete fibre of plane of equilibrium was not found)
The inner lever arm of cross-section was calculated from user input value z = Coeffz ∙ d, because
N2/3 Note inner lever arm is not possible to calculate from plane of equilibrium (tensile reinforcement , com-
pressive concrete fibre of plane of equilibrium was not found)
The part of inner lever arm of cross-section was calculated according to from equation z+(-) = 0,5 ∙ z,
N2/4 Note because inner lever arm is not possible to calculate from plane of equilibrium (tensile reinforcement,
compressive concrete fibre of plane of equilibrium was not found)
Explanation of errors and warning can be presented:

l In numerical output via check box Print explanation of errors and warnings in service for crack control, see code
chapter 3.2.1
l In dialog Calculation info via action button Calculation info in service for crack control, see chapter 3.2.1
l In dialog Warnings and errors (Concrete solver > Concrete > Warning and errors >)
National annexes
National annexes are supported in check response. For more details about national
Capacity - diagram (ULS)

Introduction
Capacity - diagram services uses creation of interaction diagram which is a graph illustrating the capacity of concrete mem-
ber to resist a set of combinations of axial force and bending moment. Dependent on the load, the position of the neutral axis
is changed and this leads to obtaining different values of compressive and tensile areas in concrete members. Therefore
this concludes to a different capacity calculated from the strain distribution.
The Capacity - diagram calculates the extreme allowable interaction between the normal force N and bending moments My
and Mz . In theory this diagram is a 3D-diagram, but SCIA Engineer allows the user to obtain horizontal and vertical sections.
The axis of the diagram has an axis for the normal force N, the bending moment My and the bending moment Mz .
- 384 -
Checks
Assumptions and limitations

l Concrete – bilinear or parabola-rectangular stress-strain diagram

l Reinforcement – bilinear with or without inclined horizontal branch stress-strain diagram
l Tensile stress in concrete is not considered

l Capacity of plain concrete is also calculated by interaction diagram using proper coefficient α cc,pl according to chapter
12.6.3(1) from EN 1992-1-1
First the section is in pure compressions, then it will be over- reinforced until it reaches the point where it is balanced
designed. After the point of balanced design the section will reach pure bending, then under-reinforced and finally will be in
pure tension.
Generally the interaction diagram is used to find the capacities for the checked cross-section. The searching of capacities
depends on used method for finding intersection with interaction diagram. This method can be the following:
l NRd - the bending moment My and Mz are constant and the intersections are searched in the vertical direction
l MRd - the normal force N is constant and the intersections are searched in horizontal direction
l NRdMRd - the used eccentricity is constant and the intersections are searched in direction of constant eccentricity
- 385 -
Chapter 9
l MRdy - the bending moment around z axis and normal force are constant and the intersections are searched in hori-
zontal direction in plane N-My
l MRdz - the bending moment around y axis and normal force are constant and the intersections are searched in vertical
direction in plane N-Mz
See the example of interaction diagram sections for particular method type:
Method NRd: (My and Mz are constant)

Vertical section N-My
Vertical section N-Mz
- 386 -
Checks
Vertical section N-Mres
Horizontal section My -Mz
- 387 -
Chapter 9
Method MRd: (N is constant)

- 388 -
Checks
Method NRdMRd: (eccentricity = constant)

- 389 -
Chapter 9
Method MRdy: (Mz and N are constant)

Vertical section N-My
- 390 -
Checks
Method MRdz: (My and N are constant)

Vertical section N-Mz
- 391 -
Chapter 9
Output values
l UC - unity check of interaction diagram

l NRd+ - normal force resistance (maximal positive values)
l MRdy+ - bending moment (My ) resistance (maximal positive values)
l MRdz+ - bending moment (Mz ) resistance (maximal positive values)
l NRd- - normal force resistance (minimal negative values)
l MRdy- - bending moment (My ) resistance (minimal negative values)
l MRdz- - bending moment (Mz ) resistance (minimal negative values)
l MRdz+ - bending moment (Mz ) resistance (maximal positive values)
l NEd - design value of normal force
l MEdy - design value of bending moment (My )
l MEdz- - design value of bending moment (Mz )
Setup
There are several parameters which affect generation of the horizontal and vertical cuts of interaction diagrams. These val-
ues are stored in Concrete settings (structure). The parameters for interaction diagram are the following:
- 392 -
Checks
Interaction diagram method - this option enable to select appropriate interaction diagram method. The following
approaches can be applied:
l NRd – assuming My and Mz are constant

l MRd – assuming N is constant
l NRdMRd – assuming eccentricity is constant
l MRdy – assuming Mz and N are constant
l MRdz – assuming My and N are constant
Default value is NRdMRd
Division of strain - this option explain precision of calculation of diagram point during generation of vertical cuts. The value
means how many times the strain plane is readjusted from the position of section under full compression to the position of
section under full tension.The value influences the accuracy and the speed of calculation
Default value = 250. with limits <0;10000>.
- 393 -
Chapter 9
Number of points in vertical cuts - number of direction (number of "branches") in which interaction diagram is cal-
culated during generation of interaction diagram.
Default value = 36. with limits <0;10000>.
Errors and warnings

The following errors, warnings and notes may be occurred during the check capacity - diagram
List of Errors
The combination of internal forces is outside Change (a) the dimensions of the cross-section, (b) the amount of rein-
E6/1 Error
of interaction diagram surface forcement and/or (c) the quality of the used materials.
List of Warnings
There is no intersection between the interaction diagram sur- Change (a) the dimensions of the cross-section, (b) the
W6/1 Warning face and the section plane, according to the selected method amount of reinforcement and/or (c) the quality of the used
of check. materials.
W6/2 Warning It's not possible to generate the horizontal section My -Mz Change (a) the dimensions of the cross-section, (b) the
- 394 -
Checks

amount of reinforcement and/or (c) the quality of the used
because NEd is outside the maximal or minimal capacity NRd.
materials.
It's not possible to generate the vertical section N-Mz Change (a) the dimensions of the cross-section, (b) the
W6/3 Warning because MEdy is outside the maximal or minimal capacity amount of reinforcement and/or (c) the quality of the used
MRdy . materials.
List of Notes
The calculation was not done (because numerical crosssection, phased cross-section,
N0/1 Note
member or cross-section with different material as concrete material is used)
There is some detailing longitudinal reinforcement, which is not taken into account for the
N0/4 Note
ULS and SLS check
There is some detailing stirrups, which is not taken into account for the check shear and tor-
N0/5 Note
sion
N2/1 Note The normal forces and bending moments are zero (NEd = 0, MEdy = 0, MEdz = 0)
Unity check value is zero because NEd is also zero and the selected method for the check is Change method of check to
N6/1 Note
NRd. MRd, NRdMRd, MRdy or MRdz .
Unity check value is zero because MEdy is also zero and the selected method for the check Change method of check to
N6/2 Note
is MRdy . MRd, NRdMRd or MRdz .
Unity check value is zero because MEdz is also zero and the selected method for the check Change method of check to
N6/3 Note
is MRdz . MRd, NRdMRd or MRdy .
National annexes
Shear + torsion (ULS)

Introduction
Check of Interaction shear and torsion consists of three checks:
l check of shear, "Shear check" on page 408

l check of torsion, "Torsion check" on page 411
l check of interaction of shear and torsion
All checks mentioned above are calculated according to clause 6.1 - 6.3 in EN 1992-1-1. The following preconditions are
used for calculation :
l The checks are calculated for beams and columns and for general load (N+My +Mz )
l Cross-section with one polygon and one material is taken into account in version SCIA Engineer 15.
- 395 -
Chapter 9
l The material of all reinforcement bars and stirrups have to be same in SCIA Engineer 15.
l The checks should be used only in case, that the angle between gradient of the strain plane and the resultant of shear
forces is not greater than 15 °.
Equivalent thin-walled closed cross-section

Equivalent thin-walled cross-section can be calculated by 4(5) possibilities in SCIA Engineer depending on parameter Equi-
valent thin-walled cross-section. This parameter can be changed in Concrete setting (if 1D concrete member data is
not defined) or in 1D concrete member data for Advanced model level.
There are the following options:
l Automatic - program calculates equivalent thin-walled cross-section according one method below. It means that program
tries to create equivalent thin-walled cross-section from stirrup for torsion at first, and if this method is not successful, pro-
gram uses method based on shape of cross-section. This is the default setting.
l From stirrups for torsion - program tries to create equivalent thin-walled cross-section around stirrup, where check box
Torsion is ON, see "Stirrup for torsion" on page 400. If equivalent thin-walled cross-section was not successful created or
stirrup for torsion is not defined, program finishes with some warning/error. This method is not supported for design of
shear reinforcement, because user(practical) reinforcement is not taken into account and therefore for design method
From used cross-section is used, if this method is selected.
l From used cross-section. The program tries to create equivalent thin-walled cross-section from current cross-section by
offsetting the value tef . If equivalent thin-walled cross-section was not successfully created program finishes with warn-
ing/error.
- 396 -
Checks
l From the effective rectangular cross-section. The program tries to create an equivalent rectangular concrete thin-walled
cross-section the perimeter and area of which are the same as the perimeter and area of the original cross-section. It fol-
lows, that effective rectangular cross-section with the following dimension will be created:
hef = [u + √(u2 - 16 ∙ A)] / 4
bef = A / hef
where
A is cross-sectional area of source cross-section

u the outer circumference of the source cross-section
If equivalent thin-walled cross-section was not successfully created program finishes with some warning/error.
l User input - equivalent thin-walled cross-section can be defined directly by the user, it means, that user has to define fol-
lowing properties:
l area of thin-walled cross-section (Ak,user)
l outer circumference of thin-walled cross-section (uk,user)
l effective wall thickness (tef,user)
This method is available only in 1D concrete member data. If the member is not prismatic (arbitrary member or member
with haunches), equivalent thin walled cross-section is recalculated to each section of the member according to formulas
below:
Aki = Ai ∙ Ak,user / Am
uki = ui ∙ uk,user / um
tefi = Ai / ui ∙ um / Am ∙ tef,user
where
- 397 -
Chapter 9
cross-sectional area of concrete cross-section in i-th

Ai
section
cross-sectional area of concrete cross-section in the
Am
middle of the member
Ak,user user input area of thin-walled cross-section
outer circumference of concrete cross-section in i-th
ui
section
outer circumference of concrete cross-section in the
um
middle of the member
user input outer circumference of thin-walled cross-
uk,user
section
tef,user user input effective wall thickness
The user (practical) reinforcement is not taken into account for design of shear rein-
forcement, therefore when method From stirrups for torsion is used, the thin-walled cross-
section from current cross-section is created
- 398 -
Checks
The following parameters have influence on this check:
l coefficient of effective depth of cross-section, see "Coefficient for calculation of effective depth of cross-section" on
page 155
l coefficient of inner lever arm, see "Coefficient for calculation of lever arm" on page 155
l angle of concrete compression strut, see "Angle between concrete compression strut and beam axis" on page 156
l angle of shear reinforcement , see "Angle of shear reinforcement" on page 157
l type for determination equivalent thin-walled cross-section, see "Equivalent thin-walled closed cross-section" on
page 396
Determination stirrups around section
The stirrups around section are taking into account on a length corresponding to horizontal projection of a length of com-
pression strut (the width of concrete strut), which can be calculated according to formula
δ = z ∙ cot θ
where
is inner lever arm of cross-section , see "Inner lever arm for shear check" on
z
page 407
Angle between concrete compression strut and beam axis perpendicular to the
θ
shear force, see "Angle between concrete compression strut and beam axis" on
page 156
Calculation number of stirrup link (number of cuts)

The way how to calculate number of stirrup links can be input in properties of stirrup layer and there are two possibilities for
calculation of number of stirrup links in SCIA Engineer:
l Automatically calculation – the number of links is calculated as number of intersections of stirrup with straight line per-
pendicular to direction of shear force resultant, where this line is crossing the centre of polygon
- 399 -
Chapter 9
l User input – the number of links is inputted directly by the user
Automatic calculation User input
Stirrup for torsion
There is taken into account for torsional check only the stirrup where check box Torsion is ON. This check box can be
switched ON/OFF in dialogue Stirrup shape (action button Edit stirrup shape in properties of Stirrup or in library of stirrups).
- 400 -
Checks
Only one stirrup can be taken into account for check of torsion in SCIA Engineer.
Calculation of average characteristics of shear reinforcement
As it was mentioned, there is a possibility to define more stirrup zones (more stirrups) around section with different prop-
erties, therefore it is necessary to calculate average characteristic. The average characteristics are calculated from stirrups
within calculated interval, see"Determination stirrups around section" on page 399 and in this calculation distance of stirrups
from the section (value δ) is taken into account. It means that stirrup , which is nearer to the section has higher influence on
average values than stirrup in farer distance.
Calculation characteristic of shear reinforcement
The shear reinforcement in SCIA Engineer can be inputted via REDES (stirrup zone) and via Free bars. There is possibility
to input more stirrup zones and more free bars (stirrups) to member with different parameters. Therefore it is very import-
ant to set the region for taking into account stirrups around the section and to calculate average characteristics of shear rein-
forcement for shear check.
- 401 -
Chapter 9
As mentioned above, it exists general concept of "strut-and-tie" model for the prediction of shear effects in concrete. In this
model, the top compression and bottom tensile members represent the compressive concrete and tensile reinforcement,
respectively. The horizontal members are connected by the compressive virtual struts and reinforcement tensile ties. The
axial forces in tensile ties should be transmitted by the shear reinforcement. Consequently, the maximal force in concrete
struts (VRd,max ) and shear force retained by the shear resistance (VRd,s ) have to be compared with acting shear force
(VEd). The procedure for check can be represented by diagram below:
Generally, there are two possibilities for calculation of shear capacity of concrete dependently on existence of cracks in bend-
ing:
Shear concrete capacity in region cracked in bending - formula 6.2.a,b in EN 1992-1-1
VRd,c = [CRd,c ∙ k ∙ (100 ∙ ρl ∙ fck )1/3 + k1 ∙ σcp] ∙ bw ∙ d
VRd,c,min = (νmin + k1 ∙ σcp) ∙ bw ∙ d
Shear concrete capacity in region uncracked in bending – clause 12.6.3(3) in EN 1992-1-1

VRd,c = fcvd ∙ Acc / k12.6.3
- 402 -
Checks
Additionally, there is calculated maximal shear force (VEd,max )) without reduction by β for member where load is applied in
the upper side of the member (see formula 6.5 in EN 1992-1-1).
VEd,max = 0,5 ∙ bw1 ∙ d ∙ ν ∙ fcd
Maximal capacity of concrete compressive strut (VRd,max ) is determined according to formula 6.9 in EN 1992-1-1, because
as has been mentioned before, the angle of stirrups (θ) is always perpendicular to member axis.
VRd,max = (α cw ∙ bw1 ∙ z ∙ ν1 ∙fcd) / (cot θ + tan θ)
Design value of shear force sustained by shear reinforcement (VRd,s ) is calculated according to formula 6.13 in EN 1992-1-
1
VRd,s = Asw / s ∙ z ∙ fywd ∙ (cot θ + cot α) ∙ sin α
Final design value of shear force (VRd) carried by member is calculated based on the following formulas depending on type
of member and area of shear reinforcement.
l for beam as slab and for other member with only detailing stirrups (Asw = 0)
VRd = VRd,c ≤ min(VRd,max , VEd,max ) + Vtd + Vccd
l for other cases
VRd = VRd,s + Vtd + Vccd ≤ min(VRd,max , VEd,max ) + Vtd + Vccd
where

VEd

VRd,c the design shear resistance of the member without shear reinforcement
σct,max maximal tensile strength in uncracked cross-section
V
Rd,c,min
k
k = 1 + √(200 / d) ≤ 2
ratio of tensile reinforcement
ρl
ρl = Asl / (bw ∙d) ≤ 0,02
σcp
σcp = NEd / Ac ≤ 0,2 ∙ fcd
the smallest width of the cross-section in tensile area of cross-section perpendicular to direction of resultant
bw
shear force, see "Width of cross-section for shear check" on page 405
d
Asl tensile area of reinforcement
- 403 -
Chapter 9

νmin
the concrete design strength in shear and compression, see equations 12.5 and 12.6 in EN 1992-1-1
fcvd if σccp ≤ σc,lim : fcvd = √(fctd2 + σccp ∙ fctd)
if σccp > σc,lim : fcvd = √(fctd2 + σccp ∙ fctd - ((σccp - σc,lim ) / 2)2)

normal (axial)stress of uncracked cross-section
σccp
σccp = NEd / Acc
limit value of stress caused by axial force, see equations 12.7 in EN 1992-1-1
σc,lim
σc,lim = fcd - 2 ∙ √(fctd ∙ (fctd + fcd))
Acc compressed concrete area for uncracked cross-section
maximum value of shear force resultant calculated without reduction by coefficient β, see clause 6.2.2(6) in
VEd,max
EN 1992-1-1
minimum width of cross-section between tension and compression chord perpendicular to direction of shear
bw1
force, see "Width of cross-section for shear check" on the facing page
ν
tion 6.6N in EN 1992-1-1
VRd,max
αcw
z
1 and 2 in clause 6.2.3(3) in EN 1992-1-1.
θ
is design stress of the shear reinforcement
σswd
σswd = VEd ∙ s / (z ∙ (cot θ + cot α) ∙ sin α)
VRd,s design value of the shear force which can be sustained by the yielding shear reinforcement.
the cross-sectional area of the shear reinforcement calculated as average area from all stirrups within cal-
Asw
culated interval, see "Calculation of average characteristics of shear reinforcement" on page 401
s the spacing of the stirrups calculated as average area from all stirrups within calculated interval, see "Cal-
- 404 -
Checks
culation of average characteristics of shear reinforcement" on page 401

the design yield strength of the shear reinforcement.
fywd
fywd = 0,8 ∙ fywk and σswd ≤ 0,8 ∙ fywk
angle of shear reinforcement . The angle of stirrups is always perpendicular (90 °) to member axis in SCIA
α
Engineer
the design value of the shear component of the force in the tensile reinforcement, in the case of an inclined
Vtd
tensile chord
the design value of the shear component of the force in the compression area, in the case of an inclined com-
Vccd
pression chord
Width of cross-section for shear check

There are calculated two widths for shear check
l value bw – this value is calculated as the smallest width of the cross-section in tensile area of cross-section perpendicular
to direction of resultant shear force. This value is used for calculation shear resistance of concrete (VRdc ) according to
clause 6.2.2(1)
l value bw1 – this value is calculated as minimum width of cross-section between tension and compression chord per-
pendicular to direction of shear force. These values are used for calculation:
l design value of maximum shear force VEd,max (calculation without reduction β), clause 6.2.2(6)
l design value of maximum shear force limited by crushing of the compression struts (VRd,max ), clause 6.2.3(3,4)
l design value of shear force carried by shear reinforcement (VRds ), clause 6.2.3(3,4)
- 405 -
Chapter 9
Effective depth of cross-section for shear check

The effective depth of cross-section is usually defined as distance of the most compressive fibre of concrete to centre of grav-
ity of tensile reinforcement. In SCIA Engineer, the effective depth of cross-section is defined as distance the most com-
pressive fibre of concrete to position resultant of forces in tensile reinforcement. There is calculated in SCIA Engineer the
perpendicular projection of this distance to straight line perpendicular to neutral axis (slope line plane of equilibrium), called
drec . The problem is how to calculate this distance if the difference between direction of resultant of bending moment and
resultant of shear force is significant. In this case the effective depth for shear is calculated, than perpendicular projection of
this distance is calculated from bending load to direction of shear force resultant. There are some exceptional cases when
effective depth is not calculated from plane of equilibrium:
l the most compressive fibre can not be determined (the whole cross-section is in tension)
l resultant of force in tensile reinforcement can not be determined (whole section is in compression)
In this cases, the effective depth is calculated according to formula

d = Coeffd ∙ hl ∙ cos(|α V - α M |)2
The effective depth d calculated from plane of equilibrium or from formula above is compared with the minimal allowed
effective depth. It can occur when cos(|α V - α M |) 2 is lower than 0,5 (the distance between angle α M and α V is greater than
45 °). In that case is the effective depth calculated according formula
d = Coeffmin ∙ Coeffd ∙ hl
where
The height of cross- section in the direction of shear

hl
forces resultant
The coefficient for calculation effective depth of cross-sec-
Coeffd tion, see "Coefficient for calculation of effective depth of
cross-section" on page 155
The coefficient for minimal effective depth of cross-sec-
Coeffmin
tion, set to 0,5
The angle between direction of shear resultant and y-
αV
axis of cross-section
αM The angle of slope line plane of equilibrium
- 406 -
Checks
Inner lever arm for shear check
Inner lever arm in EN 1992-1-1, clause 6.2.3 (3) is defined as distance of forces in tensile and compression chord, it follows
that it is distance of position resultant of tensile force (tensile reinforcement) and position of resultant of compressive force
(compressive reinforcement and compressive concrete). In EN code it is not defined how to calculate inner lever arm if dif-
ference between direction of resultant of bending moment and resultant of shear force is significant. Therefore in SCIA
Engineer is used the same principle as for calculation of effective depth, it means that inner lever arm is calculated as pro-
jection to direction of shear force resultant. There are some exceptional cases, when inner lever arm is not calculated from
plane of equilibrium:
l the most compressive fibre can not be determined (the whole cross-section is in tension)
l resultant of forces in tensile reinforcement can not be determined (whole section is in compression)
In this cases, the inner lever arm is calculated according to formula

z = Coeffz ∙ Coeffd ∙ hl ∙ cos(|α V - α M |)2
The inner lever arm z calculated from plane of equilibrium or from formula above is compared with the minimal allowed inner
lever arm. It can occur when cos(|α V - α M |) 2 is lower than 0,45 (the distance between angle α M and α V is greater than 48
°). In that case is the inner lever arm calculated according formula
z = Coeffmin ∙ Coeffz ∙ Coeffd ∙ hl
where
hl The height of cross-section perpendicular to neutral axis

Coeffd tion, see "Coefficient for calculation of effective depth of
cross-section" on page 155
Coeffz tion, see "Coefficient for calculation of lever arm" on
page 155
The coefficient for minimal effective depth of cross-sec-
Coeffmin
tion, set to 0,45
The angle between direction of shear resultant and y-
αV
axis of cross-section
αM The angle of slope line plane of equilibrium
- 407 -
Chapter 9
Calculation basic characteristics for shear
It is very important for shear check to calculate cross-section characteristics which have influence to shear resistances. It
means the following characteristics:
l width of cross-section for shear check (value bw and bw1), see "Width of cross-section for shear check" on page 405
l effective depth of cross-section (value d), see "Effective depth of cross-section for shear check" on page 406
l inner lever arm (value z), see "Inner lever arm for shear check" on the previous page
The EN code gives these values to relation with bending load, but there is problem to calculate these values, if difference
between direction of resultant of bending moments and resultant of shear forces is significant. In this case the code EN does
not give any recommendation. Therefore in SCIA Engineer, if the angle between resultant of bending moments and res-
ultant of shear forces is greater than 15 °, the program gives the warning and in this case the more sophisticated method
(for example biaxial shear method) should be used.
Shear check
The shear check is commonly based on the theory of the concrete truss-model. In this theory a virtual truss-model is ima-
gined in a concrete beam. This truss-model has a set of vertical (or slightly diagonal), horizontal and diagonal members. The
vertical bars are considered to be the stirrups; the horizontal bars are the main reinforcement and the diagonal bars are the
concrete struts. The check of biaxial shear is calculated according to preconditions in clause 6.2 in EN 1992-1-1.
l The shear forces in both direction is taken into account and shear check is done for resultant of shear force
l The parameters of plane of equilibrium (value, d, z and h) are recalculated to direction of resultant shear force
l The design shear resistance of the member without shear reinforcement (VRd,c ) is calculated according to clause 6.2.2
(1) in EN 1992-1-1, if section is cracked in flexure, otherwise clause 12.6.3 in EN 1992-1-1 is used
l Design value of maximum shear force will be calculated according to clause 6.2.2(6) (VEd,max ) and 6.2.3 (3,4) (VRd,max )
in EN 1992-1-1
l Design value of shear resistance is calculated according to 6.2.3 (3,4) (VRd,s ) in EN 1992-1-1
l The number of shear link can be calculated automatically or defined by user (in properties of stirrup zone), see "Cal-
culation number of stirrup link (number of cuts)" on page 399
l The angle of stirrups for check is always perpendicular to member axis.
- 408 -
Checks
With the following limitations:
l Inclined compression chord or inclined tensile chord are not taken into account
l The width of cross-section for shear checks (value bw and bw1) are calculated automatically. There is no possibility to
define user value in SCIA Engineer
l Free bars reinforcement is not taken into account
l The area of longitudinal reinforcement is not subtracted from concrete area
As mentioned above, there exists general concept of “strut-and-tie” model for the prediction of torsional effects in concrete.
In this model, the top compression and bottom tensile members represent the compressive concrete and tensile rein-
forcement, respectively. The horizontal members are connected by the compressive virtual struts and reinforcement tensile
ties. Consequently, the maximum of torsional resistance moment carried by concrete strut (TRd,max ) and torsional moment
retained by the torsional resistance (T Rd,s ) have to be compared with acting torsional moment T Ed ). The procedure for
check can be represented by diagram below:
- 409 -
Chapter 9
Torsional cracking moment is calculated according to equation 6.26 in EN 1992-1-1 ,provided that the stress caused by tor-
sional moment is equal to design axial tensile strength of concrete (value fctd). It follows:
TRdc = 2 ∙ fctd ∙ tef ∙ Ak
Maximum of torsional resistance moment (TRd,max ) is determined according to formula 6.30 in EN 1992-1-1.
TRd,max = 2 ∙ ν ∙ α cw ∙ fcd ∙ Ak ∙tef ∙cos θ ∙ sin θ
Design torsional resistance moment of torsional reinforcement (TRd,st ) is calculated according to formula below
TRdst = 2 ∙ Ak ∙ (Aswt / st ) ∙fywd ∙ cot θ
Final design value of torsional moment(TRd) carried by member is calculated based on the following formulas
l for member without or with only detailing stirrups for torsion(Aswt = 0)
TRd = TRd,c ≤ TRd,max
l for other cases
TRd = TRd,s ≤ TRd,max
where

TRd,c the design value of torsional cracking moment
effective wall thickness, see "Calculation of basic characteristics" on the
tef
facing page
the area enclosed by the centre-lines of the thin-walled closed cross-sec-
Ak tion, including inner
hollow areas, see "Calculation of basic characteristics" on the facing page
TRd,max Maximum of torsional resistance moment
coefficient taking into account state of the stress in the compression
αcw chord, see note 3 in clause 6.2.3(3) in EN 1992-1-1. The value 1 is
always taken into account for non -prestressed structures
strength reduction factor for concrete cracked in shear loaded from Man-
ν
ager for National annexes, see equation 6.6N in EN 1992-1-1
Angle between concrete compression strut and beam axis perpendicular
θ to the shear force, see "Angle between concrete compression strut and
beam axis" on page 156
TRd,st design torsional resistance moment of torsional reinforcement
the cross-sectional area of the torsional reinforcement calculated as aver-
Aswt age area from all stirrups for torsion within calculated interval, see "Cal-
culation of average characteristics of shear reinforcement" on page 401
the spacing of the stirrups calculated as average area from all stirrups for
st torsion within calculated interval, see "Calculation of average char-
acteristics of shear reinforcement" on page 401
- 410 -
Checks
Calculation of basic characteristics
The torsional resistance of sections is calculated on the basis of a thin-walled closed section, even if the section is actually
solid. For solid members, the section is idealized as a thin-walled section. There are several options for generation of thin -
walled cross-section in SCIA Engineer, see "Equivalent thin-walled closed cross-section" on page 396
The effective wall thickness is calculated according to clause 6.3.2(1) in EN 1992-1-1

tef = A / u > 2 ∙ asl
where
the total area of the cross-section within the outer circumference, includ-
A
ing inner hollow areas
u the outer circumference of the cross-section
minimal distance between edge and centre of the longitudinal rein-
asl
forcement.
The important parameters for check of torsion calculated from the centre line of the effective thin-walled cross-section are:
l the area enclosed by the centre-lines of the thin-walled cross-section, including inner hollow areas (value Ak )
l the circumference of the centre line thin-walled cross-section (uk )
Torsion check
In normal building structures, torsion generally arises as a secondary effect, and specific calculations are not necessary. Tor-
sional cracking is generally adequately controlled by reinforcement provided to resist shear. Even when torsion occurs, it
rarely controls the basic sizing of the members, and torsion check is often a check calculation after the members have been
checked for flexure. In some cases, the loading that causes the maximum torsional moment may not be same that induces
the maximum flexural effect. In some cases, reinforcement provided for flexure and the other forces may prove adequate to
resist torsion.
- 411 -
Chapter 9
The torsion check is commonly based on the theory of the concrete truss-model too. In this theory a virtual truss-model is
imagined in a concrete beam. This truss-model has a set of vertical (or slightly diagonal), horizontal and diagonal members.
The vertical bars are considered to be the stirrups; the horizontal bars are the main reinforcement and the diagonal bars are
the concrete struts.
l The parameters of plane of equilibrium (value, d, z and h) are recalculated to direction of resultant shear force
l The torsional cracking moment (TRd,c ) is calculated according to clause 6.3.2(5) in EN 1992-1-1
l Design value of maximum of torsional resistance moment (TRd,max )is calculated according to clause 6.3.2(4) in EN
1992-1-1
l The angle of stirrups for check is always perpendicular to member axis.
l There are 5 possibilities for calculation thin-walled closed section, see "Equivalent thin-walled closed cross-section" on
page 396
With the following limitations:
l only one stirrup can be taken into account for torsion check, see "Stirrup for torsion" on page 400
l The area of longitudinal reinforcement is not subtracted from concrete area
As mentioned above, there exists general concept of “strut-and-tie” model for the prediction of shear and torsional effects in
concrete. In this model, the top compression and bottom tensile members represent the compressive concrete and tensile
reinforcement, respectively. The horizontal members are connected by the compressive virtual struts and reinforcement
tensile ties. .The procedure for check interaction of shear and torsion can be represented by diagram below:
- 412 -
Checks
Only minimum reinforcement is required (see provided that the following condition (equation 6.31 in EN 1992-1-1) is sat-
isfied:
TEd / TRd,c + VEd / VRd,c ≤ 1
The maximum resistance of a member subjected to torsion and shear is limited by the capacity of the concrete struts. In
order not to exceed this resistance the following condition (equation 6.29 in EN 1992-1-1) should be satisfied:
TEd / TRd,max + VEd / VRd,max ≤ 1
The force in shear reinforcement caused by shear and torsion effect can be calculated according to formula
Fswd = [|TEd| / (2 ∙ Ak ) + VEd / (ns ∙ z)] ∙ (st / cot θ)
The maximum force which, can be carried by shear reinforcement is give by formula:
Fswd,max = Aswt / fywd
The additional tensile force in longitudinal reinforcement caused by shear and torsion is calculated according to formula:
Fsd = [|TEd| / (2 ∙ Ak ) ∙ uk + VEd] ∙ cot θ
The maximum force which, can be carried by longitudinal reinforcement is give by formula:
Fsd,max = Asl,tor / fywd
where
- 413 -
Chapter 9
the design value of torsional cracking moment, see

TRd,c
"Calculation procedure" on page 409
VEd
VEd,y(z) shear force in direction of y(z)-axis of LCS

the design shear resistance of the member without
VRd,c shear reinforcement, see "Calculation procedure" on
page 402
Maximum of torsional resistance moment, see "Cal-
TRd,max
culation procedure" on page 409
the design value of the maximum shear force which
can be sustained by the member, limited by crushing of
VRd,max
the compression struts, see "Calculation procedure"
on page 402
the area enclosed by the centre-lines of the thin-walled
closed cross-section, including inner
Ak
hollow areas, see "Calculation basic characteristics for
shear" on page 408
number of stirrup link (number of cuts) of shear rein-
ns forcement, see "Calculation number of stirrup link
(number of cuts)" on page 399
inner lever arm of cross-section recalculated to dir-
z ection of shear forces resultant, see "Inner lever arm
for shear check" on page 407
the spacing of the stirrups calculated as average area
from all stirrups for torsion within calculated interval,
st
see "Calculation of average characteristics of shear
reinforcement" on page 401
Angle between concrete compression strut and beam
axis perpendicular to the shear force, see "Angle
θ
between concrete compression strut and beam axis"
on page 156
the cross-sectional area of the torsional reinforcement
calculated as average area from all stirrups for torsion
Aswt
within calculated interval, see "Calculation of average
characteristics of shear reinforcement" on page 401
the design yield strength of the shear reinforcement.
fywd fywd = 0,8 ∙ fywk
σswd ≤ 0,8 ∙ fywk

is design stress of the shear reinforcement caused by
shear and torsion effect
σswd
σswd = [|TEd| / (2 ∙ Ak ) + VEd / (ns ∙ z)] ∙ [st / (Aswd ∙ cot
θ)]
- 414 -
Checks

circumference of the area enclosed by the centre-lines
uk of the thin- walled closed cross- section, see "Cal-
culation basic characteristics for shear" on page 408
the design yield strength of the longitudinal rein-
fyd
forcement.
the area of longitudinal reinforcement bars, which are
Asl,tor
inside stirrup for torsion
Check of interaction shear and torsion

The interaction of shear and torsion has to be taken into account, if the member is loaded by shear and torsion effect. The
shear and torsion checks are commonly based on the theory of the concrete truss-model, see "Shear check" on page 408
and "Torsion check" on page 411.
l The special assumptions for shear check are described in "Shear check" on page 408.
l Assumptions for check torsion are described in "Torsion check" on page 411
l Only minimum reinforcement is required provided that condition clause 6.3.2(5) in EN 1992-1-1 is satisfied:
l The maximum resistance of a member subjected to torsion and shear is limited by the capacity of the concrete struts. In
order not to exceed this resistance the condition in clause 6.3.2(4) in EN 1992-1-1 should be satisfied
l Inclined compression chord or inclined tensile chord are not taken into account
l The widths of cross-section for shear checks (value bw and bw1) are calculated automatically. There is no possibility for
definition of user value in SCIA Engineer
l only one stirrup can be taken into account for torsion check, see "Stirrup for torsion" on page 400
l The area of longitudinal reinforcement is not subtracted from concrete area.
- 415 -
Chapter 9
Warnings, errors and notes
Stress limitations (SLS)
Introduction
Stress limitation (SLS) check is based on the calculation of stresses in particular component (concrete fibre, reinforcement
bar) and comparison with limited values with respect of EN 1992-1-1 requirements. Based on the internal forces, concrete
cross-section and reinforcement defined by the user, SCIA Engineer is able to calculate the plain of equilibrium of a member
or a single cross-section and find the actual value of stresses in each component.
Generally, stress limitation from the point of the serviceability limit state is based on the verification of the following states:
l compressive stress in concrete - the high value of compressive stress in concrete could lead to appearance of lon-
gitudinal cracks, spreading of micro-cracks in concrete and higher values of creep (mainly non linear) . This effect can led
to state when the structure is unusable.
l tensile stress in reinforcement - stress in reinforcement is verified due to limitation of unacceptable strain existence
and thus appearance of cracks in concrete .
The method described in chapter "Theoretical background" on page 375 is used for determination of the plane of the equi-
librium. There are used different stress-strain diagrams towards the Capacity-response (ULS). Stress-strain diagrams
based on the serviceability limit state are used for the finding of the plain of the equilibrium. This check provides the cal-
culation of the stresses in particular components for each state of cross-section.
Generally, this check uses the iterative method for the interaction of the normal force (N) with uni-axial or bi-axial bending
moments (M y + M z ). Additionally, there is possibility to calculate stresses for short-term or long-term stiffness which is
applied via modified stress-strain diagram.
Assumption and limitations
l Concrete – linear stress-strain diagram dependent on:

l type of E-modulus - short-term (Ec ) or long-term (Ec,eff ) E-modulus for preparation of stress-strain dia-
gram
l cracking of the cross-section
l un-cracked cross-section - stress-strain diagram with tensile concrete is considered
l cracked cross-section - stress-strain diagram without tensile concrete is considered
l Reinforcement – linear stress-strain diagram with tensile branch
As an example the preparation of the stress-strain diagram for C25/30 (fck = 25 MPa, Ec = 31 GPa) is visible from the fol-
lowing figures.
Concrete SLS short-term uncracked
- 416 -
Checks
Concrete SLS long-term uncracked
Concrete SLS short-term cracked
- 417 -
Chapter 9
Concrete SLS long-term cracked
As an example for the reinforcement material the stress-strain diagram for B400C (fyk = 400 MPa, Es = 200 GPa) is visible
from the following figure.
- 418 -
Checks
Note: The maximal stress in SLS diagram is used as 5 ∙ f ck (f yk ) for concrete, rein-
forcement respectively.
The calculation procedure can be described in the following steps:

Verification of crack appearance
At first crack appearance is verified for characteristic load combination in accordance to chapter 7.1(2) - maximal tensile
stress in concrete fibre is compared with effective concrete tensile strength fct,eff . The calculation of maximal tensile stress in
concrete fibre is performed on cross-section with SLS linear diagram of concrete with tensile branch and the reinforcement
is taken into account with linear diagram. As a conclusion, two cases can appear:
1) σct ≤ σcr - no crack appears; the cross-section is considered as uncracked and SLS linear diagram
with tension is used for another steps of the calculation.
2) σct > σcr - crack appears; the cross-section is considered as cracked; the cross-section is recal-
culated using SLS linear diagram without tension.
where
σ
normal concrete stress on un-cracked section at the most tensioned fibber of concrete cross-section
ct
is value of strength for determination if crack width will be calculated or not, see chapter "Value of strength for cal-
σ
culation of cracking forces" on page 425
cr
Verification of stress in component

Calculation of stresses in component based on the combination. There are compared three different cases
1) verification of concrete stress under characteristic load according to chapter 7.2(2)
- 419 -
Chapter 9
this verification is calculated against to longitudinal cracks in concrete and it is provided only for expos-
ure classes XD, XF and XS. Generally, maximal compressive concrete stress σc,char has to be lesser
than maximal allowed compressive concrete strength for characteristic combination σc,char,lim = k1∙
fck . It can be expressed as follows:
σc,char,lim ≤ k1∙ fck
where k1 is NA parameter, standard value is k1 = 0,6.
2) verification of concrete stress under quasi-permanent load according to chapter 7.2

(3)
this verification is calculated against to considering of linear creep only. When the condition is not ful-
filled then non-linear creep calculation should be considered. Generally, maximal compressive con-
crete stress σc,qp has to be lesser than maximal allowed compressive concrete strength for quasi-
permanent combination σc,qp,lim = k2 ∙ fck . It can be expressed as follows:
σc,qp,lim ≤ k2∙ fck
3) verification of reinforcement stress under characteristic load according to chapter 7.2

(5)
this verification is calculated against to considering of unacceptable cracks and deformation in the con-
crete. Generally, maximal reinforcement tensile stress σs,char has to be lesser than maximal allowed
reinforcement tensile strength for characteristic combination σs,char,lim = k3 ∙ fyk . It can be expressed
as follows:
σs,char,lim ≤ k3 ∙ fyk
Additionally, when the stress in reinforcement is caused by an imposed deformation then the maximal
strength is increased to k4 ∙ fyk , where k4 is NA parameter, standard value is k4 = 1,0.
The option for imposed deformation is described in chapter "Setup" on the facing page .
Unity check is maximum from all partial unity checks. It means
Unity check = max(σc,char / σc,char,lim ; σc,qp / σc,qp,lim ; σs,char / σs,char,lim )
The procedure above can be done for short-term or long-term state. It means stress-strain diagram including or not effect-
ive modulus of elasticity can be used. Effective E modulus of elasticity is based on the creep coefficient. and it is calculated as
follows
Ec,eff = Ecm / (1 + φ)
The coverage of long-term behaviour in the calculation is possible to set in Global settings -
Solver settings - General - SLS - Use effective modulus of elasticity.
- 420 -
Checks
SCIA Engineer is not able to use characteristic or quasi-permanent combination together

in one step. Therefore the same forces are used for crack appearance and final stress val-
ues.
Load cases are considered as standard load used for the stress limitation check
Output values
l UC - unity check of check response (see above)

l σc,char - maximal calculated value of compressive stress of concrete under characteristic combination
l σc,qp - maximal calculated value of compressive stress of concrete under quasi-permanent combination
l σs,char - maximal calculated value of compressive stress of reinforcement under characteristic combination
l σc,char,lim - limited value of compressive stress of concrete under characteristic combination
l σc,qp,lim - limited value of compressive stress of concrete under quasi-permanent combination
l σs,char,lim- limited value of compressive stress of reinforcement under characteristic combination
Setup
The following items have impact on the calculation of stress limitation check.
Imposed load
Additionally, when the stress in reinforcement is caused by an imposed deformation then the maximal strength is increased
to k4 ∙ fyk , where k4 is NA parameter, standard value is k4 = 1,0.
The option for imposed deformation is available in Global settings - Solver settings - Stress limitations - Indirect load
(imposed deformation).
- 421 -
Chapter 9

This value can be set in Concrete setting by using Advanced level or in 1D member data (advanced mode is ON), if
defined. If normal concrete stress on un-cracked section at the most tensioned fiber of concrete cross-section is greater
than this value, the crack width will be occurred and will be calculated. There are two possibilities:
0 MPa it means that crack width is calculated if there is some tension in cross-section
it means, that crack width is calculated only in case, that normal concrete stress on un-cracked section at the
fct,eff most tensioned fibre of concrete cross-section is greater the mean value of the tensile strength of the concrete
effective at the time

This value can be set in Concrete setting by using Advanced level or in 1D member data (advanced mode is
ON).There are two possibilities:
fctm it means that mean tensile strength of concrete in time 28 days is taken into account, see picture below
it means that the mean flexural tensile strength (EN 1992-1-1,clause 3.1.8(1)) is taken into account. This value
f
should be used if restrained deformations such as shrinkage or temperature movements are taking into account
ctm,fl for calculation of crack width
- 422 -
Checks
The value presented in material properties of concrete (picture above) is mean tensile
strength of concrete in time 28 days. If cracking is expected earlier than 28 days, it is neces-
sary to input value fctm (t) at this time to material properties (EN 1992-1-1,clause 3.1.2(9))
Use of effective modulus of concrete

This value can be set in Concrete setting by using Advanced level or in 1D member data (advanced mode is ON). If
this check box is ON, then effective module of elasticity is taken into account.
National annexes in stress limitation
Errors, Warnings, Notes
List of Errors
To increase amount of reinforcement or to increase dimen-
E0/1 Error Plane of equilibrium was not found. sions of cross-section or to increase quality of the used mater-
ials
Limit concrete strength is exceeded under the characteristic Increase amount of reinforcement, dimensions of the cross-
E5/1 Error
combination of " & State & "-term loads (EN §7.2(2)). section and/or quality of the used materials.
E5/5 Error Limit reinforcement strength is exceeded under the char- Increase amount of reinforcement, dimensions of the cross-
- 423 -
Chapter 9

acteristic combination of " & State & "-term loads (EN §7.2
section and/or quality of the used materials.
(5)).
Limit concrete strength is exceeded under the quasi-per-
Increase amount of reinforcement, dimensions of the cross-
E5/2 Error manent combination of " & State & "-term loads (EN §7.2
section and/or quality of the used materials.
(3)).
" & State &" in error description is replaced by "short" or "long" according used com-
bination.
List of Warnings
The selected combination is not serviceability - char- Please change type of combination to serviceability - char-
W5/3 Warning
acteristic acteristic
The selected combination is not serviceability - quasi- Please change type of combination to serviceability - quasi-
W5/4 Warning
permanent permanent
List of Notes
material is used)
N0/4 Note
Change the exposure class to XD, XS or
N5/2 Note Check of stress limitation is not required for the selected exposure class.
XF.
Crack width (SLS)

Introduction
The crack width is calculated according to clause 7.3.4 in EN 1992-1-1. The following preconditions are used for calculation :
l The crack width is calculated for beams and columns and for general load (N+My+Mz)
l Cross-section with one polygon and one material is taken into account in version SCIA Engineer 15
l The material of all reinforcement bars have to be same in SCIA Engineer 15
l Normal stress on un-cracked section at the most tensioned fibre for determination if crack occurred or not (check of nor-
mal stresses), should be calculated for characteristic combination of the load according to EN 1992-1-1, clause 7.2(2).
- 424 -
Checks
There is made simplification in SCIA Engineer 15 that this normal stress is calculated for the same type of combination as
it is used for calculation of crack width (load/combination/class inputted in service Crack control.

This value can be set in Concrete setting by using Advanced level or in 1D member data (advanced mode is ON), if
defined. If normal concrete stress on un-cracked section at the most tensioned fibre of concrete cross-section is greater
than this value, the crack will occur and the crack width will be calculated. There are two possibilities:
0 MPa it means that crack width is calculated if there is some tension in cross-section
it means, that crack width is calculated only in case that normal concrete stress on un-cracked section at the
fct,eff most tensioned fiber of concrete cross-section is greater the mean value of the tensile strength of the concrete
effective at the time
Check of normal stresses (occurring of crack width)

Before calculation of crack width the normal concrete stresses on un-cracked section at the most tensioned fibre has to be
checked. If condition below is satisfied, the crack width does not create and the crack width is not calculated
σct ≤ σcr
where
σ
ct
σ
culation of cracking forces" above
cr
There is possible to present cracking forces (N cr, Mcry , Mcrz ) in numerical output. These cracking forces are forces which
cause the reaching of value fc,teff (occurring of crack width in cross-section) in the most tensioned fibre of concrete cross-
section in direction of first or second principal stress. For calculation of this cracking forces is used condition, that eccentricity
of inputted forces and cracking forces has to be the same.

This value can be set in Concrete setting by using Advanced level or in Concrete member data (advanced mode is
ON).There are two possibilities:
f
ctm,fl for calculation crack width
- 425 -
Chapter 9
sary input value fctm (t) in this time to material properties (EN 1992-1-1,clause 3.1.2(9)).
Use of effective modulus of concrete

This value can be set in Concrete setting by using Advanced level or in 1D member data (advanced mode is ON). If
this check box is ON, then effective module of elasticity is taken into account.
EN 1992-1-1 does not give instruction how creep under varying load should be taken into
account for calculation of the crack width. The creep can be generally taken into account by
assuming that effective module of elasticity (EN 1992-1-1, clause 5.8.7(2) ) for calculation
modular ratio (Es /Ec,eff ≈ 15). A Lower value of modular ratio (greater value of module of
elasticity of concrete than effective ) may be used where less than 50 % of the stresses
arise from quasi-permanent load. The different value of modulus of elasticity can be input
directly in material properties, see picture below, but these changes has influence to FEM
analysis too.
- 426 -
Checks
Type of maximal crack width

This value can be set only in 1D member data (advanced mode is ON) and there are two options
Auto it means that maximal (limit) value of crack width will be calculated according to EN 1992-1-1(Table 7.1N)
User it means that user defined value will be taken into account for particular member

This value can be set in Concrete setting by using Advanced level or in 1D member data (advanced mode is ON).
There are two possibilities:
f
ctm,fl for calculation crack width
- 427 -
Chapter 9
sary input value fctm (t) in this time to material properties (EN 1992-1-1,clause 3.1.2(9)).
Calculation of mean strain in the reinforcement and concrete

Difference between mean strain in the reinforcement and the mean strain in concrete between the cracks is calculated
according to EN 1992-1-1, formula 7.9
where
σs the stress in the most tensioned reinforcement

Es design value modulus of elasticity of the most tensioned reinforcement member
factor dependent on duration of the load. If check box "Use of effective modulus of concrete" on page 426 is ON,
kt
the value 0.4 is used, otherwise value 0.6 is used
f is the mean value of the tensile strength of the concrete effective at the time when the cracks may first be expec-
ct,eff ted to occur.The value can be set by "Type of strength for calculation of cracking forces" on the previous page
ρ
ratio of reinforcement within effective area of concrete in tension
p,eff
ratio of design value of modulus of elasticity of the most tensioned reinforcement and modulus elasticity of the con-
αe
crete
From the formula above follows that difference between mean strain in the reinforcement and concrete mainly depends on:
- 428 -
Checks
l strain (stress) in the most tensioned reinforcement,

l effect of tension stiffening.
Strain in the most tensioned reinforcement

Strain in the most tensioned reinforcement is calculated according to formula below
There are used following preconditions in SCIA Engineer:
l The section is loaded by load/combination/class selected in service crack control, see chapter 3.2.1
l Transformed section is used
l Plane section remains plane after loading (deformation) too
l Tensile strength of concrete is not taken into account (cracked section)
l Ideal bond between concrete and reinforcement is taken into account, it means that change strain of reinforcement εs
and concrete fibre εc in the same position is the same
l The linear strain-stress diagram of concrete and reinforcement with infinite branch is used, it means, that distribution of
stress is linear and depends on change of strain (Hook’s law)
Linear stress-strain diagram of concrete Linear stress-strain diagram of reinforcement
Effect of tension stiffening

The tension stiffening effect represents the capacity of the intact concrete between neighbouring cracks to carry a limited
amount of tensile forces. The reason for this effect is bond slip between the reinforcement and the neighbouring concrete.
The decreasing of stress in reinforcement due to tension stiffening can be calculated according to formula:
where
kt factor dependent on duration of the load. The following values should be used according to code EN 1992-
- 429 -
Chapter 9
1-1, chapter 7.3.4(2).
l kt = 0,6 for short term loading

l kt = 0,4 for long term loading
The value of kt in SCIA Engineer depends on type of modulus of concrete. If check box "Use of effective
modulus of concrete" on page 426 is ON, the value 0.4 is used, otherwise value 0.6 is used.
is the mean value of the tensile strength of the concrete effective at the time.
f
When the cracks may first be expected to occur.The value can be set by "Type of strength for calculation of
ct,eff
cracking forces" on page 427.
ratio of reinforcement within effective area of concrete in tension. This ratio is calculated only for non-
prestressed reinforcement (prestressed reinforcement is not taken into account for check crack width)
ρ according to formula
p,eff
A
area of non-prestressed reinforcement (see chapter 4.4) within effective area of concrete in tension
s,eff
the effective area of concrete in tension surrounding the reinforcement. This is area of reinforcement
A
bounded by line, which is in distance hc,eff from the most tensioned fibre of concrete in the direction of bend-
c,eff ing moment resultant
the depth of effective area of concrete in tension surrounding the reinforcement.
h
c,eff
the height of cross-section in direction of resultant of the bending moments (thickness of FEM element in
h
centroid)
d effective depth of cross-section in direction of resultant of the bending moments
x depth of concrete in compression calculated for uncracked section
ratio of design value of modulus of elasticity of the most tensioned reinforcement and modulus elasticity of
the concrete
αe
design value of modulus of elasticity of the most tensioned The value is loaded from material properties of
Es
the reinforcement, see picture below
Ec modulus of elasticity of concrete. The value is loaded from material properties of the concrete
- 430 -
Checks
The program finishes with error if area of non-prestressed reinforcement As,eff is zero,
EN 1992-1-1 does not give instruction, how creep under varying load should be taken into
modular ratio (Es /Ec,eff ≈ 15). A lower value of modular ratio (greater value of module of
arise from quasi- permanent load. The effective module of elasticity can be taken into
account by check box Use effective modulus of concrete (see 2.1.3 ) .The different value of
modulus of elasticity can be input directly in material properties, but these changes has influ-
ence to FEM analysis too.
Calculation of maximum crack spacing

Maximum crack spacing is calculated according to EN 1992-1-1, clause 7.3.4(3)
- 431 -
Chapter 9
where
k
coefficients of calculation loaded from national annex setting (Manager of national annex > code EN 1992-1-1 >
3 SLS)
, k4
c cover of the most tensioned reinforcement calculated in direction of resultant of bending moments
k1 coefficient which takes account of the bond properties of the bonded reinforcement
l k1 = 0,8 for high bond bars (in SCIA Engineer bar surface = ribbed)
k1 l k1 = 1,6 for bars with an effectively plain surface e.g. prestressing tendons (in SCIA Engineer bar surface =
smooth)
The bar surface can be defined in material properties of the reinforcement

coefficient which takes account of the distribution of strain
k l k2= 0.5 for pure bending

2,i+ l k2 = 1.0 for pure tension
l k2= (ε1+ ε2)/2 • ε1
the greater tensile strain at the boundaries (edges) of the cross-section The strain is calculated for uncracked sec-
ε1
tion with taking into account conditions in chapter 4.6.1.1 and the value of strain is zero for edge in compression
the lesser tensile strain at the boundaries (edges) of the cross-section The strain is calculated for uncracked sec-
ε2
ρ
p,eff
ratio of design value of modulus of elasticity of most tensioned reinforcement and modulus elasticity of the con-
αe
crete
is depth of concrete in compression calculated for uncracked section with taking into account conditions in chapter
x
4.6.1.1.
h the height of cross-section in direction of resultant of the bending moments
centre to centre spacing between bars of reinforcement of the most tensioned layer of reinforcement per-
ss
pendicular to direction of bending moments resultant
diameter of bars of the most tensioned layer of reinforcement. If bars with different diameter are inside of the
ds effective area of concrete, the equivalent diameter according to equation 7.12 in EN 1992-1-1 is taken into
account
- 432 -
Checks
Calculation of crack width in direction of principal stresses

The crack width is calculated according to EN 1992-1-1, formula 7.8.
w = sr,max • (εsm - εcm )
where
sr,max maximum crack spacing

(εsm - εcm) difference between mean strain in the reinforcement and the mean strain in concrete between the cracks

Before calculation of crack width the normal concrete stresses on un-cracked section at the most tensioned fibre has to be
checked. If condition below is satisfied, the crack width does not create and the crack width is not calculated
σct ≤ σcr
where
σ
ct
- 433 -
Chapter 9
σ
culation of cracking forces" on page 425
cr
There is possible to present cracking forces (N cr, Mcry , Mcrz ) in numerical output. These cracking forces are forces which
cause the reaching of value fc,teff (occurring of crack width in cross-section) in the most tensioned fibre of concrete cross-
section in direction of first or second principal stress. For calculation of this cracking forces is used condition, that eccentricity
of inputted forces and cracking forces has to be the same.
Calculation of mean strain in the reinforcement and concrete

where
σs the stress in the most tensioned reinforcement

Es design value modulus of elasticity of the most tensioned reinforcement member
kt factor dependent on duration of the load.
f is the mean value of the tensile strength of the concrete effective at the time when the cracks may first be expec-
ct,eff ted to occur.The value can be set by "Type of strength for calculation of cracking forces" on page 425
ρ
p,eff
ratio of design value of modulus of elasticity of the most tensioned reinforcement and modulus elasticity of the con-
αe
crete
From the formula above follows that difference between mean strain in the reinforcement and concrete mainly depends on:


l The section is loaded by load/combination/class selected in service crack control, see code chapter 3.2.1
l Ideal bond between concrete and reinforcement is taken into account, it means change strain of reinforcement εs and
concrete fibre εc in the same position is the same
- 434 -
Checks
stress is linear and depends on change of strain (Hook’s law)
Linear stress-strain diagram of concrete Linear stress-strain diagram of reinforcement

where
factor dependent on duration of the load. The following values should be used according to code EN 1992-
1-1, chapter 7.3.4(2).
l kt = 0,6 for short term loading

l kt = 0,4 for long term loading
The value of kt in SCIA Engineer depends on type of load. It is calculated according followed formula.
kt = kt,long + (kt,short - kt,long) ∙ (1 - Coefflong)
l kt = 0,6 for Variable load case (Coefflong = 0)

kt
l kt = 0,4 for Permanent load case (Coefflong = 1)
l kt = 0,46 for Characteristic SLS combination (Coefflong = 0,7)
l kt = 0,6 for Frequent SLS combination (Coefflong = 0)
l kt = 0,4 for Quasi-permanent SLS combination (Coefflong = 1)
l kt = 0,46 for Other SLS combination (Coefflong = 0,7)
l kt = 0,46 for Non-linear combinations (Coefflong = 0,7)
- 435 -
Chapter 9
is the mean value of the tensile strength of the concrete effective at the time.
f
When the cracks may first be expected to occur.The value can be set by "Type of strength for calculation of
ct,eff
cracking forces" on page 425.
ratio of reinforcement within effective area of concrete in tension. This ratio is calculated only for non-
prestressed reinforcement (prestressed reinforcement is not taken into account for check crack width)
ρ according to formula
p,eff
A
area of non-prestressed reinforcement (see chapter 4.4) within effective area of concrete in tension
s,eff
the effective area of concrete in tension surrounding the reinforcement. This is area of reinforcement
A
bounded by line, which is in distance hc,eff from the most tensioned fibre of concrete in direction of bending
c,eff moment resultant
the depth of effective area of concrete in tension surrounding the reinforcement.
h
c,eff
the height of cross-section in direction of resultant of the bending moments (thickness of FEM element in
h
centroid)
d effective depth of cross-section in direction of resultant of the bending moments
depth of concrete in compression calculated for uncracked section with taking into account conditions in
x
code chapter 4.6.1.1.
ratio of design value of modulus of elasticity of the most tensioned reinforcement and modulus elasticity of
the concrete
αe
design value of modulus of elasticity of the most tensioned The value is loaded from material properties of
Es
the reinforcement, see picture below
Ec modulus of elasticity of concrete. The value is loaded from material properties of the concrete
- 436 -
Checks
The program finishes with error if area of non-prestressed reinforcement As,eff is zero,
modular ratio (Es /Ec,eff ≈ 15). A Lower value of modular ratio (greater value of module of
arise from quasi- permanent load. The effective module of elasticity van be taken into
account by check box Use effective modulus of concrete (see 2.1.3 ) .The different value of
modulus of elasticity can be input directly in material properties, but these changes has influ-
ence to FEM analysis too.
Calculation of maximum crack spacing

Maximum crack spacing is calculated according to EN 1992-1-1, clause 7.3.4(3)
where
- 437 -
Chapter 9
k
coefficients of calculation loaded from national annex setting (Manager of national annex > code EN 1992-1-1 >
3 SLS)
, k4
c cover of the most tensioned reinforcement calculated in direction of resultant of bending moments
k1 coefficient which takes account of the bond properties of the bonded reinforcement
l k1 = 0,8 for high bond bars (in SCIA Engineer bar surface = ribbed)
k1 l k1 = 1,6 for bars with an effectively plain surface e.g. prestressing tendons (in SCIA Engineer bar surface =
smooth)

coefficient which takes account of the distribution of strain
k l k2= 0.5 for pure bending

2,i+ l k2 = 1.0 for pure tension
l k2= (ε1+ ε2)/2 • ε1
the greater tensile strain at the boundaries (edges) of the cross-section The strain is calculated for uncracked sec-
ε1
the lesser tensile strain at the boundaries (edges) of the cross-section The strain is calculated for uncracked sec-
ε2
ρ
p,eff
ratio of design value of modulus of elasticity of most tensioned reinforcement and modulus elasticity of the con-
αe
crete
is depth of concrete in compression calculated for uncracked section with taking into account conditions in chapter
x
4.6.1.1.
h the height of cross-section in direction of resultant of the bending moments
centre to centre spacing between bars of reinforcement of the most tensioned layer of reinforcement per-
ss
pendicular to direction of bending moments resultant
diameter of bars of the most tensioned layer of reinforcement. If bars with different diameter are inside of the
ds effective area of concrete, the equivalent diameter according to equation 7.12 in EN 1992-1-1 is taken into
account
- 438 -
Checks
Calculation of crack width

w = sr,max • (εsm - εcm )
where
sr,max maximum crack spacing

(εsm - εcm) difference between mean strain in the reinforcement and the mean strain in concrete between the cracks
Warning and errors

The following errors, warnings and notes may be occurred during the check crack width

The crack is not appeared, because maximal tensile stress is lesser than crack-
N5/1 Note
ing strength.
The crack is appeared, because maximal tensile stress is greater than crack-
N5/2 Note
ing strength.
E5/1 Error Check was not done, because plane of equilibrium was not found. To increase amount of reinforcement or to
- 439 -
Chapter 9

increase dimensions of cross-section or to
increase quality of the used materials.
Depth of effective area of the concrete in the tension is calculated only as MIN
N5/3 Note
[(2.5*(h-d); h/2)], because member is in compression.
The maximum spacing of reinforcement cannot be calculated. The width of
N5/4 Note cross-section perpendicular to direction of bending moment resultant crossing
the bar with maximum tensile stress will be taken into account.
To input some bars of reinforcement to
There is no reinforcement inside of effective area of the concrete in the ten-
E5/2 Error inside effective area of the concrete or
sion.
decrease cover of reinforcement.
To increase amount of reinforcement or to
E5/3 Error Effective area of the concrete is not created. increase dimensions of cross-section or to
Check is not done, because normal force and bending moments for quasi per-
N5/5 Note
manent combination are zero.
N5/6 Note Check crack width satisfies, because the crack width is lesser than limit value.
Check crack width does not satisfy, because the crack width is bigger than limit
E5/4 Error increase dimensions of cross-section or to
value.
Check crack width does not satisfy, because crack width is not calculated due
to some errors during calculation.

l In numerical output via check box Print explanation of errors and warnings in service for crack control, see chapter
3.2.1
Abbreviations
Abbreviation Explanation
SEN Software SCIA Engineer
PNL Physical nonlinear calculation
GNL Geometrical nonlinear calculation
LCS Local coordinate system
GCS Global coordinate system
REDES The module in SEN for inputting user reinforcement to 1D member via template
SLS Serviceability limit state
ULS Ultimate limit state
Warning and errors

The following errors, warnings and notes may be occurred during the check of crack width
- 440 -
Checks

The crack is not appeared, because maximal tensile stress is lesser than crack-
N5/1 Note
ing strength.
The crack is appeared, because maximal tensile stress is greater than crack-
N5/2 Note
ing strength.
E5/1 Error Check was not done, because plane of equilibrium was not found. increase dimensions of cross-section or to
Depth of effective area of the concrete in the tension is calculated only as MIN
N5/3 Note
[(2.5*(h-d); h/2)], because member is in compression.
The maximum spacing of reinforcement cannot be calculated. The width of
N5/4 Note cross-section perpendicular to direction of bending moment resultant crossing
the bar with maximum tensile stress will be taken into account.
To input some bars of reinforcement to
There is no reinforcement inside of effective area of the concrete in the ten-
E5/2 Error inside effective area of the concrete or
sion.
decrease cover of reinforcement.
E5/3 Error Effective area of the concrete is not created. increase dimensions of cross-section or to
Check is not done, because normal force and bending moments for quasi per-
N5/5 Note
manent combination are zero.
N5/6 Note Check crack width satisfies, because the crack width is lesser than limit value.
Check crack width does not satisfy, because the crack width is bigger than limit
value.
Check crack width does not satisfy, because crack width is not calculated due
to some errors during calculation.

l In numerical output via check box Print explanation of errors and warnings in service for crack control, see chapter
3.2.1
Abbreviations
Abbreviation Explanation
SEN Software SCIA Engineer
PNL Physical nonlinear calculation
GNL Geometrical nonlinear calculation
LCS Local coordinate system
GCS Global coordinate system
REDES The module in SEN for inputting user reinforcement to 1D member via template
SLS Serviceability limit state
ULS Ultimate limit state
- 441 -
Chapter 9
Literature
1. [1] EN 1992-1-1: 2004 Eurocode 2 : design of concrete structures – Part 1: General rules and rules for building
2. [2] ENV 1992-1-1: 1991 Eurocode 2 : design of concrete structures – Part 1: General rules and rules for building
Literature
EN 1992-1-1: 2004 Eurocode 2 : design of concrete structures – Part 1: General

[1]
rules and rules for building
ENV 1992-1-1: 1991 Eurocode 2 : design of concrete structures – Part 1: General
[2]
rules and rules for building
Deflections (SLS)
Introduction
The calculation of deflection is done according to chapter 7.4.3 from EN 1992-1-1. The verification of deflections should be
performed due to the following reasons:
l Unacceptable deflection should not affect proper function of the structure or aesthetic - limit for total deflection
l To avoid damage to partitions and finishes due to increments in deflection following their construction - limit for additional
deflection
The behaviour of the reinforced cross-section for deflection needs is the same as used for the stiffness calculation and can
be also expressed in term of moment and strain (deformation) diagram. The final value of stiffness is calculated using inter-
polation formula between state (I) deformation for uncracked concrete section (ξ = 0) and state (II) deformation for fully
cracked concrete section (no tension carries) (ξ = 1) dependently on the ratio of stress in reinforcement from cracking load
and acting load. The dependency of cracking moment on strain in concrete is visible from the following figure. The value of
deformation is then recalculated from the stiffness and acting load.
- 442 -
Checks
Influence of deflection values

Generally, there are three main effects which affect the values of deformation
Effect of load
In concrete structures, deflections increase with time under sustained load. The greater part of the deflection normally
occurs under sustained loads. Therefore, long-term deflections are calculated under a best estimate of the sustained load
during the lifetime of the structure. The design load for calculating long-term deflections is the permanent load
Effect of cracking
Effect of concrete cracking is irreversible process. Therefore, it is necessary to calculate long-term deflections using a effect-
ive tensile concrete strength which corresponds to the worst cracking during the lifetime of the structure.
Effect of creep
In fact creep is the continuous deformation of a member under sustained load. As it is mentioned in "Assumptions" on
page 370, creep effect is covered in calculation via effective modulus of elasticity which is calculated using creep coefficient.
Assumption
The same preconditions are used for calculation as mentioned in chapter "Assumption and limitations" on page 416
SCIA Engineer is able to calculate short-term or long-term stiffness. This type depends on setting in Global settings - Solver
settings - General - SLS - Use effective modulus of elasticity.
- 443 -
Chapter 9
l check is performed on linear/envelope or code combination (it is not necessary to define concrete combinations)
l check is done for selected members (Current CDD runs for whole structure)
There are the following limitations:
l Deformation caused by shrinkage is not automatically taken into account in version SCIA Engineer15.
l Verification based on limiting span / depth ratio according to 7.4.2 is not implemented.
l The check is done only on user defined reinforcement (check using theoretical designed reinforcement is not supported).
l The calculation of deflection depends on the internal forces used for the reduced stiffness. Therefore the
check of deflection doesn’t work for case where the internal forces are equal to zero but deflection are
not zero. Typically for cantilever structure of member with free overhang. Here the results cannot be con-
sidered.
Theory
As mentioned in EN 1992- 1- 1 chapter 7.4.1(3) calculated deformations should not exceed those that can be accom-
modated by other connected elements such as partitions, glazing, cladding, services or finishes. In some cases limitation
may be required to ensure the proper functioning of machinery or apparatus supported by the structure, or to avoid ponding
on flat roofs.
Generally two main situation are required to be checked:
l Total deflection - The appearance and general utility of the structure could be impaired when the calculated sag of a
beam, slab or cantilever subjected to quasi-permanent loads exceeds span/250. The sag is assessed relative to the sup-
ports. Pre-camber may be used to compensate for some or all of the deflection but any upward deflection incorporated in
the form-work should not generally exceed span/250
l Additional deflection - Deflections that could damage adjacent parts of the structure should be limited. For the deflec-
tion after construction, span/500 is normally an appropriate limit for quasi-permanent loads. Other limits may be con-
sidered, depending on the sensitivity of adjacent parts.
The calculation procedure used in new Deflection check can be described in the following steps:
1) Calculation of short-term stiffness - short-term stiffness is calculated using 28days E modulus for acting load
- 444 -
Checks
2) Calculation of long-term stiffness - long-term stiffness is calculated using effective E modulus based on creep coef-
ficient for acting load
Unfortunately, for time being there is not possibility to distinguish between short-term and long-term part of the load in com-
bination. Therefore some precondition has been established for determination of long-term part of the load. Long-term part
of the load (LongTermPercentage) is estimated based on the type of combination for check. There are three main
SLS combinations:
l 1) SLS characteristics - LongTermPercentage = 70 %

l 2) SLS frequent - LongTermPercentage = 85 %
l 3) SLS quasi-permanent- LongTermPercentage = 100 %
3) Calculation of ratios - stiffness ratios are used as simplified method for calculation of particular deflections (see
below). These values are calculated for each state according to points 1 and 2 above. Generally , the values are ratios of lin-
ear stiffness of concrete component only divided by resultant stiffness taking cracks into account.
ratio = Stiffnesslin / Stiffnessres
For example:
ratiouz = EIz,lin / EIz,res
4) Calculation of particular component - Several particular components are needed for calculation of total and addi-
tional deflection
As mentioned beforehand, the short- and long-term stiffnesses are calculated using a so-called creep factor. This creep-
factor is dependant on the relative humidity, outline of the cross-section, reinforcement percentage, concrete class, etc.This
factor is used to divide the short-term stiffness and obtain the long-term stiffness, Thus by taken the concrete stiffness for
short- and long-term and the representative compression strength the program calculates the stress and strain diagram.
Generally , the components calculated below can be graphically presented on the following figure
Linear (elastic) deflection - is the sum of short-term and long-term elastic deflection
δlin = δlin,s + δlin,l
Immediate deflection - to calculate the immediate deformation, the deformation of the permanent load is calculated using
the short-term stress and strain diagram. Additionally by subtracting the immediate deformation from the total deformation,
the programs calculates the additional deformation.
δimm = δlin,l ∙ ratio s
Short-term deflection - is the multiplication of short-term elastic deflection and short-term ratio
δs = δlin,s ∙ ratios
Long-term deflection + creep - is the multiplication of long-term elastic deflection and long-term ratio
δl,creep = δlin,l ∙ ratiol
- 445 -
Chapter 9
Creep deflection - is calculated based on short and long term ratios

δcreep = δlin,l ∙ (ratiol - ratios )
Long-term deflection - is the difference between deflection caused by long-term + creep and creep parts of deflection
δl = δl,creep - δcreep
Additional deflection - is the difference between sum of shot-term and long-term with creep towards immediate deflec-
tion
δadd = δs + δl,creep - δimm
Total deflection - is the sum of short-term and long-term +creep deflection

δtot = δs + δl,creep
5) Check of deflections - as it was reported at the beginning of this chapter two deflections are required to be checked. At
first the limit values has to be calculated for particular direction of deflections. These values are:
a) limit for total deflection
δtot,lim = L / 250
b) limit for additional deflection

δadd,lim = L / 500
In formulas above, there is mentioned L value. This value corresponds to buckling length multiplied by β factor of the mem-
ber in particular direction.
Finally the unity check can be calculated as follows:
Unity check = max (δtot / δtot,lim ; δadd / δadd,lim )
Output values
l Unity check - unity check of check deflection(see above)

l δtot,y - total deflection in (y) direction
l δtot,z - total deflection in (z) direction
l δtot,lim,y - limit total deflection in (y) direction
l δtot,lim,z - limit total deflection in (z) direction
l δadd,y - additional deflection in (y) direction
l δadd,z - additional deflection in (z) direction
l δadd,lim,z - limit additional deflection in (z) direction
l δadd,lim,y - limit additional deflection in (y) direction
Setup
The following items have impact on the calculation of deflection check. Both are stored in Concrete settings (structure)-
Global settings-Solver settings - Deflections
Maximal total displacement

Maximal total displacement expresses ad L/x. Default value is 250. The limit is taken according to chapter 7.4.1(4) from EN
1992-1-1.
- 446 -
Checks
Maximal additional displacement

Maximal additional displacement expresses ad L/x. Default value is 500. The limit is taken according to chapter 7.4.1(5) from
EN 1992-1-1.
Additionally, both values above can be modified using Concrete member data per each member.
- 447 -
Chapter 9
Errors, Warnings, Notes

List of Errors
Change (a) the dimensions of the cross-section, (b) the amount of reinforcement or
E0/1 Error Plane of equilibrium was not found.
(c) the quality of the used materials.
The limit additional deflection in (y) dir- Change (a) the dimensions of the cross-section, (b) the amount of reinforcement or
E8/2 Error
ection is exceeded. (c) the quality of the used materials.
The limit additional deflection in (z) dir- Change (a) the dimensions of the cross-section, (b) the amount of reinforcement or
E8/3 Error
ection is exceeded. (c) the quality of the used materials.
The limit total deflection in (y) direction Change (a) the dimensions of the cross-section, (b) the amount of reinforcement or
E8/5 Error
is exceeded. (c) the quality of the used materials.
The limit total deflection in (z) direction Change (a) the dimensions of the cross-section, (b) the amount of reinforcement or
E8/6 Error
is exceeded. (c) the quality of the used materials.
List of Warnings
- 448 -
Checks
List of Notes
material is used)
N0/3 Note The "Free bars" reinforcement is not taken into account
N0/4 Note
" & State & " in note N8/1 is replaced by "short" or "long" according used combination
Detailing provisions
Introduction
Requirements for detailing provisions of reinforced concrete members are another step of proper design respecting safety,
serviceability and durability of structure.
Generally SCIA Engineer distinguishes three main types of member within their detailing provisions:
l Beam - verification of longitudinal and shear reinforcement

l Column - verification of main and transverse reinforcement
l Beam slab - verification of longitudinal reinforcement only
The following table shows which checks of detailing provisions are performed for particular member type:
longitudinal shear
Member type
(main) (transverse)
6.2.3(3) - Maximal percentage of shear reinforcement
8.2(2) - Minimal clear spacing of bars 9.2.2(5) - Minimal percentage of shear reinforcement
9.2.1.1(1) - Minimal area of longitudinal reinforcement 9.2.2 (6) - Maximal longitudinal spacing of stirrups
(shear)
Beam 9.2.1.1(3) - Maximal area of longitudinal reinforcement
9.2.2 (8) - Maximal transverse spacing of stirrups
9.2.3(4) - Maximal centre-to-centre bar distance based on torsion
(shear)
Code-Independent - Maximal clear spacing
9.2.3(3) - Maximal longitudinal spacing of stirrups (tor-
sion)
8.2(2) - Minimal clear spacing of bars 9.2.3(3) - Maximal longitudinal spacing of stirrups (tor-
sion)
Column 9.5.2(1) - Minimal bar diameter of longitudinal reinforcement
9.5.3 (1) - Minimal diameter of transverse rein-
9.5.2(2) - Minimal area of longitudinal reinforcement forcement
- 449 -
Chapter 9
longitudinal shear
Member type
(main) (transverse)
9.5.2(3) - Maximal area of longitudinal reinforcement 9.5.3(3) - Maximal longitudinal spacing of transverse
9.5.2(4) - Minimal number of longitudinal reinforcement bars reinforcement
8.2(2) - Minimal clear spacing of bars

Beam Slab -
9.3.1.1(3) - Maximal bar distance of longitudinal reinforcement
Assumption and limitations

There are the following assumption and limitation:
l Stirrups can be defined with perpendicular direction to axis of the member (α = 90°).
l Shear bends are not able to define, therefore check of detailing provisions for them is not supported
l Only checks mentioned in previous chapter are supported
l Each check of detailing provisions includes differences per national annex if those exist.
Minimal clear spacing of bars - Code chapter 8.2(2)

The main principles which are checked are mainly satisfying minimal distances between bars which should be arranged in
such a way that concrete can be placed and compacted satisfactorily so that adequate bond will develop between the bars
and concrete.
The procedure of calculation is running for each distances between bars and verification of the minimal distance among
them towards the limited value from the code. The distances are evaluated as the minimal clear distance for all member
types mentioned before (beam, column and beam slab) . Check looks as follows.
Minimal clear distance between longitudinal bar ss-s,min is calculated from practical reinforcement (REDES).
Furthermore minimal allowed clear distance between bars from all bars in cross-section is calculated according to chapter
8.2(2) as
ss-s,min,lim =max (k1 ∙ ϕ; dg+k2; slb,min)
where:
l k1 and k2 are coefficients defined in NA. For standard Eurocode k1= 1 and k2= 5
l ϕ is diameter of maximal longitudinal reinforcement
l dg - maximal stone diameter in concrete mixture
l slb,min is minimal clear distance defined as fixed value in chapter 8.2(2)
Finally unity check is calculated as follows:

UC8.2(2) = ss-s,min,lim / ss-s,min
Clause 8.2.(2) - Coefficients used for National annex parameters

There are the following differences in particular NA.
National annex k1 k2
Standard NA 1,0 5,0
Czech ČSN – EN NA 1,5 5,0
- 450 -
Checks
National annex k1 k2
Slovak STN – EN NA 1,5 5,0
0,0 for dg ≤16 mm
German DIN-EN NA 1,0
5,0 for dg >16 mm
0,0 for one reinforcement layer
Austrian ÖNORM-EN NA 1,0
10,0 for more reinforcement layers
Finnish SFS-EN NA 1,0 3,0
Maximal percentage of shear reinforcement (6.2.3(3))

The maximal percentage of shear reinforcement should not exceed maximal value defined in 6.2.3(3) formula 6.12. Check
looks as follows. Calculation of percentage of shear reinforcement from defined reinforcement is done according to formula
9.4.
ρw = Asw /(s∙bw ∙sin(α))
where
l Asw - Cross - sectional area of shear reinforcement

l bw - shear effective width of cross-section
l s - longitudinal spacing of shear reinforcement
l α - angle between shear reinforcement and longitudinal axis of the member
Furthermore maximal allowed percentage of shear reinforcement is calculated as follows (see formula 6.12).
ρw,max =0,5∙α cw ∙ν1∙fcd/fywd
where
l α cw - coefficient taking into account stress state in compression strut

l ν1 - strength reduction factor for cracked concrete in shear
l fcd - design cylinder strength of concrete member
l fywd - design yield strength of shear reinforcement material

UC6.2.3(3) =ρw /ρw,max
Minimal mandrel diameter (8.3(2))

The mandrel diameter should not exceed minimal value defined in 8.3(2). Check looks as follows. Calculation of minimal
defined mandrel diameter of stirrups:
φm =Coeffϕm ∙φs
where
l Coeffϕm - value defined in Stirrup layer - Diameter of mandrel
- 451 -
Chapter 9
l φs - diameter of defined stirrup
Furthermore minimal allowed mandrel diameter of stirrup is determined as follows from table 8.1N
for φs ≤ 16 mm; φm,min=4∙φs
for φs > 16 mm; φm,min=7∙φs

UC8.3(2) = φm /φm,min
Minimal reinforcement area (9.2.1.1(1))

The area of tensile longitudinal reinforcement has to be limited by minimal value As,min calculated as follows.
As,min = max(CoeffAs,min,2∙fctm ∙bt ∙d / fyk ; CoeffAs,min,1∙bt ∙d)
where
l CoeffAs,min,1and CoeffAs,min,2 - values from formulas 9.1N CoeffAs,min,1= 0,26; CoeffAs,min,2 = 0,0013;
l fctm - mean tensile strength of concrete
l bt - mean width of cross-section in tensile zone of cross-section
l d - effective depth of cross-section
l fyk - yield strength of reinforcement
Calculation of tensile area of reinforcement in considered cross-section Ast .

UC9.2.1.1(1) = As,min/ As,t .
- 452 -
Checks
Clause 9.2.1.1(1) - Minimal tensile reinforcement for National annex

National annex formula 9.1N formula 9.1N

Standard NA CoeffAs,min,2∙fctm∙bt∙d / fyk CoeffAs,min,1∙bt∙d
German DIN-EN NA Not used Not used
Dutch NEN-EN NA max (As,min,1; As,min,2) * -
German NA doesn’t give the limit for minimal tensile area of longitudinal reinforcement. In
this case unity check is = 0.
* The procedure for Dutch NEN-NA is different. The minimal allowed value of longitudinal
reinforcement is: As,min = max (As,min,1; As,min,2). As,min,1 is calculated as ULS design on
three combinations of bending moment ME,min and normal forces N E,min. Maximal value
of it is used as A s,min,1 . Additionally necessary area from ULS (A s,req ) is calculated as
As,min,2 = 1,25 ∙ As,req. For more details see Theoretical background document "National
annexes to EN 1992".
Maximal area of reinforcement (9.2.1.1(3))

The maximal area of longitudinal reinforcement As,max should not exceed the values described in 9.2.1.1(3). and is cal-
culated as follows.
As,max =0,04∙Ac
where
l Ac - area of concrete cross-section
Calculation of longitudinal reinforcement area in considered cross-section As

UC9.2.1.1(3) = As / As,max
Clause 9.2.1.1(3) - Maximal area of reinforcement for National annex

National annex formula

Standard NA 0,04∙Ac
German DIN-EN NA 0,08∙Ac
Finnish SFS-EN NA Not limited
Swedish SS-EN NA Not limited
Slovenian SIST-EN NA Not limited
The verification for SFS, SS and SIST NA is not done at all and unity check is set to
UC9.2.1.1(3) = 0
- 453 -
Chapter 9
Minimal percentage of shear reinforcement (9.2.2(5))

The minimal percentage of shear reinforcement should not exceed minimal value defined in 9.2.2(5). Check looks as fol-
lows. Calculation of percentage of shear reinforcement from defined reinforcement is done according to formula 9.4.
ρw = Asw / (s ∙ bw ∙ sin(α))
where
l Asw - Cross - sectional area of shear reinforcement

l bw - shear effective width of cross-section
l s - longitudinal spacing of shear reinforcement
l α - angle between shear reinforcement and longitudinal axis of the member
Furthermore minimal allowed percentage of shear reinforcement is calculated as follows (see formula 9.5N).
ρw,min = 0.08 ∙ √fck / fyk
where
l fck - characteristic cylinder strength of concrete member

l fyk - characteristic yield strength of reinforcement material

UC9.2.2(5) = ρw,min / ρw
Clause 9.2.2.(5) - Minimal percentage of shear reinforcement for National annex

National annex formula 9.5N

Standard NA 0.08 ∙ √fck / fyk
German DIN-EN NA 0.16 ∙ fctm / fyk
Austrian ÖNORM-EN NA 0.15 ∙ fctm / fyd
Maximal longitudinal spacing of stirrups based on shear (9.2.2(6))

The maximal longitudinal spacing between stirrups links should not exceed maximal value defined in 9.2.2(6). Check looks
as follows. Calculation of maximal defined longitudinal distance of stirrups sl.
Furthermore maximal allowed longitudinal distance between stirrups is calculated as follows
sl,max = 0,75∙d∙(1+cotg (α))
where:
l d - effective depth of cross-section

l α - angle of stirrups to longitudinal axis of the member

UC9.2.2(6) = sl/ sl,max .
Clause 9.2.2.(6) - Maximal longitudinal spacing of stirrups for National annex

- 454 -
Checks

Standard NA 0,75∙d∙(1+cotg (α))
Austrian ÖNORM-EN NA max(0,75∙d∙(1+cotg (α)); 250 mm)
Czech ČSN-EN NA max(0,75∙d∙(1+cotg (α)); 400 mm)
for h ≤ 250 mm
l sl,max = 0,9∙d
French NF-EN NA
for h > 250 mm
l sl,max = max(0,75∙d∙(1+cotg (α))

for VEd≤ 0,3∙VRd,max
l for fck ≤ 50 MPa→ sl,max = max(0,7∙h; 300 mm)
l for fck > 50 MPa→ sl,max = max(0,7∙h; 200 mm)
l for VEd< VRd,c ; h < 200 mm and beam
l sl,max = 200 mm
German DIN-EN NA
for 0,3•VRd,max < VEd≤ 0,6∙VRd,max
l for fck ≤ 50 MPa → sl,max = max(0,5∙h; 300 mm)
l for fck > 50 MPa → sl,max = max(0,5∙h; 200 mm)
for VEd> 0,6∙VRd,max
l sl,max = max(0,25∙h; 200 mm)

Slovak STN-EN NA max(0,75∙d∙(1+cotg (α)); 400 mm)
Maximal longitudinal spacing of stirrups based on torsion requirements (9.2.3

(3))
The maximal longitudinal spacing between stirrups links based on torsion requirements should not exceed maximal value
defined in 9.2.3(3). Check looks as follows. Calculation of maximal defined longitudinal distance of stirrups sl.
Furthermore maximal allowed longitudinal distance between stirrups based on torsion requirements is calculated as follows
sl,tor,max =min (uk /8; sl; bmin)
where:
l uk - perimeter of effective area for torsion

l bmin - minimal dimension of cross-section determined from rewritten rectangular cross-section (see the following figure)
- 455 -
Chapter 9

UC9.2.3(3) = sl/ sl,tor,max .
Maximal centre-to-centre bar distance based on torsion (9.2.3(4))

The procedure of calculation is running for each distance between bars and verification of the maximal distance among
them towards the limited value from the code. The distances are evaluated as the maximal centre-to centre distance.
sc-c,max
Furthermore minimal allowed centre-to-centre distance between bars from all bars in cross-section is determined accord-
ing to chapter 9.2.3(4) as
sc-c,max,lim = 350 mm

UC9.2.3(4) = sc-c,max / sc-c,max,lim
Maximal clear spacing of bars (Code independent)

The procedure of calculation is running for each distances between bars and verification of the maximal distance among
them towards the limited value from the user point of view. The distances are evaluated as the maximal clear distance for all
member types mentioned before (beam, column and beam slab).
ss-s,max
Furthermore maximal allowed clear distance between bars from all bars in cross-section is defined by user in Concrete set-
tings (structure) as
ss-s,max,lim = 350 mm

UCmax_bar_distance(user) = ss-s,max / ss-s,max,lim .
Unity check calculation

Finally, the unity check is calculated dependently on member type and settings in Concrete settings (see "Concrete settings
for beams" on page 462. Three basic cases are distinguished:
l Beam
UC = max ( UC8.2(2); UC8.3(2); UC6.2.3(3); UC9.2.1.1(1); UC9.2.1.1(3); UC9.2.2(5); UC9.2.2(6); UC9.2.2(8); UC9.2.3(3);
UC9.2.3(4); UCmax_bar_distance(user))
l Beam slab
UC = max ( UC8.2(2); UC8.3(2); UC9.2.1.1(1); UC9.2.1.1(3); UC9.3.1.1(3))
l Columns
UC = max ( UC8.2(2); UC8.3(2); UC9.5.2(1); UC9.5.2(2);UC9.5.2(3);UC9.5.2(4);UC9.5.3(1);UC9.5.3(3); UCmax_bar_distance

(user))
Output values
l Unity check - unity check of detailing provisions

l Unity check long - unity check of detailing provisions for longitudinal reinforcement
- 456 -
Checks
l Unity check shear - unity check of detailing provisions for shear reinforcement
Minimal bar diameter of longitudinal reinforcement (9.5.2(1))

The diameter of longitudinal reinforcement in column should not exceed minimal value defined in 9.5.2(1). Check looks as
follows. The diameter is evaluated as minimal used diameter of longitudinal reinforcement in column ϕl,min
Furthermore minimal allowed diameter of longitudinal reinforcement is determined as follows
ϕl,min,col = 8 mm

UC9.5.2(1) =ϕl,min,col/ϕl,min
Clause 9.5.2(1) - minimal bar diameter of longitudinal reinforcement for National annex

Standard NA 8 mm
12 mm for min(b,h) ≥ 200 mm
Austrian ÖNORM-EN NA
10 mm for other cases
Belgian NBN-EN NA 12 mm
British BS-EN NA 12 mm
12 mm for min(b,h) ≥ 200 mm
Czech ČSN-EN NA
10 mm for other cases
German DIN-EN NA 12 mm
Irish IS-EN NA 12 mm
Polish PN-EN NA 6 mm
Singaporean SS-EN NA 12 mm
Slovak STN-EN 10 mm
Slovenian SIST-EN NA 12 mm
Minimal area of longitudinal reinforcement (9.5.2(2))

The total area of longitudinal reinforcement in column should not exceed minimal value defined in 9.5.2(2). Check looks as
follows. Total area of longitudinal reinforcement is calculated in column As .
Furthermore minimal allowed area of longitudinal reinforcement is calculated as follows
As,min =max (0,1∙|NEd| / fyd; 0,002∙Ac )
where:
l NEd - design value of normal force

l fyd- design yield strength of longitudinal reinforcement
l Ac - concrete are of cross-section

UC9.5.2(2) = As,min / As
- 457 -
Chapter 9
Clause 9.5.2(2) - minimal area of longitudinal reinforcement for National annex


Standard NA max(0,1∙|NEd| / fyd; 0,002∙Ac )
Austrian ÖNORM-EN NA max(0,13∙|NEd| / fyd; 0,0026∙Ac )
German DIN-EN NA 0,15∙|NEd| / fyd
Slovenian SIST-EN NA max(0,1∙|NEd| / fyd; 0,003∙Ac )
Swedish SS-EN NA 0,002∙Ac
Maximal area of longitudinal reinforcement (9.5.2(3))

The total area of longitudinal reinforcement in column should not exceed maximal value defined in 9.5.2(3). Total area of lon-
gitudinal reinforcement is calculated in column As .
Maximal allowed area of longitudinal reinforcement is calculated as follows
As,max = 0,04∙Ac
where:
l Ac - concrete area of cross-section

UC9.5.2(3) = As / As,max
Clause 9.5.2(3) - maximal area of longitudinal reinforcement for National annex


Standard NA 0,04∙Ac
German DIN-EN NA 0,09∙Ac
0,04∙Ac for in-situ concrete members
Austrian ÖNORM-EN NA
0,09∙Ac for prefabricated concrete members
Finnish SFS-EN NA 0,06∙Ac
Swedish SS-EN NA not used
Minimal number of bars in circular column (9.5.2(4))

The minimal number of longitudinal bars in circular column should not exceed minimal value defined in 9.5.2(4). Check looks
as follows. Used number of longitudinal bars is calculated in column nbars .
Furthermore minimal allowed number of bars in column is determined as follows
nbars,min,col. = 4
UC9.5.2(4) =nbars,min,col./nbars .
- 458 -
Checks
Minimal bar diameter of transverse reinforcement (9.5.3(1))

The diameter of transverse reinforcement in column should not exceed minimal value defined in 9.5.3(1). Check looks as fol-
lows. Used minimal diameters of transverse reinforcement is evaluated in column ϕs,min.
Furthermore minimal allowed diameter of transverse reinforcement is determined as follows
ϕs,min,lim = max (6 mm; 0,25∙ϕl,max )

UC9.5.3(1) =ϕs,min,lim /ϕs,min
Maximal longitudinal spacing of stirrups (9.5.3(3))

The maximal longitudinal spacing between stirrups links should not exceed maximal value defined in 9.5.3(3). Check looks
as follows. Maximal longitudinal spacing of stirrups sl is evaluated in cross-section
Furthermore maximal allowed longitudinal distance between stirrups is calculated as follows
sclt,max = min (20∙ϕl,min; min(b,h); 400 mm)
where:
l ϕl,min - minimal diameter of longitudinal bars

l b,h -dimensions of columns

UC9.5.3(3) = sl/ sclt,max .
Clause 9.5.3(3) - Maximal longitudinal spacing of stirrups for National annex


Standard NA min (20∙ϕ l,min; min(b,h); 400 mm)
Austrian ÖNORM-EN NA min (12∙ϕ l,min; min(b,h); 250 mm)
Czech ČSN-EN NA min (15∙ϕ l,min; min(b,h); 300 mm)
Finnish SFS-EN NA min (15∙ϕ l,min; min(b,h); 400 mm)
German DIN-EN NA min (12∙ϕ l,min; min(b,h); 300 mm)
Luxembourgian LU-EN NA min (15∙ϕ l,min; min(b,h); 400 mm)
Slovak STN-EN NA min (15∙ϕ l,min; min(b,h); 300 mm)
Slovenian SIST-EN NA min (12∙ϕ l,min; min(b,h); 300 mm)
Maximal centre-to-centre bar distance (9.3.1.1(3))

The procedure of calculation is running for each distance between bars and verification of the maximal distance among
them towards the limited value from the code. The distances are evaluated as the maximal centre- to centre distance
smax,slab.
Furthermore minimal allowed centre-to-centre distance between bars from all bars in cross-section is determined accord-
ing to chapter 9.3.1.1(3) as
smax,slab,lim =max (3∙h; 400 mm).
where
- 459 -
Chapter 9
l h - depth of the slab

UC9.3.1.1(3) = smax,slab/ smax,slab,lim
The check is performed only for principal reinforcement.
Clause 9.3.1.1(3) - maximal centre-to-centre bar distance for National annex


Standard NA max (3∙h; 400 mm)
Austrian ÖNORM-EN NA max (1,5∙h; 250 mm)
Belgian NBN-EN NA max (2,5∙h; 400 mm)
Czech ČSN-EN NA max (2∙h; 300 mm)
150 mm for h ≤ 150 mm
German DIN-EN NA h for (150 mm < h < 250 mm)
250 mm for h ≥ 250 mm

Luxembourgian LU-EN NA max (2,5∙h; 400mm)
Slovak STN-EN NA max (2∙h; 300mm)
Concrete settings
The following items have impact on the calculation of detailing provisions check.These values are stored in Concrete set-
tings (structure) - Global settings - Solver settings - Detailing provisions.
The settings is divided into three main parts:
- 460 -
Checks
l Beam
l Longitudinal
l Stirrups
Column
l Main
l Transverse
Beam slab
l Longitudinal
- 461 -
Chapter 9
Concrete settings for beams
Beams

Description Setting if minimal clear bar distance of longitudinal reinforcement for beam is checked or not.
Default Check box YES
Code 8.2(2)
Figure

Description Additional limit for minimal clear bar distance of longitudinal reinforcement for beam
Default Edit box slb,min = 20 mm
Code 8.2(2)
- 462 -
Checks
Figure

Description Setting if maximal clear bar distance of longitudinal reinforcement for beam is checked or not.
Default Check box NO
Code Code-independent
Figure

Description Additional limit for maximal clear bar distance of longitudinal reinforcement for beam
Default Edit box slb,max = 350 mm; this item is visible only if check box above is set ON
Figure

Setting if maximal centre-to-centre bar distance of longitudinal reinforcement for beam based
Description on torsion requirement is checked or not. This value is checked only if torsional moment exists in
cross-section.
Code 9.2.3(4)
- 463 -
Chapter 9
Figure

Maximal centre-to-centre bar distance of longitudinal reinforcement for beam based on torsion
Description
requirement. This value is checked only if torsional moment exists in cross-section.
Default Edit box slbt,max = 350 mm; this item is visible only if check box above is set ON
Code 9.2.3(4)
Figure

Description Setting if minimal reinforcement area of longitudinal reinforcement for beam is checked or not.
Code 9.2.1.1(1)
Figure
Check min. reinforcement area for secondary member

Setting if minimal reinforcement area of longitudinal reinforcement for secondary beam is
Description
checked or not. Settings for secondary member is defined in Concrete member data
- 464 -
Checks
Code 9.2.1.1(1)
Figure -

Description Setting if maximal reinforcement area of longitudinal reinforcement for beam is checked or not.
Code 9.2.1.1(3)
Figure
Stirrups

Description Setting if minimal mandrel diameter of stirrups for beam is checked or not
Code 8.3(2)
Figure -
Check max. longitudinal spacing (shear)

Setting if maximal longitudinal spacing of stirrups based on shear requirements is checked or
Description
not.
Code 9.2.2(6)
Figure
Check max. longitudinal spacing (torsion)

Setting if maximal longitudinal spacing of stirrups based on torsion requirements is checked or
Description
not.
- 465 -
Chapter 9
Code 9.2.3(3)
Figure
Check max. transverse spacing (shear)

Setting if maximal transverse spacing of stirrups based on shear requirements is checked or
Description
not.
Code 9.2.2(8)
Figure
Check min. percentage of stirrups

Description Setting if minimal percentage of stirrups for beam is checked or not.
Code 9.2.2(5)
Figure -

Code 6.2.3(3)
Figure -
Settings for beam slabs
Beam Slab
Longitudinal

Setting if minimal clear bar distance of longitudinal reinforcement for beam slab is checked
Description
or not.
Code 8.2(2)
- 466 -
Checks
Figure

Description Additional limit for minimal clear bar distance of longitudinal reinforcement for beam slab
Default Edit box slb,min = 20 mm
Code 8.2(2)
Figure

Setting if maximal centre-to-centre bar distance of longitudinal reinforcement for beam
Description
slab is checked or not. Only principal reinforcement is checked
Code 9.3.1.1(3)
Figure

Setting if minimal reinforcement area of longitudinal reinforcement for beam slab is
Description
checked or not.
Code 9.3.1.1(1)
- 467 -
Chapter 9
Figure

Setting if maximal reinforcement area of longitudinal reinforcement for beam slab is
Description
checked or not.
Code 9.3.1.1(1)
Figure
Settings for columns
Column
Main

Setting if minimal clear bar distance of longitudinal reinforcement for column is checked
Description
or not.
Code 8.2(2)
- 468 -
Checks
Figure

Description Additional limit for minimal clear bar distance of longitudinal reinforcement for column
Default Edit box slc,min = 20 mm
Code 8.2(2)
Figure

Setting if maximal clear bar distance of longitudinal reinforcement for column is checked
Description
or not.
Figure

Description Additional limit for maximal clear bar distance of longitudinal reinforcement for column
Default Edit box slc,max = 350 mm; this item is visible only if check box above is set ON
- 469 -
Chapter 9
Figure

Setting if maximal centre- to- centre bar distance of longitudinal reinforcement for
Description column based on torsion requirement is checked or not. This value is checked if torsional
Code 9.2.3(4)
Figure

Maximal centre-to-centre bar distance of longitudinal reinforcement for column based
Description on torsion requirement. This value is checked if torsional moment exists in cross-section
only.
Default Edit box slct,max = 350 mm; this item is visible only if check box above is set ON
Code 9.2.3(4)
Figure

Setting if minimal reinforcement area of longitudinal reinforcement for column is
Description
checked or not.
Code 9.5.2(2)
- 470 -
Checks
Figure

Setting if maximal reinforcement area of longitudinal reinforcement for column is
Description
checked or not.
Code 9.5.2(3)
Figure

Setting if minimal bar diameter of longitudinal reinforcement for column is checked or
Description
not.
Code 9.5.2(1)
Figure
- 471 -
Chapter 9
Check min. number of bars in circular column

Description Setting if minimal number of bars in circular column is checked or not.
Code 9.5.2(4)
Figure
Min. number of bars in circular column

Minimal number of bars in circular column is checked or not. This item is viable if the item
Description
above is set to YES
Default Edit box; nlc,min = 4 bars
Code 9.5.2(4)
Figure
Transverse

Description Setting if minimal mandrel diameter of stirrups for column is checked or not
Default Checkbox NO
Code 8.3(2)
Figure -
Check max. longitudinal spacing

Description Setting if maximal longitudinal spacing of stirrups is checked or not.
Code 9.5.3(3)
Figure

Description Setting if minimal diameter of longitudinal bar in column is checked or not.
Code 9.5.3(1)
- 472 -
Checks
Figure
Min bar diameter

User defined minimal diameter of longitudinal bar in column; visible if check box above is
Description
YES
Default Edit box; dsc,min = 6 mm
Code 9.5.3(1)
Figure
Min bar diameter

User defined minimal diameter of longitudinal bar in column as multiplication factor of
Description
maximal diameter of longitudinal reinforcement; visible if check box above is YES
Default Edit box; x dsc = 25%
Code 9.5.3(1)
Figure
Crack check for 2D members - introduction
The SCIA Engineer program from version 16.1 allows users to check crack widths for 2D member according to EN 1992-1-
1 including NA in Concrete.
- 473 -
Chapter 9
The main principle of calculation:

l The crack width is calculated for both surfaces of 2D member
l All types of 2D members are supported (plate, shells, wall)
l The crack width is calculated in the direction of the principal stresses at both surfaces of 2D member
l The tension stiffening of concrete between cracks can be taken into account
l The prestressing reinforcement inputted in the 2D member is not taken into account
l The influence of ribs is always taken into account (the internal forces and designed reinforcement in the direction of the rib
at the effective width of the rib is zero for 2D member)
l The following load cases/combination/classes are supported
l all types of load cases
l standard SLS combination (linear-serviceability, EN-SLS Char, EN-SLS Freq, EN – SLS Quasi)
l nonlinear combination with Type = serviceability
l class where one or more combinations described above are available
l The crack width can be calculated for the user (real) defined reinforcement
Note - The direction of crack width is not currently (version 16.1) shown in the graphical win-
dow
Designed reinforcement is not taken into account in version 16.1
Assumption
Setting of calculation
Before the calculation of crack width can be done, it is necessary to:
l run linear calculation

l check or edit default values in the concrete setup
Reinforcement
Crack width (SLS) for 2D accept three types of reinforcement
1. Required reinforcement from the 2D Reinforcement design

2. Provided reinforcement from the 2D Reinforcement design
3. User reinforcement
The user reinforcement can be inputted via
l reinforcement 2D (meshes)
l free bars
l concrete member data (the reinforcement is the same for whole 2D member)
User reinforcement via Concrete member data

When the reinforcement via 2D meshes is not defined then it is possible to define User reinforcement via Concrete member
data.
- 474 -
Checks
l Go to Settings per member - 2D member data

l Switch ON User reinforcement check box
l When this checkbox is set ON then additional items are visible - Bar distance
Concrete settings
There are many items in Concrete settings, which have influence on the design and check of 2D members. The important
parameters, which have direct influence to check cracks, are the following:
l Use effective modulus of elasticity see "Concrete settings (structure)" on page 51

l Type of strength for calculation of cracking force see "Concrete settings (structure)" on page 51
l Value of strength for calculation of cracking force see "Concrete settings (structure)" on page 51
l load duration factor.
- 475 -
Chapter 9
Limit value of crack width

The limit value of crack width is defined in EN 1992-1-1, table 7.1N. The limit value for non-prestressed structure depends
only on exposure class and can be set in Manager of national annex (code EN 1992-1-1 > SLS > General > National
annex > property w_max for non- prestressed concrete), because the table 7.1.N is only recommended and can be
changed in National annexes for some countries.
The exposure class for 2D member can be defined in Concrete settings (Solver settings > General > Minimal concrete
cover), if the concrete member data is not defined on selected 2D member or in 2D member data, if it is defined on selec-
ted member.
- 476 -
Checks
The limit crack width can be set directly by user via 2D member data. In fact, there are three options.
- 477 -
Chapter 9
l Auto - crack width is automatically determined according to NA based on selected combination and exposure class
l User - user defined value is used in check for both surfaces
l User different per surface - user defined value can be different per upper and lower surface
Load duration factor
The effect of tension stiffening is taken into account for calculation of crack width of 2D member (chapter 4.6.1.2). The effect
of tension stiffening depends on duration of the load, which is expressed in calculation by load duration factor kt .Load dur-
ation factor is determined automatically in the calculation. there is no special setting similarly as in Concrete Advanced.
The following values may be used according to code EN 1992-1-1, chapter 7.3.4(2):
kt = 0,6 for short term loading (default value)
kt = 0,4 for long term loading
The calculation of kt in SCIA Engineer is done by using Coefflong in following way:
- 478 -
Checks
l Load-case
l Permanent - Coefflong = 1,0;
l Variable - Coefflong = 0;
l Combination
l characteristic - Coefflong = 0,7;
l frequent - Coefflong = 0;
l quasi-permanent - Coefflong = 1,0;
l Others SLS - Coefflong = 0,7;
l Non-linear combination SLS - Coefflong = 0,7;
The final value of kt is calculated based on the combination according to chapter 7.3.4(2)..
kt = kt.long + [kt.short - kt.long] ∙ [1 - Coefflong];
Internal forces for crack check
The module for calculation crack width for 1D member will be used for calculation of crack width for 2D member, therefore
the internal forces and area of reinforcement in direction of principal stresses have to be calculated. The crack width will be
calculated in centre of each FEM element and the forces from centre of each FEM element will be used for calculation
Steps for calculation internal forces and area of reinforcement:
1. the stresses in direction of axis x and y of LCS for both surfaces of 2D member will be calculated
2. the angles of the first principal stress for both surfaces of 2D member will be calculated
3. the internal forces in centre of FEM element will be recalculated to direction of principal stresses
4. the area of reinforcement will be recalculated to direction of principal stresses
5. normal stresses (occurring of crack width) in direction of principal stresses is checked
6. crack width in direction of principal stresses is calculated
Calculation stresses
The stresses at upper (index +) and lower surfaces (index -) will be calculated according formulas below
where
l nx(y) - normal force in centre of the FEM element in x(y) direction

l mx(y) - bending moment in centre of the FEM element in x(y) direction
- 479 -
Chapter 9
l nxy - membrane shear force in centre of the FEM element

l mxy - twisting moment in centre of the FEM element
l h - thickness of the FEM element in centre of the FEM element
The forces in centre of FEM element can be presented in service Member 2D – Internal
forces (tree Result > 2D members) or in service Internal forces (tree Concrete > Rein-
forcement design > 2D member ) for Location = In centres
The stresses at both surface of 2D member can be presented in SCIA Engineer in service
Result > Member for Location = In centres and for Type of forces = Basic magnitudes
Calculation angle of the first principal stress

Angle of the first principal stress, it means angle between first principal stress and x- axis of LCS system , is calculated accord-
ing to formula:
where
σx+(-) - stress in direction of x-axis of LCS at upper (+) or lower (-) surface
σy+(-) - stress in direction of y-axis of LCS at upper (+) or lower (-) surface
σxy+(-) - shear stress at upper (+) or lower (-) surface
The angle of the second principal stress is perpendicular to direction of the first principal stress, it follows:
α 2+(-) = α 1+(-) + 90 °
The angle of the first principal stress can be presented in SCIA Engineer in service Result >
2D members for Location = In centres, for Type of forces = Principal magnitudes and for
Values = Alfa+ or Alfa-
Recalculation forces to direction of principal stresses

The calculated forces in centre of FEM element are recalculated to directions of principal stresses according to standard
transformation formulas:
where
nx(y) - normal force in centre of the FEM element in x(y) direction
mx(y) - bending moment in centre of the FEM element in x(y) direction
nxy - membrane shear force in centre of the FEM element
mxy - twisting moment in centre of the FEM element
- 480 -
Checks
α - angle of the first or the second principal stress at upper or lower surface form x-axis of LCS of FEM element
It follows, that for one FEM element four bending moments and four normal forces will be calculated (two for lower surface
and two for upper surface)
Value Upper surface Lower surface

Principal angle α1+ α2+ α1- α2-
Normal force n1+ = n(α1+) n2+ = n(α2+) n1- = n(α1-) n2- = n(α2-)
Moment m1+ = m(α1+) m2+ = m(α2+) m1- = m(α1-) m2- = m(α2-)
The formulas above can be written by the following way too:
where
mi± - bending moment in the i-th direction of principal stress at lower (-) or upper (+) surface of 2D
ni± - normal force in the i-th direction of principal stress at lower (-) or upper (+) surface of 2D
Internal forces in numerical output

As has been mentioned above, the internal forces in direction of principal stresses are used for calculation of crack width for
2D members. These forces are visible in Standard output of the Crack check 2D. see below
Reinforcement transformation
Recalculation reinforcement to direction of principal stresses

As was mentioned, there is possible to calculation crack width for user defined reinforcement. These reinforcements are
adapted before recalculation to direction of principal stress.
Adaptation of user reinforcement
There are three possibilities for inputting user reinforcement to 2D member:
l via Reinforcement 2D
l via Free bars
l via concrete member data (the reinforcement it the same for whole 2D member)
- 481 -
Chapter 9
Reinforcement 2D Free bars Concrete member data
- 482 -
Checks
Reinforcement 2D Free bars Concrete member data
For calculation crack width it is necessary to know following parameters of user reinforcement:
l spacing between bars of reinforcement of k-th layer of user reinforcement (ss,user,k )

l area of reinforcement of k-th layer of user reinforcement (As,user,k )
l vertical position of k-th layer of user reinforcement measured from centre plane of FEM element (zs,user,k )
l diameter of bars of k-th layer of user reinforcement (ds,user,k )
- 483 -
Chapter 9
l angle of bars of k-th layer of user reinforcement (α s,user,k ) form x-axis LCS of FEM element in plane of FEM element
l quality of material of k-th layer of user reinforcement
If more layers of user reinforcement (Reinforcement 2D or Free bars) are defined in the same direction and vertical pos-
ition, quality of material and diameter of reinforcement are the same, the one equivalent user reinforcement is created
before recalculation of user reinforcement to direction of principal stress with the following parameters:
For example: Equivalent user layer of reinforcement is created if between bars of rein-
forcement mesh is inputted individual bars of reinforcement with the same diameter.
Recalculation of reinforcement to direction of principal stress

The adopted user reinforcement for check cracks are recalculated to direction of principal stress according to formulas
below:
- 484 -
Checks
area of one layer reinforcement (user or additional) in the i-th direction of principal stress at lower (-) or upper (+) surface of
2D
spacing between of one layer reinforcement (user or additional) in the i-th direction of principal stress at lower (-) or upper
(+) surface of 2D
where
As - area of one layer of user (equivalent) reinforcement As,user(eq),k or calculated additional reinforcement As,add,j±
α s - angle of one layer of user (equivalent) reinforcement or additional reinforcement from x-axis of LCS of FEM element
ds - diameter of bars of one layer of user (equivalent) reinforcement or additional reinforcement
α i± - direction of principal stress at lower (-) or upper (+) surface of 2D from x-axis of LCS of FEM element
The vertical position and diameter of bars in the layer of user (equivalent) or additional reinforcement after recalculation to
direction of principal stresses are not changed, it means
and
Crack appearance
Before calculation crack width the normal concrete stresses on un-cracked section at the most tensioned fibber has to be
checked. If condition below is satisfied, the crack width does not creates and the crack width is not calculated
where
- 485 -
Chapter 9
l σct,max,i± - normal concrete stress on un-cracked section at the most tensioned fibber of concrete cross-section in i-th dir-
ection of principal stress at lower (-) or upper (+) surface of 2D
l ni± - recalculated value of normal force to the i-th direction of principal stress at lower (-) or upper (+) surface of 2D, see
chapter 4.3
l mi± - recalculated value of bending moment to the i-th direction of principal stress at lower (-) or upper (+) surface of 2D,
see chapter 4.3
l Ai,i± - cross-sectional area of transformed cross-section in the i-th direction of principal stress at lower (-) or upper (+) sur-
face of 2D
l Ii,i± - second moment of area of transformed cross-section in the i-th direction of principal stress at lower (-) or upper (+)
surface of 2D
l zt,max,i± - distance between centroid of transformed cross-section and the most tensioned fibber of concrete cross-sec-
tion in the i-th direction of principal stress at lower (-) or upper (+) surface of 2D
l fct,eff - is the mean value of the tensile strength of the concrete effective at the time
When the crack may first be expected to occur. The value is loaded from material properties of concrete, see picture below
sary input value fctm (t) in this time to material properties (EN 1992-1-1,clause 3.1.2(9))
The value of f ctm,fl (EN 1992-1-1,clause 3.1.8(1)) can be input instead of value f ctm , if
restrained deformations such as shrinkage or temperature movements are taking into
account for calculation crack width
- 486 -
Checks
Normal stress on un-cracked section at the most tensioned fibber for determination if crack
width is occurred or not (check of normal stresses), should be calculated for characteristic
combination of the load according to EN 1992- 1- 1, clause 7.2(2). There is made sim-
plification in SCIA Engineer that this normal stress is calculated for the same type of com-
bination as is used for calculation of crack width (load/combination/class inputted in service
Crack control, see chapter 3.2.1)
account for calculation of the crack width. The creep can generally be taken into account by
modular ratio (Es / Ec,eff ~ 15). A Lower value of modular ratio (greater value of module of
arise from quasi-permanent load. The effect of creep is automatically taken into account by
effective E modulus of elasticity when you switch this option in Concrete settings.
There is possible to present cracking forces (ncr, mcr) in Detailed output for crack control. This cracking forces are forces
which caused reaching of value f c,teff (occurring of crack width in cross-section) in the most tensioned fibber of concrete
cross-section in direction of first or second principal stress. For calculation of this cracking forces is used condition, that
eccentricity of inputted forces and cracking forces has to be same.
Crack width calculation
Calculation crack width in direction of principal stresses

As was mentioned, crack width is calculated in direction of principal stresses at upper and lower surface, it follows 4 times in
one FEM element. The crack width is calculated only in case that normal concrete stresses on un-cracked section at the
most tensioned fibber is greater than effective tensile strength of the concrete, see "Crack appearance" on page 485. In
other cases calculation finishes without calculation of crack width itself.
Value Upper surface Lower surface

Principal angle α1+ α2+ α1- α2-
Normal force n1+ n2+ n1- n2-
Moment m1+ m2+ m1- m 2-
Crack width w1+ w2+ w1- w2-

w(i±)=sr,max(i±)∙(εsm -εcm )(i±)
- 487 -
Chapter 9
where
sr,max,i± - maximum crack spacing in the i-th direction of principal stress at lower (-) or upper (+) surface of 2D member
(ε sm -ε cm ) (i±) - difference between mean strain in the reinforcement and the mean strain in concrete between the cracks in
the i-th direction of principal stress at lower (-) or upper (+) surface of 2D member
Calculation mean strain in the reinforcement and concrete
where
l σs,i± - the stress in the most tensioned reinforcement ( reinforcement the nearest to the most tensioned edge of 2D mem-
ber) in the i-th direction of principal stress at lower (-) or upper (+) surface of 2D member
l Es,i± - design value modulus of elasticity of the most tensioned reinforcement ( reinforcement the nearest to the most ten-
sioned edge of 2D member) in the i-th direction of principal stress at lower (-) or upper (+) surface of 2D member
l kt - factor dependent on duration of the load. The value can be set in Concrete solver > SLS > Crack proof > group Gen-
eral.
l fct,eff - is the mean value of the tensile strength of the concrete effective at the time
l when the cracks may first be expected to occur. The value is loaded from material properties of concrete, see notes in
chapter 4.5
l ρp,eff,i± - ratio of reinforcement within effective area of concrete in tension in the i-th direction of principal stress at lower
(-) or upper (+) surface of 2D member
l α e i± - ratio of design value of modulus of elasticity of the most tensioned reinforcement and modulus elasticity of the con-
crete in the i-th direction of principal stress at lower (-) or upper (+) surface of 2D member
From the formula above follows, that difference between mean strain in the reinforcement and concrete mainly depends
on:


l The section is loaded by load/combination/class selected in service crack control

- 488 -
Checks
l ideal bond between concrete and reinforcement is taken into account, it means change strain of reinforcement εs and
concrete fibber εc in the same position is the same
stress is linear and depends on change of strain (Hooke’s law)
Linear stress-strain diagram of concrete:
Linear stress-strain diagram of reinforcement:
The program finishes with error E0/1, if equilibrium on the cracked section, with taking into
account conditions above, is not found.

- 489 -
Chapter 9
The change of stresses depends on:
l factor dependent on duration of the load (kt ),

l the mean value of the tensile strength of the concrete (fct,eff ),
l ratio of reinforcement within effective area of concrete in tension (ρp,eff,i±),
l ratio of design value of modulus of elasticity (α e i±).
Ratio of reinforcement within effective area of concrete in tension (ρp,eff,i±)

This ratio of reinforcement is calculated only for non-prestressed reinforcement (prestressed reinforcement is not taken into
account for check crack width) according to formula
As,eff,i± - area of non-prestressed reinforcement within effective area of concrete in tension in the i-th direction of principal
stress at lower (-) or upper (+) surface of 2D member
Ac,eff,i± - the effective area of concrete in tension surrounding the reinforcement in the i-th direction of principal stress at
lower (-) or upper (+) surface of 2D member. For 2D member this area can be calculated according to formula: Ac,eff =
hc,eff ∙1 m
h c,eff,i± - the depth of effective area of concrete in tension surrounding the reinforcement in the i-th direction of principal
stress at lower (-) or upper (+) surface of 2D member.
h - thickness of 2D member (thickness of FEM element in centroid)

di± - effective depth of 2D member calculated in centroid of FEM element in the i-the direction of principal stress at lower (-)
or upper (+) surface of 2D member.
xi,± - depth of concrete in compression calculated for uncracked section.
- 490 -
Checks
The program finishes with error (The crack is not calculated, because there is no rein-
forcement within the effective area of concrete in tension), if area of non-prestressed rein-
forcement As,eff,i is zero
Ratio of design value of modulus of elasticity (αe i±)

Ratio of design value of modulus of elasticity is calculated according to formula:
Es,i± - design value of modulus of elasticity of the most tensioned reinforcement ( reinforcement the nearest to more tension
edge of 2D member) in the i-th direction of principal stresses at lower (-) or upper (+) surface of 2D member. The value is
loaded from material properties of the reinforcement, see picture below
Ec - modulus of elasticity of concrete. The value is loaded from material properties of the concrete
Calculation maximum crack spacing

Maximum crack spacing is calculated according to EN 1992-1-1, clause 7.3.4(3) .Clause 7.3.4(4) is not taken into account
for calculation maximum crack spacing in SCIA Engineer.
where
k3 , k4 - coefficients of calculation loaded from national annex setting (Manager of national annex > code EN 1992-1-1 >
SLS)
c,i± - cover of the most tensioned reinforcement ( reinforcement the nearest to more tension edge of 2D member ) by the
concrete in the i-th direction of principal stress at lower (-) or upper (+) surface of 2D member
- 491 -
Chapter 9
k1,i± - coefficient which takes account of the bond properties of the bonded reinforcement in the i-th direction of principal
stress at lower (-) or upper (+) surface of 2D member
l k1,i± = 0,8 for high bond bars (in SCIA Engineer bar surface = ribbed)
l k1,i± = 1,6 for bars with an effectively plain surface e.g. prestressing tendons (in SCIA Engineer bar surface = smooth)

k2,i± - coefficient which takes account of the distribution of strain in the i-th direction of principal stress at lower (-) or upper
(+) surface of 2D member
l k2,i± = 0,5 for pure bending

l k2,i± = 1,0 for pure tension
l k2,i± = (ε1,i± + ε2,i±)/2•ε1,i±
ε1,i± - the greater tensile strain at the boundaries (edges) of the cross-section in the i-th direction of principal stress at lower
(-) or upper (+) surface of 2D member. The strain is calculated for uncracked section with taking into account conditions in
chapter 4.6.1.1 and the value of strain is zero for edge in compression
ε 2,i± - the lesser tensile strain at the boundaries (edges) of the cross-section in the i-th direction of principal stress at lower
(-) or upper (+) surface of 2D member. The strain is calculated for uncracked section with taking into account conditions in
chapter 4.6.1.1 and the value of strain is zero for edge in compression
ρp,eff,i± - ratio of reinforcement within effective area of concrete in tension in the i-th direction of principal stress at lower (-)
or upper (+) surface of 2D member
α e i± - ratio of design value of modulus of elasticity of most tensioned reinforcement and modulus elasticity of the concrete in
the i-th direction of principal stress at lower (-) or upper (+) surface of 2D member
xi,± - is depth of concrete in compression calculated for uncracked section with taking into account conditions in chapter
4.6.1.1.
h - thickness of 2D member (thickness of FEM element in centroid)
ss,i± - centre to centre spacing between bars of reinforcement of the most tensioned layer of reinforcement in the i-th dir-
ection of principal stress at lower (-) or upper (+) surface of 2D.
If the angle between most tensioned reinforcement and i-th direction of principal stress is lesser than 15 °, centre to centre
spacing of most tensioned reinforcement is taken into account, which is calculated according to formula below, see chapter
4.4.3
If the angle between most tensioned reinforcement and i-th direction of principal stress is equal or greater than 15 degree,
average value of centre to centre spacing calculated from all tensioned layers is taken into account, which is calculated
according to formula below ( clause 7.3.4(4) in EN 1992-1-1)
ds,i± - diameter of bars of the most tensioned layer of reinforcement in the i-th direction of principal stresses at lower (-) or
upper (+) surface of 2D, see chapter 4.4.3
- 492 -
Checks
Effect of orthogonal mesh reinforcement

When the angle between the axes of principal stress and direction of reinforcement is higher than 15 °, then the maximal
crack spacing can be calculated based on formula 7.15. This formula is valid in case of orthogonal mesh reinforcement only.
sr,max = 1/ [ cos θ / sr,max,y + sin θ / sr,max,z ]
where
l θ - is the angle between the reinforcement in the y - direction and principal tensile stress
l sr,max,y(z) - is the crack spacing calculated above per y and z direction respectively.
Output
Check crack 2D command properties

The presentation of the results for Crack width 2D is available in Concrete > Reinforcement check (ULS+SLS) > 2D mem-
bers > Crack width (SLS). See below.
When you go to this command you can find its properties
- 493 -
Chapter 9
Unfortunately in version R 16.1 it is not possible to have predefined location In Centres.

Therefore this has to be done manually by user.
Generally, there are the following items in menu Values
l w_-
l w_+
l w_max-
l w_max+
l UC-
l UC+
l UC
- 494 -
Checks
Graphical output
ure).
Graphical drawing in 3D window - w+
- 495 -
Chapter 9
Graphical drawing in 3D window - w-
- 496 -
Checks
When it is required to evaluate unity check then it is recommended to make the following steps in Drawing settings 2D to suc-
cessful displaying of unity check results.
Thus we can see the following drawing of UC per surface (+ or -).

Graphical drawing in 3D window - UC+
- 497 -
Chapter 9
Graphical drawing in 3D window - UC-
- 498 -
Checks
Unfortunately in version R 16.1 it is not possible to have predefined Drawing settings 2D fro
each values separately. Therefore this has to be done manually by user.
Numerical output
As the check is based on Scia Design Form technology, three different outputs are available
l Brief
l Standard
l Detailed
- 499 -
Chapter 9
Brief
Brief output is typical output of Scia engineer where the values are printed into table.
- 500 -
Checks
Standard
Standard output is coming from Scia design Forms and includes the basic settings and major steps of calculation of crack
width.
- 501 -
Chapter 9
Detailed
Detailed output is again coming from Scia design Forms and includes the basic settings and all detailed steps of calculation
of crack width.
- 502 -
Checks
- 503 -
Chapter 9
- 504 -
Checks
- 505 -
Chapter 9
- 506 -
Code dependent deflections - introduction

The calculation of code dependent deflection (CDD) is done according to chapter 7.4.3 from EN 1992-1-1. The verification
of deflections should be performed due to the following reasons:
l Unacceptable deflection should not affect proper function of the structure or aesthetic - limit for total deflection
l To avoid damage to partitions and finishes due to increments in deflection following their construction - limit for additional
deflection
The behaviour of the reinforced cross-section for deflection needs is the same as used for the stiffness calculation and can
be also expressed in term of moment and strain (deformation) diagram. The final value of stiffness is calculated using inter-
polation formula between state (I) deformation for uncracked concrete section (x=0)and state (II) deformation for fully
cracked concrete section (no tension carries) (x=1) dependently on the ratio of stress in reinforcement from cracking load
and acting load.The dependency of cracking moment on strain in concrete is visible from the following figure. The value of
deformation is then recalculated from the stiffness and acting load.
- 507 -
Chapter 9
Influence of deflection values

Generally, there are three main effects which affect the values of deformation
Effect of load
In concrete structures, deflections increase with time under sustained load. The greater part of the deflection normally
occurs under sustained loads. Therefore, long-term deflections are calculated under a best estimate of the sustained load
during the lifetime of the structure. The design load for calculating long-term deflections is the permanent load
Effect of cracking
Effect of concrete cracking is irreversible process. Therefore, it is necessary to calculate long-term deflections using a effect-
ive tensile concrete strength which corresponds to the worst cracking during the lifetime of the structure.
Effect of creep
In fact creep is the continuous deformation of a member under sustained load. As it is mentioned in "Assumptions" on
page 370, creep effect is covered in calculation via effective modulus of elasticity which is calculated using creep coefficient.
Procedure for calculation

l User switches on functionality Code dependent deflection in Project data , see "Setting Project data" on the facing page
l User runs linear by using new Solver link
- 508 -
l User defines creep coefficient, shrinkage coefficient and coefficient for increasing amount of reinforcement in Concrete
setting (global setting) or in concrete member data (local setting), see "Global setting" on the next page
l User open command Code dependent deflection and select, see "Command for Code dependent deflection" on
page 516
l 1D and 2D member for calculation
l combination for calculation
l type of reinforcement
l drawing setting and output setting
l User runs Code dependent deflection by clicking on button Refresh in the command
l The program calculates deflection and makes numerical and graphical output for 1D and 2D members for selected value,
extreme...., see "Theoretical background" on page 528
Limitation for version SEN 17.0

l the Plane generator and Absences are not supported in structures
l calculation deflection for the rib is not supported
l only deflection in z axis of LCS of 2D member is calculated (deflection perpendicular for plane of 2D member)
l deflection in y and z axis of LCS of 1D member is supported
l shrinkage is not taken into account
l it is not possible run code dependent deflection for non-linear combination
Setting Project data
Code dependent deflection can be calculated in SCIA Engineer only in case, that check box Code dependent deflection
(Project data > Functionality > Concrete) is ON.
- 509 -
Chapter 9
The old results (results calculated by Nexis) will be removed after switching ON this check
box
New code dependent deflection used functionality of new solver link, therefore there is
some limitations for calculation in version 17.0
Global setting
The following items have impact on the calculation of deflection check
l Parameters of creep coefficient, see "Parameters for calculation of creep coefficient" on page 513
l Type of strength for calculation of cracking forces, see "Type of strength for calculation of cracking forces" on page 427
l Value of strength for calculation of cracking forces, see "Value of strength for calculation of cracking forces" on page 425
l Coefficient for increasing amount of reinforcement, see "Coefficient for increasing amount of reinforcement" on
page 514
l Maximal total deflection for 1D member, see "Maximal total deflection for 1D member" on page 514
l Maximal additional deflection for 1D member, see "Maximal additional deflection for 1D member" on page 514
l Maximal total deflection for 2D member, see "Maximal total deflection for 2D member" on page 515
l Maximal additional deflection for 2D member,see "Maximal additional deflection for 2D member" on page 515
- 510 -
l Type of variable load coefficient for the automatic generation of a combination for calculation creep deflection, see "Type
of variable load coefficient for the automatic generation of a combination" on page 516
Setting of parameters can be done in Concrete setting (setting for whole structure) or indi-
vidual per member (local setting) in 1D or 2D concrete data, if it is defined
- 511 -
Chapter 9
- 512 -
Parameters for calculation of creep coefficient
There are two options for calculation/input creep coefficient:
l automatic calculation (Type input of creep coefficient = Auto), where creep coefficient is calculated according to EN
1992-1-1, annex B.1 for following input parameters:
l Relative humidity
l Age of concrete at loading
l Age of concrete at moment considered
Except of these input parameters, automatic calculation of creep coefficient depends on material properties (mean com-
pressive strength of concrete fcm , type of cement) and cross-section parameters (cross-sectional area Ac , the perimeter
of the member in contact with the atmosphere u).
l user input (Type input of creep coefficient = User value) and user can input directly value of creep coefficient
automatic calculated creep coefficient can be in each section of 1D member or in each ele-
ment of 2D member different, because cross-sectional properties and material properties
can be different in each section/member (haunch, arbitrary member, 2D member with vari-
able thickness...)
type of creep coefficient and input parameters can be defined separately for each 1D and
2D member via Setting per member (1D concrete data and 2D concrete data)
- 513 -
Chapter 9
Coefficient for increasing amount of reinforcement
The amount of reinforcement, which is used for code dependent deflection, can be easily change by multiplying with Coef-
ficient increasing amount of reinforcement. This coefficient is applicable for all type of reinforcement (required,
provided,user). The area of reinforcement , which is used for calculation stiffness, is calculated as As = Coeffreinf · As, where
default value of this coefficient is 1,0.
Maximal total deflection for 1D member
The value of maximal total deflection for 1D member is expressed as relative value to length of the span of 1D member.
δtot,lim,y = Lyy / xtot
δtot,lim,z = Lzz / xtot
where
Lyy length of span perpendicular to y (z) axis of LCS of 1D member loaded from Buckling data, where calculation
(zz) length of span depends on Relative deformation system relation
coefficient loaded from concrete setting or concrete 1D member data, if exist (default value 250 is set according to
xtot
chapter 7.4.1(4) from EN 1992-1-1)
Maximal additional deflection for 1D member
- 514 -
The value of maximal additional deflection for 1D member is expressed as relative value to length of the span of 1D mem-
ber.
δadd,lim,y = Lyy / xadd
δδ add,lim,z = Lzz / xadd
where
Lyy length of span perpendicular to y (z) axis of LCS of 1D member loaded from Buckling data, where calculation
(zz) length of span depends on Relative deformation system relation
x coefficient loaded from concrete setting or concrete 1D member data, if exist (default value 500 is set according to
add chapter 7.4.1(4) from EN 1992-1-1)
Maximal total deflection for 2D member
The value of maximal total deflection for 2D member is expressed as absolute value and this value is directly loaded from
concrete setting or concrete 2D member data, if exist (default value is 25 mm).
Maximal additional deflection for 2D member
The value of maximal additional deflection for 2D member is expressed as absolute value and this value is directly loaded
from concrete setting or concrete 2D member data, if exist (default value is 15 mm).
- 515 -
Chapter 9
Type of variable load coefficient for the automatic generation of a com-

bination
The combination for calculation deflection caused by creep is in version 17.0 generated automatically from inputted SLS
combination. The combination is created from inputted combination by multiplying variable load cases by some coefficient.
There are two possibility for definition this coefficient:
l Use Psi2 factor - it follows that SLS Quasi permanent combination is created on the background, it means the variable
load cases are multiplied by coefficient ψ2
l User input - the variable load are multiplied by the coefficient, which is directly inputted by user (default value is 0,3)
Command for Code dependent deflection
Calculation Code dependent deflection can be run directly in Concrete tree via command Code dependent deflections
(Concrete > Reinforcement check ULS+SLS). This command is visible, if linear calculation is done and if check box Code
dependent deflection Project data is on, see "Setting Project data" on page 509
- 516 -
There is possible to evaluate deflection for 1D and 2D in one command and properties in these command are filtered accord-
ing to, if in the project are only 1D members, only 2D members or both.
- 517 -
Chapter 9
- 518 -
Group selection
There is possible to select, which 1D and 2D members will be taken into account for Code dependent deflection and for eval-
uation of the results. If some selection of members is done, only for this selection non-linear stiffness (reduced stiffness by
taking into account cracking and creep), for others members linear stiffness will be used. It follows, that for different selec-
tions, different results can be obtained, therefore:
l there is new group CDD selection in the header of numerical outputs, where is the list of the members, which will be used
for code dependent deflection is presented
- 519 -
Chapter 9
l there is note N7/1, if not all members from the structure are used for code dependent deflection
The code dependent deflection is recalculated, if new selection is done and some selected
members are not in CDD selection.
List of members from Selection and CDD selection can be different, because for evaluation
numerical or graphical output only some member from CDD selection can be selected.
Automatic combination
There is supported in version 17.0 only automatic generation of combination for CDD (combination for calculation imme-
diate deflection and deflection caused by creep) from inputted load case/combination/class defined in subgroup Result
case for deflection, see "Combination for CDD" on page 528.
Group Result case for deflection

Load case/combination or class can be define in the group, which will be used for calculation code dependent deflection. For
automatic generation of combination, which is supported in version 17.0, from defined results case a special combination for
calculation immediate deflection and deflection caused by creep, will be created on the background. There are supported fol-
lowing result cases:
l Load cases
l SLS combination (Linear-serviceability, Envelope-Serviceability, EN-SLS Characteristic, EN SLS Frequent, EN SLS
Quasi permanent, )
l Classes, which contain load cases or only SLS combinations
Envelope combination is exploded to linear combination on the background. Deflection and

FEM analysis is calculated for each linear combination and extreme deflection form all lin-
ear combination is evaluated. If number of linear combinations after exploitation from envel-
ope combination is bigger than 10, program gives some warning with time estimation.
- 520 -
Type of reinforcement
Three type of reinforcement are supported for code dependent deflections:
l required reinforcement - it is reinforcement designed by the program in command Reinforcement design. It is a sum of
statically required reinforcement (reinforcement designed for normal forces and bending moments, longitudinal rein-
forcement designed for tensile force caused by shear and torsion) and reinforcement designed according detailing pro-
visions.
l provided reinforcement - it is reinforcement, which is input in Design defaults or Concrete member data via library
Provided reinforcement.
l user reinforcement - it is reinforcement input by the user.
Load case/combination/class, which will be used for design required and provided rein-
forcement, can be defined in group Result case for required reinforcement.
Type of reinforcement which is used for code dependent deflection is presented in numer-
ical output too. If required/provided reinforcement was not calculated or user rein-
forcement was not inputted in some sections of 1D members or elements of 2D member,
than linear stiffness for uncracked section/element or 10% of linear stiffness for cracked
section/element is used and program gives some warning.
If the required or provided reinforcement for 1D members is already designed for selected
combination in Result case for required reinforcement and selected selection, the
designed required/provided reinforcement will be used, otherwise required/provided rein-
forcement will be designed before calculation of code dependent deflection for selected
combination and selection.
The required/provided reinforcement of 2D member, which is calculated for Location = In

centres and for System = LCS mesh elements is supported for code dependent deflection
of 2D members. If the required or provided reinforcement for 2D members is already
designed for selected combination in Result case for required reinforcement, selected
selection, Location = In centres and for System = LCS mesh elements, the required/-
provided reinforcement will be used, otherwise required/provided reinforcement will be
designed before calculation of code dependent deflection for selected combination and
selection.
Group Result case for required reinforcement

Load case/combination or class can be define in the group, which will be used for design required or provided rein-
forcement, in the case that for selected selection and combination, required or provided reinforcement is not already cal-
culated. This group is visible for Type of reinforcement = Required or Type of reinforcement = Provided. There are
supported following result cases:
l Load cases
l ULS combination (Linear-ultimate, Envelope-Ultimate, EN-ULS..., )
l Classes, which contain load cases or only ULS combinations
- 521 -
Chapter 9
Group Extreme 1D
This group is visible only for project with some 1D members and user can select for which extreme (Extreme 1D) the results
for 1D will be presented and in which sections (Results in sections).
Group Extreme 2D
This group is visible only for project with some 2D members and user can select for which extreme (Extreme 2D) the results
for 2D will be presented and how will be presented (Standard results, Results on sections, Results on edges). Except the
fine following parameters can be define:
l Averaging of peaks - internal forces and required/provided reinforcement is reduced, if some Averaging strip is defined
l Rib - member type Rib is not supported in version 17.0, therefore this check box is not editable
l Location - the stiffness and required/provided reinforcement is calculated in centre of 2D elements
l System -internal forces and required/provided reinforcement is related to LCS of mesh elements
Direction(local)
There is presented deflection in two directions for 1D member (deflection in y and z direction), but only one deflection for 2D
member (z direction). User has three possibilities for presentation deflection of 1D member in graphical output:
l z (1D/2D) - deflection in z axis of LCS of 1D member and 2D member is presented

l y (1D) - only deflection in y axis of LCS of 1D member and deflection in z axis of LCS of 2D member is presented
l both (1D) - deflection in both directions of LCS of 1D member and deflection in z axis of LCS of 2D member is presented
Values
There are presented the following output values in graphical and numerical output:
l UC - unity check of check deflection in both direction (y and z) of 1D member and in direction z for 2D member
l δtot - total (long-term) deflection with taking into account cracking and creep
l δtot,lim - maximal (limit) total deflection
l δadd - additional deflection
l δadd,lim - maximal (limit) additional deflection
l δlin - linear (elastic) deflection
- 522 -
l δimm - immediate deflection

l δshort - short-term deflection with taking into account only cracking
l δcreep - deflection caused by creep
Presentation values of deflection for 1D member (deflection in y or z axis of LCS) in graph-

ical window depends on setting in property Direction (local).
Only deflection in z direction of LCS of 2D member is presented for 2D member.
Output
There is presented only brief numerical output in version 17.0 with two tables of deflection
l deflection for 1D member

l deflection for 2D member
There are presented following values in numerical output
Linear (elastic) deflection in direction of y(z)

axis LCS of the member calculated for linear
δlin,y(z)
stiffness and defined combination for deflec-
tion
Immediate deflection in direction of y(z) axis
LCS of the member after applying per-
δimm,y(z) manent and longterm variable load cal-
culated for short-term stiffness and
immediate combination
Short-term deflection in direction of y(z) axis
LCS of the member with taking into account
δshort,y(z) only cracking calculated for short-term
stiffnes and total combination (defined com-
bination in the the Result case for deflection)
- 523 -
Chapter 9
Deflection caused by creep in direction of y

(z) axis LCS of the member calculated as dif-
δcreep,y(z) ference between deflection calculated for
long-term and shorter stiffness for com-
bination for calculation creep deflection
Additional (harmful) deflection in direction of
y(z) axis LCS of the member, which is cre-
ated after applying variable load with taking
δadd,y(z) into account deflection caused by creep cal-
culated. The value is calculated as difference
between total and immediate deflection
δadd,y(z) = δtot,y(z) - δimm,y(z)
Total (long-term) deflection in direction of y
(z) axis LCS of the member with taking into
account creep and cracking calculated as
δtot,y(z) sum of short-term and deflection caused by
creep
δtot,y(z) = δshort,y(z) + δcreep,y(z)
Maximal additional (harmful) deflection in dir-
δadd,lim,y(z)
ection of y(z) axis LCS of the member
Maximal total (long-term) deflection in dir-
δtot,lim,y(z)
ection of y(z) axis LCS of the member
Unity check of additional and total deflection
UC
in both directions
Type of reinforcement, which is used for cal-
culation of stiffnesses
None – no reinforcement, linear stiffness is
used
Type of reinf.
Reg. – required reinforcement
Prov. – provided reinforcement
User – user (REDES, 2D meshes or free
bars)
Check Status of the check
E/W/N Errors/Warnings/Notes

Table with combination key (list of load cases with load coefficient) of Result case for deflection for each table separately (for
1D and 2D member) is presented in numerical output, if the check box Print combination key is switched on. The list of load
cases is presented for each dangerous combination (index of combination), which is presented in column Case in table of
numerical output.
- 524 -
Print explanation of symbol

Table with explanation of symbol for each table separately(for 1D and 2D member) is presented in numerical output, if the
check box Print explanation of symbol is switched on.
Group Errors,warnings and notes settings

There is possible to present errors , warnings and notes, which occurred during calculation, in numerical and graphical out-
put. User can select in this group:
l if the errors, warning and notes will be presented in the header of the numerical output (check box Show information
about warnings in Result header)
l if the explanation of errors, warning and notes will be presented in the numerical output (check box Show table with
explanation...)
l how the errors, warnings and notes will be presented in numerical and graphical output (properties Show errors, Show
warnings and Show notes)
Only numerical output of errors, warning and notes is supported for 2D member in version
17.0.
The following errors, warnings and notes can occur during calculation of deflection
- 525 -
Chapter 9

W7/1 Warning The limit total deflection in (y) direction of LCS member is exceeded
To increase dimension of cross-section or
The limit additional deflection in (y) direction of LCS member is
W7/2 Warning to increase area of reinforcement (manu-
exceeded.
ally or by using Coefficient for increasing
W7/3 Warning The limit total deflection in (z) direction of LCS member is exceeded
amount of reinforcement defined in Con-
The limit additional deflection in (y) direction of LCS member is crete setting or concrete member data)
W7/4 Warning
exceeded.
To change type of reinforcement, which is
The linear stiffness was used for the calculation, because section is used for calculation, or to design required
W7/5 Warning
uncracked and there is no reinforcement or provided reinforcement or to input user
reinforcement
To increase dimension of cross-section or
to increase area of reinforcement (manu-
Only 10% of the linear stiffness was used for the calculation because
W7/6 Warning ally or by using Coefficient for increasing
the section is cracked and no equilibrium had been found
amount of reinforcement defined in Con-
crete setting or concrete member data)
Nonlinear stiffnesses are calculated only for some members (CDD
To use all 1D and 2D members for
N7/1 Note selection),so for different CDD selection, the deflections can be
CDD calculation
changed
E09 Error Rib is not supported, the linear stiffness was used for the calculation
The value of unity check is loaded from Concrete setting (value Ncal.check), if errors is
occurred during the calculation.
Except errors/warning and notes above, two special warning can be appeared before running of calculation:
l warning about number of combinations, which is used for CDD calculation
- 526 -
l warning about number of 1D elements
Group Drawing setup 1D

The user can set how will be presented result for 1D members in graphical window in this group
- 527 -
Chapter 9
Group Drawing setup 2D

The user can set how will be presented result for 2D members in graphical window in this group
The calculation procedure of code dependent deflection can be described in the following steps:
l a special combinations on the background for calculation code dependent deflection is generated, see "Combination for
CDD" below
l required or provided reinforcement for selected load case/combination/class is calculated, if it is not calculated and this
type of reinforcement is selected. The area of reinforcement, which is used for calculation of stiffness is recalculated by
the coefficient for increasing amount of reinforcement, see "Coefficient for increasing amount of reinforcement" on
page 514
l nonlinear stiffnesses of 1D members from the selection for each dangerous combination is calculated, see "Calculation
stiffness of 1D element" on page 530
l nonlinear stiffnesses of 2D members from the selection for each dangerous combination is calculated, see "Calculation
l program runs FEM analysis for each dangerous combination and for each type of stiffness (for each combination FEM
analysis runs 4 times), where for calculation of nonlinear stiffness are used these stiffnesses, deflection of 1D members
and 2D members (values ux , uy , uz ) are calculated
l program calculates all type of deflections (short, total, immediate...) , see "Calculation of deflection" on page 534
l program calculates maximal value of deflection for 1D and 2D elements, see "Calculation maximal deflection " on
page 535
Combination for CDD
- 528 -
Three type of load case/combination/class are used for calculation code dependent deflection
l load case/combination/class for calculation total deflection – this load case/combination/classes defined directly in com-
mand for calculation deflection (group Result case for deflection), see"Command for Code dependent deflection" on
page 516 . The envelope combination is exploded to dangerous (liner combination), where these dangerous com-
bination is based on local extreme values of
l 1D internal forces components N, My , Mz
l 2D internal forces components nx , ny , nxy , mx , my , mxy
l longitudinal stresses σx in 4 corners of idealized rectangular css of 1D members
l stresses σx , σy and τxy at the top and bottom face of 2D members
l global displacements ux , uy , uz in each mesh node
l load case/combination/class for calculation immediate deflection - will be generated automatically in version SCIA Engin-
eer 18 from each dangerous (linear) combination which is used for calculation total deflection., if means that for each dan-
gerous total combination, new immediate combination is generated by removing variable load cases with duration =
Medium, Short or Instantaneous.
l load case/combination/class for calculation deflection caused by creep - will be generated automatically in version SCIA
Engineer 18 from each dangerous (linear) combination which is used for calculation total deflection, if means that for
each dangerous total combination, new creep combination is generated by multiplying variable load cases by coefficient
defined in Concrete stetting, see "Type of variable load coefficient for the automatic generation of a combination" on
page 516.
These three types of combination (total, immediate and creep) are used for calculation deflection, but for determination if
the section/element is cracked or uncracked new characteristic combinations are generated for all dangerous com-
binations:
l characteristic total combination - is generated from dangerous total combination

l characteristic immediate combination - is generated from dangerous immediate combination
l characteristic creep combination - is generated from dangerous creep combination
Generation characteristic combination depend on type of combination, which is input in command for calculation deflection
(group Result case for deflection)
l for SLS Quasi permanent combination - SLS characteristic combination is created from dangerous (total, immediate and
creep) combination, it means that coefficient of variable load are changed:
l for lead (master) variable load cases coefficient 1 is used
l for other variable load cases ψ0 factor is used
l for other combinations and load cases - SLS characteristic combination are the same as dangerous (total, immediate and
creep) combination
If the more characteristic combinations are generated from one dangerous combination,
then only characteristic combination which causes the biggest tensile stress, is taken into
account.
Example:
SLS Quasi permanent combination is defined with following load cases:
- 529 -
Chapter 9
l LC1 - self weight (permanent load)

l LC2 - other permanent load
l LC3 - variable load case with long duration (load type = category A)
l LC4 - variable load case with short duration (load type = snow for Finland)
The following combination are generated for calculation code dependent deflection:
Type of combination Combikey of all dangerous combinations

1: LC1 + LC2
Total
2: LC1 + LC2 + 0.30∙LC3 + 0.2∙LC4
1: LC1 + LC2
Immediate
2: LC1 + LC2 + 0.30∙LC3
1: LC1 + LC2
Creep
2: LC1 + LC2 + 0.30∙LC3 + 0.2∙LC4
1: LC1 + LC2
Total characteristic 2a: LC1 + LC2 + LC3 + 0.70∙LC4
2b: LC1 + LC2 + 0.70∙LC3 + LC4
1: LC1 + LC2
Immediate characteristic
2: LC1 + LC2 + LC3
1: LC1 + LC2
Creep characteristic 2a: LC1 + LC2 + LC3 + 0.70∙LC4
2b: LC1 + LC2 + 0.70∙LC3 + LC4
Calculation stiffness of 1D element
Members which are not expected to be loaded above the level which would cause the tensile strength of the concrete to be
exceeded anywhere within the member should be considered to be uncracked. Members which are expected to crack, but
may not be fully cracked, will behave in a manner intermediate between the uncracked and fully cracked conditions. New
stiffness (stiffness with taking into account cracking) is calculated in centre of each 1D element.
Two types of stiffness are calculated:
Short-term stiffness - is calculated using 28 days modulus of elasticity Ec = Ecm , it follows that value of stiffness is loaded
directly from properties of the concrete material
Long-term stiffness - is calculated using effective E modulus based on creep coefficient for acting load, it follows Ec =
Ec,eff = Ecm / (1 + φ).
Calculation effective modulus of elasticity is based on equation 5.27 in EN 1992-1-1, but

instead of effective creep coefficient φef , only creep coefficient φ is used.
The following procedure is used for calculation stiffens for
l calculation transformed CSS characteristics of uncracked section (Ai, Ii, ti...)
l calculation stiffness’s of uncracked cross-section ((EIy )I ,( EIz )I , (EA)I ) to centre of uncracked transformed cross-section
l calculation maximum value of tensile stress of uncracked cross-section (value σct,res ) for respective characteristic
- 530 -
combination (Nchar,res , Mchar,res,y , Mchar,res,z )
l calculation maximum value of tensile stress of uncracked cross-section (value σct,imm ) for immediate characteristic com-
bination (Nchar,im , Mchar,im,y , Mchar,im,z )
l check condition σct ≥ σct,imm
l If condition is fulfilled, then respective characteristic combination will be used for calculation, Nchar = Nchar,res , Mchar,y
= Mchar,res,y , Mchar,z = Mchar,res,z , σct = σct,res
l otherwise immediate characteristic combination will be used Nchar = Nchar,im , Mchar,y = Mchar,im,y , Mchar,z = Mchar-
im,z , σct = σct,im
l check condition(σct ≤ σcr)
l If condition is fulfilled, then cross-section is uncracked nad

l bending stiffness around y-axis EIy = (EIy )I
l bending stiffness around z axis EIz = (EIy )I
l axial stiffness EA = EAI ,
l Else, cross-section is cracked and average stiffness will be calculated

l calculation transformed CSS characteristics of cracked section (Air, Iir, tir...)
l calculation stiffness’s of fully cracked cross-section ((EIy )II ,( EIz )II , (EA)II ) to centre of cracked transformed cross-section
l calculation stress in tensile reinforcement of fully cracked cross-section (value σsr) for characteristic combination (Nchar,
Mchar, Mchar,z )
l calculation stress in tensile reinforcement of fully cracked cross-section (value σs ) for respective combination (N, My , Mz
l calculation the distribution coefficient ξ according equation 7.19 in EN 1992-1-1
ξ = 1 - β ∙ (σsr / σs )
where
coefficient taking account of the influence of the duration of the loading or of repeated loading on the average
strain
β
β = 1 for calculation short-term stiffness
β = 0,5 for calculation long-term stiffness
l calculation averages value of stiffness’s based on equation 7.18 in EN 1992-1-1

l bending stiffness around y-axis (EIy ) = 1 / [ξ / (EIy )II + (1 - ξ) / (EIy )I ]
l bending stiffness around z-axis (EIz ) = 1 / [ξ / (EIz )II + (1 - ξ) / (EIz )I ]
l axial stiffness (EA) = 1 / [(ξ / (EA)II + (1 - ξ) / ( EA)I ]
Stiffness is recalculated to principal axis for unsymmetrical cross-section.
The four type of stiffnesses is calculated for each 1D element and each dangerous combination:
Type of stiffness Respective combination

Short-term stiffness for immediate deflection Immediate
Short-term stiffness for short-term deflection Total
Short-term stiffness for creep deflection Creep
Long-term stiffness for creep deflection Creep
- 531 -
Chapter 9
The following stiffnesses are changes in stiffness matrix for 1D element:

EAx = EA
GAy = GAz = G ∙ EAx / (1.2 ∙ Ec )
EIy = EIy
EIz =EIz
GIx = 0.5 ∙ 1 - μ) ∙ (EIy ∙ EIz )0.5
where
G shear modulus of the concrete calculated according to formula G = 0.5 ∙ Ec / (1 + μ)

μ Poisson's coefficient of the concrete loaded from material properties of the concrete
Eccentricity of stiffness (distance between centre of gravity of concrete cross-section and

centre of gravity of cracked transformed cross-section) is not taken into account in version
SCIA Engineer 18.
Calculation stiffness of 2D element
Members which are not expected to be loaded above the level which would cause the tensile strength of the concrete to be
exceeded anywhere within the member should be considered to be uncracked. Members which are expected to crack, but
may not be fully cracked, will behave in a manner intermediate between the uncracked and fully cracked conditions. New
stiffness (stiffness with taking into account cracking) is calculated in centre of each 2D element.
Two types of stiffness are calculated:
Short-term stiffness - is calculated using 28 days modulus of elasticity Ec = Ecm , it follows that value of stiffness is loaded
directly from properties of the concrete material
Long-term stiffness - is calculated using effective E modulus based on creep coefficient for acting load, it follows Ec =
Ec,eff = Ecm / (1 + φ).
Calculation effective modulus of elasticity is based on equation 5.27 in EN 1992-1-1, but

instead of effective creep coefficient φef , only creep coefficient φ is used.
The following procedure is used for calculation stiffens of 2D element
l Calculation of principal stresses of 2D element for both surfaces
σ1± = (σx± + σy±) / 2 + 1/2 ∙ √[(σx± - σy±)2 + 4 ∙ τxy±]
σ2± = (σx± + σy±) / 2 - 1/2 ∙ √[(σx± - σy±)2 + 4 ∙ τxy±]
l Calculation angle of principal stresses at both surfaces
α σ1± = 0.5 ∙ tan-1 [2 ∙ τxy± / (σx± - σy±)]
l Calculation of final value of principal stress
α = α σ1+ if σ1+ ≥ σ1-
- 532 -
α = α σ1- otherwise
l Recalculation internal forces to direction of principal stress α
m(α) = mx ∙ cos2(α) + my ∙ sin2(α) + mxy ∙ sin(2 ∙ α)
n(α) = nx ∙ cos2(α) + ny ∙ sin2(α) + nxy ∙ sin(2 ∙ α)
where nx , ny , nxy , mx , my , mxy are 2D forces in centre of 2D element
l Recalculation area of reinforcement to direction of of principal stress α
As (α) = As ∙ cos2(α - α s )
where As , α s are area and angle of longitudinal reinforcement
l Calculation of non-linear stiffness in first principal direction according to procedure as for 1D element, see "Calculation
l for rectangular cross-section (b = 1 m, h = thickness of 2D element in centre of gravity)
l for internal forces N = n(α), My = m(α) and Mz = 0 according procedure as for 1D element
l Calculation of non-linear stiffness in second principal direction according to procedure as for 1D element, see "Cal-
culation stiffness of 1D element" on page 530
l for rectangular cross-section (b = 1 m, h = thickness of 2D element in centre of gravity)
l for internal forces N = n(α+90) , My = m(α+90) and Mz = 0 according procedure as for 1D element
The four type of stiffnesses is calculated for each 1D element and each dangerous combination:
Direction of principal
Type of stiffness Respective combination
stress
First (EA1, EIy1, EIz1)
Short-term stiffness for immediate deflection Immediate Second (EA2, EIy2,
EIz2)
Short-term stiffness for short-term deflection Total Second (EA2, EIy2,
EIz2)
Short-term stiffness for creep deflection Creep Second (EA2, EIy2,
EIz2)
Long-term stiffness for creep deflection Creep Second (EA2, EIy2,
EIz2)
The following stiffnesses are changes in stiffness matrix for 2D element:

D11 = EIy1
D22 = EIy2
D33 = 0.5 ∙ (1 - μ) ∙ (D11 ∙ D22)0.5
D44 = G ∙ h / 1.2
D55 = G ∙ h / 1.2
D12 = μ ∙ (D11 ∙ D22)0.5
d11 = EA1
- 533 -
Chapter 9
d22 = EA2
d33 = G ∙ h
d12 = μ ∙ (d11 ∙ d22)0.5
where
G shear modulus of the concrete calculated according to formula G = 0.5 ∙ Ec / (1 + μ)

μ Poisson's coefficient of the concrete loaded from material properties of the concrete
Eccentricity of stiffness (distance between centre of gravity of concrete cross-section and

centre of gravity of cracked transformed cross-section) is not taken into account in version
SCIA Engineer 18.
Calculation of deflection
The following type of deflection is calculated in code dependent deflection:
l Linear (elastic) deflection δlin,y(z) - this deflection is calculated for total combination and for linear stiffness. Value of deflec-
tion is the same as values of deflection calculated in tree Results.
l Immediate deflection δimm,y(z) - deflection after applying permanent and long-term variable load calculated for short-
term stiffness and immediate combination.
l Short term deflection δshort,y(z) - deflection with taking into account cracking of cross-section/2D element calculated for
short-term stiffness and total combination (combination defined directly in the Result case for deflection).
l Deflection caused by creep δcreep,y(z) - deflection calculated as difference between deflection calculated for long-term
and short-term stiffness for creep combination.
δcreep,y(z) = δcreep,long,y(z) - δcreep,short,y(z)
l Additional (harmful) deflection δadd,y(z) - deflection after applying variable load with taking into account deflection caused
by creep calculated. The value is calculated as difference between total and immediate deflection.
δadd,y(z) = δtot,y(z) - δimm,y(z)
l Total (long-term) deflection δtot,y(z) - deflection with taking into account creep and cracking calculated as sum of short-
term deflection and deflection caused by creep.
δtot,y(z) = δshort,y(z) + δcreep,y(z)
Generally, the components calculated can be graphically presented on the following figure
- 534 -
Only deflection in y and z axes of LCS of member is calculated for 1D member. For 2D
member only deflection in z axis of LCS of member (deflection perpendicular to plane of 2D
member) is supported.
All types of deflection are calculated for each dangerous (linear combination) and max-
imal/minimal value from all combinations is presented in each section/elements.
Calculation maximal deflection

Generally two main situation are required to be checked:
l Total deflection - The appearance and general utility of the structure could be impaired when the calculated sag of a
beam, slab or cantilever subjected to quasi-permanent loads exceeds maximal total deflection. The sag is assessed rel-
ative to the supports. Pre-camber may be used to compensate for some or all of the deflection but any upward deflection
incorporated in the form-work should not generally exceed span/250. The value of maximal total deflection for 1D mem-
ber is expressed as relative value to length of the span of 1D member, see "Maximal total deflection for 1D member" on
page 514. The value of maximal total deflection for 2D member is expressed as absolute value and this value is directly
loaded from concrete setting or concrete 2D member data, if exist (default value is 25 mm).
l Additional deflection - Deflections that could damage adjacent parts of the structure should be limited. For the deflec-
tion after construction, span/500 is normally an appropriate limit for quasi-permanent loads. Other limits may be con-
sidered, depending on the sensitivity of adjacent parts. The value of maximal additional deflection for 1D member is
expressed as relative value to length of the span of 1D member, see "Maximal additional deflection for 1D member" on
page 514. The value of maximal additional deflection for 2D member is expressed as absolute value and this value is dir-
ectly loaded from concrete setting or concrete 2D member data, if exist (default value is 15 mm).
- 535 -
Chapter 9
Steel Fibre concrete
Project data
Steel fibre concrete is new type of material supported in SCIA Engineer. The theoretical background is taken from Com-
mentary on the DAfStb Guideline “Steel Fibre Reinforced Concrete", November 2012 (see[1] DAfStb Guideline "Steel fibre
reinforced concrete") provided by Bekaert and also from EN 1992-1-1: Eurocode 2, Design of concrete structures - Part 1-
1: General rules and rules for buildings within NA documents [2] EN1992-1-1
This is general functionality accessible for all user without any special licence. The activation of steel fibre concrete is done in
Project data.
There is new check box Steel fibre concrete in Material option. When this option is switch On then new database of fibre
concrete is offered.
Steel fibre concrete has to be selected together with standard concrete
- 536 -
Material
Material library
Name of steel fibre concrete

As has been showed before there is a new material type steel fibre concrete. This material is based on library of
DRAMIX fibres. The name of fibre concrete is prepared based on the several fibre characteristics and can be as follows:
C28/35-30kg/m3-5D65/60BG
where:
l C28/35 - concrete characteristic

l 30kg/m3 - dosage density, selected from the list
l 5D - type of fibre (3D/4D/5D)
l 65/60 - fibre geometric properties
l BG - fibre production parameters
The name of steel fibre concrete is generated automatically and updated when the following items are changed:
l fck of concrete
l dosage amount
l fibre type
The default material database library is prepared based on 3D/4D and 5D fibre concrete.
- 537 -
Chapter 9
There is also filter for Steel fibre concrete.
- 538 -
When it is necessary to create completely new material there is also this possibility after click on button New.
- 539 -
Chapter 9
Code independent part

Generally there is a group of Code independent items which are common for any kind of material in SCIA Engineer.
Code dependent part

EN 1992-1-1: Steel fibre in compression
This material characteristic are the same as for standard reinforced concrete
Fibres
The definition and selection of fibres is presented in this group. The list of items is the following:
The items above can be explained as follows:
l Selection of fibre type see the list of possible Fibre type - for fibre library see "Fibre library" on page 552
l Fibre dosage - edit box for definition of fibre dosage. Generally there is a limit from 20 to 40 kg/m3
l Member size effect - default κf G = 1,7; there will be on factor per material and for slab in fact
l Fibre orientation effect (general) - default κf F = 1,0 - corresponding to bending and tensile loads;
l Fibre orientation effect (shear) - default κf F = 0,5
There is automatic control of fibre type concrete class and dosage. For instance when you
define dosage out of range <20;40> then the following message appears
- 540 -
DAfStb: Steel fibre concrete in tension

There are special characteristic per fibre concrete in tension based on amount and type of fibres and concrete class. The
procedure of calculation of each values is mentioned in chapter "Materials theoretical background" on page 548
ffct0,L1 Characteristic basic residual tensile strength in performance class 1 [MPa]

ffct0,L2 Characteristic basic residual tensile strength in performance class 2 [MPa]
ffct0,u Characteristic basic residual tensile strength in ULS [MPa]
ffct0,s Characteristic basic residual tensile strength in SLS [MPa]
εfct,L11 Strain at reaching residual tensile strength in performance class 1 [1e-4]
εfct,L12 Strain at starting descending branch of residual tensile strength in performance class 1 [1e-4]
εfct,L2 Strain at reaching residual tensile strength in performance class 2 [1e-4]
εfc,fctm Strain at reaching mean concrete tensile strength [1e-4]
- 541 -
Chapter 9
εfct,L13 Strain at starting reaching residual tensile strength in performance class 1 [1e-4]
ffctR,L1 Characteristic residual tensile strength in performance class 1 [MPa]
ffctR,L2 Characteristic residual tensile strength in performance class 2 [MPa]
ffctR,u Characteristic residual tensile strength in ULS [MPa]
ffctR,s Characteristic residual tensile strength in SLS [MPa]
ffctd,L1 Design residual tensile strength in performance class 1 [MPa]
ffctd,L2 Design residual tensile strength in performance class 2 [MPa]
ffctd,u Design residual tensile strength in ULS [MPa]
ffctd,s Design residual tensile strength in SLS [MPa]
Material diagrams
There is possibility to define stress-strain diagram for analysis type independently.
Stress-strain diagram for Linear analysis and Check verification

Stress-strain diagram is one used for linear analysis and check verification. We can focus on two parts:
l compressive part - there are two types of behaviour in compression

l Bilinear diagram
l Parabola rectangular diagram
l tensile part - tensile part is prepared automatically based on figure R.2 from [1] DAfStb Guideline "Steel fibre reinforced
concrete"
The stress-strain diagram can look as follows for C32/40-30kg/m3-5D65/60GG
Bilinear Parabola rectangular
- 542 -
Stress-strain diagram for Non-linear analysis

This stress-strain diagram is used for non-linear analysis only. Visibility of this diagram is dependent on setting in project
data. There must be selected Functionality > Nonlinearity > Concrete > 2D physical nonlinearity.
- 543 -
Chapter 9
Then the following settings "Nonlinear behaviour" is automatically set ON and available for each steel fibre concrete mater-
ial.
There are several possibilities of definition stress /strain diagram:
l By code without tension part

l By code with tension part and peak - default
l By code with tension part and without peak
l By user definition
The shape of diagram for fibre concrete C30/37-30kg/m3--5D65/60BG is the following:
- 544 -
Diagram
Diagram
type
By code
without
tension
part
- 545 -
Chapter 9
By code
with ten-
sion part
and peak
- 546 -
By code
with ten-
sion part
and
without
peak
- 547 -
Chapter 9
By user
definition
- then dia-
logue for
user
definition
is avail-
able
where
the
default
can be
loaded
from
selected
type of
pre-
defined
diagram
above
Materials theoretical background
Characteristic basic residual values

The calculation of material characteristics is based on the document see[1] DAfStb Guideline "Steel fibre reinforced con-
crete".The calculation of characteristic values is dependent on fibre type and dosage. Each concrete class has recom-
mended fibre types and dosages. Based on that the residual strengths values f R1,m to f R4,m are determined. These
strengths are input for other calculation. Nevertheless the characteristic values will be presented in the material library as
the first values for user (ff ct0,L1; ff ct0,L2; ff ct0,u; ff ct0,s ). The input for calculation is list of measured values from the tests.
This list is available for specific concrete class, fibre type and dosage (see the example below).
- 548 -
Then the following precondition is considered:

fR1,m = ff cflm,L1
fR4,m = ff cflm,L2
Next step is calculation of residual flexural strength from formula O.3 from German guideline (only limit value is used)
ff cflk,L1 = 0.51 ∙ ff cflm,L1
ff cflk,L2 = 0.51 ∙ ff cflm,L2
Then this strengths are used in formulas for characteristic values of residual tensile strength (see R.3.31-34) and will be vis-
ible in material library
ff cft0,L1 =ff cflk,L1 . βL1
ff cft0,L2 =ff cflk,L2 . βL2
ff ct0,u =ff cflk,L2 . βu
ff ct0,s =ff cflk,L2 . βs for L2/L1 ≤ 1,0
ff ct0,s =ff cflk,L1 . βs for L2/L1 > 1,0
Beta factor calculation

Determination of beta factors (βL1 and βL2 is done based on figures P.1 and P.2 from see[1] DAfStb Guideline "Steel fibre
reinforced concrete"
βL2 = 1 / 3 ∙ L2/L1 + 0,02
when
0,7 ≤ L2/L1 ≤ 1,0
or
βL2 = 0,18 ∙ L2/L1 + 0,17
when
- 549 -
Chapter 9
1,0 ≤ L2/L1 ≤ 1,5

Determination of beta factors βs and βu
βu = 0,37; for the stress block
βs = 0,37; when using reinforcement
When ratio L2/L1 is mentioned in the text above it means ratio of fR4,m / fR1,m is used
Residual values
The second step of calculation material characteristic is calculation of residual values from characteristic ones. Member size
and fibre orientation are another items affecting the calculation The simplification is done by taking into account values
member size effect; there will be one factor per material and for slab
κfG
= 1,7
fibre orientation effect
κfF = 1,0 for bending and tensile loads
= 0,5 for shear
Both values will be possible to edit in material library per specific material. Additionally, there will be two values for κf F (gen-
eral and for shear only) - see[1] DAfStb Guideline "Steel fibre reinforced concrete".
Then residual values of material characteristics are calculated using the following formulas (see R.3.36-39):
ff ctR,L1 = κf F ∙ κf G ∙ ff ct0,L1
ff ctR,L2 = κf F ∙ κf G ∙ ff ct0,L2
ff ctR,u = κf F ∙ κf G ∙ ff ct0,u
ff ctR,s = κf F ∙ κf G ∙ ff ct0,s
Design values
The third step of calculation material characteristic is calculation of design values from residual ones.
ff ctd,L1 = α f c . ff ctR,L1 / γf ct
ff ctd,L2 = α f c . ff ctR,L2 / γf ct
ff ctd,u = α f c . ff ctR,u / γf ct
ff ctd,s = α f c . ff ctR,s / γf ct
where
reduction factor which is aligned with the design concept of this document to allow for long-term effects on the resid-
α ual tensile strength of steel fibre reinforced concrete (see[1] DAfStb Guideline "Steel fibre reinforced concrete")
f
c
= 0,85
- 550 -
γ partial safety factor according to Table R.1 (see[1] DAfStb Guideline "Steel fibre reinforced concrete")
f
= 1,25
ct
Material diagrams
The material diagrams are completely different than standard concrete material diagrams. The effect of fibres are taken
into account by tensile branch. Here just behaviour in tension is described
There are two types of material diagram used in analysis dependent on analysis type:
l diagram for linear analysis and section design - this diagram is based on design values
l diagram for nonlinear analysis - this diagram is based on residual values
- 551 -
Chapter 9
Fibre library
There is a new library of Fibres if the check box in Project data > Steel fibre concrete is set ON. This new library is in Libraries
> Concrete, reinforcement > Fibres.
The fibre type is then possibly selected in material of steel fibre concrete directly. The material characteristics are calculated
based on the selected fibre type.
- 552 -
This s a standard library with all general functions. There is predefined list of fibres which are stored in EP_Fibres.db4.
l 5D65/60BG
l 5D65/60GG
l 4D65/60BG
l 3D45/50BL
The name of fibres is automatically generated from the following items:

5D65/60BG
where
- 553 -
Chapter 9
5D Logo type
65 Aspect ratio
60 Length
B Coating
G Form delivery
The property of the items in library will be the following:

Name Edit box 5D65/60BG 5D65/60GG 4D65/60BG 3D45/50BL
Logo type Combo box 5D 5D 4D 3D
Length [mm] Edit box 60 60 60 50
Diameter [mm] Edit box 0,9 0,9 0,9 0,9
Aspect ratio [-] Edit box 65 65 65 45
Fibres [kg-1] Edit box 3132 3132 3200 3200
Rm,nom [MPa] Edit box 2300 2300 1600 1600
E modulus [MPa] Edit box 210000 210000 210000 210000
Coating Combo box Bright Galvanized Bright Bright
Form delivery Combo box Glued Glued Glued Loose
Min dosage [kg/m3] Edit box 20 20 20 20
Max dosage [kg/m3] Edit box 35 35 40 40
Min characteristic concrete strength [MPa] Edit box 28 28 20 20
Max characteristic concrete strength [MPa] Edit box 40 40 40 40
- 554 -
Internal forces
Internal forces 2D
As the first step for design and check procedure of steel fibre concrete for 2D members is necessary to prepare dimensional
2D forces for concrete structures. These dimensional forces will be calculated by Baumann transformation formula. These
forces will be related to LCS of 2D mesh element it means to direction XY of LCS. The main reason why to recalculate forces
coming from FEM analysis is to take into account also the effect of torsional moment to the calculation.
The following precondition will be used for calculation of 2D dimensional forces in one node of 2D member:
l The dimensional internal forces will be calculated only in direction of reinforcement. The different directions for lower and
upper surface can be used.
l Effective depth is equal to the depth of cross-section.
l Calculation in two directions + direction of the concrete strut
l The directions of calculation will be defined in Design default in Concrete setting or concrete member data.
l Baumann’s transformation formulas will be used in the calculation.
l The angle of concrete strut will be optimized to force in this direction will be the smallest.
l The dimensional forces with the influence of additional tensile force caused by shear will be calculated - effect of moment
shifting.
Internal Forces 2D - Theoretical background
The following procedure is used for calculation of dimensional forces 2D:
l Definition of input value for calculation

l Calculation of inner lever arm
l Calculation of normal forces at both surfaces of 2D element
l Calculation of principal forces at both surfaces of 2D element
l Recalculation of principal forces at both surfaces to inputted direction (Baumann’s transformation formula)
l Optimization of angle of concrete strut
l Calculation of virtual forces at lower(upper) surface for inputted direction and direction of concrete strut for upper(lower
surface)
l Recalculation of forces at surfaces to centre of gravity of cross-section of 2D member
Definition of input value for calculation

The following value are defined as basic forces in centres:
nx(y) Normal force in node of 2D member in x(y) direction

mx(y) Bending moment in node of 2D member in x(y) direction
nxy Membrane shear force in node of 2D member
mxy Twisting moment in node of 2D member
- 555 -
Chapter 9
h Thickness of 2D element
Angle of x axis of LCS of FEM element. The angle of x axis will be depends on
αx selected LCS system to which forces will be calculated (LCS of FEM element,
LCS of 2D element, UCS…)
α
The first (second) inputted direction of calculation at upper surface defined
inp,1 from x axis of LCS of FEM element
(2)+
α
The first (second) inputted direction of calculation at lower surface defined
inp,1 from x axis of LCS of FEM element
(2)-
Minimal angle between angle of inputted direction and angle of concrete strut,
θα
default value will be 15 °
Distance of the centroid of the upper(lower) defined longitudinal reinforcement
from upper (lower) edge of 2D element. For surface with two layer of rein-
as+(-) forcement
as+(-) = cover+(-) + ds1+(-)
d1(2)+ Diameter of longitudinal reinforcement in first(second) direction at upper
(-) (lower) surface
cover Cover of longitudinal reinforcement at upper(lower) surface calculated to sur-
+(-) face of the closer bar to the surface
z Inner lever arm for upper (lower) surface
The position for recalculation forces at surfaces to centre of gravity of cross-sec-
z+(-)
tion of 2D member
Calculation lever arm for 2D element

The calculation of surface forces required knowing the lever arm.. The special cross-section set has to be created for the cal-
culation of lever arm (value z). Value "z" will be calculated in direction of angle of first principal moment (the forces will be
recalculated to this direction and cross-section set will be created in this direction).The reinforcement will be designed for the
recalculated forces and from designed reinforcement inner lever arm will be calculated
If value z is not calculated (forces are zero or equilibrium is not found) the value z will be calculated according to formula
z = 0,9 ∙ d
where
l value d = h for fibre concrete
The distance of centre of compressive concrete and centre of tensile reinforcement to centre of cross-section has to be cal-
culated too
z = z+ + z-
where
the part of lever arm for upper surface (above centre of cross-section)
z
IF mα ≥ 0 then z+ is distance of centre of compressive concrete to centre of CSS
+
IF mα < 0 then z+ is distance of centre of tensile reinforcement to centre of CSS
- 556 -
∙d
the part of lever arm for lower surface (under centre of cross-section)
IF mα ≥ 0 then z- is distance of centre of tensile reinforcement to centre of CSS
z- IF mα < 0 then z- is distance of centre of compressive concrete to centre of CSS
∙d
The forces for calculation of z will be will be calculated according to formulas below
mα = mx ∙ cos2(α) + my ∙ sin2(α) + mxy ∙ sin(2 ∙ α)
nα = nx ∙ cos2(α) + ny ∙ sin2(α) + nxy ∙ sin(2 ∙ α)
Calculation of normal forces at both surfaces of 2D element

The inputted internal forces will be recalculated to both surfaces according the following formulas
nx-(+) = nx / 2 +(-) mx / z
ny-(+) = ny / 2 +(-) my / z
nxy-(+) = nxy / 2 +(-) mxy / z
Calculation of principal forces at both surfaces of 2D element

The principal forces at both surfaces will be calculated according to the following formulas
nI∓ = (nx∓ + ny∓ ) / 2 + 1/2 ∙ √((nx∓ + ny∓ ) 2 + 4 ∙ nxy,∓ )
nII∓ = (nx∓ + ny∓ ) / 2 - 1/2 ∙ √((nx∓ + ny∓ ) 2 + 4 ∙ nxy,∓ )
and direction of first principal force will be calculated according to formula

α I∓ = 0,5 ∙ tan-1((2 ∙ nxy∓ ) / (nx∓ - ny∓ ))
Recalculation of principal forces at both surfaces to inputted (Baumann’s transformation

formula)
The recalculation the principal forces to inputted direction will be done separately for both surfaces with using Baumann’s
transformation formula
nEds,i∓ = (nI∓ ∙ sin(α j∓ ) ∙ sin(α k∓ ) + nII∓ ∙ cos(α j∓ ) ∙ cos(α k∓ )) / (sin(α j∓ - α i∓ ) ∙ sin(α k∓ - α i∓ ))
where
index of direction (direction for recalculation of forces) i, j, k, i = 1,2,3,1. For

example for lower surface and for calculation of forces in second direction α 2- (i
i, j, = 2, j = 3, k = 1) the formula will be following
k, i
nEds,2- = (nI- ∙ sin(α 3-) ∙ sin(α 1-) + nII- ∙ cos(α 3-) ∙ cos(α 1-)) / (sin(α 3- - α 2-) ∙ sin
(α 1- - α 2-))
α angle between inputted direction or direction of concrete strut and direction of
i,j,k± first principal forces at lower or upper surface
- 557 -
Chapter 9
l The first inputted direction: α 1∓ = α inp,1∓ - α I∓

l The second inputted direction: α 2∓ = α inp,2∓ - α I∓
l Direction of concrete strut: α 3∓ = α con∓ - α I∓
the direction of concrete strut at lower (upper) surface. This value can be cal-
culated for all states of stresses excepted of hyperbolic state of stress (n1∓ > 0
and n2∓ < 0) according to formula: α con∓ = 0,5 ∙ (α inp,1∓ + α inp,2∓ ). For hyper-
bolic state of stress (n1∓ > 0 and n2∓ < 0) the angle of concrete strut should be
α
find by optimization method , see next chapter. For the angle of concrete strut,
con∓ the following conditions have to be fulfilled:

Optimization of angle of concrete strut

For hyperbolic state of stress (n1∓ > 0 and n2∓ < 0) the angle of concrete strut α con∓ should be find by optimization methods.
The two methods for optimization of angle of concrete strut will be available:
The force in concrete strut will be compressive and the smallest (nEds,3∓ < 0 and nEds,3∓ = minimum). The solution can be
based on derivation of the following equation.
nEds,3∓ = (nI∓ ∙ sin(α 1∓ ) ∙ sin(α 2∓ ) + nII∓ ∙ cos(α 1∓ ) ∙ cos(α 2∓ )) / (sin(α 1∓ - x) ∙ sin(α 2∓ - x))
d/dx nEds,3∓ (x) = {cos(α 1∓ - x) ∙ [nII∓ ∙ cos (α 1∓ ) ∙ cos (α 2∓ ) + nI∓ ∙ sin (α 1∓ ) ∙ sin (α 2∓ )]} / [sin (α 1∓ - x)2 ∙ sin(α 2∓ - x)2] + {cos
(α 2∓ - x) ∙ [nII∓ ∙ cos (α 1∓ ) ∙ cos (α 2∓ ) + nI∓ ∙ sin (α 1∓ ) ∙ sin (α 2∓ )]} / [sin (α 1∓ - x)2 ∙ sin(α 2∓ - x)2] = 0
The force in concrete strut will be compressive and the sum of all compressive forces in all direction at one surface will be the
smallest (nEds,3∓ < 0 and ∑nEds,i∓ = minimum (for nEds,i∓ ≤ 0)). The optimization method for finding this angle of concrete
strut is not developed.
For the angle of concrete strut, the following conditions have to be fulfilled:

Calculation of virtual forces at lower(upper) surface for inputted direction and direction of
concrete strut for upper (lower surface)
The virtual forces will be calculated according to Baumann’s transformation formula, where instead of angle of concrete
strut angle of direction for upper or lower surface will be added
l nEds,virt,1-
ELSE nEds,virt,1- = (nI- ∙ sin(α 2-) ∙ sin(α 1+) + nII- ∙ cos(α 2-) ∙ cos(α 1+)) / (sin(α 2- - α 1-) ∙ sin(α 1+ - α 1-))
nEds,virt,2-
- 558 -
l nEds,virt,3-
ELSE nEds,virt,3- = (nI- ∙ sin(α 2+) ∙ sin(α 1-) + nII- ∙ cos(α 2-) ∙ cos(α 1-)) / (sin(α 2- - α 3+) ∙ sin(α 1- - α 3+))
l nEds,virt,1+
THEN nEds,virt,1+ = nEds,1+
ELSE nEds,virt,1+ = (nI+ ∙ sin(α 2-) ∙ sin(α 1+) + nII+ ∙ cos(α 2-) ∙ cos(α 1+)) / (sin(α 2+ - α 1+) ∙ sin(α 1- - α 1+))
l nEds,virt,2+
THEN nEds,virt,2-= nEds,2-
nEds,virt,3+
THEN nEds,virt,3+ = nsurface,3+
ELSE nEds,virt,3+ = (nI+ ∙ sin(α 2+) ∙ sin(α 1+) + nII+ ∙ cos(α 2+) ∙ cos(α 1+)) / (sin(α 2+ - α 3-) ∙ sin(α 1+ - α 3-))
Recalculation of forces at surfaces to centre of gravity of cross-section of 2D member

The forces will be recalculated to centre of gravity of cross-section of 2D member.
l Forces at centroid for direction inputted for upper surface
mEd,i = nEds,i- ∙ z- + nEds,virt,i+ ∙ z+
nEd,i = nEds,i- + nEds,virt,i+
l Forces at centroid for direction inputted for lower surface
mEd,i = nEds,virt,i- ∙ z- + nEds,i+ ∙ z+
nEd,i = nEds,virt,i- + nEds,,i+
Internal Forces 2D Shifting
The additional tensile force caused by shear should be taken into account for the design of reinforcement. The method
based on shifting of bending moments will be used. There is a necessity to shift bending moment from basic forces in
- 559 -
Chapter 9
distance a = d = Coeffd ∙ h (see clause 9.2.1.3(2) in [2] EN1992-1-1,). It follows that square subregion with dimension 2 ∙ a
will be created around selected point of mesh element and maximum bending moments inside of this square will be taken
into account for this point of mesh element.
Shifting of bending is depending on the Concrete setting > Solver settings > Internal forces > Internal forces ULS.
The comparison of the results can be seen on design forces (centroid) for two slabs. Upper slab is without shifting and lower
with shifting. You can see the maximums /positive and negative) are the same but the length of them is wider in case of shift-
ing.
- 560 -
Internal Forces 2D Command
The previous chapter says about the procedure of calculation internal forces for 2D members. Here the presentation pos-
sibilities are described. There is a completely new item in the tree Concrete > SFRC 2D members > SFRC 2D Internal
forces.
- 561 -
Chapter 9
There is also a standard command for 2D with the following items.
- 562 -

l System
- 563 -
Chapter 9
l The explanation of the type of values is the following:

and related to direction (1,2) and surface(+-); these forces are comparable with 1D solution in fact. The forces for
upper and lower surface are the same in case of directions(1,2) of designed reinforcement are the same. These
forces are calculated based on design (surface) forces and virtual forces
l Basic (centroid) - forces related to centre of gravity calculated purely on FEM (the same forces as are presented in
Results >2D members > 2D internal forces

Internal Forces 2D Results
List of results
There are the following list of results based on selection of Type of values.
and related to direction (1,2) and surface(+-); these forces are comparable with 1D solution in fact. The forces for upper
and lower surface are the same in case of directions(1,2) of designed reinforcement are the same. These forces are cal-
culated based on design (surface) forces and virtual forces
Dimensional bending moment at centroid recalculated to first defined direction (1) for upper
mEd1,+
(+) surface
Dimensional bending moment at centroid recalculated to second defined direction (2) for
mEd2,+
upper (+) surface
Dimensional bending moment at centroid recalculated to compression strut in upper (+) sur-
mEd,c+
face
nEd,1+ Dimensional normal force at centroid recalculated to first direction (1) and upper (+) surface
- 564 -
Dimensional normal force at centroid recalculated to second direction (2) and upper (+) sur-
nEd,2+
face
nEd,c+ Dimensional normal force at centroid recalculated to compression strut in upper surface(+)
Dimensional bending moment at centroid recalculated to first defined direction (1) for lower
mEd1,-
(-) surface
Dimensional bending moment at centroid recalculated to second defined direction (2) for
mEd2,-
lower (-) surface
Dimensional bending moment at centroid recalculated to compression strut in lower (-) sur-
mEd,c-
face
nEd,1- Dimensional normal force at centroid recalculated to first direction (1) and lower (-) surface
Dimensional normal force at centroid recalculated to second direction (2) and lower (-) sur-
nEd,2-
face
nEd,c- Dimensional normal force at centroid recalculated to compression strut in lower surface(-)
vEd Shear force resultant
l Basic (centroid) - forces related to centre of gravity calculated purely on FEM (the same forces as are presented in Res-
ults >2D members > 2D internal forces
mx Bending moment in x direction

my Bending moment in y direction
nx Normal force in x direction
ny Normal force in y direction
nxy Membrane shear force
mxy Torsional moment
vx Shear force in x direction
vy Shear force in y direction
nx,y+- Normal force in direction x recalculated to upper (+) surface

nx,y+- Normal force in direction y recalculated to upper (+) surface
nxy+- Membrane shear force recalculated to upper (+) surface
nx,y+- Normal force in direction x recalculated to lower (-) surface
nx,y+- Normal force in direction y recalculated to lower (-) surface
nxy+- Membrane shear force recalculated to upper (-) surface
nI+ Principal force in direction I recalculated to upper (+) surface

nII+ Principal force in direction II recalculated to upper (+) surface
αI+ Angle of first principal force in upper(+) or lower (-) surface

nI- Principal force in direction I recalculated to lower (-) surface
nII- Principal force in direction II recalculated to lower (-) surface
αI- Principal force in direction I recalculated to lower (-) surface
- 565 -
Chapter 9
Normal surface force at upper surface (positive direction of z axis of LCS) in defined first dir-
nEd,s1+
ection of reinforcement
Normal surface force at upper surface (positive direction of z axis of LCS) in defined second
nEd,s2+
direction of reinforcement
Normal surface force at upper surface (positive direction of z axis of LCS) in compressive con-
nEd,sc+
crete strut
Normal surface force at lower surface (positive direction of z axis of LCS) in defined first dir-
nEd,s1-
ection of reinforcement
Normal surface force at lower surface (positive direction of z axis of LCS) in defined second
nEd,s2-
direction of reinforcement
Normal surface force at lower surface (positive direction of z axis of LCS) in compressive con-
nEd,sc-
crete strut
Graphical output
ure).
- 566 -
Numerical output
Output is typical output of Program name where the values are printed into table based on selection from Type of values.
- 567 -
Chapter 9
- 568 -
Dosage design 2D
Dosage design Command
The new item for dosage design is added to the tree Concrete > SFRC 2D members > SFRC 2D Dosage design.
Command properties are standard for 2D calculation
- 569 -
Chapter 9

l System
l Values - only one value - Dosage
- 570 -
Dosage design - Theoretical background
The fibre dosage design is iterative procedure which calculates the resistance of cross-section with current fibre dosage and
standard reinforcement and compare it with acting load to get equilibrium of forces. The main task is the calculation of
moment resistance of cross-section. For more details about this procedure, see "Capacity Check Theoretical background".
It is one iterative step with defined fibre dosage.
The calculation precognitions for finding plane of equilibrium of steel fibre concrete with reinforcement are taken from Fig-
ure R.4 - Determining stresses and strains for steel fibre reinforced concrete from [1] DAfStb Guideline "Steel fibre rein-
forced concrete"
The iterative procedure start with maximal allowed dosage design (35kg/m3), defined by type of fibres, see "Fibre library".
The verification if 2D element is able to resist the acting load with existing reinforcement is performed. If yes, than procedure
calculate the resistance for minimal allowed dosage design and if the equilibrium is not found, than iterative algorithm based
on bisection method start to find the optimal dosage.
- 571 -
Chapter 9
Maximal dosage exceeded

If maximal dosage is not enough to get equilibrium of forces, than it is necessary to increase amount of standard rein-
forcement, or to increase quality of concrete, or to increase the thickness of 2D element.
Capacity check 2D
Capacity check command
The new item for Capacity check (ULS) is added to tree Concrete > SFRC 2D members > SFRC Capacity check (ULS).
- 572 -
Except typical general setting for command there are the following properties for 2D members
l Type of dosage - combo box

l Material defined - Dosage is defined in material library
l Designed - Before execution of capacity check is calculated dosage design and this designed dosage is used for capa-
city check
l User - User can define dosage in properties for check, with limitations according materials, see. "Fibre library" on
page 552
- 573 -
Chapter 9
l System
l Type of values
l Capacity check
l Compression strut
l Values - these are dependent on type of values
l Capacity check
l UC - the value of unity check
l mRd - moment resistance
l nRd - forces resistance
l Compression strut
l UCcs - the value of unity check for compression strut
l nRd,cs - resistance of compression strut
l Deformed structure - results are drawn on deformed structure
Capacity check Theoretical background
The capacity check for fibre reinforced concrete is based on the calculation of the resistance of cross-section with the cur-
rent fibre dosage and standard reinforcement and comparison of it with acting load to get equilibrium of forces.
The calculation precognitions for finding plane of equilibrium of steel fibre concrete with reinforcement are taken from Fig-
ure R.4 - Determining stresses and strains for steel fibre reinforced concrete from [1] DAfStb Guideline "Steel fibre rein-
forced concrete".
The following conditions of equilibrium must be fulfilled.

Fc+Fct+Fs++Fs-+NEd =0
Fc. zc + Fct.zct + Fs+. zs++Fs-.zs- + MEd =0

Following procedure is used for calculation of the Capacity check for fibre reinforced concrete.
- 574 -
l Definition of the input values for calculation

l The calculation of the height of the compression zone
l Calculation of the reinforcement material parameters
l Calculation of the concrete material parameters
l Calculation of the area of reinforcement
l Calculation of the diameter of reinforcement
l Calculation of the cover of reinforcement
l Calculation of the lever arm of forces in reinforcement from the centre of gravity
l Calculation of the effective depth of the cross-section
l Calculation of the centre to centre distance from more compressive edge
l Calculation of the balanced parameters of the cross-section
l Calculation of the fibre concrete material parameters in tension
l Estimation of the reinforcement stress for calculation of the compression zone
l Calculation of the balanced normal force
l Calculation of the height of the compression zone
l The calculation of the resistance of the cross-section
l Calculation of the inner lever arm for concrete and reinforcement from centre of gravity
l Calculation of the stress in the reinforcement according to height of the compression zone
l Calculation of the resistance
l Calculation of the unity check
The calculation of the height of the compression zone

Calculation of the reinforcement material parameters
The reinforcement material parameters are calculated independently for upper and lower surface, they can be generally dif-
ferent.
fyd+(-) = fyk+(-) / γs
Es+(-)
where
Characteristic yield strength of reinforcement, different according Type of cal-

culated reinforcement:
l Nearest - The strength of reinforcement, which is the nearest to the upper

(lower) surface
f l Average - The average strength of all reinforcement which are on upper
yk+
(lower) surface according to formula
(-) fyk+(-) = ∑(As+(-),i ∙ fyk+(-),i) / ∑(As+(-),i)
where
As+ The area of i-th reinforcement bar on

(-),i the upper (lower) surface
- 575 -
Chapter 9
Characteristic yield strength of rein-

fyk+
forcement of i- th bar on the upper
(-),i (lower) surface
Partial factor for reinforcing steel, national dependent value in EN 1992- 1- 1,

γs
§2.4.2.4(1), for details see "National annexes theoretical background".
Modulus of elasticity of reinforcement, different according Type of calculated rein-
forcement:
l Nearest - The modulus of elasticity of reinforcement, which is the nearest to the

upper (lower) surface
l Average - The average modulus of elasticity of all reinforcement which are on
E upper (lower) surface according to formula
s+ Es+(-) = ∑(As+(-),i ∙ E+(-),i) / ∑(As+(-),i)
(-)
where
As+ The area of i-th reinforcement bar on

(-),i the upper (lower) surface
E+ Modulus of elasticity of reinforcement
(-),i of i-th bar on the upper (lower) surface
Calculation of the concrete material parameters
Calculation of the design value of compressive concrete strength

fcd = α cc ∙ fck / γC
where
The coefficient taking account of long term effects on the compressive strength and
α of unfavourable effects resulting from the way the load is applied, national depend-
cc ent value in EN 1992-1-1, §3.1.6(1)P, for details see "National annexes theoretical
background".
f
Characteristic compressive cylinder strength of concrete at 28 days
ck
γ Partial factor for concrete, national dependent value in EN 1992-1-1, §2.4.2.4(1),
C for details see "National annexes theoretical background".
Calculation of the strains for concrete stress-strain diagram

Proper strains are used according selected type of stress-strain diagram
l Bilinear - εc3, εcu3

l Parabolic - εc2, εcu2
Calculation of the extra rotation point

The extra rotation point is used in the calculation
HeightRatio = 1 - (εc2(3) / εcu2(3))
StrainRatio = (εc2(3) / εcu2(3)
- 576 -
Calculation of the strength reduction factor for strength of concrete and pos-
ition of concrete compressive force
For bilinear stress-strain diagram
η = 1 - (εc3 / εcu3) / 2
β = 1 - (εcu32 / 2 - εc32 / 6) / (εcu32 - εcu3 ∙ εc3 / 2)
For parabolic stress-strain diagram

η = 1 - {εc2 / [(n + 1) ∙ εcu2]}
β = 1 - {εcu22 / 2 - εc22 / [(n + 1) ∙ (n + 2)]} / [εcu22 - εcu2 ∙ εc2 / (n + 1)]
where
εc2 The strain at the reaching the maximum strength for parabolic (bilinear) stress-
(3) strain diagram according to Table 3.1 from EN 1992-1-1
ε
The ultimate strain for parabolic (bilinear) stress- strain diagram according to
cu2 Table 3.1 from EN 1992-1-1
(3)
The exponent for parabolic stress-strain diagram according to Table 3.1 from EN
n
1992-1-1
Calculation of the area of reinforcement

The area of reinforcement is calculated as the sum of all reinforcement for upper and lower surface on the 2D element
As+(-) = ∑As+(-),i
Calculation of the diameter of reinforcement

The diameters of reinforcement bars are calculated independently for upper and lower surface, they can be different.
Different procedure is used according Type of calculated reinforcement:
l Nearest - The diameter of reinforcement bar, which is the nearest to the upper (lower) surface, is used as ds+(-)
l Average - The average diameter of all reinforcement bars which are on upper (lower) surface, is used as ds+(-)
ds+(-) = ∑(As+(-),i ∙ ds+(-),i) / ∑(As+(-),i)
where
As+(-),i The area of i-th reinforcement bar on the upper (lower) surface
ds+(-),i The diameter of reinforcement of i-th bar on the upper (lower) surface
Calculation of the cover of reinforcement

The cover of reinforcement is calculated independently for upper and lower surface, they can be different.
l Nearest - The cover of reinforcement bar, which is the nearest to the lower (-) and upper (+) surface
c- = 0.5 ∙ h + Y(z)-
c+ = 0.5 ∙ h - Y(z)+
where
- 577 -
Chapter 9
Y-coordinate (vertical) of the reinforcement which is the nearest to the lower sur-
Y(z)-
face
Y Y-coordinate (vertical) of the reinforcement which is the nearest to the upper sur-
(z)+ face
l Average - The average diameter of all reinforcement bars which are on lower (upper) surface
c-(+) = 0.5 ∙ h - zs-(+)
where
zs-(+) The lever arm of forces in reinforcement from the centre of gravity
Calculation of the lever arm of forces in reinforcement from the centre of gravity
The lever arms of forces in reinforcement from the centre of gravity are calculated independently for upper and lower sur-
face, they can be different.
l Nearest - The lever arms of forces in reinforcement, which is the nearest to the lower (-) and upper (+) surface
zs- = -0.5 ∙ h + c- + 0.5 ∙ ds-
zs+ = 0.5 ∙ h - c+ - 0.5 ∙ ds+
where
c-(+) The cover to the lower (upper) reinforcement
ds-(+) The diameter of lower (upper) reinforcement
l Average - The average diameter of all reinforcement bars which are on upper (lower) surface
zs+(-) = ∑(As+(-),i ∙ zs+(-),i) / ∑(As+(-),i)
where
As+
The area of i-th reinforcement bar on the upper (lower) surface
(-),i
The Y-coordinate (vertical) of i-th bar of reinforcement on the upper (lower)
zs+(-),i
surface
Calculation of the effective depth of the cross-section

The effective depth of cross-section is calculated from cover and diameter of reinforcement
d = h - c-(+) - 0.5 ∙ ds-(+)
where
- 578 -

The decision if lower or upper reinforcement characteristics are used is based on the value
of bending moment (positive → lower reinforcement, negative → upper reinforcement.
For fibre concrete without longitudinal reinforcement (As,sum = 0 mm2) is d = h.
Calculation of the centre to centre distance from more compressive edge

The centre to centre distance from more compressive edge is calculated from cover and diameter of reinforcement
as = c-(+) + 0.5 ∙ ds-(+)
where

of bending moment (positive → lower reinforcement, negative → upper reinforcement.
For fibre concrete without longitudinal reinforcement (As,sum = 0 mm2) is as = 0 mm.
Calculation of the balanced parameters of the cross-section

The balanced parameters ξbal for balanced depth of compression zone and depth of the compression zones xbal are cal-
culated as follows
The decision if ε cu2 or ε cu3 are used is based on the type of stress-strain diagram (ε cu2→
parabolic, εcu3→ bilinear).
of bending moment. For more tensile edge: positive → lower reinforcement, negative →
upper reinforcement. For less tensile edge: positive → upper reinforcement, negative →
lower reinforcement.
l The balanced parameter for more tensile edge when cross-section is in tension
ξbal1,t = εcu2(3) / [εcu2(3) + (fyd-(+) / Es-(+))]
l The balanced parameter for more tensile edge when cross-section is in compression
ξbal1,c = εcu2(3) / [εcu2(3) - (fyd-(+) / Es-(+))]
l The balanced parameter for less tensile edge when cross-section is in tension
ξbal2,t = εcu2(3) / [εcu2(3) - (fyd+(-) / Es+(-))]
l The balanced parameter for less tensile edge when cross-section is in compression
ξbal2,c = εcu2(3) / [εcu2(3) + (fyd+(-) / Es+(-))]
- 579 -
Chapter 9
The balanced depth of compression zone is than calculated as follows
l For more tensile edge
xbal1 = ξbal1,t(c) ∙ d
l For less tensile edge
xbal2 = ξbal2,t(c) ∙ d
Calculation of the fibre concrete material parameters in tension

The fibre concrete material parameters are calculated according the recommendations from the Entwurf DAfStb Guideline
for Steel fibre reinforced concrete.
The design value of tensile concrete strength

For calculation procedure of ff ctd,L1 and ff ctd,L2 see the chapter "Design values" in "Materials theoretical background".
The balanced depth of compression zone for fibre concrete

ξf bal,t = εcu2(3) / (εcu2(3) + εf ct_L2)
where
εfct_ The strain in the fibre reinforced concrete at reaching residual tensile strength in
L2 the performance class 2
The tensile strain and stress in fibre concrete

The calculation of stress and strain in fibre concrete in divided to two branches according the ratio of xc / d with ξf bal,t .
l when xc / d ≥ ξf bal,t
εf ct = εcu2(3) ∙ (d - xc ) / xc
εf cc = εcu2(3)
IF ff ctd,L2 < ff ctd,L1
THEN ff ctd = ff ctd,L2 + (ff ctd,L1 - ff ctd,L2) ∙ (εf ct_L2 - εf ct ) / (εf ct_L2 - εf ct_L12)
ELSE ff ctd = ff ctd,L1 + (ff ctd,L2 - ff ctd,L1) ∙ (εf ct - εf ct_L12) / (εf ct_L2 - εf ct_L12)
l when xc / d < ξf bal,t
εf ct = εf ct_L2
εf cc = εf ct_L2 ∙ xc / (d - xc )
where
εfct_ The strain in the fibre reinforced concrete at starting descending branch of resid-
L12 ual tensile strength in performance class 1
- 580 -
The reduction factor for tensile strength of concrete and position of concrete
tensile force
Two support values are calculated
Af ct = 0.5 ∙ (εf ct_L12 - εf ct_L11 + εf ct ) + 0.5 ∙ (ff ctd / ff ctd,L1) ∙ (εf ct - εf ct_L12)
Sf ct = εf ct_L112 / 3 + (εf ct_L12 - εf ct_L11)2 / 2 + [(ff ctd,L1 - ff ctd) / ff ctd,L1] ∙ [(εf ct - εf ct_L12) / 2] ∙ [(εf ct - εf ct_L12) / 3 + εf ct_L12] +
(ff ctd / ff ctd,L1) ∙ (εf ct - εf ct_L12) ∙ [(εf ct - εf ct_L12) / 2 + εf ct_L12]
The reduction factors are than calculated as follows
ηf t = Af ct / εf ct
βf t = Sf ct / (Af ct / εf ct )
λf t = 1.0
Estimation of the reinforcement stress for calculation of the compression zone

Stress in upper and lower reinforcement is estimated for the calculation of first iteration as "starting point". The stresses are
generally set to yield strength of reinforcement.
l For only compression load
IF mEd = 0
THEN σs+(-) = max(-εc2(3) ∙ Es+(-); -fyd+(-))
ELSE σs+(-) = -fyd+(-)
l For only tension load
σs+(-) = -fyd+(-)
l For compression and tension load together
IF mEd ≥ 0
THEN σs+ = -fyd+ and σs- = fyd-
ELSE σs+ = fyd+ and σs- = -fyd-
Calculation of the balanced normal force

The balanced normal force nRd,bal is force in the cross-section, when balanced state is adjusted.
nRd,bal = - xbal1 ∙ λ ∙ b ∙ η ∙ fcd + (h - xbal1) ∙ λf t ∙b ∙ ηf t ∙ fctd,L1 + As+ ∙ σs+ + As- ∙ fyd-
Calculation of the height of compression zone

Three possibilities for calculation of the height of compression zone are available
l nRd method (height of compression from force)
xc = (-nEd + λf t ∙ b ∙ h ∙ ηf t ∙ fctd,L1 + As- ∙ σs- + As+ ∙ σs+) / (λ ∙ b ∙ η ∙ fcd + λf t ∙ b ∙ ηf t ∙ fctd,L1)
l mRd method (height of compression from moment)
βtin = 1 - βf t
A = λ ∙ b ∙ η ∙ fcd ∙ β + λf t ∙ b ∙ ηf t ∙ fctd,L1 ∙ βtin
B = -λ ∙ b ∙ η ∙ fcd ∙ 0,5 ∙ h - λf t ∙ b ∙ ηf t ∙ fctd,L1 ∙ h ∙ (2 ∙ βtin - 0,5)
C = |mEd| + As- ∙ σs- ∙ zs- + As+ ∙ σs+ ∙ zs+ - λf t ∙ b ∙ ηf t ∙fctd,L1 ∙ h2 ∙ (0,5 - βtin)
- 581 -
Chapter 9
D = B2 - 4 ∙ A ∙ C
if D ≥ 0
THEN xc = (-B - √D) / (2 ∙ A)
ELSE xc = -999 and error message is shown
l nRd/mRd method (height of compression from eccentricity)
eccentricity: e = -|mEd / nEd|
βtin = 1 - βf t
A = λ ∙ b ∙ η ∙ fcd ∙ β + λf t ∙ b ∙ ηf t ∙ fctd,L1 ∙ βtin
B = -λ ∙ b ∙ η ∙ fcd ∙ (0,5 ∙ h - e) - λf t ∙ b ∙ ηf t ∙ fctd,L1 ∙ h ∙ (2 ∙ βtin - 0,5 ∙ h + e)
C = As- ∙ σs- ∙ (zs- - e) + As+ ∙ σs+ ∙ (zs+ - e) - λf t ∙ b ∙ ηf t ∙fctd,L1 ∙ h2 ∙ (0,5 ∙ h - βtin ∙ h - e)
D = B2 - 4 ∙ A ∙ C
if D ≥ 0
THEN xc = (-B -(+) √D) / (2 ∙ A) (- when e < 0; + when e > 0)
ELSE xc = -999 and error message is shown
The calculation of the resistance of the cross-section

Calculation of the inner lever arm for concrete and reinforcement from centre of gravity
Inner level arm of compressive forces in concrete from centre of gravity
IF mEd ≥ 0
THEN zcc = 0,5 ∙ h - β ∙ xc
ELSE zcc = -0,5 ∙ h + β ∙ xc
Inner level arm of tensile forces in concrete from centre of gravity

IF mEd ≥ 0
THEN zct = - xc - (h - xc ) ∙ βf t + 0,5 ∙ h
ELSE zct = + xc + (h - xc ) ∙ βf t - 0,5 ∙ h
IF xc < 0, THAN zct = 0
Calculation of the stress in the reinforcement according to height of the compression zone
Three possible states for recognition of stress in reinforcement, based on comparison of xc with d and as .
l xc ≤ d and xc ≥ as
IF mEd ≥ 0
THEN σs+ = -fyd+; σs- = fyd-
ELSE σs+ = fyd+; σs- = -fyd-
l xc < as
σs+ = fyd+; σs- = fyd-
- 582 -
l xc > d
IF mEd = 0
THEN σs+ = max(-εc2(3) ∙ Es+, -fyd+) ; σs- = max(-εc2(3) ∙ Es-, -fyd-)
ELSE σs+ = -fyd+; σs- = -fyd-
Calculation of the resistance

The resistance of the cross- section is based on calculation of forces in compressive and tensile concrete and in rein-
forcement and than these forces are multiplicative by inner level arms to obtain final resistances.
l Concrete compressive area
Acc = xc ∙ b
l Concrete tensile area
Act = (h - xc ) ∙ b
l Minimal concrete stress
σcc = -fcd
l Maximal concrete stress (tension)
σct = fctd,L1
l Compressive force in concrete
Fcc = Acc ∙ η ∙ σcc
l Tensile force in concrete
IF xc > 0
THEN Fct = Act ∙ ηf t ∙ σct
ELSE Fct = Act ∙ fctd,L2
l Forces in lower (-) and upper (+) reinforcement
Fs-(+) = As-(+) ∙ σs-(+)
l Resistances of the cross-section
nRd = Fcc + Fct + Fs- + Fs+
mRd = - Fcc ∙zcc - Fct ∙ zct - Fs- ∙zs- - Fs+ ∙ zs+
The calculation of the unity check

Final unity check is calculated according selected type of method for calculation
l nRd method
UC = mEd / mRd
l mRd method
UC = nEd / nRd
l nRd/mRd method
UC = max(mEd / mRd, nEd / nRd, (nEd2 + mEd2)0,5 / (nRd2 + mRd2)0,5)
- 583 -
Chapter 9
Final value of unity check can be drawn in 3D scene in SCIA Engineer.
Check of the compression strut

On addition to capacity check is the check of compression strut. The internal forces which are calculated in the direction of
the concrete strut have to be also checked. The internal forces have to be carried by concrete in compression.
The depth of the compression zone is calculated for each surface as average values from user defined reinforcement for
both directions
xc,avg± = 0,5 ∙ (xc,1± + xc,2±)
where
x Depth of the compression zone calculated from user defined reinforcement in the
c,1± first direction
x Depth of the compression zone calculated from user defined reinforcement in the
c,2± second direction
Design value of resistance of concrete compressive strut is calculated according formula

nRd,sc± = -Acc± ∙ η ∙ Redfcd ∙ fcd
where
The area of the compression concrete at upper (lower) surface

Acc±
Acc± = xc,avg± ∙ 1 m
The coefficient for reduction design compressive strength of the concrete from
η
concrete setup
Red The coefficient for reduction strength of the concrete in compressive concrete
fcd strut from concrete setup
fcd The design compressive strength of concrete
Unity check is than calculated as follows

UCsc = max(nEd,sc+ / nRd,sc+, nEd,sc- / nRd,sc-)
The value of Unity check for compression strut is also part of capacity check UC
UC = max(UCcapacity , UCsc )
- 584 -
Capacity check national annexes
National annexes are supported in capacity check and in dosage design. The following items are supported.
l α cc - Coefficient taking into account long-term behaviour of concrete - Standard EN: 1,0
l γC - Partial safety factor for design situation in ultimate limit state for concrete - Standard EN: Permanent: 1,5; Accidental:
1,2
l α f,c - Coefficient taking into account long-term behaviour of fibre concrete in tension - Standard EN: 0,85
l γf,C - Partial safety factor for design situation in ultimate limit state for fibre concrete - Standard EN: 1,25
l εud/εuk - Ratio of design and characteristic value of limit strain in reinforcement - Standard EN: 0,9
For national possibilities see "Theoretical background document".
Shear check 2D
Shear check - Command
The new item for Shear check (ULS) is added to the tree Concrete > SFRC 2D members > SFRC Shear check (ULS).
- 585 -
Chapter 9

city check
l User - User can defined dosage in properties for check, with limitations according materials, see. "Fibre library" on
page 552
l System
l Values
l UC - the value of unity check
l vfRd,cf - shear capacity of slab with respect of fibres
l vRdc - shear capacity of concrete without fibres
- 586 -
l vRd,cf - shear capacity corresponding to fibres

l vRd,max - maximal capacity of compressive concrete strut
Shear check theoretical background
The effect of the steel fibres in shear check is covered by additional component (vRd,cf ) in equation for calculation of cross-
section resistance (vRd,c ). The steel fibres behaves as spread shear reinforcement over the whole cross-section of the slab.
Thus the amount of standard shear reinforcement is reduced or it can be completely neglected.
The shear check for fibre reinforced concrete is based on the calculation of resultant shear force per each Finite element
and calculation of shear capacity of fibre reinforced concrete against to this resultant shear force.
The calculation uses the procedure from [1] DAfStb Guideline "Steel fibre reinforced concrete" chapter 6.2.
Work-flown of shear check is on next picture.
- 587 -
Chapter 9
- 588 -
Calculation of the resultant of shear forces and its angle

The resultant of shear forces and its angle is calculated from basic forces.
vEd = √(vx 2 + vy 2)
α v = arctg (vy / vx )
Recalculation of the internal forces to the direction of resultant of shear forces

The dimensional forces (mEd, nEd) have to be recalculated to the direction α v .
mEd = mx ∙ cos(α v )2 + my ∙ sin(α v )2 + mxy ∙ sin(2 ∙ α v )
nEd = nx ∙ cos(α v )2 + ny ∙ sin(α v )2 + nxy ∙ sin(2 ∙ α v )
Recalculation of reinforcement area to the direction of resultant of shear forces

The areas of user defined longitudinal reinforcement (reinforcement mesh) have to be recalculated to the direction of res-
ultant of shear forces.
The recalculation is done only for :
l Tensile reinforcement - this state is evaluated from calculation of compression zone

l Main reinforcement (principal) only
Calculation of compression zone

This calculation is needed for determination of values
l Distances d and z
l The state of reinforcement - tensile or compressive
Calculation is based on capacity check. For details see "Capacity check theoretical background".
For fibre reinforcement only (without standard reinforcement) are values d and z calculated as follows
d=h
z = 0,9 ∙ d
Calculation of vRd,max
The calculation is based on standard calculation according equation 6.9 [2] EN1992-1-1. Because we are not support
inclined shear reinforcement in SCIA Engineer 18.
vRd,max = α cw ∙ bw ∙ z ∙ ν1 ∙ fcd / (cot θ + tan θ)
where
α The coefficient taking account of the state of the stress in the compression chord,
cw for details see "National annexes theoretical background".
b
Width of cross-section effective on shear, bw = 1 m
w
z The lever arm of forces
The value of strength reduction factor for concrete in shear, for details see
ν1
"National annexes theoretical background".
- 589 -
Chapter 9
The angle between the concrete compression chord and the beam axis per-
pendicular to the shear force.
θ
l Automatic calculation
l User defined
Verification of vRd,max
The condition of vEd ≤ vRd,max is checked.
If it is fulfilled, the Shear check can continue.

It it is not fulfilled, the Shear check ends here with the warning message:
Description: Maximum concrete shear resistance v Rd,max was exceeded. Solution:

Increase depth of member or class of concrete."
Calculation of vRd,c
v Rd,c is calculated in direction of shear force resultant. It means all the characteristics as forces (n Ed , m Ed ) and rein-
forcement (Asl) are recalculated to this direction.
l Longitudinal reinforcement ratio in direction of shear force resultant
ρl = Asl / (b ∙ d)
ρl = min(ρl; 0,02)
l Effect of normal forces - recalculated normal force in direction of shear force resultant
σcp = min(-nEd / Ac ; 0,2 ∙ fcd)
l Coefficient based of effective depth d
k = min(1 + √(200 / d); 2)
l Coefficient CRd,c and k1 - based on national annex
l vRd,c is than calculated
vRd,c = (CRd,c ∙ k ∙ (100 ∙ ρl ∙ fck )1/3 + k1 ∙ σcp) ∙ d
l Limit value vRd,cmin
vRd,cmin = (νmin + k1 ∙ σcp) ∙ d
l Final value of vRd,c is than
vRd,c = max(vRd,c ; vRd,cmin)
Calculation of vRd,cf
Calculation is based on chapter RE.6.2.2 equation R.6.2d [1] DAfStb Guideline "Steel fibre reinforced concrete"
vRd,cf = α f c ∙ ff ctR,u ∙ bw ∙ h / γf ct
- 590 -
Calculation of vfRd,cf
Final shear capacity of 2D member not requiring standard shear reinforcement is calculated according equation R.6.2c [1]
DAfStb Guideline "Steel fibre reinforced concrete"
vf Rd,c = min(vRd,c , + vRd,cf ; 1,4 ∙ vRd,c )
The condition of vEd ≤ vf Rd,c is checked.
If it is fulfilled, note message appear and shear check calculation is stopped.
Shear resistance without shear reinforcement vf Rd,c is sufficient, no shear reinforcement is

required.
If it is not fulfilled, warning message appear and shear check calculation is stopped.
Shear resistance without shear reinforcement vf Rd,c was exceeded. Shear reinforcement
is required.
Calculation of vRd,s
Calculation of v Rd,s is not done, because in SCIA Engineer 18 is not possible to define shear reinforcement for
2D members.
Shear check national annexes
National annexes are supported in shear check. The following items are supported.
l CRd,c - Coefficient to determinate shear resistance of concrete - Standard EN: 0,18

l k1 - Coefficient to determinate shear resistance of concrete - Standard EN: 0,15
l νmin - Coefficient to determinate shear resistance of concrete - Standard EN: νmin = 0,035 ∙ k3/2 ∙ fck 1/2
l θmin - Minimal angle between the concrete compression strut and the beam axis - Standard EN: 21,8° (cotg = 2,5)
l θmax - Maximal angle between the concrete compression strut and the beam axis - Standard EN: 45,0° (cotg = 1)
l ν1 - Strength reduction factor for concrete cracked in shear - Standard EN: ν1 = 0,6 for fck ≤ 60 MPa; ν1 = 0,9 - fck / 200
for fck > 60 MPa
l α cw - Coefficient taking account of the state of the stress in the compression chord - Standard EN: 1 for non-prestressed
members
Punching - Introduction
Introduction
The effect of the steel fibres in punching check is, similarly in shear check, covered by additional component (vRd,cf ) in equa-
tion for calculation of cross-section resistance (vRd,c ). The steel fibres behaves as spread shear reinforcement over the
whole cross-section of the slab. Thus also here the amount of standard shear reinforcement is reduced and shera studs or
rails can be completely neglected.
- 591 -
Chapter 9
The SFRC Punching (ULS) command allows quick basic verification of the punching resistance of plates with point-type
supports according to [1] DAfStb Guideline "Steel fibre reinforced concrete". Nevertheless the most parts are coming dir-
ectly from EN 1992-1-1:2004/A1:2014 + applicable National Annexes. The verification reveals either that the load-bearing
capacity of the steel fibre reinforced concrete is sufficiently high or that additional amount of punching shear reinforcement is
required. If any verification limit is exceeded, the verification result is marked as not permissible. In such case, the user must
change the model parameters or select a suitable design alternative.
Highlights
The list of main features available within the command is following:
n Selection of structural nodes automatically or by user to localize point-type supports on plates

n Preparation of all required input data from model automatically including the design of longitudinal reinforcement
n Recognition of internal, edge or corner column type from the geometry of constructed basic control perimeter around
loaded area
n Determination of the load increment factor β by general formula or using simplified approach
n Verification of plate without punching reinforcement and, if necessary, design quantitative amount of shear links around
column
n Presentation of inputs and results via graphical and numerical output integrated to Engineering Report
n Extension of capability to design shear reinforcement also beyond the basic control perimeter
n Consideration of all modelled openings to reduce length of control perimeters
Usage
The procedure to perform the command is following:
1. Open Concrete service using tree menu

2. Select [SFRC Punching (ULS)] located at SFRC 2Dmembers
3. Adjust properties of the Punching command as follows:
a. Define selection of nodes (All / Current / ...)
b. Select result case
- 592 -
c. Choose Dosage type (Material defined / Designed / User)

d. Choose source of longitudinal reinforcement (not editable User reinforcement)
e. Decide whether averaging of peaks is required for results of longitudinal reinforcement
f. Select type of extreme to be displayed (Nodes / Global)
g. Select a result value to be displayed (VEd, UCvfRd,c , UCvRd,max ,...)
4. Run the command by click on [Refresh] action button to perform the Punching Design procedure
5. See and verify Punching results via graphical and numerical output
6. Sent selected output to the Engineering Report
7. If required, change Punching settings to modify assumptions for design
8. Refresh the results with new settings and review the results
Note: The Punching design can depends on results of designed dosage. When such res-
ults are not yet calculated, the dosage design is automatically run on background for selec-
ted result case.
In case maximal dosage is not good enough and design returns n/a, then maximal dosage
value 35kg/m3 is used in punching check and the message is given to user: "Maximal avail-
able dosage is not sufficient to resist the load, nevertheless 35kg/m3 is used for calculation
in punching check"
Limitations
Not all modelled punching cases of column-plate connection can be calculated successfully. Such cases are covered by the
system of Errors/ Warnings/Notes through which the description and possible solution of detected problems is presented.
What kind of E/W/N information is displayed in numerical or graphical output depends on the relevant settings of Punching
command.
The summary of main limitations is following:
- 593 -
Chapter 9
n The structural node can be calculated for punching design only if conditions for the selection are fulfilled:
a. Node must have a reference on Plate (2D member) from Steel fibre concrete material
b. Node must have a reference on Column (1D member) or Support in node
c. Plate is supported in the node just by column and not by other members like beams, ribs etc.
n The punching design can not be performed successfully if:
a. Point force is applied on the node [W6/121]
b. Plate is not horizontal [W6/122]
c. Column is not perpendicular to plate [W6/123]
d. Column goes through the plate as single column [W6/124]
e. Column is rotated by the Alpha angle [W6/127]
f. Column is not prismatic [W6/128]
g. Columns above and below the plate have different orientation of LCS [W6/129]
h. Column has not supported type of cross-section (circle or rectangle) [W6/131]
i. Combination of Support in node and Column is modelled [W6/133]
j. Subregion near the node is not from the steel fibre concrete material [W6/134]
n Reduction of load for foundation plate by contact stress of soil is not considered [N6/107]
n There is no additional punching data to adjust or extend inputs manually by user
n As longitudinal reinforcement can be considered just the User reinforcement (practical reinforcement inputted by user
manually)
Punching Command
The SFRC Punching (ULS) command can be selected in the tree menu of service Concrete > SFRC 2D members . The
command is available, when EC - EN national code is selected in Project data and the linear or non-linear static analysis is
done for the model containing 2D members from steel fibre reinforced concrete material. Once the command is selected,
appropriate parameters are listed and can be adjusted in property window with following options:
- 594 -
- 595 -
Chapter 9
Selection
Places, where the punching is calculated and results are available, can be defined automatically or manually. However, the
final selection always contains just structural nodes, which fulfil the following criteria:
l node has the reference on a plate (=2D member) from steel fibre concrete material
l node does not contain any reference on beams
To define the selection of the nodes, several options are available:

Prepares automatically the selection of all structural nodes in model, which fulfil above mentioned
All
criteria
Uses user selection of part of the model, where structural nodes are filtered to keep in selection
Current
just the proper nodes
Same approach as Current, just additional options are available for user to enhance the
Advanced
actual selection by the previous one.
Same approach as Current, just an already saved selection of part of the model - made and
Named Selection
named by user - is used.
Note: If manually defined selection contains structural nodes not applicable for punching,
user is informed about that fact in the graphical window and preview. Also keep on mind,
that the filtering of nodes also respects current Activity applied in model.
Result case
To define load, for which results are calculated and displayed, the following parameters can be used:
Specifies what type of load is considered (if some option is marked with an asterisk, the
Type of load
FEM results for that option are not yet calculated).
Load case / Combination /
Result Class / Nonlinear Offers list of all available result cases for the selected type of load.
Com.
Dosage and Reinforcement

To define longitudinal reinforcement, which is taken into account during the punching calculation, these parameters can be
used:
Defines which fibre dosage is considered in punching calculation, there are in fact three pos-
sibilities: Material defined - coming from setting per each material from Material library;
Dosage Designed - it means Dosage deign is run at first and the results from it are taken into account
for punching check and User defined which means the setting defined in command directly is
taken into account fro all nodes in the model.
Specifies what type of reinforcement is considered in the punching calculation:there is one
Type of reinforcement
option related to User reinforcement only.).
Averaging of peak Controls whether the averaging of peak is applied or not during the Reinforcement design
Provides information about the location of the Reinforcement design results (used In nodes
Location
avg.)
Provides information about the coordination system of Reinforcement design results (used
System
LCS mesh element)
- 596 -
Note: If results of the Dosage design are not available for the selected Result case, Loca-
tion and System, than the program automatically runs the procedure to make those results
available for the Punching calculation.
Note: The 'User' type of reinforcement applied on 2D members as Reinforcement 2D is

taken into account for Punching calculation only.
Extreme
To control display of results, the following parameters can be used:
Specifies for what nodes results are displayed: Nodes - results are displayed for every cal-
Extreme culated node regardless of position of extreme, Global - just the node with the extreme of a
selected result value is displayed
Values Specifies what result value is presented from the available list of Punching - Results
Output settings
In addition to previous settings related to the result values and extremes, it's possible to control specifically a numerical out-
put as follows:
Specifies what type of numerical output is displayed from following options: Brief (just
Output summary info) and Standard (summary info supplemented by more detailed inform-
ation)
Print explanation of symbols Controls whether an explanation of symbols used in numerical output is present or not
Controls whether an combination key is presented or not (this option is available just
when type of load is not a load-case and output is selected as Brief)
Errors, warnings and notes settings

System of errors, warnings and notes is fully supported for the Punching calculation to provide various type of information
(for a complete list see Punching - Errors / Warnings / Notes). The E/W/N messages are displayed using both numerical and
graphical output. The showing is controlled by following options:
Show information in Result Controls whether summary info about errors and warning is visible as a part of the Result
header header.
Specifies what errors are presented in graphical and numerical output: All (all detected
Show errors
errors) and None (no errors)
Specifies what warnings are presented in graphical and numerical output: All (all detec-
Show warnings ted warnings), In extremes only (just warnings detected on nodes with extreme) and None
(no warnings)
Specifies what notes are presented in graphical and numerical output: All (all detected
Show notes
notes), In extremes only (just notes detected on nodes with extreme) and None (no notes)
Controls whether an explanation of detected errors, warnings and notes is presented in
Show table with explanation
the numerical output
- 597 -
Chapter 9
Punching - Theory
Basis of calculation
Phenomenon of punching means a local shear failure around a concentrated load on a plate. The most common situations
where the punching has to be considered is the region immediately surrounding a column in a flat ceiling plate or where
column is supported on a foundation plate. The following problem types can be currently distinguished there: interior, edge
and corner columns. Design of punching shear reinforcement is based on Re 6.4.5 from [1] DAfStb Guideline "Steel fibre
reinforced concrete" together with clauses 6.4 and 9.4.3 in EN 1992-1-1: 2004 / AC:2014 + National Annexes. The cal-
culation reveals either that the load-bearing capacity of the steel fibre reinforced concrete is sufficiently high or that specific
amount of punching shear reinforcement is required. If the verification limits are exceeded, such a result is marked as not
permissible. In that case, the user must change the model parameters or select a suitable design alternative.
Modelling
Places, where the punching design is calculated and results are available, can be defined automatically or manually (see
Punching command). However, the final selection always contains just structural nodes, which fulfil the following criteria:
l node has the reference on a plate (=2D member) from steel fibre concrete material
l node does not contain any further reference on beams or other columns
The described filtering of structural nodes is integrated to the design procedure and is run automatically. Up to the user is
just specify which part of the model should be considered for that filtering (by choosing a specific selection type in command
which respects to current activity).
Note: If manually defined selection contains structural nodes not applicable for punching at
all, such nodes are removed from the selection and user is informed about that fact in the
graphical window and preview.
Input data
All input data required by the punching design procedure are prepared from the model for each node automatically. User is
able to check them all via Standard output. The input data cannot modify by user directly, since any additional data applic-
able on the node does not yet exist for the Punching design (be aware that punching data from Concrete Advanced service
are not taken into account at all). However, most of inputs can be changed by updating the related parameters in model.
- 598 -
Note: Part of the preparation of input data is a check, whether a selected node can be suc-
cessfully calculated for punching or some limitation is reached (for complete list see
E/W/N). When node cannot be successfully calculated, the results are set to not available
values (N/A) and final unity check of the design itself is set to the error value (as default
UC=3.0). Explanation and possible solution of such cases is available through E/W/N sys-
tem.
Punching load and area

The punching load and related loaded area are evaluated for each combination separately to properly consider which sur-
face (side) of the plate is actually loaded. Key step is to determine the punching shear force, VEd , and based on its sign
(respective direction) is decided about a governing column (the one punched through the plate). The loaded surface of the
plate than lies on opposite side than the governing column. In addition to that, corresponding unbalanced bending moments
MEd,y and MEd,z are registered as input for calculation of β-factor using a general formula. The evaluation of the punching
load varies with selected approach for modelling the point-type support of the plate at a calculated node. Selected approach
also determines what coordination system is taken as a referenced for the loaded area to be further used for the rest of
punching design procedure. Two categories of point-type support of plates may be recognized in the model.
Punching load from support in node

First option is modelling plate with supports in nodes, where the loaded area of each node is derived according to a type of
using support as follows:
n Standard support - square cross-section is assumed with the inputted size
n Column support - assigned cross-section is taken with inputted dimensions
For both types, the coordination system of the loaded area is determined from the coordination system of the node itself with
just substitution of axes (x=y and y=z). When the support is rotated around its z-axis, this rotation is taken into account and
the loaded area is rotated as well. The punching shear force VEd is taken as component R z of the reaction in the support
including its sign (which is positive when the direction of R z is same like the direction of global z-axis). The unbalanced
moments are derived from moment reactions Mx and My , which again are just transformed to the coordination system of
the loaded area and presented in absolute values.
- 599 -
Chapter 9
Punching load from columns

Second possibility of point-type support of plate is direct modelling of columns above and below the plate as connected 1D
members. The loaded area is taken same as shape of cross-section from the governing column (punched through the
plate). The shear force, VEd, is calculated as a resultant of columns normal (axial) forces acting perpendicularly on the plate.
For calculation of the resultant is used the following convention of direction of normal force based on its sign:
n compressive (negative sign) - means the force in direction from the column into the plate (punching)
n tension (positive sign) - means the force in direction from the plate into the column (pulling)
In case of a single column connected to the plate, the shear force is directly the normal force from the end section of the
column on side relating to the node. If both columns below and above the plate are modelled, the shear force VEd is taken as
the resultant as follows. If both normal forces are compression (with same sign), just differential force is accounted as shear
force else aboslute . Mostly the governing punching load is
- 600 -
- 601 -
Chapter 9
Note: For determination of punching load from columns are used original internal forces
from FEM analysis (not the recalculated ones).
Steel fibre reinforced concrete plate

Each calculated node for punching design has to have a reference on some 2D member. In many case, the region around
the node also includes other 2D members with even different properties than the referenced plate. To overcome that issue,
a homogenization of properties of the relevant plates is done in advance to prepare required input data for punching design.
Two following procedures are performed. Firstly, to get unified outer boundary of plates per a floor, all the connected plates
lying in the common plane (same as the referenced plate) are virtually merged together. From the merging procedure are
automatically excluded plates with a different type or material than the referenced plate. Secondly, within the unified bound-
ary is created around each calculated node a circular region of radius 3h + a, where h is thickness of the referenced plate of
the node and a is half-width of the loaded area. Required input data for punching design are than extracted and homo-
genized from mesh nodes / elements within this region as follows:
n Ceiling / Foundation - if plate is supported by surface support (contact stresses is present on all mesh nodes / elements in
the region) than the plate is assumed as foundation, else ceiling plate is considered
n Thickness (h) - taken as minimum value recognized from all mesh nodes / elements in the region
n Material (fcd) - taken as minimum value recognized from all mesh nodes / elements in the region
Note: If the properties of a plate around the node are not constant (some homogenization
is required), user is informed about that fact by notes via E/W/N system.
Same region like for the recognizing of steel fibre concrete plate properties is assumed for evaluation of longitudinal rein-
forcement coming to the punching design. As a source a user practical longitudinal reinforcement is used. The following
characteristics are calculated:
n Effective depth (deff ) - there can be distinguish two cases based on longitudinal reinforcement existence on the slab
n with standard longitudinal reinforcement - taken as minimum value from effective depths (deff,i) of mesh nodes / ele-
ments within the region calculated according to formula:
deff,i = (dy,i+dz,i) / 2
- 602 -
n without standard longitudinal reinforcement - taken as entire height of the slab
d=h
n Reinforcement ratio (ρl) - taken as mean value from reinforcement ratios (ρl,i) of mesh nodes / elements within the region
calculated according to formula:
ρl,i = √(ρy,i.ρz,i) where
ρy,i = Asy,i / (b*dy,i) and ρz,i = Asz,i / (b*dz,i)
Punching design procedure

Basic control perimeter
If the load transfer is non-uniform (due to unbalanced bending moments), local peak loading should be compensated with
the help of a lump-sum factor β for VEd. For structures where the lateral stability does not depend on frame action between
the slabs and the columns, and where the adjacent spans do not differ in length by more than 25%, approximate values for β
may be used. The user must decide whether these approximate values can be used, because the program cannot check
the preconditions described above.
Approximate values of β for use in a specific country may be found in settings for Concrete
National Annex.
Punching shear force

The design procedure for punching shear is based first of all on checks at the face of the column u0 and at the basic control
perimeter u1. The maximum shear stress is calculated for considered control perimeter ui according clause 6.4.3(1) as fol-
lows:
vEd,ui = β ∙ |VEd| / (ui ∙ deff )
where
βl is factor ...
Punching resistance with fibres and without shear reinforcement

The effect of the steel fibres in punching check is, similarly in shear check, covered by additional component (vRd,cf ) in equa-
tion for calculation of overall cross-section resistance (vf Rd,c ) as follows
vf Rd,c = min ( vRd,c + vRd,cf ; 1,4 . vRd,c )
Where the punching shear resistance( vRd,c ) of a plate is checked at the basic control perimeter according clause 6.4.4(1)
as follows:
- 603 -
Chapter 9
vRd,c = CRd,c ∙ k ∙ (100 ∙ ρl∙ fck )1/3 + k1.σcp≥ vmin
where
CRd,c = 0.18 / γc
k = 1 + √(200 / deff ) ≤ 2.0 where deff in [mm]
ρl is average reinforcement ratio in specific distance around column
fck is characteristic concrete compressive strength in [MPa]
vmin = 0.035 ∙ k3/2 ∙ fck 1/2
k1 = 0,1; this value is NA dependent
σcp - normal concrete stress taken into account as difference of shear forces in the columns
and contribution of fibre in resistance vRd,cf
vRd,cf = 0,85 . αf c . ff ctR,u / γf ct
where
αf c reduction factor which is aligned with the design concept of this document to allow for long-term effects on the
residual tensile strength of steel fibre reinforced concrete (see [1] DAfStb Guideline "Steel fibre reinforced con-
crete"); default = 0,85
γf ct - partial safety factor according to Table R.1 (see [1] DAfStb Guideline "Steel fibre reinforced concrete");
default = 1,25
ff ctR,u - residual value of steel fibre reinforced concrete
The calculation of ff ctR,u is dependent on member size factor (κf G) . This factor is during punching calculated as follows:
κf G = 1+ Af ct .0,5≤1,7
where
Af ct = u1.d
The following condition must be satisfied to avoid necessity of punching shear reinforcement:
UCvfRd,c = vEd,u1 / vf Rd,c ≤ 1.0
When this condition is not fulfilled, the warning W6/102 occurs and design of shear reinforcement continues (with final status
OK, but to indicate that shear reinforcement is required).
Beside that, at the column perimeter, the maximum punching shear stress is checked according to clause 6.4.5(3) as fol-
lows:
vRd,max = 0.4∙ v ∙fcd
See NA values in Theoretical Background - National annexes to EN1992
As a result, he following condition must be satisfied to keep the plate designable
- 604 -
UCvRd,max = vEd,u0 / vRd,max ≤ 1.0
When this condition is not fulfilled, the warning W6/101 occurs and design procedure ends with status Not OK.
As a summary, when the shear reinforcement is not required, the final unity check value is calculated as follows:
UC = max {UCvfRd,c ; UCvRd,max }

If punching reinforcement is required, the outer control perimeter uout beyond which the reinforcement is no longer needed
is calculated acc. to clause 6.4.5(4)
uout = β ∙ |VEd| / (vRd,c ∙ deff )
Be aware in case of shear reinforcement is required then fibre contribution is not allowed to
consider (see Re 6.4.5 [1] DAfStb Guideline "Steel fibre reinforced concrete"). Thus shear
resistance of concrete only is mentioned in the formula below.
A shape of outer control perimeter is searched iteratively to find a distance, aout , for which the outer control perimeter has
the necessary length. I The shape of the outer control perimeter is considered same as for the basic control perimeter. In
some cases, this condition cannot be fulfilled and different shape is used (see warning W6/113). If any outer perimeter with
required length cannot be constructed, the design procedure cannot be done successfully (see error E6/106). If any open-
ing is near the loaded area, the reduction of the outer perimeter is considered, which leads to increasing of value aout .
[fig. - different shape of uout] [fig. - problem to find uout]
Distribution of shear reinforcement

Within the uout , the shear reinforcement is designed using the following assumptions:
l the distribution of the shear links is considered only as radial

l just vertical shear links are supported
l the shape of reinforcement perimeters around the column is used same as basic control perimeter
- 605 -
Chapter 9
TODO: Settings for distribution of shear reinforcement and diameter of shear links
The required area Asw,reqof one perimeter of shear reinforcement around the column assumed as radially distributed ver-
tical shear links is calculated as
Asw,req =[(vEd,u1 - 0.75 ∙ vRd,c ) ∙ u1 ∙ sr] / (1.5 ∙ fywd,ef )
where
fywd,ef is effective design strength of the punching reinforcement acc. to formula:
TODO: Settings for distribution of shear reinforcement and diameter of shear links
The required area is further adjusted to fulfil detailing provision rules acc. to clause 9.4.3(1), so that number of shear links ns
per each reinforcement perimeter is following (rounded up)
ns = max { 4 ∙ Asw,req/ (π ∙ ds 2); u1,last / st,max,u1; us,last / st,max,out }
where
ds is diameter of shear link
u 1,last / st,max,u1 represents condition of maximum allowed tangential spacing of links of reinforcement
perimeters placed within the basic control perimeter (u 1,last is length of last perimeter of shear rein-
forcement there)
u s,last / st,max,out represents condition of maximum allowed tangential spacing of links of reinforcement
perimeters placed outside the basic control perimeter (u s,last is length of last perimeter of shear rein-
forcement there)
- 606 -
Note: Settings for detailing rules...
The last condition, which must be fulfilled acc. to clause 9.4.3(2) is minimum reinforcement area of single shear link Asw1,min
acc. to formula
Asw1,min = 0.08 ∙ √ ( fck / fywk ) ∙ sr ∙ st / 1.5
where
st is tangential spacing of shear links of last perimeter of shear reinforcement around column
[fig. Asw1min + st]

The final designed area of each perimeter of shear reinforcement around the column is than as follows
Asw = ns ∙ π ∙ ds 2 / 4 ≥ ns ∙ Asw1,min
where condition about minimum reinforcement area of shear link is automatically checked and design is recalculated with an
increment of ns if the condition is not satisfied.
[fig. ns + ds] [fig setup for ds]
The required number of shear reinforcement perimeters around column, n per , is determined based on clause 6.4.5(4),
which specifies that the outermost perimeter of shear reinforcement, as,last = s0 + sr ∙ nper, should be placed at a distance
not greater than kout ∙ deff within uout . The following formula for nper is derived
nper = [(aout - s0 - kout ∙ deff ) / sr] + 1 ≥ nper,min
where
kout is coefficient to determine the maximum distance of last perimeter from uout
nper,min is minimum number of reinforcement perimeters around column required acc. to clause 9.4.3(1)
- 607 -
Chapter 9
Note: The coefficient kout is National Annex value and can be edited using Concrete Setup.
The total amount of shear reinforcement Asw,tot around the column is than simply calculated as
- 608 -
Asw,tot = nper ∙ Asw
[fig Asw,tot]
Punching resistance with shear reinforcement

To confirm, that designed amount of shear reinforcement is sufficient, the punching resistance of a plate with shear rein-
forcement is verified in required number of control perimeters, nc,per, as follows
nc,per = [s0 + (nper - 1) ∙ sr] / au1
where
au1 = 2 ∙ deff and represents the equidistant spacing of control perimeters from column face
The shape of control perimeters is primarily considered same as for the basic control perimeter. However, it it's not possible
to construct it in same pattern due to the plate boundary, than different shape pattern with minimised length is used instead
(see warning W6/118).
[fig. TODO]
Note: All control perimeters used during the punching design procedure can be displayed
in the graphical window to be checked also visually.
The punching resistance with shear reinforcement is calculated for i-th control perimeter using expression in clause 6.4.5(1)
vRd,cs,i = 0.75 ∙ vRd,c + 1.5 ∙ (deff / sr) ∙ Asw ∙ fywd,ef / (ui ∙ deff ) ≤ kmax ∙ vRd,c
where
ui is lenght of i-th control perimeter with the distance from column face aui = i * 2 * deff
The maximum capacity that can be achieved by application of shear reinforcement is limited by the value kmax ∙vRd,c accord-
ing to clause 6.4.5(1). Hence, the unity check of the punching resistance with shear reinforcement can be formulated as
UCvRd,cs = max {vEd,ui / vRd,cs,i; vEd,ui / (kmax ∙ vRd,c )} ≤ 1.0
It's obvious, that due to this limitation not always can be shear reinforcement successfully designed (see warning W6/117).
In such case, it's recommended to increase
Note: The factor kmax is National Annex value and can be edited via Concrete Setup.
To be sure, that all detailing rules related to punching reinforcement are fulfilled,
Punching - Results
List of Results
The following list of result values is available to be presented in the graphical output:
UC Summary unity check as maximum from below mentioned checks

Unity check of the punching shear resistance of plate without shear reinforcement including
UCvfRd,c
fibres
UCvRd,max Unity check of the punching shear resistance at the column perimeter
- 609 -
Chapter 9
Unity check of the punching shear resistance of plate with designed shear reinforcement
UCvRd,cs
(including limit of maximum capacity achievable by application and excluding fibres
Unity check of the detailing rules of designed punching shear reinforcement (the maximum
UCAsw,det
value from all detailing rules is presented)
Total amount of designed shear reinforcement placed within the basic control perimeter
Asw,tot
around column
VEd Punching shear force calculated as difference of axial forces of columns per floor
Graphical output
Presentation of any selected result value of the Punching calculation in graphical window consists of two components:
n numerical value of the result itself

n visualization of control perimeters
Colouring of both components is given differently. The colour of numerical value is determined according to the type of selec-
ted result value. If the selected result is not a check value (Asw, VEd) than the colour of the numerical value is always blue.
Else the standard principle of colouring is used - as for any unity check - to distinguish between satisfy (green) and not satisfy
(red) check value.
- 610 -
The colour of control perimeters is considered to be more advanced to provide the complete information about final punch-
ing result case independently on the selected result value. Basic four punching case may be found as follows:
n A) maximum shear capacity of concrete adjacent to the column is not sufficient (UCvRd,max > 1.0) -> basic control peri-
meter is red
n B) shear capacity without shear reinforcement is sufficient (UCvfRd,c ≤ 1.0 and UCvRd,max ≤ 1.0) -> basic control peri-
meter is green
n C and E) shear capacity with shear reinforcement is sufficient (UCvfRd,c > 1.0 but UCvRd,cs ≤ 1.0) -> all required control
perimeters are blue
n D) plate is not designable by application of shear reinforcement (UCvRd,cs > 1.0) or detailing rules are broken (UCAsw,-
det > 1.0) => all required control perimeters are red
Numerical output
Presentation of results as a numerical output is possible via Preview and / or Table results. For the Punching check, there is
available two types of output:
n Brief - contains just a summary table with basic results

n Standard - contains the same summary table as in Brief output supplemented by additional tables providing further semi-
results
- 611 -
Chapter 9
Note: As option for display the Standard output for the specific node, it's possible to use the
Table results functionality. In this way, it's just necessary to select a line representing the
specific node and by double-click on the line the display the output just for that node.
There is also possibility to display explanation of symbols list of used symbols in with explanation presented in numerical out-
put is following:
VEd Punching design shear force taken as difference of axial forces of columns per floor
Unity check of the punching shear resistance of plate without shear reinforcement with
UCvfRd,c
respect of fibres
UCvRd,max Unity check of the punching shear resistance at the column perimeter
Unity check of the punching shear resistance of plate with designed shear reinforcement
UCvRd,cs
(including limit of maximum capacity achievable by application
Unity check of the detailing rules of designed punching shear reinforcement (the maximum
UCAsw,det
value from all detailing rules is presented)
Total amount of designed shear reinforcement placed within the basic control perimeter
Asw,tot
around column
VEd Punching shear force calculated as difference of axial forces of columns per floor
Errors, Warnings and Notes

sages is following:
Punching EWN
List of E/W/N
sages is following:
Errors
Unhandled problem occurred during the preparation of geo-
E6/101 Error
metry of column shape.
Unhandled problem occurred in calculation of basic control
E6/102 Error
perimeter.
Unhandled problem occurred in calculation of concrete shear
E6/103 Error Please contact SCIA Support team.
capacity.
Unhandled problem occurred in calculation of design shear
E6/104 Error
reinforcement.
Unhandled problem occurred in calculation of reduction of
E6/105 Error
column periphery.
Punching design failed. A control perimeter cannot be correctly
If possible, try to extend boundary of the plate or
E6/106 Error generated because the entire boundary of the plate is very
change the dimensions of the involved members.
close to the column periphery.
- 612 -
Warnings
Punching shear resistance at the column perimeter (vRd,max ) Use higher grade of material or increase thickness of
W6/101 Warning
is not sufficient acc. to §6.4.3(2). the plate.
Punching shear resistance at the basic control perimeter
To avoid design of shear reinforcement try to increase
W6/F102 Warning (vRd,c ) is not sufficient acc. to §Re 6.4.3. Punching shear rein-
amount of longitudinal reinforcement.
forcement is required.
Area of a single link of shear reinforcement is less than min-
W6/110 Warning
imum value acc. to §9.4.3(2).
Tangential spacing of shear links (st,u1) of the outermost peri-
W6/111 Warning meter of shear reinforcement inside the basic control peri-
Tangential spacing of shear links (st,out) of the outermost peri-
W6/112 Warning meter of shear reinforcement outside the basic control peri-
Last perimeter of shear reinforcement is placed at a distance
W6/113 Warning greater than (kd) from the outer control perimeter uout, see
§6.4.5(4).
Number of perimeters of shear reinforcement is less than the
W6/114 Warning
minimum value acc. to §9.4.3(1).
Radial spacing sr of shear reinforcement perimeters around
W6/115 Warning
the column exceeds the maximum value acc. to §9.4.3(1). Change assumptions for design of shear rein-
Distance s0of first perimeter of shear reinforcement from the forcement (by using Design defaults).
W6/116 Warning
column face is not within the interval acc. to §9.4.3(1) and (4).
Punching resistance of plate with designed shear rein- Use higher grade of material or increase thickness of
W6/F117 Warning
forcement vRd,cs is not sufficient acc. to §Re 6.4.5. the plate.
A control perimeter ui outside the basic control area is not gen-
W6/118 Warning erated with same shape as the basic control perimeter u1, see
§6.4.2(7).
Node cannot be calculated for punching. The basic control
W6/119 Warning perimeter is detected as type of straight line between opposite
edges of the plate so different failure mode is assumed.
Design of punching shear reinforcement cannot be done. The
W6/120 Warning
outer control perimeter uout is not found correctly.
Node cannot be calculated for punching. A point force is Remove the point force and apply the load through a
W6/121 Warning
applied on the node. column (1D member).
W6/122 Warning
not horizontal.
W6/123 Warning
not perpendicular to the plate.
Node cannot be calculated for punching. Connected column Split the column in the node to get separate column
W6/124 Warning
goes through the plate. above and below the plate.
Node cannot be calculated for punching. Connected column is Rotate the column through a rotation of its LCS
W6/127 Warning
rotated by alpha angle. instead of alpha angle (if possible).
W6/128 Warning
not prismatic.
Node cannot be calculated for punching. Connected columns
W6/129 Warning Unify orientation of LCS of both columns (if possible).
above and below the plate have different orientation of LCS.
- 613 -
Chapter 9
Node cannot be calculated for punching. The nodal support is

W6/130 Warning
not perpendicular to plate by its z-axis.
Node cannot be calculated for punching. Connected column
W6/131 Warning
has not supported type of cross-section.
W6/132 Warning identified as foundation but this is not valid everywhere
around the node.
Node cannot be calculated for punching. Combination of
W6/133 Warning
nodal support and linked 1D member is not allowed.
Node cannot be calculated for punching. Subregion near the
W6/134 Warning
node is not from the concrete material.
Node cannot be calculated for punching. An opening with Simplify shape of the opening to be rectangle or circle
W6/136 Warning
unsupported shape is detected around the node. (if possible)
Reduced length of the basic control perimeter due to open-
Change the method for determination of the Beta
W6/137 Warning ings is significant. The simplified method for the Beta factor is
factor in the Concrete settings.
not recommended to use.
Notes
N6/101 Note Length of column periphery u0 is reduced acc. to §6.4.5(3).
Normal concrete stress σcp is neglected in the formula for cal-
N6/102 Note
culation punching shear resistance vRd,c .
The ratio of longitudinal reinforcement ρl around the node is
N6/103 Note
taken as the maximum limit (0.04).
The longitudinal reinforcement ρl around the node is not fully
N6/104 Note
anchorage (for some mesh nodes ρl =0).
The thickness of the plate around the node is not the same. The
N6/105 Note
minimum value of thickness is taken.
Concrete material around the node is not the same. The min-
N6/106 Note
imum value of characteristic strength fck is taken.
Reduction of punching shear force for foundation plate is neg-
N6/107 Note
lected.
The length of control perimeters is reduced by ineffective part
N6/108 Note
caused by presence of openings acc. to §6.4.2(3).
Capacity of designed shear reinforcement vRd,cs is limited by
N6/111 Note
value of kmax ∙ vRd,c acc. to §6.4.5(1).
Crack width 2D
Crack width command
The new item for Crack width (SLS) is added to tree Concrete > SFRC 2D members > SFRC Crack width (SLS).
- 614 -
Command properties are standard for 2D calculation.
- 615 -
Chapter 9
Crack width calculation can be executed on Load cases, SLS combinations and SLS result classes.

city check
page 552
- 616 -
l System
l LCS - 2D member - can be used in case of hyperbolic / parabolic shells and such atypical structures
l Values
l UC - The value of unity check
l UC+ - The value of unity check for upper surface
l w+ - Crack width on the upper surface
l wlim+ - Limit crack width for upper surface
l UC- - The value of unity check for lower surface
l w- - Crack width on the lower surface
l wlim- - Limit crack width for lower surface
Crack width theoretical background
The crack width for slabs with standard reinforcement

When standard reinforcement exists, the crack width is calculated according equation R.7.8 [1] DAfStb Guideline "Steel
fibre reinforced concrete":
wk = sr,max ∙ (εf sm - εcm )
where
sr,max The maximum final crack spacing.

(εfsm - The difference between mean strains in concrete and reinforcement in case
εcm) of steel fibre reinforced concrete.
The maximum final crack spacing

sr,max = (1 - α f ) ∙ ϕs / (3,6 ∙ ρp,eff ) ≤ (1 - α f ) ∙ (σs ∙ ϕs ) / (3,6 ∙ fct,eff )
where
The coefficient for fibre reinforcement concrete

αf
α f = ff ctR,s / fctm
Averaged diameter of reinforcement, see the chapter Calculation of the dia-

ϕs
meter of reinforcement in "Capacity check theoretical background"
The effective reinforcement ratio obtained from the equation 7.10 from [2]
ρ EN1992-1-1
p,eff
ρp,eff = As / Ac,eff
- 617 -
Chapter 9
f
The effective tensile strength of concrete
ct,eff
The difference between mean strains

The difference is calculated according equation R.7.9
(εf sm - εcm ) = ((1 - α f ) ∙ (σs - 0,4 ∙ fct,eff / ρp,eff )) / Es ≥ 0,6 ∙ (1 - α f ) ∙ σs / Es
where
The coefficient for fibre reinforcement concrete

αf
α f = ff ctR,s / fctm
ϕ Averaged diameter of reinforcement, see the chapter Calculation of the diameter

s of reinforcement in "Capacity check theoretical background"
The effective reinforcement ratio obtained from the equation 7.10 from [2]
EN1992-1-1
ρp,eff = As / Ac,eff
where
ρ
p,- The area of reinforcement inside of
eff
As
Ac,eff
The effective concrete area see figure
A 7.1 in [2] EN1992-1-1
c,eff
- 618 -
f
ct,- The effective tensile strength of concrete
eff
εf
The mean strain in the reinforcement in steel fibre reinforced concrete for the rel-
s- evant combination of actions taking tension stiffening into account
m
ε
c- The mean strain in concrete between cracks
m
The reinforcement stress in the crack without taking into account the fibre effect.
σs
Maximal value of tensile stress of the reinforcement inside area Ac,eff .
Es Modulus of elasticity of standard reinforcement
The crack width for slabs without standard reinforcement

When standard reinforcement does not exists on selected 2D member, the crack width is calculated according equation
R.7.11 [1] DAfStb Guideline "Steel fibre reinforced concrete":
wk = sf w ∙ εf ct
- 619 -
Chapter 9
where
s
f = 140 mm
w
εf The strain in the steel fibre reinforced concrete, where stress- strain diagram is
ct same as for standard concrete with linear effective branch in tension
Recalculation of internal forces and reinforcement areas for Crack width

The crack width are calculated in the direction of principal forces. Therefore is necessary to recalculate basic internal forces
and the reinforcement areas to the principal directions.
Normal stresses per directions and surfaces
Normal stresses per each direction of member LCS and for upper(lower) surface are calculated.
σx,up(lo) = nx / (h ∙ 1m) -(+) mx / (1/6 ∙ h2 ∙ 1m)
σy,up(lo) = ny / (h ∙ 1m) -(+) my / (1/6 ∙ h2 ∙ 1m)
σxy,up(lo) = nxy / (h ∙ 1m) -(+) mxy / (1/6 ∙ h2 ∙ 1m)
where
nx(y) Normal force in centre of mesh element in x(y) direction

mx(y) Bending moment in centre of the mesh element in x(y) direction
nxy Membrane shear force in centre of the mesh element
mxy Twisting moment in centre of the mesh element
h Thickness of the 2D member
- 620 -
Principal stresses for both surfaces

σ1,up(lo) = (σx,up(lo) + σy,up(lo)) / 2 + 1/2 ∙ √(σx,up(lo) - σy,up(lo))2 + 4 ∙ σxy,up(lo)2)
σ2,up(lo) = (σx,up(lo) + σy,up(lo)) / 2 - 1/2 ∙ √(σx,up(lo) - σy,up(lo))2 + 4 ∙ σxy,up(lo)2)
and σ1,up(lo) is greater than σ2,up(lo)
Angles of principal stresses from y axis for both surfaces
First direction
when (σx,up(lo) - σy,up(lo)) > 0
α σ1,up(lo) = arctg(2 ∙ σxy,up(lo) / (σx,up(lo) - σy,up(lo))) / 2
when (σx,up(lo) - σy,up(lo)) < 0
α σ1,up(lo) = arctg(2 ∙ σxy,up(lo) / (σx,up(lo) - σy,up(lo))) / 2 - 90 °
when (σx,up(lo) - σy,up(lo)) = 0
l when σxy,up(lo) = 0
α σ1,up(lo) = 0
l when σxy,up(lo) < 0
α σ1,up(lo) = -45 °
l when σxy,up(lo) > 0
α σ1,up(lo) = 45 °
Second direction
α σ2,up(lo) = α σ2,up(lo) + 90 °
Recalculation of areas of reinforcement to direction of principal stresses

When standard reinforcement 2D mesh is defined, than is necessary to recalculate its area to the direction of principal
stress.
As (α σ) = ∑(As,i ∙ cos(α σ - α s,i))
where
A The area of the i-th reinforcement layer in the mesh element

s,i
Angle between y-axis and the direction of the principal stress for first or second dir-
ασ
ection
α
Angle between y-axis and the direction of the i-th reinforcement layer
s,i
Recalculation of the internal forces for the crack width

mup(lo) = mx ∙ cos(α σ,up(lo))2 + my ∙ sin(α σ,up(lo))2 + mxy ∙ sin(2 ∙ α σ,up(lo))
nup(lo) = nx ∙ cos(α σ,up(lo))2 + ny ∙ sin(α σ,up(lo))2 + nxy ∙ sin(2 ∙ α σ,up(lo))
The recalculation is done four times in total. Once per direction and surface.
- 621 -
Chapter 9
Limit value of crack width

When steel fibre reinforcement concrete contains standard reinforcement 2D meshes, than is the limit value of crack width
wlim taken same as for standard concrete according clause 7.3.1(5) from [2] EN1992-1-1
When steel fibre reinforcement concrete does not contain standard reinforcement, than is the limit value of crack width wlim
taken from the National annex manager in group SLS - General. Where is new item - w max_fibre according the [1] DAfStb
Guideline "Steel fibre reinforced concrete"in table R.4.
Crack width national annexes
National annexes are supported in crack width. The following items are supported.
l wlim - Limit value of crack width for concrete with standard reinforcement mesh - Standard EN: Table 7.1N
Exposure class Reinforced members - Quasi permanent load combination Prestress members - Frequent load combination
X0, XC1 0,4 0,2
XC2, XC3, XC4 0,3 0,2
XD1, XD2, XS1, XS2, XS3 0,3 Decompression
l wlim_fibre - Limit value of crack width for concrete without standard reinforcement mesh (only steel fibre reinforced con-
crete) - Standard EN: Table R.4
Exposure class Reinforced members - Quasi permanent load combination

X0, XC1 0,4
XC2, XC3 0,3
XC4 0,2
XD1, XS1 0,2
- 622 -
l k3 - Coefficient for calculation maximal final crack spacing - Standard EN: 3,4
l k4 - Coefficient for calculation maximal final crack spacing - Standard EN: 0,42
l sr,max - Maximal crack spacing - Standard EN: sr,max = 1,3 ∙ (h - xr)
Stress limitation 2D
Stress limitation command
The new item for Stress limitation (SLS) is added to tree Concrete > SFRC 2D members > SFRC Stress limitation (SLS).
Command properties are standard for 2D calculation.
- 623 -
Chapter 9
Stress limitation calculation can be executed on Load cases, SLS combinations and SLS result classes.

city check
page 552
l System
l LCS - 2D member - can be used in case of hyperbolic / parabolic shells and such atypical structures
l Type of values - Overal check / Concrete (char) / Concrete (qp) / Reinf (char)
- 624 -
l Values - values are dependent on type of values (see above)

l Overall Check
l UC - value of unity check
l UC+ - value of unity check for upper surface
l UC- - value of unity check for lower surface
Concrete (char)
l σc,char1+ - value of stress in concrete under characteristic combination in direction (1) of reinforcement for upper
surface
l σc,char2+ - value of stress in concrete under characteristic combination in direction (2) of reinforcement for upper
surface
l σc,char1- - value of stress in concrete under characteristic combination in direction (1) of reinforcement for lower
surface
l σc,char2- - value of stress in concrete under characteristic combination in direction (2) of reinforcement for lower
surface
l Concrete (qp)
l σc,qp1+ - value of stress in concrete under quasi-permanent combination in direction (1) of reinforcement for upper
surface
l σc,qp1+ - value of stress in concrete under quasi-permanent combination in direction (2) of reinforcement for upper
surface
l σc,qp1- - value of stress in concrete under quasi-permanent combination in direction (1) of reinforcement for lower
surface
l σc,qp2- - value of stress in concrete under quasi-permanent combination in direction (2) of reinforcement for lower
surface
Reinf (char)
l σs,char1+ - value of stress in reinforcement under characteristic combination in direction (1) of reinforcement for
upper surface
l σs,char2+ - value of stress in reinforcement under characteristic combination in direction (2) of reinforcement for
upper surface
l σs,char1- - value of stress in reinforcement under characteristic combination in direction (1) of reinforcement for
lower surface
l σs,char2- - value of stress in reinforcement under characteristic combination in direction (2) of reinforcement for
lower surface
l

Stress limitation theoretical background
Stress limitation check is based on the calculation of stresses in particular component (concrete edge or reinforcement bar)
in the principal direction of internal forces and on the comparison with limited values with respect of [2] EN1992-1-1 require-
ments. Based on the internal forces, concrete cross-section and reinforcement defined by the user, SCIA Engineer is able
- 625 -
Chapter 9
to calculate the plain of equilibrium of a 2D and find the actual value of stresses in each component. The stresses are cal-
culated on the same internal forces as are used for crack width. For more information about recalculation of internal forces
and reinforcement, see "Crack width theoretical background".
Two states are checked in the stress limitation check.
l Compressive stress in concrete - The high value of compressive stress in concrete could lead to appearance of lon-
gitudinal cracks, spreading of micro-cracks in concrete and higher values of creep (mainly non-linear). This effect can
lead to state when the structure is unusable.
l Tensile stress in reinforcement - The stress in reinforcement is verified due to limitation of unacceptable strain exist-
ence and thus appearance of cracks in concrete in case of standard reinforcement exists only. Stress in reinforcement is
evaluated only when cracks appear (generally tensile stress in concrete σs is greater than mean tensile strength of con-
crete fctm ).
In case of NEN NA the value of stress in reinforcement is calculated but not checked due to
fact it is not required in NEN-NA.
The linear elastic stress-strain diagram on the serviceability limit state is used for the finding of the plane of the equilibrium.
The following assumptions are used:
l There are used stress-strain diagrams which are defined in properties of material.
l Concrete - linear stress-strain diagram dependent on:
l Type of elasticity modulus - short-term (Ec ) or long-term (Ec,eff ) elasticity modulus
l Cracking of the cross-section
l un-cracked cross-section - stress-strain diagram with tensile concrete
l cracked cross-section - stress-strain diagram without tensile concrete
l Reinforcement - linear stress-strain diagram with tensile branch (if reinforcement is presented in the 2D member)
Cracking status
The evaluation of tensile stress in reinforcement depend on the cracking status (appearance of the cracks).
- 626 -
Two possibilities are available according to chapter 7.1(2) in [2] EN1992-1-1
l 0 MPa - The first crack appears when tensile stress occurs in the cross-section
l fct,eff - The first crack appears when the tensile effective strength of concrete is reached in the cross-section
If cracks does not appear, the stress in reinforcement is not evaluated.

If cracks appear, the stress in reinforcement is evaluated and stress-strain diagram without tensile branch is considered for
concrete.
Verification of concrete stress under characteristic load

Verification of concrete stress under characteristic load according to chapter 7.2(2) in [2] EN1992-1-1.
The verification is calculated against to longitudinal cracks in concrete and it is provided only for exposure classes XD, XF
and XS. Generally, maximal compressive concrete stress σc,char has to be lesser than maximal allowed compressive con-
crete strength for characteristic combination σc,char,lim . It can be expressed as follows:
σc,char ≤ σc,char,lim = k1 ∙ fck
where
The factor for maximum compressive stress in concrete under SLS characteristic

k1
combination
f
ck
Verification of concrete stress under quasi-permanent load

Verification of concrete stress under quasi-permanent load according to chapter 7.2(3) in EN 1992-1-1.
The verification is calculated against to considering of linear creep only. When the condition is not fulfilled then non-linear
creep calculation should be considered. Generally, maximal compressive concrete stress σc,qp has to be lesser than max-
imal allowed compressive concrete strength for quasi-permanent combination σc,qp,lim .It can be expressed as follows:
σc,qp ≤ σc,qp,lim = k2 ∙ fck
where
The factor for maximum compressive stress in concrete under SLS quasi- per-
k2
manent combination
f
ck
Verification of reinforcement stress under characteristic load

Verification of reinforcement stress under characteristic load according to chapter 7.2(5) in [2] EN1992-1-1.
The verification is calculated in case standard reinforcement exist only and it is against to considering of unacceptable cracks
and deformation in the concrete. Generally, maximal tensile reinforcement stress σ s,char has to be lesser than maximal
allowed tensile reinforcement strength for characteristic combination σs,char,lim . It can be expressed as follows:
σs,char ≤ σs,char,lim = k3 ∙ fyk
When stress in reinforcement is caused by an imposed deformation, than factor k4 is used:
σs,char ≤ σs,char,lim = k4 ∙ fyk
where
- 627 -
Chapter 9
k The factor for maximum tensile stress in reinforcement under SLS characteristic

3 combination
k The factor for maximum tensile stress in reinforcement under SLS characteristic
4 combination for imposed deformation
f
ck
Unity check
Final unity check is calculated from partial unity checks from all verifications.
UC = max(σc,char / σc,char,lim ; σc,qp / σc,qp,lim ; σs,char / σs,char,lim )
Stress limitation national annexes
National annexes are supported in stress limitation. The following items are supported.
l k1 - Factor for maximum compressive stress in concrete under SLS characteristic combination - Standard EN: 0,6
l k2 - factor for maximum compressive stress in concrete under SLS quasi-permanent combination - Standard EN: 0,45
l k3 - Factor for maximum tensile stress in reinforcement under SLS characteristic combination - Standard EN: 0,8
l k4 - Factor for maximum tensile stress in reinforcement under SLS characteristic combination for imposed deformation -
Standard EN: 1,0
Nonlinear calculation of steel fibre reinforced concrete

Nonlinear analysis - Introduction
Physical non-linear calculation represents very powerful tools for analysing any kind of structure in civil engineering build-up
not only from steel fibre reinforced concrete but also from the other materials. Generally, there could be significant dif-
ferences of results towards to linear analysis, especially in case of hyper-static structures. In case of linear analysis, just E-
modulus of material is taken into account for preparation of stiffness matrix. There is no stress distribution based on increas-
ing of strain in component. On the other side the non-linear calculation provides stress distribution and increasing of bearing
capacity after reaching of the ultimate strain until the collapse mechanism based on different values of stress and strain
dependent on predefined nonlinear stress-strain relationship in material diagram.
Especially for steel fibre reinforced concrete this analysis can provide real behaviour of the structure with different results
towards to linear analysis only. This behaviour is very influenced by the crack formation very typical for fibre concrete. The
toughness of fibre concrete is significantly increased by steel fibre existence up to values very close to standard rein-
forcement.
A typical shape of stress-strain diagram is visible on the following figure, where parabolic behaviour is used in compression
as in standard concrete. Tensile behaviour represents the narrow peak expressed as mean tensile strength. From the point
of strain, this peak works very well as a crack localizator. After the crack formation, the toughness of SFRC allows to keep
certain level of tensile stress with increasing of strain up to failure which is fixed as 25‰. Generally, there are two types of
tensile branch based on selected fibre type with softening or hardening post-cracking behaviour (5D and 4D with ascending
branch and 3D with descending branch in tension). The diagram for nonlinear analysis are prepared based on user defined
- 628 -
dosage and points are generated according to requirements in [1] DAfStb Guideline "Steel fibre reinforced concrete" see fig-
ure R.1 .
The nonlinear behaviour of reinforcement is also considered if the reinforcement is defined. The real stress train diagram is
used for nonlinear calculation (see following figure). There are also two options for diagram (with and without hardening).
Nonlinear analysis
In this chapter, the basic precondition for successful run of non-linear calculation are described .
Project data
Besides standard linear calculation there is also available nonlinear calculation respecting physical nonlinearity of steel fibre
concrete. There are in fact two options:
- 629 -
Chapter 9
l physical non-linear calculation for fibre concrete (without standard reinforcement)

l physical non-linear calculation for fibre concrete with standard reinforcement
The activation of this feature is done in Project data > Nonlinearity > Concrete >2D physical non-linearity (FRC)
The usage of the calculation is limited for
l Structure type "General XYZ"

l Post processing environment "v17"
l "General plasticity" is not possible to combine with this functionality
Material diagrams
When the settings above is applied then there is a new option (automatically switch ON) for each steel fibre concrete mater-
ial - "Non-linear behaviour"
- 630 -
When this checkbox is ON then there is a possibility to define "Stress/strain diagram for non-linear analysis". There are four
types of stress/strain diagram
l By code without tension part

l By code with tension part and peak - default
l By code with tension part and without peak
l User definition - when this is selected then user can define its own stress/strain diagram based on the three option above
- 631 -
Chapter 9
There are also two option for definition of diagram for non-linear calculation for concrete in compression
l parabolic
l linear-constant
- 632 -
09c_Nonlinear_calculation
Non-linear analysis
When the setting per material is done, user reinforcement via 2D meshes is inputted or not and non-linear combination is
defined then non-linear analysis can be run. As has been mentioned before this type of calculation is available for Post pro-
cessing environment "v17" only.
- 633 -
Chapter 9
The mesh size is always a significant factor for Finite Element calculation method and
mainly for nonlinear analysis. After several kind of testing we recommend to set mesh size =
h/2 for steel fibre reinforced concrete and mesh size = h for combined reinforcement (steel
fibre reinforced concrete + standard reinforcement) .
There is used standard Newton-Raphson method for solving of this physical nonlinear problem with recommendation of 10
increments of loads and 500 iterations in each load increment
- 634 -
When load is too high and no equilibrium is found in certain increment of load with reaching
of maximum number of iterations, the user is informed about this with warning TO DO -
add figure of message
- 635 -
Chapter 9
Besides, the nonlinear calculation uses very efficient damage material model called Mazars model [3] Mazars. This material
model is very well applicable for material diagram with peaks and descending stress-strain diagrams.
Nonlinear analysis - Results
Results of nonlinear calculation

The results are accessible in standard menu Results for reviewing of any other type of results. The most important in this
case are 2D strains and stresses where you can easily find the position of the load on the stress-strain diagram (see below).
Results of nonlinear calculation in checks

When non-linear analysis is successfully finished then it is possible to use result of Non-linear combination in check or
dosage design of steel fibre concrete.
- 636 -
Please take into account that non-linear combination are not envelope combination . Con-
tent of non-linear combination is simply "summarized" together.
Nonlinear analysis - Benchmark: Double clamped beam
Very simple example of Double Clamped beam loaded by surface load was used for demonstration of usability and cor-
rectness of result of non-linear calculation of steel fibre reinforced concrete.The slab with span 3,0m, 1,0m width and thick-
ness of 150mm from material C30/37-30kg/m3-5D65/60BG is used. The slab is supported in both sides restraining all the
translation and rotations. But be aware one translation in longitudinal direction of the slab must be free. The
nonlinear analysis with this support in X direction significantly influences the result of non-linear calculation.
- 637 -
Chapter 9
Here you can find stress strain-diagram for nonlinear analysis
Hand calculation
Based on hand calculation we can find the surface load corresponding to plastic bending moment of this structure.
The first crack strength (f fl ) is considered equal to mean tensile strength (f ctm ) of the concrete determined based on for-
mulas from [2] EN1992-1-1
ffl=3,00MPa
In opposite side post cracking strength (ffl,II ) is coming from average residual flexural strength (fR4,m ). In this case we can
use also multiplication factor of 1,04 used in [1] DAfStb Guideline "Steel fibre reinforced concrete". Value fR4,m is determ-
ined based on the tests for certain concrete grade, fibre type and dosage.
f,fl,II =fR4,ml=1,04.4,78 = 4,97MPa
See steps of hand calculation to obtain maximal plastic load of this structure.
- 638 -
The first crack

The value of load corresponding to first crack is calculated as
qcr,1 = 12.W.ffl/ l2 = 12.0.00375.3,00 / 32 = 15,0kN/m2
and cracking moment is in fact

mcr =W.ffl=0.00375.3,00 = 11,25kNm/m
Plastic behaviour
The final value of plastic load is in fact the following
qpl = 16.W.ffl,II / l2 = 16.0.00375.4,97 / 32 = 33,1kN/m2
and finally plastic bending moment

mpl =W.ffl,II =0.00375.4,97 = 18,64kNm/m
- 639 -
Chapter 9
Inputs
Theo goal of this research is to find the surface load corresponding to plastic state of the structure in the upper fibres above
the support. We can prepare set of load cases where the load is increased by ste. LC-5kN/m2; LC-10kN/m2; LC-15kN/m2;
LC-2kN/m2; LC-25kN/m2; LC-30kN/m2; LC-35kN/m2; LC-40kN/m2; LC-45kN/m2; LC-50kN/m2
The same scenario is the preparation of Nonlinear combinations
The non-linear calculation using Newton Raphson method s is run with mesh size can be set as h/2 = 0,075mm for this
example.
Results analysis
When the non-linear calculation is getting converged then we can perform analysis of the results. We are going to invest-
igate the upper fibres above the support. Thus we can define section above support. At first we can look and Basic strain
and stress for each non-linear combination (as you can see here for nonlinear combination 30kN/m2)
- 640 -
Additionally, very efficient method to have overall imagine about the structure behaviour is displaying results via 3D result
together with deformations, see below.
- 641 -
Chapter 9
- 642 -
Now we can easily see the results of strain and stresses for each non-linear combination. The table shows the value of the
load corresponding to plastic bending moment. Thsi valeu is somewhere between 34-35kN/m2
We can also make a graph of dependency between load level and strain and stress. If we look at the Load-Stress dis-
tribution, we can deduct the behaviour of the structure is linear till value of 15kN/m2, This perfectly corresponds with stress-
strain diagram with small peak of diagram in tension. We are approaching to top of the peak till value of 15kkN/m2. It is also
visible from the strain table that for this load we obtain strain 0,8*1e-4 which is lower than 1,0 representing strain of the top of
the peak.This proofs our first precondition of qcr,1 which is calculated as 15kN/m2. After that there is a phase of crack form-
ation and stress is coming significantly down based on the stress-strain diagram. The residual strength in tension (1,22MPa)
is reached somewhere between 20-25kN/m2 corresponding to strain 3,0*1e-4.The load higher than value 25kN/m2 means
the spreading of the cracks with smooth hardening of the material done by increasing branch of stress-strain diagram in ten-
sion till value 1,77MPa and strain. 250*1e- 4. The plastic load is reached by the load 34- 35kkN/m 2 where the strain
258,3*1e-4 exceeds the limit 250*1e-4
- 643 -
Chapter 9
Additionally, the upper fibres of the slab above support are neglected for calculation for higher load due to exceeding the
strain limit and the structure is considered as fully cracked. Nevertheless the middle of the slab is still able to carry some load.
When we look at the centre of the slab.
Moreover we can compare also bending moment with estimation done by hand calculation. In this case, the bending
moment above support corresponding to first crack for load level 15kN/m2 is m cr = 10,69kNm/m and plastic moment cor-
responding to load level 35kN/m2 is mpl = 18,40kNm/m. These values are perfectly in coincidence with estimation provided
by hand calculation.
Conclusions
The non-linear calculation performed in Scia engineer provides very good relationship with hand calculation. The load cor-
responding to first crack is completely the same in comparison with hand calculation.(15kN/m2). The limit of surface load cor-
responding to plastic bending moment obtained by non-linear calculation is 34,5kN/m2 and estimated by hand calculation is
33,1kN/m2 which is considered as acceptable. From the point of bending moments, the value of cracking moment is really
equal to hand calculation. The last compared value is plastic bending moment 18,4kNm/m which is also very close to value
from hand calculation 18,64kNm/m. The study proofs that this tool can be used for analysis of 2D structures and modelling
of real behaviour of the structure with respect of cracks.
Hand calculation SCIA Engineer

mcr[kNm/m] 11,25 10,69
qcr[kN/m2] 15,0 15,0
mpl[kNm/m] 18,64 18,40
qpl[kN/m2] 33,1 35,0
- 644 -

ConcreteCodeCheck15 EN1992 Enu

Încărcat de

Informații document

Titlu original

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

ConcreteCodeCheck15 EN1992 Enu

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Concrete Code Check EN-1992

Run using Model Data files (Debug) 26

Concrete member data 27

Properties of 1D Member data 28

Concrete settings (structure) 47

Concrete settings (structure) 51

Design Defaults 117

Beam slab 126

Plate, Shell (Plate) 132

Wall, Shell (Wall), Deep beam 139

Numerical output 145

Graphical output 151

Graphical output 151

Longitudinal reinforcement 153

Shear reinforcement 154

Internal forces - theory 154

Parameters influencing the calculation 155

Determination whether member is in compression 166

First order bending moments with imperfection 166

Calculation of second order effects 169

Design of reinforcement for rectangular section 172

Design of reinforcement for circular section 172

Design of reinforcement for other cross-sections 173

Checks for all type of cross-sections 174

Reduction of shear forces and bending moment 182

Concrete setup 183

Concrete member data 184

Application to internal forces 187

Buckling data 192

Creep coefficient 193

Estimation of ratio of longitudinal reinforcement 194

Calculation of slenderness 194

Calculation of limit slenderness 195

Reinforcement design - theory 198

Design of longitudinal reinforcement 201

Design of shear reinforcement 209

Torsional longitudinal reinforcement 219

Detailing provisions in Design 220

Minimal area of shear reinforcement from minimal ratio 9.2.2(5) 221

Minimal area of shear reinforcement for torsion 9.2.3(3) 222

Maximal area of shear reinforcement from maximal ratio 6.2.3(3) 222

Maximal area of shear reinforcement from maximal ratio 6.2.3(3) 224

Recalculation to edges 225

Minimal area of reinforcement from minimal ratio 9.2.1.1(1) 227

Minimal area of reinforcement for torsion 9.2.3(4) 227

Maximal area of reinforcement from maximal ratio 9.2.1.1(3) 227

Minimal area of reinforcement from minimal ratio 9.5.2(2) 228

Minimal area of reinforcement from minimal bar diameter 9.5.2(1) 229

Minimal area of reinforcement from minimal number of bars 9.5.2(4) 230

Maximal area of reinforcement from maximal ratio 9.5.2(3) 231

Minimal area of reinforcement from minimal ratio 9.3.1.1(1) 232

Maximal area of reinforcement from maximal ratio 9.3.1.1(1) 233

Reinforcement design 1D - graphical output 233

Required ∩ Provided 235

Design 2D - Introduction 235

Theoretical background 236

Additional tensile force caused by shear-shifting 240

Command Internal forces 2D 241

Definition of provided reinforcement 253

Design As - Theoretical background 253

Design As - Shear Reinforcement 255

Design As - Check of compressive strut 258

Design As - Detailing provisions 260